You are on page 1of 464

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

Unit 1

Understanding Corporate Strategy

Structure
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Caselet
Objectives
1.3 What is Strategy?
1.4 Strategic Window
1.5 Corporate Strategy in Different Types of Organizations
1.6 Lack of Strategic Management in Some Companies
1.7 Ten Principles of Strategy
1.8 Case Study
1.9 Summary
1.10 Glossary
1.11 Terminal Questions
1.12 Answers
1.13 References

1.1 Introduction
Any discussion on business and management today is incomplete without
discussing two major forces: one is competition, and the other is strategy.
Both these forces coexist or are correlated; in simple words, we can say that it
is competition that drives strategy. For an organization to survive and grow, it is
important to have a strategy. You must have seen or read about the well-known
Fortune 500 list, an annual list compiled and published by Fortune magazine
that ranks the top 500 US companies. Every year, some new names are added
and some others are deleted from this prestigious list. One common reason,
which explains both the inclusions and the deletions, is the strategy of the
respective companies. So, strategy plays a vital role in organizations. Let us try
to understand what strategy is.
Strategy is a concept that is used universally but understood differently,
and, therefore, defined differently. In fact, strategy as a concept is better
described and more easily put into practice than defined. Most companies
recognize that strategy is central to business and management. It is also
recognized that it is strategy that makes the difference between success and
failure of many companies and businesses. Yet, there is always a lack of
conceptual clarity about what strategy is. In this unit define and explain strategy
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 1

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

to make the understanding of the concept and its application clear and
meaningful.
In this unit, we will discuss corporate strategy, its definition and nature, as
well as its levels in an organization. You will be able to understand corporate
strategy in different types of organizations, why some organizations do not
practice strategic management and the principles of strategic management.

1.2 Caselet
Every organization, big or small, follows a certain strategy to achieve its
goals, which are specific to its market. For example, for a long time, the oil
company Shell had focused on selling oil only. Thus, selling oil was its
corporate strategy. For the past few years, the company, like other major
oil producers, has found itself at the heart of the debate over climate change.
The companys operations alone led to carbon emissions that account for
some 3.6 per cent of global fossil-fuel CO2 emissions in any yeara total
greater than that of the entire United Kingdom. In response to this situation,
Shell took an early position on the issue and started adopting strategies to
address climate change. The company engaged in actions that began to
manage its carbon footprint. These actions have earned the company
credibility and a powerful voice within policy, advocacy and market circles.

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Explain strategy, its nature and levels of strategy
Discuss the concept of strategic window
Describe corporate strategy in different types of organizations
Explain why some organizations do not undertake strategic management
List ten principles of strategy

1.3 What is Strategy?


The word strategy comes from Greek strategies, which refers to a military
general and combines stratus (the army) and ago (to lead). The concept and
practice of strategy and planning started in the military, and, over time, it entered
business and management. The key or common objective of both business
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 2

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

strategy and military strategy is the same, i.e., to secure competitive advantage
over the rivals or opponents. We will discuss the similarity between business
and military strategies in detail later.

1.3.1 Evolving Definitions of Strategy


Seven definitions of strategy are given below which have evolved over a period
of more than 30 years (196296). During this evolutionary process, different
authors have focused on different aspects of the definition of strategy. Let us
see these definitions.
Chandler (1962): The determination of the basic long-term goals and objectives
of an enterprise and the adoption of the courses of action and the allocation of
resources necessary for carrying out these goals.
Source: A Chandler, Strategy and Structure: Chapter in the History of the American
Enterprise (MIT Press, 1962).

Andrews (1962): The pattern of objectives, purpose, goals and the major policies
and plans for achieving these goals stated in such a way so as to define what
business the company is or is to be and the kind of company it is or is to be.
Source: K R Andrews, The Concept of Corporate Strategy (Homewood: Jones Irwin,
1995)

Ansoff (1965): The common thread among the organizations activities and
product-markets ... that defines the essential nature of business that the
organization was or planned to be in future.
Source: H I Ansoff, Corporate Strategy (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1965).

Glueck (1972): A unified, comprehensive and integrated plan designed to assure


that the basic objectives of the enterprise are achieved.
Source: W F Glueck, Business PolicyStrategy Formation and Management Action
(New York: McGraw-Hill, 1976).

Mintzberg (1987): A pattern in a stream of decisions and action. (Mintzberg


distinguishes between intended strategies and emergent strategies. These are
discussed in Unit 2).
Source: H Mintzberg, Crafting Strategy, Harvard Business Review (SeptemberOctober,
1987).

Ansoff (1984): Basically, a strategy is a set of decision-making rules for the


guidance of organizational behaviour.
Source: H I Ansoff, Implementing Strategic Management (London: Prentice Hall
International, 1984).
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 3

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

Porter (1996): Developing and communicating the companys unique position,


making trade-offs, and, forging fit among activities.
Source: M E Porter, What is Strategy. Harvard Business Review (NovDec, 1996),
6178.

1.3.2 Business Strategy and Military Strategy


As mentioned in the beginning, in many respects, business strategy is similar to
military strategy. Both business and military organizations try to use their
strengths to exploit the weaknesses of their competitors. If the strategy is not
commensurate with the strengths and weaknesses of the organization, efficiency
in operation and implementation may not lead to success. This is true of both
business and military organizations.
Business or military success is not the result of any accidental strategies.
Rather, success is the outcome of continuous attention to internal and external
conditions and formulation and implementation of strategies to suit those
conditions. The element of surprise or unforeseen situations provides a challenge
as well as an opportunity for both military and business strategy; in both the
cases, information and data on opponents or competitors strategies and
resources are vital inputs for success.
There is, however, a basic difference between military strategy and
business strategy. Business strategy is formulated, implemented and evaluated
with an assumption of competition, but military strategy is based on the
assumption of conflict. Also, military strategies are implemented in the field
(front or border) but, business strategies are implemented in the marketplace.
Nevertheless, military conflict and business competition are so similar that many
strategic management techniques apply equally to both. Superior strategy in
both can overcome an opponents superiority in resources and numbers. Both
business and military organizations must adapt to change and constantly improve
or innovate to be successful. Often, companies and military organizations do
not change their strategies when the environment and competitive conditions
warrant a change. This may lead to failure. Here is a good military example of
such a situation:
When Napoleon won, it was because his opponents were committed to
the strategy, tactics and organizations of earlier wars. When he lostagainst
Wellington, the Russians and the Spaniardsit was because he, in turn, used
tried-and-true strategies against enemies who thought a fresh, who were
developing the strategies not of the last war but the next.1

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 4

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

1.3.3 Levels of Strategy


Strategies exist at different levels in an organization. Three different levels of
organizational strategy can be clearly distinguished (Figure 1.1).

Figure 1.1 Levels of Strategy

Corporate-level strategies are concerned with overall purpose or objective


of the organization; for example, diversification through joint venture, merger or
acquisition. Business unit-level strategies address themselves to issues of a
particular business unit or product group of an organizationstrategies for
product development and/or identification and exploitation of new market
opportunities. Functional strategies (sometimes, called operational strategies)
concentrate on particular functional or operational areas like manufacturing,
marketing, logistics, etc.
For single-business companies, corporate-level strategies and business
unit-level strategies may not be much different. But for multi-business companies
like Unilever (or its subsidiary Hindustan Unilever), business unit-level strategies
would be quite distinct from corporate-level strategies. Functional-level strategies,
however, would be common in both single-business and multiple-business
companies. The three levels of strategy are not isolated: these strategies support,
complement or reinforce each other for the achievement of organizational
objectives. We will be discussing these strategies in more detail in the next unit.
Activity 1
The Indian car market is becoming increasingly competitive with the entry
of foreign players like Hyundai, Ford, General Motors and Honda. Do a
field or online survey/ research on any of the companies and highlight the
steps taken by the company to establish and increase its market share.
Focus on strategic planning and implementation. For information you may
visit the company website and consult the annual reports.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 5

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The key or common objective of both business strategy and military
strategy is to secure competitive advantage over the rivals or the
opponents. (True/False)
2. A unified, comprehensive and integrated plan designed to assure that the
basic objectives of the enterprise are achieved. This definition of strategy
was given by________.
3. Business strategy is formulated, implemented and evaluated with an
assumption of__________, but military strategy is based on the
assumption of_________.
4. For single-business companies, corporate-level strategies and business
unit-level strategies would be quite distinct. (True/False)

1.4 Strategic Window


Companies need to evolve and adapt to changing situations, as is clear from
the example of Shell that you read in the beginning of the unit. They should
always look for opportunities and make the best of them at the right time. Here,
we are referring to strategic windows, the concept which was introduced by
Abell (1978). The basic idea behind the concept of a strategic window is this:
there are only limited periods during which the fit or the match between the key
requirements of a market and the particular competencies of the firm are at the
optimum. Companies should exploit such optimum opportunities or windows.
Strategic windows arise as a result of business or market evolution.
Businesses and markets are never static. They are constantly evolving.
Businesses and markets may evolve because of
Development of new product (new demand);
Emergence of new competing technologies; and
Market redefinition or changes.
Due to such evolution, it is recommended that investment in a product
line or market area should be made to coincide with the period(s) during which
a strategic window is open. Companies which do this, optimize returns. For
example, Maruti-Suzuki entered the Indian car market at the right time. The
strategic window was open because of the obsolescence of technology of
Premier Padmini (earlier Fiat), which was the only available passenger car in
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 6

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

the market. (There was also Ambassador, but that was used more as an official
car). Even after Marutis entry, the strategic windows for cars remained open,
and other car companiesGeneral Motors, Tata Motors, Ford, Honda, Hyundai
all entered the Indian car market. Maruti, however, was the first mover and
continues to be the market leader.
Strategic windows are also important for timing the exit from a product or
a market. There are times when it is advisable, and also possible, to divert a
business which a company cannot operate profitably any longer. This means
that the strategic window for exit is open, that is, there are buyers or companies,
who are willing to acquire the business, and, the company should act on it. This
is what Hindustan Unilever did. They hived off their vanaspati (Dalda) business
to the US-based Bunge Ltd, who had plans to relaunch the product. If a company
does not exit in time, the strategic window may get closed; there may not be
any buyer, and the business may have to be closed down at considerable losses.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. The opportunities that companies should always look for and seize or
exploit at the right time are called _________.
6. Strategic windows arise as a result of _________.
7. Businesses and markets may evolve because of
(a) Development of new product (new demand)
(b) Emergence of new competing technologies
(c) Market redefinition or changes
(d) All of these
8. Strategic windows are not so important for timing the exit from a product
or a market. (True/False)

1.5 Corporate Strategy in Different Types of Organizations


A well-formulated strategy is vital for growth and development of any
organizationwhether it is a small business, a big private enterprise, a public
sector company, a multinational corporation or a non-profit organization. But,
the nature and focus of corporate strategy in these different types of organizations
will be different, primarily because of the nature of their operations and
organizational objectives and priorities.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 7

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

Small businesses, for example, generally operate in a single market or a


limited number of markets with a single product or a limited range of products.
The nature and scope of operations are likely to be less of a strategic issue
than in larger organizations. Not much of strategic planning may also be required
or involved; and, the company may be content with making and selling existing
product(s) and generating some profit. In many cases, the founder or the owner
himself forms the senior/top management and his (her) wisdom gives direction
to the company.
In large businesses or companieswhether in the private sector, public
sector or multinationalsthe situation is entirely different. Both the internal and
the external environment and the organizational objectives and priorities are
different. For all large private sector enterprises, there is a clear growth
perspective, because the stakeholders want the companies to grow, increase
market share and generate more revenue and profit. For all such companies,
both strategic planning and strategic management play dominant roles.
Multinationals have a greater focus on growth and development, and also
diversification in terms of both products and markets. This is necessary to remain
internationally competitive and sustain their global presence. For example,
multinational companies like General Motors, Honda and Toyota may have to
decide about the most strategic locations or configurations of plants for
manufacturing the cars. They are already operating multi location (country)
strategies, and, in such companies, roles of strategic planning and management
become more critical in optimizing manufacturing facilities, resource allocation
and control.
In public sector companies, objectives and priorities can be quite different
from those in the private sector. Generation of employment and maximizing
output may be more important objectives than maximizing profit. Stability rather
than growth may be the priority many times. Accountability system is also very
different in public sector from that in private sector. There is also greater focus
on corporate social responsibility. The corporate planning system and
management have to take into account all these factors and evolve more
balancing strategies.
In non-profit organizations, the focus on social responsibilities is even
greater than in the public sector. In these organizations, ideology and underlying
values are of central strategic significance. Many of these organizations have
multiple service objectives, and the beneficiaries of service are not necessarily
the contributors to revenue or resource. All these make strategic planning and

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 8

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

management in these organizations quite different from all other organizations.


The evaluation criteria also become different.
Johnson and Scholes (2005) have given a good and detailed exposition
of strategic management in various types of organizations mentioned above.
Activity 2
The print media, that is, newspapers and magazines, have long served the
information needs of people all over the world. The rise of radio and television
offered some competition. But, with the advent of the Internet and availability
of news and information online, the service offered by the print media is no
longer as valuable as before. Imagine that you are the managing editor of
a leading daily. Suggest some major strategic changes that you feel are
needed at this stage to sustain and grow your company. Visit the websites
of some leading newspapers and see how they are adapting new strategies
to survive and grow.

Self-Assessment Questions
9. The nature and focus of corporate strategy in different types of
organizations are different primarily because of the nature of their
operations and organizational objectives and priorities. (True/False)
10. As they are operating multi location (country) strategies, roles of strategic
planning and management become more critical in _______ companies
for optimizing manufacturing facilities, resource allocation and control.

1.6 Lack of Strategic Management in Some Companies


Some companies do not undertake strategic planning and management. Some
other companies do strategic planning, but receive no support from managers
and employees. In some other cases, managers and employees do not get
enough support from the top management. A number of such and other reasons
explain why certain companies do not take to strategic planning and
management. David (2003) has mentioned various reasons for poor or no
strategic planning and management by companies. These are discussed below:
1. Poor reward structure: When an organization achieves success, it often
fails to reward its managers or planners. But when failure occurs, the
company may punish the managers concerned. In such a situation, it is
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 9

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

better for individual managers to do nothing than to risk trying to achieve


something, fail and be punished.
2. Content with success: If an organization is generally successful, the top
management or individual managers may feel that there is no need to
plan and strategize because everything is fine. However, they forget that
success today does not guarantee success tomorrow.
3. Overconfidence: As managers gain experience, they may rely less on
formalized planning and more on individual initiative and decisions. But,
this is not appropriate. Overconfidence or overestimating experience leads
to complacency and ultimately can bring downfall. Forethought and
planning are the right virtues and are signs of professionalism.
4. Fire-fighting: An organization may be so deeply engrossed in crisis
management and fire fighting that it may not have time to plan and
strategize. This happens with many companies and is a clear sign of nonprofessionalization.
5. Waste of time: Some organizations view planning as a waste of time
because no tangible marketable products are produced through planning.
But they forget that time spent on planning is an investment, and there
would be returns, both tangible and intangible, in due course.
6. Too expensive: Some organizations are culturally opposed to spending
resources on matters like planning which do not produce instant or
immediate results. They feel that spending on planning is a wasteful
expenditure.
7. Previous bad experience: Managers may have had previous bad
experience with planning, that is, cases in which plans have been
cumbersome, impractical or inflexible. There could be experience of
failures also. They would like to avoid recurrence of this.
8. Honest difference of opinion: Some managers may sincerely think that a
plan is not correct. They may see the situation from a different viewpoint,
or, they may have aspirations for themselves or the organization, which
are different from those envisaged in the plan. Different people in different
jobs in the same organization may have different perceptions of the same
situation, and this may lead to difference of opinions among them and
eventually to lack of planning due to lack of consensus.
9. Self-interest: When management has achieved status, privilege or selfesteem through effectively using an old system, it often sees a new plan
or a new system as unnecessary or a threat.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 10

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

10. Fear of the unknown: Managers may not be sure of their abilities to learn
new skills or take on new roles or adapt to new system. This is basically
inertia against change or fear for change.
11. Fear of failure: Whenever something new or different is attempted, there
is a chance of success, but, there is also some risk of failure. Many
companies and managers may like to avoid strategic planning and
management for fear of failure.
12. Suspicion: Employees may not trust management, or, the management
may not have enough confidence in the managers. This gives rise to
mutual suspicion.2

Self-Assessment Questions
11. All companies undertake strategic planning and management. (True/False)
12. Both overconfidence and fear of failure are among the reasons for not
adopting strategic planning and management. (True/False)

1.7 Ten Principles of Strategy


Duro and Standstrom3 have mentioned about 10 principles of strategy, which
are drawn from the military rule or warfare, but are equally applicable to business.
These are given in the following:
1. Set a goal and stick to it.
2. Maintain good morale (good leadership is aprecondition for this).
3. Accumulate forces.
4. Act aggressively.
5. Aim for surprise.
6. Make sure your own forces are secure.
7. Use your forces economically.
8. Coordination (either through chain of command or through cooperation).
9. Try to be adaptable.
10. Simplicity (clear and simple plans and concise orders/instructions).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 11

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

OveLiljedahl4 has discussed the relevance and applications of the


aforementioned principles to business strategy and has given examples from
the Scandinavian Airline Systems (SAS) as pronounced by their MD.
1. Set a goal and stick to it
SAS: We will be the best airline in Europe.
2. Maintain good morale
SAS: The personality of the leader; motivation courses
3. Accumulate forces
SAS: Concentration on profitable European routes
4. Act aggressively
SAS: Investing its way out of the crisis in a stagnating market
5. Aim for surprise
SAS: While competitors pay 100 million kroners for a new DC9a, SAS
repaints and changes interiors of all its 80 planes for 50 million kroners
6. Make sure your own forces are secure
SAS: Delegate responsibility for results; each unit ensures its own security
7. Use your forces economically
SAS: Personnel and fleet tailored to suit the need for resources
8. Coordination
SAS: The aim is known and understood by all employees
9. Try to be adaptable
SAS: Adaptation to new threats from outside; adapting to deteriorating
sales opportunities in the airline industry advising aircraft manufacturers
on how to build modern fleet aircraft.
10. Simplicity
SAS: Single strategy; instead of getting 100 per cent better on one point,
get 1 per cent better on 100 points.
All concerned with strategyplanners and managers at different levels
would do well to learn and remember the 10 principles. The SAS example shows
how they can be real life business strategies.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 12

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

Self-Assessment Questions
13. For strategy building, one should set a goal and stick to it. (True/ False)
14. Good leadership is a precondition for maintaining good morale of a
strategy. (True/ False)

1.8 Case Study


Modi Xerox Defines its Corporate Strategy
Modi Xerox was incorporated in 1983 in technical and financial collaboration
with Rank Xerox, UK, equipped with state-of-the-art manufacturing facility
at Rampur, UP, India. Since 1983, it has come a long way. Modi Xerox, with
a market share of 58 per cent, is the leader in the Indian photocopier market.
The companys strategic objective is to capture the incremental document
volume and successfully ride the shift in documentation modes. This is
where the strategy comes in. Recognizing the shift in doctrination mix,
Xerox has developed an intelligent digital platform. It is emerging as a
document company, covering document in any form, that is, digital, CDROM, multimedia and paper. Modi Xeroxs strategy closely follows this.
To be a recognized document company, Modi Xerox had launched intensive
advertising. An advertising campaign, worldwide, announced Xeroxs
alignment with digital technology.
Subsequently, new digital models have been launched in India. Modi Xeroxs
Vision 2000 was to develop, manufacture, market and finance a range of
document products and solutions to enhance customer productivity, make
the document persuasive and efficient by making them automated. Following
Vision 2000 was Vision 2002, which targeted a sales turnover of $1 billion
in India. To achieve this, the company had to develop innovative thinking
and plan.
Modi Xeroxs innovative thinking has given birth to the companys new micro
marketing plan. This involves segmenting the user market vertically on the
standard industrial classification and horizontally by splitting the market
into private organizations, public companies and jobbers. The company
has conducted user census in 48 cities to draw up a micro-marketing plan.
Modi Xeroxs key strategies are based on the marketing plan, and the plan
is based on four corporate objectives:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 13

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

1. Return on assets
2. Customer satisfaction
3. Employees motivation and satisfaction
4. Market share

Costumers are divided into segments and respective accounts are handled
by specialized account managers, global accountant, local accountant and
general and mass market managers. The rest of the customers are handled
by sales promotion agents (dealers and partners).
The company also has telemarketing and telesales programmes.
Telemarketing plays a support role, marketing mostly to small organizations
with around 20 employees. The telesales team is able to access the target
customer in different locations through its computer network.
Modi Xerox is a quality company. Quality is its basic business principle or
philosophy. Quality means providing customers innovative products and
services which fully satisfy their requirements. Quality improvement is the
job of every Modi Xerox employee, whether a staff or a manager.
Leadership through quality is both a strategy (continuous pursuit of quality
improvement) and a process (a fundamental business principle on which
all work processes are based). Leadership through quality is fostered by
the management at all levels and is pursued as a proactive approach rather
than are active approach. This reflects positiveness in the companys
strategy.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 14

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

1.9 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Strategy or corporate strategy is better described, and more easily put
into practice than defined. However, strategy, as mostly used or
understood, is an action plan or, a scheme of action or design of
execution of a plan.
Business strategy is similar to military strategy. Both business and military
organizations try to use their strengths to exploit the weaknesses of their
competitors or opponents to win or succeed. There is, however, a
significant difference between the two. Business strategy is formulated
based on the assumption of competition, military strategy is based on the
assumption of conflict.
Like strategy, strategic management has also been defined differently by
different authors and strategy analysts. However, the common elements
in most of the definitions are organizational objectives, the environment,
formulation of strategy, implementation and control.
In any organization, strategy can exist or operate at three levelscorporate
level, business unit level and functional level. In single business companies,
corporate-level strategies and business unit-level strategies may not be
much different. But, for multi-business companies (like Unilever or ITC),
strategies at two levels would be quite distinct. Functional-level strategies,
however, would be common to both types of companies.
Companies should always look for opportunities, and seize or exploit
opportunities at the right time. In other words, they should be constantly
aware of strategic windows. This is what Maruti (Suzuki) did. They entered
the Indian car market at the right time, i.e., when the strategic window
was open because of the obsolescence of Premier Padmini (earlier Fiat).
Some companies do not undertake strategic planning and management.
Some of the common reasons for this are poor reward structure, previous
bad experience, contentment with success, too expensive, overconfidence,
honest difference of opinion, fire fighting, self-interest or self-esteem, waste
of time, fear of the unknown, fear of failure, and suspicion.
Duro and Standstrom have mentioned 10 principles of strategy, which
are drawn from the military rule or warfare, but are equally applicable to
business. These are: 1. Set a goal and stick to it; 2. Maintain good morale

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 15

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

(good leadership is a precondition for this); 3. Accumulate forces; 4. Act


aggressively; 5. Aim for surprise; 6. Make sure your own forces are secure;
7. Use your forces economically; 8. Coordination (either through chain of
command or through cooperation); 9. Try to be adaptable; 10. Simplicity
(clear and simple plans and concise orders/instructions).

1.10 Glossary
Competitive advantage: Advantage over competitors gained by offering
consumers greater value, either by means of lower prices or by providing
greater benefits and service that justifies higher prices.
Fortune 500: A list of top companies around the world compiled annually
by Fortune magazine, which ranks publicly listed corporations according
to their revenues.
Multilocation: The state of being in more than two places at the same
time
Strategic window: Short time period between specific events during
which there is an opportunity to capitalize on a market
Strategy: A plan, method, or series of maneuvers or stratagems for
obtaining a specific goal or result.

1.11 Terminal Questions


1. What is strategy? Mention the different definitions of strategy.
2. What is the relationship between business strategy and military strategy?
What are the similarities and differences between the two types of
strategies?
3. Distinguish between the major levels of a strategy in an organization.
4. What is strategic window? Explain with some examples.
5. Explain the corporate strategy in different types of organizations.
6. Why do some companies not use strategic management? Mention some
common reasons.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 16

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

1.12 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. True
2. Glueck (1972)
3. Competition, conflict
4. False
5. Strategic windows
6. Market evolution
7. (d)
8. False
9. True
10. Multinational
11. False
12. True
13. True
14. True

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. The word strategy comes from Greek strategos, which refers to a military
general and combines stratus (the army) and ago (to lead). Several
definitions of strategy have evolved over a period of more than 30 years
(19621996). Refer to Section 1.3 and 1.3.1 for further details.
2. Business strategy is similar to military strategy in many respects. Both
business and military organizations try to use their strengths to exploit
the weaknesses of the competitors. Refer to Section 1.3.2 for further
details.
3. Strategies exist at different levels in an organization. Three different levels
of organizational strategy can be clearly distinguished -- corporate-level
strategies, business unit-level strategies and functional strategies. Refer
to Section 1.3.3 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 17

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 1

4. Companies should always look for opportunities, and seize or exploit


opportunities at the right time. These opportunities, during which there is
a chance to capitalize on a market, are called strategic windows. Refer to
Section 1.4 for further details.
5. The nature and focus of corporate strategy in different types of
organizations will be different primarily because of the nature of their
operations and organizational objectives and priorities. Refer to Section
1.5 for further details.
6. Some companies do not undertake strategic planning and management.
A number of reasons explain why certain companies do not take to strategic
planning and management. Refer to Section 1.6 for further details.

1.13 References
1. Abell, D F. 1978. Strategic Windows. Journal of Marketing 42(2).
2. Alkhafaji, A F. 2003. Strategic Management. New York: Harworth Press.
3. David, F R. 2003. Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases. 9th ed.,
Indian Reprint. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
4. Glueck, W F. 1980. Business Policy and Strategic Management. New
York: McGraw-Hill.
5. Porter, M E. What is Strategy. Harvard Business Review 72(6), 1996.
6. Thompson, AA, Jr, and A J Strickland. 2001. Strategic Management:
Concepts and Cases. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
E-references
http://www.shell.com/home/content/aboutshell/our_strategy/
http://www.source2update.com/Company-History/Modi-XeroxMODXER.html
Endnotes
1

F Glueck, Taking the mystique out of planning, Across the Board (July August, 1985).

F R David, Strategic Management , 9th ed. (Pearson Education, 2003), 17 18.

International Management Institute (IMI), Supplementary Readings in Competitive Analysis


and Marketing Strategy , in R-CAMS ,S.No. 9 (New Delhi, 2000).

International Management Institute (IMl).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 18

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Unit 2

Strategic Management Process

Structure
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Caselet
Objectives
2.3 Strategic Management Model
2.4 Approaches to the Strategic Management Process
2.5 Levels in SMP
2.6 Participants in SMP
2.7 Strategic Drift
2.8 Case Study
2.9 Summary
2.10 Glossary
2.11 Terminal Questions
2.12 Answers
2.13 References

2.1 Introduction
In the previous unit, we had defined corporate strategy and strategic
management. In defining strategic management, we had mentioned the
external environment, formulation of strategy and also implementation and
control. Strategic planning and management should actually start with
organizational mission and objectives, consider internal competences and
resources, various strategy alternatives and the competitive situation and,
then proceed with formulation and implementation of the strategy. All these
constitute the strategic management process (SMP). And, this would be the
subject matter of our analysis in the various units starting with Unit 5. In this
unit, we shall give an overview of the strategic management process in terms
of different approaches, levels in SMP, planned or intended and realized
strategies, the people involved, roles of the chief executive, board of directors
and consultants, among others. We shall also discuss concepts like strategic
drift and the learning organization and their relevance and roles in the strategic
management process.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 19

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.2 Caselet
Every organization follows a strategic management model, which depends
on its size, products and other factors. The organizational structure of the
company is built on the basis of this model. Hindustan Unilever (HUL) is a
fast moving consumer goods (FMCG) company that markets about 100
products/brands grouped into different categories. The different categories
of products require different organizational structure. Therefore, the
company has adopted a hybrid organizational structure based on functions
and product divisionalization. Like most organizations, strategies at HUL
also operate at three levels: corporate, SBU and functional. These will be
discussed in more detail in the unit.

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Explain the different approaches to the strategic management process
Illustrate the strategy-making hierarchy in an organization
Describe the various participants in the strategic management process
Explain the meaning and nature of strategic drift

2.3 Strategic Management Model


The strategic management process consists of four distinct steps or stages:
(a) Defining organizational mission, objectives or goals
(b) Formulation of strategy/strategic plan
(c) Implementation of strategies
(d) Strategy evaluation and control
For understanding these four stages, a company has to consider a number
of other factors like organizational competence and resources, the environment,
various strategy alternatives available, strategy selection criteria, etc. All these
are internal parts of SMP. The strategic management process may best be
illustrated in the form of a model. We can call this the strategic management
model. Relationships among the major components of the strategic management
process are shown in the model (Figure 2.1).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 20

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Companies may or may not follow the strategic management process as


rigidly as shown in the model. Generally, application of SMP is more formal and
model driven in large, well-structured organizations with many divisions, products,
markets, different priorities for investmhent, etc. Smaller businesses or
companies tend to be less formal. In other words, formality in SMP refers to the
extent to which participants in SMP, their responsibilities, authority and roles/
duties are clearly specified. Also, in practice, strategists may not always follow
the strategic management model as rigid steps or chains in the management
process. Situations may not always warrant this. It would also depend on a
companys approach to SMP.
Figure 2.1 Illustrates the Strategic Management Model.
CORPORATE STRATEGY

Understanding
strategy

Understanding
corporate
strategy
(Ch. 1)

Strategic
management
process
(Ch.2)

Stability
Strategies
(Ch. 7)

Strategy
analysis

Strategy
formulation

Corporate
strategy
and corporate
governance
(Ch. 3)

Mission. goal,
objectives
(Ch. 4)

Strategy
for change
(Ch. 8)

Internal
competences
resources
(Ch. 5)

Expansion
strategies
(Ch.9)

Strategy
selection

External
environment
(Ch. 6)

Strategy
implementation

Structural
implementation
(Ch. 2)

Functional
implementation
(Ch. 13)

Industry &
competition
analysis
(Ch.10)

Strategy
evaluation control

Behavioural
implementation
(Ch. 14)

Strategy
evaluation
and control
(Ch. 15)

Selection &
activation
of strategy
(Ch.11)

Figure 2.1 Strategic Management Model

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The _____process consists of four distinct steps or stages Defining
organizational mission, objectives or goals; formulation of strategy/
strategic plan; implementation of strategies; and strategy evaluation and
control.
2. Organizational competence and resources, the environment, various
strategy alternatives available, strategy selection criteria, etc., are _____
parts of SMP.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 21

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

3. Application of SMP is more formal and model driven in small businesses.


(True/False)
4. In practice, strategists may not always follow the strategic management
model as rigid steps or chains in the management process as, situations
may not always warrant this. (True/False)

2.4 Approaches to the Strategic Management Process


There are different approaches to the strategic management process (some
call these modes of strategy making). These approaches lay varying emphasis
on different elements of the strategic management process, primarily because
of differences in the nature and forms of organizations.
Approaches to strategy making or the strategic management process
have been differently enunciated by different authors and strategy analysts.
Mintzberg (1973) has classified various approaches into three modes. He calls
these the three modes of the strategy-making process.
These are:
Entrepreneurial mode
Adaptive mode
Planning mode
Steiner and others (1982) have classified various approaches into five
forms or categories. These are:
Formal-structured approach
Entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach
Intuitive-anticipatory approach
Incremental approach
Adaptive approach
Three modes of Mintzberg and five approaches of Steiner and others
have some commonness or similarities in terms of the content. Therefore, the
two sets of approaches can be regrouped into more coherent forms for the
purpose of analysis. For example, Mintzbergs planning mode resembles the
formal-structured approach of Steiner and others, incremental and adaptive
approaches have common features (adaptive is common in both).
Entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach is essentially based on opportunities,

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 22

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

intuition and anticipation. Therefore, entrepreneurial-opportunistic and intuitiveanticipatory approaches of Steiner and others can be analysed together. So,
the two sets of approaches may be restated in the forms of three basic
approaches:
1. Entrepreneurial-opportunistic
2. Formal-structured and
3. Adaptive

2.4.1 Entrepreneurial-opportunistic Approach


An entrepreneur is a creative thinkeran individual who combines the roles of
an innovator and risk taker. He is tough and pragmatic in decision making and
is constantly driven by an insatiable urge for creation and achievement. He is
characterized by an active search for opportunities in a generally unfriendly or
unfavourable environment. In the entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach, the
focus is on exploiting opportunities against environmental odds rather than
problem solving. In this approach, power rests with one person, the owner and
chief executive, who is capable of taking bold decisions on the basis of personal
power and charisma. Bold decisions are taken many times in situations of
uncertainty. The most dominant goal in this approach is creation and expansion
of assets, markets and market share.
The strategy is to move forward with unusual leaps or discontinuous
growth for achieving entrepreneurial success or profits. Many companies have
successfully used this approach.
The entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach is suitable for organizations
in which the key strategistssometimes a single individualare visionaries.
Also, they have complete control over formulation and implementation of a
strategy and have very high stake in the outcome of the strategy. They lead the
organization from front and by example. These are the reasons why many such
organizations outperform their more professional counterparts adopting formalstructured approach.
The advantages of this approach may, however, turn into disadvantages
if the strategists are found lacking in what they do or in righteousness. Since
there are hardly any checks and controls, the entrepreneurs/strategists should
have the right vision backed by the right strategy and resources. Otherwise, the
strategy may easily lead to failure. There are many such cases of failures.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 23

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.4.2 Formal-structured Approach


In the formal-structured approach (also called the planning mode), the strategic
management process depends largely on the planning system. Planning is based
on organizational objectives and priorities, values of the top management, the
companys strengths and weaknesses, external opportunities and threats
(including risks) and alternative options or strategies available. This implies the
application of scientific techniques and tools of analysis in the planning process.
The roles of planners are, therefore, very important in this approach. Suitability
of the formal-structured approach depends on the size of the organization,
management styles, complexity of environment, etc. Steiner (1969) has identified
six factors which determine the degree of formalization of the strategic
management process. These are organization, management style, environment,
production process, nature of problems and purpose of planning system.
Most of the large companies, including multinationals, follow the formalstructured approach because it suits their organizational structure and the
decision-making process. Many companiesUnilever, for example, started with
the entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach during the initial years of incorporation
when the company was guided by the vision of the promoter. But, after years of
growth when the company became large and, also global in nature, it switched
over to the formal-structured approach because, at this stage, more planning
and checks and balances are required to sustain growth.
A basic advantage of this approach is that it generates enough information
and, employs scientific tools of analysis which enable planners and decision
makers to find solutions even in complex situations. However, when the planning
and management system becomes too formalized and highly structured, the
decision-making process becomes slow. Such a system also generally
discourages new initiative and unconventional decision making which may be
warranted by emerging competitive situations.

2.4.3 Adaptive Approach


The adaptive approach is essentially a balancing strategy. It is more remedial
and reconciliatory, and, therefore, more reactive than proactive as a decisionmaking process. Decisions are made in sequential and incremental steps
necessitated by internal or environmental changes. Different interest groups
and stakeholders put pressure on the decision-making process to protect their
own interests. The basic orientation in this approach, therefore, is to maintain
flexibility to adapt to pressing needs and circumstances. This also means that

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 24

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

the final decision, many times, is a compromised one, which may be at the cost
of organizational effectiveness or success.
The adaptive approach typically suits large public sector companies, where
there is greater focus on accountability than on growth. There are also important
pressure groups in the form of the controlling ministry and other related
government departments and ministries. In such companies, current problem
solving (with necessary adaptation and compromise) always has higher priority
than future planning. All large public sector companies in India like ONGC,
SAIL, BHEL, IOC, MMTC, STC and, also in other parts of the world, follow the
adaptive approach. The degree of adaptability and compromise on strategic
planning and decision making would depend on the progressiveness of the
companies and the concerned controlling ministries.
The adaptive approach also suits follower companies (in the private sector)
rather than leaders in the industry. Followers or imitators are companies that
avoid the risk of innovation and are content with producing and selling products
that have already been established in the market. They only concentrate on
market share.

2.4.4 Combination Approach


Many companies realize that adopting a single approach exclusively may not
be the most judicious course. Stakeholders stakes/interests are increasing
(including stock options), the marketplace is ever changing and the business
environment is never fully predictable. Due to these factors, the strategic
management process of a company has to cope with a large number of complex
variables or factors, and a single approach may not be sufficient to secure
competitive advantage. A combination of approaches may be the appropriate
strategy.
A dominant entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach may be combined with
the formal-structured approach for better results. Similarly, a formal-structured
approach may be combined with some elements of entrepreneurial-opportunistic
approach. And, environmental (both internal and external) adaptability should
be a common element in these approaches. As Sumantra Ghoshal puts it: It
may be useful for Reliance (following entrepreneurial approach) to think whether
it should follow a bit of Hindustan Levers structured processes, just as much as
it may be productive for Hindustan Lever to consider ways of broadening its
systems and culture to the entrepreneurial approach.1

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 25

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Hindustan Unilever, like many other companies, has also realized the
need for infusing entrepreneurial approach into their dominant formal-structured
approach for developing more effective business strategies. According to its
former Chairman, Keki Dadiseth, Hindustan Lever has grown in size. While it
has its own obvious benefits, it also has some drawbacks. What we need to
master is the art of creating and preserving the entrepreneurial ability and
connectedness of a small company within a large company.2
There are different ways in which the three approaches can be combined.
Individual companies have to work out the right combination based on growth
alternatives, investment opportunities or priorities, stakeholders pressures and
top managements style of functioning.
Activity 1
We have mentioned four different entrepreneurial-opportunistic approaches
(Reliance, Dell, Sony, Hero Honda) to the strategic management process.
Make a comparative analysis of these four approaches.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. ________ has classified various approaches to SMP into three forms,
calling it the three modes of the strategy-making process entrepreneurial
mode, adaptive mode and planning mode.
6. In the ______ approach, the focus is on exploiting opportunities against
environmental odds rather than problem solving.
7. In the __________ approach, the strategic management process depends
largely on the planning system.
8. Which of these approaches is essentially a balancing strategy more
remedial and reconciliatory, and, therefore, more reactive than proactive
as a decision-making process?
(a) Entrepreneurial-opportunistic
(b) Formal-structured
(c) Adaptive approach
(d) Combination approach

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 26

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.5 Levels in SMP


We had mentioned the three levels of strategy in Unit 1. We shall now elaborate
on these strategies with respect to the strategic management process. To do
this, let us first define a strategic business unit (SBU). A strategic business unit
is a division or a product/product group unit which operates as a separate profit
centre having its own set of market and competitors and its own marketing
strategies. The company or the corporate organization consists of related
businesses and/or products grouped into different SBUs. The SBUs are
homogeneous enough to manage and control most factors which affect their
performance. Resources are allocated to SBUs in relation to their contributions
to the corporate objectives, growth and profitability.
Three levels in the strategic management process, as mentioned in Unit
1, are: the corporate level, the business unit or SBU level and the functional
level. These three levels of strategy distinctly exist only in multiple SBU firms.
For single-business companies, corporate-level strategy and SBU-level strategy
are not really distinguishable because all the organizational level strategies for
resource allocation or growth or market diversification are formulated with respect
to the particular product or business of the company (only in the case of product
diversification, corporate-level strategy and single business unit-level strategy
may/would be different). Relationships among corporate level, business unitlevel and functional-level strategies in single SBU and multiple SBU firms are
shown in Figures 2.2 and 2.3. We can also call these alternative strategic
management structures.

Operations
strategies

Corporate/business
strategy

Top/Senior
management

Functional strategy

Middle
management

Marketing
strategies

Financial
strategies

HR
strategies

Figure 2.2 Corporate/Business Level and Functional Strategies


in Single SBU Company
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 27

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Corporate
strategy

SBU 1
strategy

Corporate
management

SBU 2
strategy

Operations
strategies

Marketing
strategies

SBU top
management

SBU 3
strategy

Financial
strategies

Personnel
strategies

Middle
management

Figure 2.3 Corporate/Business Level and Functional Strategies


in Multiple SBU Company

2.5.1 Corporate, SBU and functional level


Corporate-level strategy sets the long-term objectives of an organization and
broad policies and controls within which an SBU operates. The corporate-level
strategies also help an SBU to define its scope of operations and also limit or
enhance SBUs operations through resources the corporate management allocates
for securing competitive advantage. Functional-level strategies follow from, and
also support, SBU-level strategies. Strategies at the functional level are often
described as tactical. Such strategies are guided and controlled by overall SBU
strategies. Functional strategies are more concerned with implementation of
corporate-and SBU-level strategies rather than formulation of strategies. Strategic
management process at three levels also involves decision making. But, the types
of decision making, their scope and impact are different at different levels. The
characteristics of decision making at three levels may be more clearly understood
in terms of major dimensions of decision making. These are shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1 Characteristics of Strategic Decisions at Corporate, SBU and Functional Levels
Level of Strategy
Dimension

Corporate

SBU
Policy/operational

Functional

Type of decision

Conceptual/policy

Operational

Investment
implication
Risk involved

High

Medium

Low/Nil

High

Medium

Low

Time horizon

Long term

Medium term

Short term

Impact

Critical

Major

Minor

Flexibility

High

Medium

Low

Adaptability

Low

Medium

High

A distinction can be made between functional-level or functional-area


strategies and operating strategies. Functional-area strategies involve
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 28

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

approaches, actions and practices to be undertaken for managing particular


functions or business processes or key activities within a business marketing
strategy. Operating strategies in comparison, are relatively narrow strategies
for managing different operating units (plants, distribution centres in different
geographic locations, etc.,) and specific operating activities of strategic
significance (advertising campaigns, management of particular brands, website
sales and operations, etc).3 Operating strategies provide more specific details
about functional-area strategies and render completeness to functional-level
strategies and also to overall corporate strategy.
Hindustan Unilever (HUL) is a multi-SBU fast moving consumer goods
(FMCG) company. It markets about 100 products/brands. It has grouped its big
range of products into three categories: home and personal care, foods and
beverages and, industrial and agricultural. In addition to domestic marketing, it
is also engaged in export which is a separate SBU. The company has adopted
a hybrid organizational structure based on functions and product divisionalization.
Like most organizations, strategies at HUL also operate at three levels: corporate,
SBU and functional. The strategic management process in HUL is shown below
as a model structure (Figure 2.4).
HUL

Corporate level
Resource mibilization
Resource deployment
Merger and acquisition
divestment
Appropriation of earnings

Business level (SBU)


Beverages
Personal products
detergents
Ice cream and frozen dessels
Export
Functional level
Technical
Marketing
Finance
Human resources
Research
Corporate affairs
Legal & secretarial

Flow of decision
Flow of support

Figure 2.4 Strategic Management Process at HUL


Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 29

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Self-Assessment Questions
9. A ________ is a division or a product/product group unit which operates
as a separate profit centre having its own set of market and competitors
and its own marketing strategies.
10. Strategies at the functional level are often described as_____, and such
strategies are guided and controlled by overall SBU strategies.
11. Corporate-level strategy sets the short-term objectives of an organization
and broad policies and controls within which an SBU operates.
(True/False)
12. Operating strategies in comparison are relatively narrow strategies for
managing different operating units. (True/False)

2.6 Participants in SMP


The fact that the strategic management process involves strategy making at
the corporate level, SBU level and functional level also implies that managers
at different levelstop, senior and middleparticipate in the strategic planning
and management process. In addition to the managers, the board of directors
also play a definite role. Many times, management consultants also play important
roles in the strategic planning and management of a company. So, there may
be five major participants in the strategic management process of a company
although they may play quite different roles. The five participants are:
1. Board of directors
2. Chief Executive Officer (CEO)
3. Corporate planning staff
4. Other managers
5. Consultants

2.6.1 Role of Board of Directors


In any organizational hierarchy, the board of directors is the apex/highest level
body. The board is the final authority in managing the affairs of a company,
strategic or non-strategic. They perform these functions according to or subject
to the memorandum of association and articles of association of the company.
The role of a board member depends on his (her) degree of involvement in the
strategic process; and the degree of involvement of a member depends partly
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 30

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

on the management philosophy of a company and partly on the interest a


particular board member takes in the affairs of the company. The levels of
involvement and, therefore, the roles of the board members can vary widely.
Wheelan and Hunger4 have analysed the role of board members in terms of a
continuum as shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Degree of Involvement of Board Members in Strategic Management
Low
(Passive/
phantom)
Never knows
what to do

High
Rubber
Stamp
Permits
executives to
make all
decisions and
approves
what they
decide

Minimal
review
Reviews
selected
issues
brought to
him/her

Normal
participation
Involved to a
limited degree
to review
managements
performance,
decisions or
programmes

Active
participation
Questions,
reviews and
makes final
decisions on
mission,
objectives,
strategy,
policies;
performs
fiscal and
management
audit

(Active/
catalyst)
Takes the
leading role
in establishing
and
modifying
mission,
objectives,
strategy and
policies; has
very active
strategy
committee

Source: T L Wheelen, and J D Hunger (1983), 49

Given the progressive management philosophy of a company, professional boards


can play very effective roles in the strategic management process. Boards of
Hindustan Unilever, L&T, ITC, Tata Motors, Tata Steel, for example, are quite
effective and take active part in the strategy-making processes of these companies.
They participate in setting and reviewing corporate objectives, formulation of longterm strategies, examination and review of proposals for new investment,
appointment of chief executives and other key personnel, etc. According to a
survey conducted by AIMS Research5 on the practice of boards of directors and
their roles in company management, the boards of Hindustan Unilever, Tata Motors,
Bajaj Auto, HDFC and L&T are considered the best in India.
On the other extreme, as shown in Table 2.3, there are boards or board
members who play only passive roles. In such cases, strategic decisions are
taken mostly outside the board. Strategy and decision makers may be a powerful
family group or a powerful CEO or the top management committee, overseas
parent company in the case of subsidiaries of multinationals or bureaucrats or
ministers in the case of public sector companies.
Between the passive boards and the extraordinarily participative ones,
there are boards which are more common in companies. These boards play a
balancing role between the strategy-making process in the companies and the
shareholders. Major strategic functions performed by these boards are:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 31

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Approval of the corporate budget and resource allocation for strategic


investments
Periodic review of the strategic planning process
Monitoring the chief executives role in the strategic management process
Triggering discussion on growth possibilities and alternatives
Guiding the chief executive in formulating organization-level strategies
Review of strategy implementation with respect to results or profitability

2.6.2 Role of Chief Executive


The chief executive plays the most important role in the strategic management
process of a company. Major management functions of a chief executive,
however, can be broadly divided into two categories; strategic and non-strategic.
Every chief executive should clearly distinguish between his/her strategic
functions and non-strategic or operational functions so that he can appropriately
allocate his time and concentrate more on strategic functions. Strategic and
non-strategic functions of a chief executive in selected basic organizational
areas are given in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3 Strategic and Non-strategic Functional Activities of Chief Executives
Function
Basic organizational area

Strategic

Non-strategic

Setting goals and priorities

Deciding organizational
mission and objectives,
setting major policies,
priorities, etc.

Minimal or nil

Long-term planning

Providing direction and


leading the process

Constitute the planning team

Short-term planning

Providing directions

Reviewing results

Developing resources

Leading organizational
resource development
team

Developing human and


physical resources

Allocation of work and major


resources

Allocating major resources Designing organizational


to strategic functions and
structure and
projects
preparing/approving corporate
budget

Committing resources

Committing new projects or Developing control criteria


resources; discommiting
projects, resources

Evaluating results /
performance appraisal

Negligible or nil

Measurement of performance
against plans; measuring
organizational and managerial
effectiveness

Mobilizing support

Maintaining good PR for better


governance

Relationship with internal and


external stakeholders

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 32

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

It may be interesting to see how chief executives prioritize their major


functions or roles. T Thomas, the former CEO of Hindustan Unilever visualizes
three major roles6 of the chief executive:
Managing relationship with the environment
Managing the board
Long-term planning
It is to be noted that Thomas was holding the positions of the chief executive
and also of the chairman of the company. If the two positions are delinked as
happens in many companies, the chief executives primary role is to assist the
board rather than manage it. Managing the board would be the chairmans job.
Some empirical studies have highlighted the relative importance of major
functions (both strategic and non-strategic) performed by a chief executive.
Results of a study7 of 125 Indian CEOs are summarized in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Major Functions of a Chief Executive

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Function

Degree of
importance*

Time spent
(per cent)

Long-term planning
External relationship
Review and control of organizational performance
Personnel development
Short-term planning
Performance appraisal
Meetings in the organization
Review of organizational relations

4.8
4.5
4.0
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.6

18.0
30.0
20.0
7.0
8.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
100.0

* Degree of importance of a function has been measured on a 5-point scale


Source: R K Shah, Top Managerial Effectiveness (1990).

Effectiveness of the strategic role of the chief executive determines the direction
and pattern of growth of most of the companies. An effective chief executive is
a practical/realistic visionary a dreamer who also does. He becomes a catalyst
in the strategic management process and, mobilizes resources, managers and
supports the board to accelerate the growth process. Effective chief executives
are successful leaders; they lead by example and charter a new growth trajectory
for the company. Jack Welch of GE, Lee Iacocca of Chrysler Corporation, Michael
Dell of Dell Computers, Bill Gates of Microsoft, Keki Dadiseth of Hindustan
Unilever, P N Haksar of ITC, Dhirubhai Ambani of Reliance, Aditya Birla of
Hindalco Industries, Azim Premji of Wipro and N R Narayanamurthy of Infosys
have led their companies to unprecedented heights.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 33

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.6.3 Role of Corporate Planning Staff


Every chief executive needs the support of his corporate planning staff. With
increasing volatility of the competitive environment, the strategic planning and
management process is becoming more complex. Also, with the introduction of
new tools, techniques and planning models, the planning system is also
becoming more technical and specialized. Therefore, almost all large companies
and multinationals have created a separate corporate planning division or unit.
This division or unit is equipped with specialized planning staff who forms the
nucleus of strategic planning activities of a company. In many companies, this
division or unit functions directly under the charge of the chief executive.
The corporate planning division performs various functions mostly of a
strategic nature. Major functions of the corporate planning staff may be
summarized as follows:
Assisting the chief executive in developing and formalizing fundamental
concepts or divisions about organizational growth and diversification.
Scanning the environment and identifying new business opportunities.
Analysing cost benefits of alternative investment opportunities and
allocating resources to various activities/projects.
Integrating SBU plans (and, sometimes, also functional plans) into
corporate plans.
Monitoring progress of strategic plans at corporate level, SBU level and
functional levels.
Undertaking mid-term review of plans and strategies and, suggesting
changes, if and when necessary.
Evaluating plan performancemeasuring the degree of success (or
failure) of strategic plans and reporting to the chief executive for any
necessary action.
Vaswani (1990) of Gujarat University conducted a study8 on the strategic
management process in India based on a cross-section of Indian companies.
The study included 12 public sector, 26 FERA9 and 24 private sector companies.
One of the study findings focussed on the role or functions of the corporate
planning staff. These are shown in Table 2.5.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 34

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Table 2.5 Functions of Corporate Planning Staff: Relative Importance


Functions

Weightage*

Getting top management participation in development of plan assumptions


Integrating the plans
Monitoring plan progress
Communicating the plans
Issuing planning guidelines
Converting physical plans into financial plans
Interpreting the plans
Monitoring and reviewing strategic plans
Negotiating plan targets
Verification of plan activities
Monitoring performance of operating units
Providing continuous staff assistance to chief executive for planning activities
Recommending and monitoring allocation of resources to various
organizational units
14. Identification of new business opportunities

2.7
2.3
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.1
2.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.6
1.6
1.5

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

1.4

* Weightage is on a four-point scale


Source: P Vaswani, Strategic Management Process in India (1990).

2.6.4 Role of Senior Managers


Not only the corporate planning staff but other managers, particularly the senior
managers, also play an important role in the strategic management process of
a company. The senior managers include SBU heads and also functional heads.
Some of these heads are at the level of directors who are represented on the
board. The senior managers are members of different management committees,
including top management committees which are involved in strategic planning
and management. Some of these committees consider and evaluate proposals
for new investment, restructuring, diversification, etc. In all these committees
some corporate planning staff members are also represented.
ITC has constituted a Corporate Management Committee (CMC) which
consists of five full-time directors and five senior managers, besides company
secretary. MRF has divided its senior managers into five strategic groups dealing
with products and markets, environment, technology, resources and manpower.
Each group, headed by a leader, prepares position papers (which includes
initiation of strategy proposals, feedback and implementation reports) for the
board. Voltas undertakes strategy implementation through a Corporate Executive
Committee (CEC) headed by the President (Chief Executive) and consisting of
Senior VPs and VPs of different functional areas.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 35

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.6.5 Role of Consultants


Management consultants can play very useful roles in the strategic planning
process of a company. Consultants render services in different functional areas
of management including the strategic planning and management process. In
companies with no separate planning division or unit, consultants can fill that
gap. They can undertake planning and strategy exercises as and when the
company management feels the need for such exercises or consultancies. Even
in companies with a corporate planning division/unit, consultants may provide
specialized inputs or insights into identified management or strategy areas. Top
strategic consultants like McKinsey & Company use or develop latest tools,
techniques or models to work out solutions to specific strategic management
problems or issuesbe it productivity, cost efficiency, restructuring, long-term
growth or diversification. Consultants bring with them diversified skills (most of
the consulting companies are multidisciplinary) and experience from various
companies which may not be available internally in a single company. This is
the reason why even large multinational companies hire consultants for achieving
their goals or objectives.
There are many international consultants who are in demand in different
countries. There are also national consultants. Leading international consultants,
in addition to McKinsey & Company, are Boston Consulting Group (BCG), Arthur
D Little and Accenture (formerly Anderson Consulting). Prominent Indian
consulting companies are A F Ferguson, Tata Consultancy Services (TCS) and
ABC Consultants.
Consultants, sometimes have a difficult or delicate role to play. In many
companies, a situation develops when the chief executive or the top management
needs to bank upon the support of an external agency like a consultant to push
through a strategic change in the organizational structure or management system
of the company. It may be for growth and development or downsizing. In both
cases, many companies face internal resistance to change. The resistance is
more if it is downsizing even when it is required for turning around a company.
This happens particularly in public sector companies where implementing change
is always difficult. Consultants are engaged to support or substantiate the
companys point of view (in the form of their recommendations) so that change
is more easily acceptable to the internal stakeholders of the company.
Consultants role may become delicate and, sometimes, tricky in such cases,
and they should carefully weigh the ethical implication of their participation.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 36

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Managers at different levelstop, senior and middleparticipate in the
strategic planning and management process. (True/False)
14. The _______ plays the most important role in the strategic management
process of a company.
15. Most large companies and multinationals have created a separate
_____unit, which is equipped with specialized planning staff who form
the nucleus of strategic planning activities of a company.
16. In companies with no separate planning division or unit, ______can fill
that gap.

2.7 Strategic Drift


In the strategic management process of every company, there is a risk of
strategic drift. In simple terms, strategic drift is the widening gap between
demand for change by the environmental forces and actual strategic change in
a company.
If there is a pressure for change, managers usually look for what is familiar.
But, this creates problems when managing strategic change, because the action
required may be outside the present system or paradigm, and organizations
may be required to change significantly their core assumptions and strategies.
The situation may be one of declining performance. To arrest the decline,
company management may first seek to improve implementation of the existing
strategy. This can be through tightening controls and improving the monitoring
system. If this is not effective, a change of strategy may take place, but, a
change which may still be within the existing paradigm. For example, the
management may seek to expand the market but, may assume that it will be
similar to its existing market and, therefore, plan for managing the new project
in much the same way as it has been used to. This is the strategy of incremental
change.
But, this may not be enough. Such processes or strategies may not be
adaptive enough to the environmental changes over time. This may give rise to
strategic drifta mismatch between the environmental needs and strategic
actionas shown in Figure 2.5.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 37

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Environmental
change

Amount of change

Strategic
change
3

2
4

Phase 1
incremental change

Phase 2
Flux

Phase 3/4
Transformational
change or demise

Time

Figure 2.5 Strategic Drift in the Management Process

As shown in the Figure 2.6, an organizations strategy gradually moves


away from or neglects the forces at work in its environment. Sometimes, the
strategic drift is difficult to detect and reverse. This happens because not only
changes are being made in strategy, but also such changes may achieve some
short-term improvement in performance tending to legitimize the action taken.
But, with time, either the drift becomes evident or the environmental change
increases, and the performance is affected. Strategy development is then likely
to go into a state of flux (Phase 2), with no clear direction, further damaging the
performance. Eventually, more transformational change may be required (Phase
3) if the demise of the organization (Phase 4) is to be avoided.10
The above description of strategic drift conforms to a situation of lack of
fit or match with the environment. The lack of fit can happen in another way
also. Those organizations, which tend to stretch their competences to create
new opportunities, may also get into problems. In this case, a transformational
change may be attempted through development of entirely new products or
services not previously in existence. This can succeed and create a shift in the
market in accordance with the intended strategy. However, there is a risk that
such an organization can find itself ahead of its environment (Phase 5 in Figure
2.5). The strategy and the environment may eventually realign (as shown in the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 38

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

figure), but, this may not often happen in reality; and, even if it happens, the
time lag in the realignment process can cause significant problems of
performance in the organizations. Strategic drifts of this nature are, however,
not very common. More common drifts in organizations are the ones where the
strategic process lags behind the environmental forces.
But, all this emphasizes the delicate balance that an organization needs
to maintain in developing its strategy. It has internal pressurescultural or
managerialwhich tend to constrain strategy development, and environmental
forces, including markets and competitors, which it must cope with for a particular
strategic process to succeed. Every organization has to constantly endeavour
to align or realign these two forces to avoid the occurrence of a strategic drift.

2.7.1 The Learning Organization


The risk of strategic drift implies that there is not much justification in pursuing
formalized planning approaches with predetermined objectives, analyses and
strategies. The environment is too complex and changes too rapidly for such
approaches to produce desired results. Such uncertainty in the environment
requires that strategy should be managed in a more unconventional,
discontinuous way and not through incremental changes. Managers should
not regard their experience as fixed and unalterable; on the other hand, they
should try to develop an organization in which they continually challenge past
experience and practices and strive for new, innovative ways. In other words,
they should develop a learning organization. Senge (1990) gives a good
exposition of the art and practice of the learning organizations.
Managers in a learning organization have a questioning mind. They start
by questioning the past and the present. For this to happen, companies need to
develop organizations which are pluralistic, i.e., organizations in which different
and even conflicting ideas and views are encouraged, and discussions, debates
and experimentations are the norms. In this way, all strategic solutions and
decisions emerge through a critical, but progressive process. The job of the top
management is to create such an organization and build teams which can work
in a pluralistic environment. This can be done in a number of ways; for example,
through development of different types of organizational structure or through
development of organizational culture. Suitability of the organizational type is
important. The learning organization is also an evolving organization.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 39

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Activity 2
In every organization, there is a chance of strategic drift. Progressive
organizations try to prevent strategic drift through advance planning and
preventive strategies. Assume that you are the strategic planning manager
of one such company. Give your analysis of preventive planning and
strategies.

Self-Assessment Questions
17. The widening gap between demand for change by the environmental
forces and actual strategic change in a company is referred to as ______.
18. The risk of strategic drift implies that there is not much justification in
pursuing formalized planning approaches with predetermined objectives,
analyses and strategies. (True/False)
19. Managers in a learning organization have a __________mind.
20. The learning organization is also an evolving organization. (True/False)

2.8 Case Study


Strategic Management Process At Hindustan Unilever (HUL)
Hindustan Unilever (HUL) is a partly owned (majority holding) subsidiary of
Unilever Ltd. For quite some years, Unilever
was on the lookout for expansion
opportunities for its group companies/
businesses in India. When the opportunity
came its way with Indias e conomic
liberalization in the 1990s, Unilever acted fast,
achieved a big expansion in each of its major
businesses in the country, regrouped and
integrated its companies.
Unilever worked out its corporate strategy for
India in line with its objectives. To achieve its
objectives, HUL formulated a strategy which
had three distinct components:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 40

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

1. A strategy for expansion of businesses


2. A strategy for regrouping and integrating the group companies
3. A strategy for consolidation of ownership and control by the parent
company in the Indian operations by acquiring majority equity in them.
For expansion of its business, HUL exploited a whole range of strategic
possibilities. It used takeovers/ acquisitions, mergers, strategic alliances
and joint ventures. In some cases, it employed the start-up route as well. It,
however, relied heavily on the takeover route for its expansions. There
were valid reasons for this. By relying on the takeover route for its expansion,
Unilever was in a position to avoid the time lags.
Along with the expansion of its various businesses, Unilever carried out the
regrouping/integration of its existing businesses/companies in the country.
Its idea was to integrate all its companies in India into a single mega firm. It
used mergers for accomplishing the objective and carried it out in stages.
It took two companies at a timetwo companies of the group which enjoyed
the closest synergy were merged at a time into a single entity, and the
merged entity in turn was subsequently merged with another company of
the group to form a much larger entity. The process continued till it reached
the stage where Unilever had just a single company in India.
Unilever merged four companiestwo of its existing companies, Doom
Dooma India and Tea Estates India, two taken-over companies, Kissan
and Kothari General Food (KGF), into Brooke Bond. The merging of Doom
Dooma and Tea Estates served two purposes. It furthered the objective of
integrating the group companies. It also helped Unilever to acquire majority
equity in Brooke Bond with an incremental new investment. Unilever then
merged Brooke Bond and Lipton into a single entityBrooke Bond Lipton
India Ltd (BBLIL). Then TOMCO, which had been taken over earlier, was
merged with HLL. Subsequently, the combined entity, Brooke Bond Lipton
India Ltd (BBLIL) was merged with Hindustan Lever. Consolidation of
ownership and control by the parent company was the third part of Unilevers
strategic process with respect to its Indian operations. Unilever acquired
majority stake and consolidated its position in all its companies in India.
The company acquired 51 per cent or more equity in each of its companies
in India, and it managed this at attractive prices and with minimal new
investment. This was accomplished through a chain of moves involving
mergers of companies and incremental new investments.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 41

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

2.9 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
There are different approaches to the strategic management process.
These approaches can be regrouped into three basic approaches:
entrepreneurial-opportunistic, formal-structured and adaptive.
Many companies use a predominantly entrepreneurial-opportunistic
approach and combine this with the formal-structured approach. Similarly,
a formal-structured approach may be combined with some elements of
adopting predominantly a formal-structured approach with elements of
entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach.
Corporate-level strategies, SBU-level strategies and functional-level
strategies all involve decision making. But, the types of decision making,
their scopes and impacts are different at different levels. For example,
corporate-level strategies are generally long term, SBU-level strategies
are generally medium term and functional level strategies are short term.
Managers at different levelstop, senior and middleparticipate in the
strategic management process. In addition, the board of directors plays
an important role. Consultants also have a role to play. In all, there are
five major participants in SMP: board of directors, chief executives (CEO),
corporate planning staff, other managers and consultants.
In the strategic management process of every company, there is a risk of
strategic drift. Strategic drift is the gap between demand for change by
the environmental forces and actual strategic change taking place in a
company.
In learning organizations, managers constantly challenge past experience
and practices and, strive for new innovative ways. In such organizations,
strategy is managed in a more unconventional, discontinuous way and,
not through incremental changes.

2.10 Glossary
Merger: The combining of two or more companies into one, through a
purchase acquisition or a pooling of interests
Strategic business unit: A division or a product/product group unit which
operates as a separate profit centre having its own set of market and
competitors and its own marketing strategies
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 42

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

Strategic drift: The widening gap between demand for change by the
environmental forces and actual strategic change in a company
Strategic management process: An ongoing process that entails
specifying the organization's mission, vision and objectives, developing
policies and plans, often in terms of projects and programs, which are
designed to achieve these objectives, and then allocating resources to
implement the policies and plans, projects and programmes.

2.11 Terminal Questions


1. Explain the strategic management process (SMP). Discuss it in terms of
the strategic management model.
2. Distinguish between the entrepreneurial-opportunistic approach, formalstructured approach and the adaptive approach in strategic management.
Would you generally recommend each of these approaches in isolation
or in some combination for a company?
3. What are the different levels in SMP? Are there any interrelations among
them? Explain.
4. Who are the major participants in SMP? Do you feel all these participants
play equal roles?
5. Compare the roles of the board of directors and the chief executives in
the strategic management process.
6. What is the role consultants play in the strategic planning and management
process of a company? Is it an essential role?
7. What is strategic drift? Explain graphically.
8. Which is a learning organization? What is the mindset of managers in a
learning organization?

2.12 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Strategic management
2. Internal
3. False

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 43

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

4. True
5. Mintzberg (1973)
6. entrepreneurial-opportunistic
7. formal-structured
8. (c)
9. Strategic business unit
10. tactical
11. False
12. True
13. True
14. Chief executive
15. Corporate planning unit
16. Consultants
17. Strategic drift
18. True
19. Questioning
20. True

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. The strategic management process may best be illustrated in the form of
a model. Refer to Section 2.3 for further details.
2. Three modes of Mintzberg and five approaches of Steiner and others
have some commonness or similarities in terms of the content. Refer to
Section 2.4 for further details.
3. Three levels in the strategic management process are the corporate level,
the business unit or SBU level and the functional level. Refer to Section
2.5 for further details.
4. There may be five major participants in the strategic management process
of a companyboard of directors, chief executive officer (CEO), corporate
planning staff, other managers and consultants. Refer to Section 2.6 for
further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 44

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

5. The board of directors is the final authority in deciding the affairs and
direction of a company; the chief executive plays the most important role
in the strategic management process of a company. Refer to Section 2.6
for further details.
6. Management consultants can play very useful roles in the strategic
planning process of a company. Refer to Section 2.6.5 for further details.
7. Strategic drift is the widening gap between demand for change by the
environmental forces and actual strategic change in a company. Refer to
Section 2.7 for further details.
8. Due to the fear of strategic drift, every company should be a learning
organization. In learning organizations, managers constantly challenge
past experience and practices and, strive for new innovative ways. Refer
to Section 2.7.1 for further details.

2.13 References
1. Hill, C W L, and G R Jones. 1997. Strategic Management: An Integrated
Approach. 2nd edn. Boston: Houghton Mifflinco.
2. Johnson, G, and K Scholes. 2005. Exploring Corporate Strategy. 6th edn.
London: Pearson Education.
3. Mintzberg, H. 1973. Strategy Making in Three Modes. California
Management Review, Winter.
4. Senge, P. 1990. The Fifth Discipline: The Art and Practice of the Learning
Organization. New York: Doubleday Century.
5. Thomas, J. 1981. Managing a Business in India. New Delhi: Allied
Publishers.
6. Wheelen, T L, and J D Hunger. 1983. Strategic Management and Business
Policy. Massachusetts: Addison-Wisley.
7. Wright, P, C Pringle, and M Kroll. 1998. Strategic Management: Text and
Cases. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
Endnotes
1

Sumantra Ghoshal, Collectors of Great People, Economic Times, Supplement (August


20, 1999).

Keki Dadiseth, Business Growth Through People Growth: Our Blueprint for the New
Millennium , Chairman s Speech (Mumbai: Annual General Meeting of the Company,
April 20, 2000).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 45

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 2

A A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble, Crafting and Executing Strategy:
The Quest for Competitive Advantage, 14th ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005) 34.

T L W heelen, and J D, Hung er, Strategic Management and Business Policy


(Massachusetts: Edition Wesley, 1983), 49.

AIMS Research Survey, Best Boards, Business Today (March 7 21, 1999).

T Thomas, Managing a Business in India (New Delhi: Allied Publications, 1981), l.

R K Shah, Top Management Effectiveness, unpublished PhD Dissertation (South Gujarat


University, 1990).

P Vaswani, Strategic Management Process in India , PhD Thesis Surat: South Gujarat
University, 1990.

Companies covered under the Foreign Exchange Regulation Act (FERA). FERA has now
been replaced with Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA).

10

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy (1999), 77.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 46

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Unit 3

Business Policy, Strategic Management


and Business Continuity Planning

Structure
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Caselet
Objectives
3.3 Policy, Strategy, Tactics
3.4 Strategic Management
3.5 Strategic Planning and Strategic Management
3.6 Benefits of Strategic Management
3.7 Business Ethics and Strategic Management
3.8 Planning for Business Continuity
3.9 Case Study
3.10 Summary
3.11 Glossary
3.12 Terminal Questions
3.13 Answers
3.14 References

3.1 Introduction
A common debate found in strategic management literature is whether policy
comes before strategy or vice versa and what is the interrelation between the
two. The present unit throws light on this by considering the definitions and
features of both. The definitions and role of tactics are also dealt with.
Different definitions of strategic management are also given for clearer
understanding of the concept and process. The classification of management
functions into strategic and operational categories has been done. Four important
topics strategic planning, strategic management, limitations of strategic
management and business ethics have also been discussed.
An extension of strategic planning is business continuity planning. This is
a recent development in policy and strategic management. It essentially deals
with the damages due to a disaster to a businessnatural or manmade.
Appropriate planning and strategies are required to handle such damages or
disasters. Implementation issues are also involved. All these have been
discussed in this unit.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 47

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3.2 Caselet
Birla Sun Life Insurance is one of the few Indian companies to have a fully
operational business continuity plan (BCP). It consists of a response plan
to restore and recover operations for critical processes within a
predetermined time after a disaster. The plan would ensure minimal impact
to the organization, its people, and most importantly, its customers.
The objective is to have a planned response in the event of any contingency,
ensuring recovery of critical activities within agreed time frames. The plans
would comply with various regulatory requirements and minimize the
potential business impact to the company. Additionally, it helps to create a
system that fosters continuous improvement of business continuity
management.
Highlights of the plan are as follows:
Crisis Management and incident response
Data back-up, data and system recovery as documented in the Disaster
recovery plan
Recovery of all critical business functions and supporting systems
Alternate recovery sites if primary location is unavailable
Communication with customers, employees and other stakeholders
Assurance to customers that they will continue to receive optimum
customer services at all times
Source: http://insurance.birlasunlife.com/Pages/Individual/About-Us/BusinessContinuity-Plan.aspx

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Distinguish between policy, strategy and tactics
Differentiate between strategic planning and strategic management
Discuss the benefits and limitations of strategic management
Explain the role of business ethics in strategic management
Describe business continuity planning in terms of all aspects

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 48

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3.3 Policy, Strategy, Tactics


We start with five definitions of strategy given by Mintzberg and Quinn (1991).
The five definitions or descriptions are: plan, ploy, pattern, position and
perspective. Strategy as a plan is a consciously intended course of action to
deal with a situation. These action plans may be general or specific. For example,
a strategy to gain competitive advantage in the market through differentiation is
a general strategy, but a strategy to offer low price and higher value for the
customer in a particular market may be considered a specific strategy. As a
ploy, strategy is a specific manoeuvre intended to outwit an opponent or a
competitor. Strategy as a pattern is visible in the consistency of action, intended
or unintended, that a company undertakes from time to time to strengthen its
position in the marketplace. Strategy as a position involves developing a match
between the organization and its external environment by reacting or responding
to change in the market environment. Tata Motors, responding to the emergence
of a Japanese light commercial vehicle (LCV) in the Indian market and introducing
its own LCV to become a market leader, is an example. Finally, strategy as a
perspective involves creating a shared view or perspective of the environment
by the management and other managers at different levels in the organization.
There are many such definitions of strategy in strategic management
literature. If we have to give one single definition of strategy, we would like to
quote the one given by Thompson and Strickland (2001):
A companys strategy consists of the combination of competitive moves
and business approaches that managers employ to please customers, compete
successfully, and achieve organizational objectives.1
As the above definition suggests, and as mostly used or understood,
strategy is an action plan or a scheme of action or design of execution of a
plan. Porter, one of the greatest exponents of strategy, has a slightly different
approach to the definition. He describes strategy as:
... developing and communicating the companys unique position, making
trade-offs, and, forging fit among activities.2
For an organization, unique position indicates choice of activities which
are different from those of its competitors or performing similar activities in
different ways to exhibit its uniqueness.
Trade-off is required when some of the activities followed by a company
may not be compatible with each other or with organizational objectives or goals.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 49

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Forging or creating fit among different activities is necessary to ensure that


they relate to or reinforce each other.
Policy is different from strategy. Policy is derived from the Greek word
politeia, meaning polity, that is, the state and its citizens, and Latin polotis
meaning polished, that is, clear.
According to the New Webster Dictionary, policy means the art or manner
of governing a nation or the principle on which any measure or course of action
is based. This definition implies that policy is a prescribed guideline for governing
actions of an organization with respect to given objectives. Kotler has given a
clear definition of policy:
Policies define how the company will deal with stakeholders, employees,
customers, suppliers, distributors and other important groups. Policies narrow
the range of individual discretions so that employees act consistently on important
issues.3

3.3.1 Different Features of Policy


On the basis of this definition, certain features of policy can be identified. These
are:
Policies should follow from organizational objectives and should be
formulated in consistency with such objectives.
Policies provide guidelines to managers/members in an organization for
deciding a course of action, and these limit their discretion or freedom in
choosing the course of action.
Policy formulation is generally the function of senior or top management
of a company, and not the job of all managers.
Policies are commonly expressed in qualitative terms in a general way.
Sometimes, policies can also be stated in a conditional or more specific
way.
In any organization, a policy will remain in vogue for sometime till it is
reviewed, and a change in the policy is made or the policy is replaced by
a new one4. This means that policies do not change frequently.
To make the concept or meaning of policy clearer, some examples are given
below.
A company will not consider any cost reduction measures if it means
compromising on the quality of its product(s).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 50

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

A company decides to grow only through retained earnings and not resort
to capital issue or market borrowing.
A company will not consider adding any new products with less than 10
per cent return on investment.
A company sells on cash terms and also on credit terms.
A rental company charges a deposit for renting materials.
A car company charges extra money for delivering the car to the buyers
premises.
A company hires personnel with experience only.
A company has guidelines on how to collect outstanding amounts from its
customers.
A company responds to 50 per cent of customer enquiries within three
working days.
A company does not question the return of goods by customers that were
purchased during last one month.
A company does not give any discount on price.
A company gives 10 per cent discount on price if payment is made in
cash.

3.3.2 Policy vs Strategy


The difference between policy and strategy should now be clear. Policy is broader
or more generalmore in the form of guidelines or principles. Strategy is more
specific with reference to a particular situation, target or objective. Policy generally
comes first; strategy comes later, and, sometimes, follows from or is subject to
policy. Let us explain this with an example. A company wishes to achieve greater
cost efficiency. This is the objective. The company also has a policy of not
retrenching any of its existing employees. So, a strategy will be worked out,
which is subject to or consistent with this policy. The strategy may relate to
economies of scale or measures for increasing productivity or identifying and
eliminating wasteful expenditure in some area(s) of operation.
Some policy analysts and strategic thinkers do not make much distinction
between policy and strategy. According to them, the relationship between policy
and strategy is an evolutionary phenomenon. Over a period of time, because of
pressure of business and growing competition, business policies of many
companies evolved into specific strategic processes. The paradigm shift between

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 51

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

policy and strategy has been well enunciated by Hofer and others (1984). This
is shown below.
First Phase: Till the mid-1930s: (Ad hoc policy)
Ad hoc policy making necessitated by the expansion of American firms in terms
of product, markets and customers; and, the consequent need for replacing
informal controls by framing functional policies to guide managers.
Second Phase: 1930s and 1940s (Planned policy)
Planned policy formulation instead of ad hoc policy making and shift of emphasis
to integration of function areas caused by environmental changes.
Third Phase: 1960s (Strategy)
Rapid pace of environmental changes and increasing complexity of management
necessitating a critical look at business in relation to environment and the need
for strategic decisions.
Fourth Phase: 1980s and later (Strategic management)
Shift of focus to strategic processes and the responsibility of management in
resolving strategic issues.
The evolutionary aspect gives a good perspective to the difference between
policy and strategy.

3.3.3 Strategy and Tactics


Strategy and tactics are also different although they appear to be the same.
From an overall strategy, a number of sub-strategies follow. These are tactics.
Let us explain this. Suppose an industrial products company wants to increase
its market share. Different strategies can be used for this. The company may
decide to adopt the strategy of increasing customer focus or improving buyer
management (other strategies can relate to quality or price). During the
implementation of the overall customer focus strategy, day-to-day responses to
the market (or customer) constitute tactics. Tactics are used more in individual
cases for example, giving a quantity discount to a particular customer, offering
a credit package to another customer, a special service to a third customer, etc.
The distinction between strategy and tactics is subtle, like the differentiation
between marketing and selling. Sometimes, the distinction between strategy
and tactics may depend on the level at which it is being used. For example, an
additional discount given to a large or important customer may be a strategic
decision for the salesperson, but for the VP (Marketing), this may be a tactical

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 52

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

decision. The distinction, or rather the relationship, between strategy and tactics
can be made clear in terms of five major factors or characteristics which relate
to both of them. These are given below:
1. Significance: Strategies have more significance or greater consequences
for an organization than tactics because strategies or strategic decisions
generally affect the entire organization or a significant part of the
organization. Tactics may affect only a particular supplier or vendor, a
particular sale or a customer.
2. Level of formulation or conduct: Because of their significance, strategies
are formulated at senior or top management level. Within an overall
strategy, tactics are employed by middle and lower levels of management
including salespersons in the field.
3. Information base: Since strategies are of major consequence to an
organization, these should be carefully worked out based on adequate
information about a companys resource, operations, environment,
competitors, customers or some or all of these. Information requirements
for tactical decisions would be much less.
4. Objectivity/subjectivity: Strategies are generally worked out by teams
and not by individual managers (except the CEO sometimes.) This, along
with the fact that those are based on carefully analysed information/data,
renders enough objectivity to strategies or strategic decisions. Tactics, by
their nature, are more subjectivesometimes left to the discretion of
individual managers.
5. Periodicity or time horizon: Strategies are not made or changed too
frequently. It takes time for a strategy to fully work itself out and to determine
its effectiveness or success or failure.
Strategies, therefore, have larger periodicity or time frame. Strategies,
which are changed too frequently, are bad strategies. Tactics, on the other hand,
can change quite frequently. If we consider policy, strategy and tactics together,
it becomes clear that policy comes before strategy and strategy comes before
tactics. All the three concepts are closely interrelated and play vital roles in the
business or management process of a company. As a sequence or conceptual
chain in the management process, policy, strategy and tactics can be written
as:
Policy Strategy Tactics

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 53

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Activity 1
Today, with increasing awareness about the threat to the environment, many
companies are adopting eco-friendly policies in various ways. Give an
example of a company that has changed its policies or adopted new policies
to make itself eco-friendly. Mention the specific steps taken.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The five definitions of _______ given by Mintzberg and Quinn (1991) are
plan, ploy, pattern, position and perspective.
2. When some of the activities followed by a company may not be compatible
with each other or with organizational objectives or goals, ________ is
required.
3. Policy is the same as strategy. (True/False)
4. According to the New Webster Dictionary, ________ means the art or
manner of governing a nation or the principle on which any measure or
course of action is based.
5. Policy generally comes first; strategy comes later, and, sometimes, follows
from or is subject to policy. (True/False)
6. Strategy and tactics are also the same although they appear to be different.
(True/False)

3.4 Strategic Management


Like strategy, strategic management also has been defined differently by different
authors and strategy analysts. We give below three definitions of strategic
management, which together give completeness to the concept of strategic
management.
Strategic management is that set of decisions and actions which leads to
the development of an effective strategy or strategies to help achieve corporate
objectives.5

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 54

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Strategic management is defined as the set of decisions and actions in


formulation and implementation of strategies designed to achieve the objectives
of an organization:6
Strategic management is primarily concerned with relating the organization
to its environment, formulating strategies to adapt to that environment, and,
assuming that implementation of strategies takes place.7
All the management functions of a company can be broadly classified
into two categories: strategic and operational. Strategic functions are performed
more at the senior and top management level, and operational functions are
discharged more by middle and lower management levels. In other words, it
can be said that, as the level of management moves up, the managers perform
more strategic functions and less operational functions. Also, in any company,
operational functions constitute a higher percentage of total management
functions than strategic functions (Figure 3.1).
Management function

Level of
management
Top

Strategic
orientation

Broad and coreative

Somewhat creative

Middle

Supervisory

Nature of function

Operational
orientation

Figure 3.1 Nature of Functions at Different Management Levels

Operational functions or operational management, as the name implies,


is concerned with routine matters of day-to-day management like efficient
production of goods, management of a sales team or sales force, monitoring of
financial performance, etc. Strategic management would be concerned with,
say, devising or innovating methods for improving financial performance of the
company. The major differences between strategic management and operational
management are shown in Table 3.1.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 55

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Table 3.1 Characteristics of Strategic Management and Operational Management


Strategic management

Operational management

Higher level

Lower level

Innovative

Routinized

Imprecise

More precise

Complex

Less complex/simple

Organizationwide

Operationally specific

Consequential

Task driven

Result driven

Productivity driven

Long-term implication

Short-term/immediate implication

Strategic management consists of three distinct steps or stages. These


are: strategy formulation, strategy implementation and evaluation and control.
In sequential order, these three stages may be shown as
Strategy formulation
Strategy implementation
Evaluation and control
Some call these three the basic elements of strategic management. These
three elements can be considered individually, but, they are closely interrelated
and must be integrated in the total management process.

Self-Assessment Questions
7. All the management functions of a company can be broadly classified
into two categories __________and _________.
8. Strategic functions are performed more at the senior and top management
level, while operational functions are discharged more by _______
management levels.
9. Strategic management consists of three distinct steps or stages
formulation, strategy implementation, and evaluation and control.
(True/False)
10. Operational functions or operational management, as the name implies,
is concerned with routine matters of day-to-day management. (True/False)

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 56

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3.5 Strategic Planning and Strategic Management


Plan or planning should precede action. And, strategic planning should precede
strategic management. Strategic planning (also called corporate planning)
provides the framework (some call it a tool) for all major decisions of an
enterprisedecisions on products, markets, investments and organizational
structure. In a successful organization, strategic planning or strategic planning
division acts as the nerve centre of business opportunities and growth. It also
acts as a restraint or defence mechanism that helps an organization foresee
and avoid major mistakes in product, market, or investment decisions.
A strategic plan, also called a corporate plan or perspective plan, is a
blueprint or document which incorporates details regarding different elements
of strategic management. This includes vision/mission, goals, organizational
appraisal, environmental analysis, resource allocation and the manner in which
an organization proposes to put the strategies into action. The concept and role
of strategic planning would be clear if we mention the major areas of strategic
planning in an organization. First, strategic planning is concerned with
environment or rather, the fit between the environment, the internal competencies
and business(es) of a company. Second, it is concerned with the portfolio of
businesses a company should have. More specifically, it is concerned with
changesadditions or deletionsin a companys product-market postures.
Third, strategic planning is mostly concerned with the future or the long-term
dynamics of an organization rather than its day-to-day tasks or operations.
Fourth, strategic planning is concerned with growthdirection, pattern and timing
of growth. Fifth, strategy is the concern of strategic planning. Growth priorities
and choice of corporate strategy are also its concerns. Finally, strategic planning
is intended to suggest to an organization, measures or capabilities required to
face uncertainties to the extent possible.
All large organizations formulate strategic plans. In 1997, All India
Management Association (AlMA) conducted a study to find out about business
plans, strategies, techniques and tools adopted by various Indian companies.
The study results were published in Business Today. The study showed that 56
per cent of the total number of companies (160) surveyed had published strategy.
In terms of planning horizon, the period covered in the strategic plan was less
than 3 years by 44 per cent of the companies, 35 years by 40 per cent of the
companies and more than 5 years by 16 per cent. Analysed in terms of company
size, bigger companies planned for a longer period. For 45 per cent of the large

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 57

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

companies, the planning period was more than 5 years, but for 70 per cent of
the small companies, the period was less than 3 years.
A characteristic feature of the starting plans of many large Indian
companies is that the long-term planning horizons of these companies generally
coincide with the national planning period. This means that many of these
companies follow a five-year planning period which synchronizes with the 5year plans of the country. This is particularly true of public sector enterprises in
the core sector.
For example, companies like BHEL, SAIL, NTPC and NHPC have
formulated corporate plans which are linked to the national plans. The 5 year
planning period of these companies, however, is not a generalization. Corporate
plans of some of these companies are linked to the national plans, but, not
necessarily of exactly 5-year duration; the duration can be a multiple of 5 years.
For example, SAIL had prepared an ambitious corporate plan with a planning
horizon of 15 years (19852000). Such plans are more appropriately called
perspective plans.
Marico Industries, the maker of Parachute coconut oil, had prepared a
strategic business plan for the period, 199196. For the preparation of the plan,
a strategic planning team was formed consisting of six managers from different
functional areas/disciplines. The planning team made some forecasts about
the general macroeconomic environment during 199196 and how the Indian
economy would perform during the period in terms of aggregate demand,
technology development and availability of raw materials. In addition to these,
the company had considered other environmental factors also. Based on an
analysis of the major strengths and weaknesses of the company and the
environmental factors (opportunities and threats), a detailed SWOT analysis
(discussed later in Unit 6) of the company was undertaken. The objective of
SWOT analysis was to identify growth and expansion possibilities in existing
and new products/businesses. These were finally translated into projected
volumes, turnover and profitability.
Once a strategic plan is prepared, the same is submitted to the senior
management/top management for their consideration and approval. In Marico
Industries also, the strategic business plan prepared by the planning group was
submitted to the senior management and finally to the top management (CEO).
Deliberations took place at different levels and the business plan was finalized.
This became more like an annual plan which was to be revised and updated
every year during the reference period (199196) as per the strategic business

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 58

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

plan. Maricos target was to increase its turnover to `300 crore by 199596. The
business plan also stipulated that Marico should add a new product to its portfolio
every year and seek technology tie-up for introduction of new products.
Strategic planning and strategic management are intimately related to
each other. Where strategic planning ends, strategic management takes over;
but, both are complementary to each other. They form vital links in an integrated
chain in corporate management. Both are continuous processes. Strategic
management may be more continuous, because it involves implementation and
monitoring also.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. A ________is a blueprint or document which incorporates details regarding
different elements of strategic management.
12. Strategic planning is concerned with environment or rather, the fit between
the environment, the internal competencies and business(es) of a
company. (True/False)

3.6 Benefits of Strategic Management


An organization can derive many benefits from strategic management. Strategic
management allows an organization to be more proactive than reactive in shaping
its own future. It allows an organization to initiate and influence rather than just
respond to activities or situations; and, this enables the organization to exercise
control over its present activities and give directions to growth and development.
Small business owners, CEOs and managers of many profit and non-profit
organizations have recognized the benefits of strategic management. The
benefits of strategic management can be both financial and non-financial.
Different research studies indicate that organizations using strategic
management are more profitable and successful than those which do not.8
Companies using strategic management techniques show significant
improvement in productivity, sales and profitability compared to the ones without
systematic planning. High-performing companies do more systematic planning
to prepare for future changes in the environmentboth internal and external.
Companies with properly organized planning system and strategic management
generally show superior long-term performance relative to the industry average.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 59

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

High-performing companies usually have more informed decision-making


system with good anticipation of both short-term and long-term consequences.
Companies, which perform poorly, often remain busy in activities that are
shortsighted and do not reflect good forecasting of future conditions. Planners
of low-performing organizations are often preoccupied with resolving internal
problems and conflicts and meeting routine or paper deadlines. They tend to
underestimate their competitors strengths and overestimate their own strengths
overlooking the weaknesses. They often attribute their poor financial performance
to uncontrollable factors such as a stagnant economy, poor industrial climate,
technological change and domestic or foreign competition.
Reports indicate that more than 1,00,000 businesses in the US fail annually
resulting in substantial financial losses. These business failures include
bankruptcies, foreclosures and liquidations. Although many factors contribute
to business failure, strategic planning and management can help in the prevention
of failures in many cases by anticipating situations or developments and
recommending or taking appropriate timely actions.
In addition to the financial benefits, companies can derive a number of
non-financial benefits from strategic management such as better awareness of
external threats, clearer understanding of competitors strategies, reduced
resistance to change, better analysis of performance-reward relationship, etc.
Strategic management may renew confidence in the current business strategy
or focus on the need for corrective actions. It helps managers to view change
as an opportunity rather than threat.
Greenley (1986) has analysed various non-financial benefits of strategic
management. He has enunciated the benefits of strategic management as given
below:
It provides for an objective view of management problems.
It allows for identification, prioritization and exploitation of opportunities.
It allows for more effective allocation of time and resources to identified
opportunities.
It provides a framework for improved coordination and control of activities.
It minimizes the effects of adverse conditions and changes.
It scans resources and time to be devoted to correcting erroneous or ad
hoc decisions.
It enables major decisions to support established objectives and priorities
better.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 60

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

It provides a framework for improved coordination and control of activities.


It helps to integrate the behaviour of individuals into a total effect.
It provides a cooperative and integrated approach to tackling problems
and opportunities.
It creates a framework for internal communication among managers.
It encourages forward thinking.
It imparts a degree of discipline, formality and positiveness to the
management of a business.
It encourages a favourable attitude towards change.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Strategic management allows an organization to be more _____ than
reactive in shaping its own future.
14. The benefits of strategic management are purely financial. (True/False)

3.7 Business Ethics and Strategic Management


Every company or business has moral or ethical responsibility towards its
shareholders. Therefore, strategic management should be ethical and socially
responsible. To be ethical and socially responsible does not mean satisfying
only legal requirements. It also signifies going beyond the law and discharging
responsibilities to the stakeholders and the society as a whole. The strategic
management team should display a high level of integrity and should evolve
right and responsible plans and actions to implement the plan. For example,
the strategists may take the shareholders interest into consideration and try to
give them adequate returns on investment. But, at the same time, they should
also take into account the concern of the employees and protect or promote
their interests. This also implies that there should be focus on transparency.
Almost all strategy formulations, implementation and evaluation decisions
have ethical implications. Strategists are responsible for developing,
communicating and also enforcing the code of business conduct or ethics for
their organization. The responsibility for ethical conduct and behaviour, should
not, however, rest only with the strategists. It should be the responsibility of all
managers. Managers, particularly senior managers, hold positions which enable
them to influence and educate many others in the organization. This makes
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 61

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

managers at different levels responsible for developing and practising ethical


decision making and management. In other words, ethical values and standards
should be an integral part of any corporate functioning. For example, Citicorp
has developed a business ethics game, called The Work Ethic, which is played
by 40,000 employees in 45 countries.9 The objective of the game is to create
and sustain an ethical culture across the organization. The strategists can be
and should be the focal point of this culture.
Explosion of the Internet and its dominance in the workplace has given
rise to many ethical issues in many organizations today. Studies like the ECommerce Perspective focus on the business ethics issues related to the
Internet. Millions of computer users are worried about the privacy and security
on the Internet. Given the global nature of Internet and e-commerce, corporate
planners and strategists have to continually strive for ensuring privacy and
security of the Internet as a strategic management tool.
We will discuss more about corporate culture, values and ethics in Unit 4
with respect to corporate governance and, also, in Unit 15 with particular
reference to implementation of corporate strategy.
Activity 2
Give an example of business ethics practised by a company and write a
report on it.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. Every company or business has _______ responsibility towards its
shareholders.
16. Almost all strategy formulations, implementation and evaluation decisions
have ethical implications. (True/False)

3.8 Planning for Business Continuity


Businesses need to be planned not only for today, but also for tomorrow, that is,
for the future. This implies business continuity and the need for sustainability.
Sustainability requires understanding and analyzing the environment. Besides
business fluctuations or business cycles, business interruptions occur because
of natural disasters like floods, earthquakes, cyclones, etc. To safeguard against
such threats or disasters, planning for business continuity is essential.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 62

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3.8.1 What is Business Continuity Planning?


Business continuity planning means proactively working out a means or method
of preventing or mitigating the consequences of a disasternatural or manmade (sabotage or terrorism) and managing it to limit to the level or degree
that a business unit can afford.

3.8.2 Need or Importance of Business Continuity Planning (BCP)


As indicated in the definition, businesses today can be exposed to different
types of threats natural or man-made. Major threats are:
Natural disasters such as floods or earthquakes or accidents
Man-made threats like sabotage or terrorism
Financial crisis or disaster can be partly man-made and partly due to
environmental factors.
BCP prepares companies to prevent or respond to such situations so that
the damages or losses are minimized and the business or company survives.
Thus, BCP plays a critical role in a businessits survival and sustainability.

3.8.3 Business Impact Analysis


Business impact analysis is the process of identifying major functions in an
organization which have impacts of different degrees on the business of the
organization. The analysis is usually done for each major function to determine
its criticality for the business. This is done through impact questions. Relevant
impact questions are:
How important is the function in terms of business policy of the company?
What is the role or criticality of the function in the business strategy of the
company?
How much the rest of the functions would be affected by absence of the
function the operational impact?
How much may be the revenue loss for the company in the absence of
the function the financial impact?
How long can the function be in operative without causing any major
impact or losses?
Whether the absence or in operation of the function affects market or
industry ranking of the company loss of competitiveness?

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 63

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Is the function critical for relationships with customers loss of customer


confidence or satisfaction?
Can the absence of the function lead to loss of future sales or revenue
future growth problem?
The answers to these questions determine the magnitude of impact of a
particular function. In terms of importance or criticality, business functions can
be classified into four categories. These are:
(i) Critical functions: Functions, if interrupted or unavailable for some time,
can put the business in complete disorder, and, may result in heavy losses.
(ii) Essential functions: Functions, whose absence or interruptions, would
badly affect the regular functioning of the organization.
(iii) Necessary functions: Functions without which an organization can
continue functioning, but its operational efficiency would be affected.
(iv) Desirable functions: The absence of these functions does not affect the
operational effectiveness, but the presence of these functions would be
beneficial to the organization.
Impact analysis enables an organization to rank or prioritize business
functions, and determine the order or priority in which those should be developed
or maintained. This also indicate recovery priorities, i.e., the speed or priority
with which a function should be restored or recovered once the function is
disturbed, interrupted or suspended.

3.8.4 Strategies for Business Continuity Planning10


Because of the possibility of different kinds of impacts, and depending on the
nature of damage or disaster, appropriate strategies should be developed and
used to deal with particular situations. Five different strategies should be
developed for five different situations/actions. These are:
1. Prevention
2. Response
3. Resumption
4. Recovery
5. Restoration

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 64

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

1. Prevention
Conventionally, prevention is the best strategy; this means taking steps or actions
to prevent or minimize the chances of occurring of a disaster. Companies can
adopt many preventive control measures as safeguards. Common preventive
control measures are:
(a) Security controls: These involve controls by setting up barriers to protect
the site and prevent unauthorized entry into the premises. This means, in
other words, manned surveillance at the location.
(b) Infrastructure controls: These include appropriate infrastructural facilities
like UPS/back-up power, smoke/fire detectors, fire extinguishers, weather
forecasting systems , etc.
(c) Personnel controls: Skilled/trained personnel are posted to man sensitive
zones where key or critical resources may be located.
(d) Software controls: These involve modern methods of controls through
computerized systems or software. These include authentication,
encryption, firewall, intrusion detection systems, etc.
2. Response
Prevention is a pre-emptive measure; response is a reactive step. If prevention
is not possible, fast response is the next best alternative strategy. After an
interruption or damage has taken place, the BCP team should immediately
inform the management and the Damage Assessment Team. Two other teams
would also be involved: the Technical Team and the Operations Team.
The Damage Assessment Team would assess the nature and magnitude
of the damage. More specifically, the team should investigate into:
The cause of disruption or damage
The scope for preventing additional damage
What can be salvaged
What repairs, restorations and replacements are required
Based on the report of the Damage Assessment Team, the Technical
Team and Operations Team should get into action. The Technical Team is the
key decision maker for further actions of the BCP and the Operations Team
executes the actual damage control operations of BCP.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 65

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3. Resumption
In this, the strategy is for resumption of normal or pre-damage activities of the
organization. Activities now shift to the command centre. The command centre
is different from the location of the normal business activity. Both resumption
and recovery actions are planned and coordinated from the command centre.
The centre should have required communication facilities, systems and
equipments for effective functioning of the BCP/Technical team.
The first decision to be taken by the Technical Team is whether important
or critical business operations can be resumed at the present site or those have
to move to an alternative location. If the present site is badly damaged and, is
not accessible for immediate use, operations may have to move to an alternative
site. Different kinds or types of alternatives may be available based on
infrastructure and facilities and the Technical Team has to choose the most
appropriate site.
4. Recovery
Along with the resumption of critical operations either at the original site or an
alternative location, the recovery process also begins. Recovery essentially
means reinstallation of the operating and control system. Necessary critical
operations are restored. As this happens, information restoration from back-up
tapes or offsite storage also begins. As soon as information/data restoration is
complete, critical business functions can resume.
5. Restoration
Restoration means restoration of the original site for normal functioning. The
restoration process is initiated simultaneously with the recovery work. In fact,
recovery and restoration teams are often common.
The five strategies mentioned above have to be planned and executed
within a time span usually decided by the top management in consultation with
the BCP team. The time span or duration of the process would depend on the
magnitude of the damage or disaster, recovery/restoration goals and the speed
with which different teams " BCP, Technical and Operational " can function.
3.8.5

Developing a Business Continuity Plan and Implementation

Plans and strategies work together. A plan is also essential for implementation
of a strategy or strategies. A separate plan can be made for each of the five
strategies, i.e., prevention, response, resumption, recovery and restoration or
an integrated plan can be prepared incorporating or dealing with all the strategies.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 66

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

In either case, a plan would have four important aspects or elements.


These are:
(a) Objective: What exactly is to be done or achieved
(b) Assumptions: These indicate availability of back-up services, trained
team to handle operations, vendors, etc.
(c) Team: The BCP team entrusted with the project their sub-teams roles
and responsibilities should be specified
(d) Scope and limitations: The role of the BCP team should be clearly
defined. Any limitations in their functioning, including resources, are to be
mentioned

3.8.6 Implementation
Implementation of business continuity plans are mostly technology driven.
Implementation involves development and testing of IT system or solution. The
software and/or hardware elements are built into the systems. Implementation
of the mechanical and physical processes of restoration/recovery also take place
simultaneously. In fact, technology and other systems have to be harmonized
for proper implementation of a business continuity plan. During continuity
planning and implementation, care should also be takes to ensure that the
organizations business process does not come to a complete halt when there
is a disruption of the normal process flow. This is ensured through planning or
building redundancy, i.e., incorporating back-up service elements which may
be redundant during normal course of business.
An example will make this clear. A bank may be selling fixed deposits to
its account holders or customers through net banking. But, the bank can also
keep phone banking facility ready as a standby so that this can be availed of by
the customers if net services break down. There can also be emergency phone
numbers which customers can use in case of failure of normal communication
services.
3.8.7 Technology versus Business
Business continuity planning and implementation predominantly involve
technologyIT and software systems. But, it must not be forgotten that
technology is used for protection or restoration of business, and, therefore,
focus on business has to be simultaneous.
Also, operational aspects of BCP involves technology, but, technology is
not all or sufficient. Other knowledge areas or activities are equally important.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 67

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

These include risk management, crisis management, impact analysis, costbenefit analysis, storage management, network management, recovery planning,
coordination and communication.11 This implies that business continuity planning
teams should be cross-functional or multi disciplinary so that all required
knowledge inputs or expertise are available. Organizations should develop and
engage such multi disciplinary teams for successful business continuity planning
and its implementation.

Self-Assessment Questions
17. To safeguard against natural or man-made disasters, ________is
essential.
18. ________is a pre-emptive measure, while _____response is a reactive
step.

3.9 Case Study


Oriental Insurance Company: Growth With Stability*
Oriental Insurance Co. (OIC), a subsidiary of General Insurance Corporation
(GIC), is one of the oldest (established in 1947) insurance companies in
India. OIC conducts all forms of non-life insurance businesses. These
businesses range from small rural insurance covers to big national projects.

OICs corporate policy is to contribute to the socioeconomic objectives of


the nation by being a vibrant and viable organization catering to the growing
insurance needs of the community.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 68

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Towards this end, the company will strive for effective management of
business operations.
With headquarters based in Delhi, OIC has 21 regional offices, 311 divisional
offices and 635 branch offices in various parts of Indiametropolitan cities,
large, medium and small towns and some rural locations. The company
has overseas operations in Nepal, Kuwait and Dubai.
OIC is managed by a team of professionally qualified and experienced
managers. These managers have vast experience in conducting general
insurance business, both nationally and internationally. The company has
a dedicated project cell at headquarters and also major cities of India. A
special R&D team has been dedicated to work out special/innovative
insurance covers like stockbrokers policies, special package policies, etc.
OIC specializes in devising special covers for large projects like power
plants, steel plants, chemical plants and petrochemicals. It has a highly
technically qualified team of professionals to render high quality customer
service. The company has special reputation in the reinsurance market.
OIC follows a strategy of growth with stability. The company maintains a
steady growth in its premium income as well as investment income. During
the last 10 years, both premium income and investment income increased
by 810 per cent. Even capital and reserve funds grew by about the same
percentage.
OIC generally follows a policy/strategy of concentration in the existing
products and markets, i.e., on its popular policies which are major revenue
earners. The company also adapts its policies/strategies to emerging
environmental and market changes to remain contemporary.
* Based on S Lomash and P K Mishra, Business Policy and Strategic Management
(New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House, 2009), 36971 (Case IX).

3.10 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Business policy or policy is different from strategy and strategy is different
from tactics. If we consider policy, strategy and tactics together, policy
comes before strategy and strategy comes before tactics as a sequence
or conceptual chain in the management process: PolicyStrategy
Tactics. But, all the three concepts are closely interrelated.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 69

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

Plan or planning should precede action and strategic planning should


precede strategic management. Strategic planningalso called corporate
planningprovides the framework (some call it a tool) for all major
decisions of an enterprisedecisions on products, markets, investment
and organizational structure.
Benefits of strategic management are manyboth financial and nonfinancial. Studies have shown that organizations using strategic
management are more profitable and successful than those which do
not.
Strategic management has its limitations alsoanalysing a complex
environment; plans, frameworks and systems mean rigidity; limitation in
implementation; and inadequate appreciation by the management.
Every company or business has moral or ethical responsibility towards its
shareholders. Therefore, strategic management should be ethical and
socially responsible.
Business continuity planning means proactively working out a means or
method of preventing or mitigating the consequences of a disaster natural
or man-made (sabotage or terrorism) and managing it to limit to the
level or degree that a business unit can afford.

3.11 Glossary
Business continuity planning: Proactively working out a means or
method of preventing or mitigating the consequences of a disaster natural
or man-made (sabotage or terrorism) and managing it to limit to the
level or degree that a business unit can afford.
Policy: The art or manner of governing a nation or the principle on which
any measure or course of action is based.
Strategic management: Set of decisions and actions which leads to the
development of a corporate organization.
Strategic plan (also called a corporate plan or perspective plan): A
blueprint or document
Strategy: The combination of competitive moves and business
approaches that managers employ to please customers, compete
successfully, and achieve organizational objectives which incorporates
details regarding different elements of strategic management.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 70

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

3.12 Terminal Questions


1. Explain the difference between policy, strategy and tactics.
2. Explain strategic management. How is it different from operations
management?
3. Specify the interrelationship between strategic planning and strategic
management. Which comes first?
4. Mention the major benefits of strategic management; state in terms of
both financial and non-financial benefits.
5. Does strategic management have any ethical implications? If so, explain
them.
6. What is business continuity planning? Explain in terms of strategies and
implementation.

3.13 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Strategy
2. Trade-off
3. False
4. policy
5. True
6. False
7. Strategic, operational
8. middle and lower
9. True
10. True
11. strategic plan
12. True
13. Proactive
14. False

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 71

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

17. moral or ethical


18. True
19. Business continuity planning
20. Prevention, response

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Policy is broader or more generalmore in the form of guidelines or
principles. Refer to Section 3.3 for further details.
2. All the management functions of a company can be broadly classified
into two categoriesstrategic and operational. Refer to Section 3.4 for
further details.
3. Plan or planning should precede action. And, strategic planning should
precede strategic management. Refer to Section 3.5 for further details.
4. An organization can derive many benefits from strategic management.
Refer to Section 3.6 for further details.
5. Every company or business has moral or ethical responsibility towards its
shareholders. Therefore, strategic management should be ethical and
socially responsible. Refer to Section 3.7 for further details.
6. Businesses need to be planned not only for today , but also for tomorrow,
that is, for the future. This implies business continuity and the need for
sustainability. Refer to Section 3.8 for further details.

3.14 References
1. Glueck, W F. 1980. Business Policy and Strategic Management. New
York: McGraw-Hill.
2. Hofer, C A, E R Murray, R A Pitts, and Ram Charan. 1984. Strategic
ManagementA Casebook in Policy and Planning. 2nd ed. Minnesota:
West Publishing.
3. Mintzburg, H, and J B Quinn. 1991. The Strategy Process: Concepts,
Contests and Cases. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
4. Ramesh, P, Business Continuity Planning, Technology Review 2002-04,
Tata Consultancy Services, July 2002.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 72

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 3

5. Steiner, G A, J B Miner, and E R Gray. 1982, Management Policy and


Strategy. New York: Macmillan.
6. Thompson, A A, Jr, and A J Strickland. 2001. Strategic Management:
Concepts and Cases. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
Endnotes
1

A A Thompson Jr, and A J, Strickland, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases


(New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001) 3.

M E Porter, W hat is strategy, Harvard Business Review (November December,


1996), 61 78.

P Kotler, Marketing Management (New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2000), 66.

A F Alkhafaji, Strategic Management (New York: The Haworth Press, 2003), 8.

W F Glueck, Business Policy and Strategic Management (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1980),
6.

J A Pearce, and R B Robinson, Strategic Management (Singapore: McGraw-Hill, 2000),


6.

G A Steiner, J B Miner, and E R Gray, Management Policy and Strategy (New York:
Macmillan, 1982), 25.

C C Miller, and L B Cardinal, Strategic Planning and Firm Performance: A Synthesis of


More than Two Decades of Research, Academy of Management Journal 6, no. 27
(1994); M Peel, and J Bridge, How Planning and Capital Budgeting Improve SME
Performance, Long Range Planning (October, 1998); J Smith, Strategies for Startups, Long Range Planning (October, 1998).

F R David, Strategic Management (2003), 20.

10

This sub-section is based on P Ramesh, Business Continuity Planning , Technology


Review 2002 04, Tata Consultancy Services, July 2002, pp. 5 10.

11

P Ramesh (2002), p. 37.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 73

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Unit 4

Corporate Strategy and


Corporate Governance

Structure
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Caselet
Objectives
4.3 Definitions: Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance
4.4 Growing Importance of Corporate Governance
4.5 Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance: Complementarity
and Conflict
4.6 Code of Best Practice
4.7 Strategic Audit
4.8 Board and CEO Relationship
4.9 Managed Corporation
4.10 Governed Corporation
4.11 Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance:
Need for more Integrative Relationship
4.12 Case Study
4.13 Summary
4.14 Glossary
4.15 Terminal Questions
4.16 Answers
4.17 References

4.1 Introduction
Corporate strategy and corporate governance are two important tools that help
in the functioning of any company. They are not the same, but generally
complementary to each other. Corporate governance is more operational, and
no strategy can succeed without operational support. Similarly, no governance
can achieve organizational objectives without a strategy or strategic management
system. A close link or relationship also exists between corporate strategy and
corporate governance through the roles of the board of directors and the CEO.
Both the board and the CEO have strategic roles to play. The two also have
important roles to play in the governance of a company.
There is, however, a basic difference between the roles of the board and
the CEO and other managers of a company. The board represents the interest
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 75

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

of the shareholders who are the owners of a company whereas the CEO and
other managers represent the management of the company. The distinction
between ownership and management is very important, because, most of the
issues in the interrelation between corporate strategy and corporate governance
revolve round the relationship, and sometimes, conflict between the two.
Most of the analysis in this unit will be around this theme. In doing so, we
will discuss the definitional aspects of corporate strategy and corporate
governance, growing importance of corporate governance, stakeholders
expectations, major issues between corporate strategy and corporate
governance, code of corporate governance, empowerment of the board, role of
professional directors, code of best practice, strategic audit, boardCEO
relationship, the managed corporation and the governed corporation.

4.2 Caselet
The year 2001-02 saw the collapse of several high-profile and large
corporations, many of which were involved in accounting fraud. These
corporations included Enron and MCI in the US and One. Tel in Australia.
These events attracted the attention of the respective governments on the
issue of corporate governance. While the US government passed the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002, the CLERP 9 reforms were passed in Australia.
Today, any discussion of corporate governance makes reference to
principles raised in three documents released since 1990: The Cadbury
Report (UK, 1992), the Principles of Corporate Governance (OECD, 1998
and 2004), the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (US, 2002).

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Explain the conceptual difference between corporate strategy and
corporate governance
Discuss the growing importance of corporate governance
Analyse the complementarities and conflicts between corporate strategy
and corporate governance
Explain the code of best practice, strategic audit, board and CEO
relationship
Distinguish between the managed corporation and the governed
corporation
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 76

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

4.3 Definitions: Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance


We had defined corporate strategy in Unit 1. We will now define corporate
governance. Often, corporate governance is equated with corporate
management, which is not correct. As has been pointed out above, corporate
governance is concerned with serving the interest of the owners (stockholders)
and, is much broader in perspective than corporate management. Corporate
management is a part of or can be a useful partner in corporate governance.
There is some confusion about the concept and meaning of corporate
governance. Two definitions given below may give some clarity to the meaning
and the role of corporate governance.
Corporate governance ensures that long-term strategic objectives and
plans are established and that the proper management structure
(organization, systems and people) is in place to achieve those objectives
while at the same time, making sure that the structure functions to
maintain the corporates integrity, reputation and responsibility to its
various constituencies.1
Corporate governance denotes direction and control of the affairs of
the company. The role of corporate governance is to ensure that the
directors of a company are subject to their duties, obligations and
responsibilities to act in the best interest of their company, to give
direction and remain accountable to their shareholders, and other
beneficiaries for their action.2

The Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)


describes corporate governance as a system. The complete OECD definition,
which is fairly elaborate, gives some additional perspectives on corporate
governance:
Corporate governance is the system by which business corporations
are directed and controlled. A corporate governance structure specifies
the distribution of rights and responsibilities among different participants
in the corporation such as board members, shareholders and other
stakeholders, and, spells out the rules and procedures for making
decisions on corporate affairs. By doing this, it also provides the structure
through which company objectives are set and means of attaining those
objectives and monitoring performance are spelt out. OECD (1993).3

If we compare the definitions of governance and corporate strategy (given


in Unit 1), some important aspects of commonness and contrasts between the
two emerge.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 77

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

First, both corporate governance and corporate strategy start with


organizational objectives. In the case of corporate governance, the objectives
have more governance orientation; in the case of corporate strategy, the
objectives have more strategic focus. Second, corporate governance is primarily
guided by the shareholders. Good governance should result in good returns on
investment of shareholders and their happiness. Corporate strategy focuses
more on market share, long-term growth and development. Third, corporate
governance concentrates on organizational structure, rules, procedures and
systems for better governance. Corporate strategy is also concerned with
structures and systems but focuses more on strategic planning and resource
allocations. Fourth, corporate governance attempts to streamline operations
for good governance; corporate strategy depends more on strategic functions
(manufacturing, finance, marketing and HR) and strategic implementation. Fifth,
the guiding force behind corporate governance is the shareholders, i.e., the
owners; but, corporate strategy is dictated by the market, competition and
customers. Finally, effectiveness of corporate governance is judged mostly by
financial results (return on investment or profit) in addition to some social
responsibilities; effectiveness or success of a corporate strategy is assessed in
terms of both financial and non-financial indicators or measures of performance
and, also, in terms of a balanced scorecardbalancing financial performance
with strategic performance (discussed in detail later in Unit 16).

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The system by which business corporations are directed and controlled
is called________.
2. Corporate governance is primarily guided by the_______.
3. It is correct to equate with corporate management with corporate
governance. (True/False)
4. Both corporate governance and corporate strategy start with organizational
objectives. (True/False)

4.4 Growing Importance of Corporate Governance


The affairs of a company are directed and controlled through the board of
directors who represent the shareholders of the company. The extent to which
the board discharges its trustee responsibilities and its commitment to run a

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 78

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

transparent organization depends on many factors, including the roles played


by the more progressive elements within the corporate sector. A strong demand
for evolving a good corporate governance system is emerging from the corporate
sector itself.
Over the years, organizations have witnessed frequent violations of
organizational and governmental regulations, increase in unethical and corrupt
corporate practices and also scams.
Owing to these and related developments, the need for proper corporate
governance is being increasingly felt.
Shareholders are also becoming more demanding and more conscious
about their rights and privileges. They expect efficient management, good
governance, high profit and large dividends. They look for transparency and
public image to maximize shareholders value. In many companies, they are
voicing their concerns in annual shareholders meetings. Also, institutional
investors are becoming an important segment of stockholders and are influencing
company management and corporate governance. Since the 1970s, institutional
investors have been increasing their participation, and are presently holding
more than 50 per cent of many corporate stocks. For example, 63 per cent of
Ford Motor Company stock, 81 per cent of Digital Equipment Corporation, 79
per cent of Kmart and 72 per cent of Citicorp are held by institutions. These
investors like to see the value of their stocks increase. Therefore, they have
started playing a more active role in governing the companies in which they
hold stocks. After Exxons 1989 oil spill in Alaska, public pension funds persuaded
the company to include an environmentalist on its board.4
If the institutional investors are not happy with corporate performance,
they convey their dissatisfaction to the company management. In 1987, Roger
Smith, chairman, General Motors, had to face a group of institutional investors,
because the group was annoyed that GM had made a $700 million hush mail
payment to H R Perot when he left the GM board. They also reprimanded Smith
for declining profits and market share, weak stock price, low productivity and
big bonuses received by senior executives. Eventually, GM announced a series
of major policy changes including stock buybacks and capital spending cuts.5

4.4.1 Different Models of Corporate Governance


All this suggests the need for an appropriate corporate governance framework
or system for every company. The corporate governance system should clearly
address the three major issues of an organization: what is the purpose

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 79

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

corporate objective or philosophy or goal of an organization; whom the


organization should be serving; and, how best to serve their interests. There
are different ways to handle (or manage) these issues, and different companies
in different countries have adopted different models of corporate governance to
address various organizational issues. Some selected corporate governance
models with their strengths and weaknesses are shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Different Corporate Governance Models: Strengths and Weaknesses
Anglo-Saxon Model (US and UK)
Strengths

Weaknesses

Dynamic market orientation


Fluid capital
Internationalization possible approach

Volatility and instability


Short-term approach
Inadequate governance structure

European Model (Germany)


Strengths

Weaknesses

Long-term industrial strategy


Very stable capital
Strong governance procedures

Internationalization difficult
Vulnerability of companies to global
market

Asian Model (Japan)


Strengths

Long-term industrial strategy


Stable capital
Overseas investments

Weaknesses

Growth of institutional investor activism


Growth of financial speculation
Secretive procedures

Source: T Clarke, and E Monkhouse, eds., Re-Thinking the Company, adap. (London:
Financial Times/Pitman Publishing, 1994)

Self-Assessment Questions
5. The affairs of a company are directed and controlled through the ______
who represent the shareholders of the company.
6. The _____ system should clearly address the three major issues of an
organizationcorporate objective; whom the organization should be
serving; and, how best to serve their interests.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 80

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

4.5 Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance:


Complementarity and Conflict
We have mentioned earlier that stakeholders expectations not only warrant
good corporate governance, but also effective corporate strategies. Simultaneous
focus on both is important, because only good governance and effective
strategies can lead to simultaneous achievement of organizational objectives
like profitability, growth and diversification and stakeholders expectations like
high return on their capital, transparency, employee motivation and customer
satisfaction. If we look at the total management activities of modern organizations,
we can clearly see the complementary roles of corporate governance and
strategies in smooth and efficient functioning of organizations. This is shown in
Figure 4.1.
INPUTS

PROCESSING

Resources and
Capabilities
Financial
Human
Technological
Materials
Information

Planning: Understand the company and its


environment
Determine goals and objectives of future
organizational performance
Select a course of action to achieve objectives
Allocate corporate resources

1
Controlling
Monitor activities
and make corrections
if needed
Use reporting and
control measures

Organizing (how to accomplish the plan)


Find the appropriate arrangement to assign
responsibility to people in the organization
Create supportive culture and leadership
Modify or reorganize if plan changes

1
Leading (creating shared vision, culture,
and values)
Empower employees
Use certain techniques to motivate employees
to follow
OUTPUTS

Outcome
Deliver quality products/
services
Achieve goals and objectives
efficiently and effectively
1. Dominantly governance activity

2. Dominantly strategic activity

3. Mix of governance and strategic activities

Figure 4.1 Management Activities in Modern Organizations: Input-output Chain


Source: A F Alkhafaji, Strategic Management, adap. (2003), 28.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 81

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Figure 4.1 shows all the major management activities in a company (inputoutput chain) and relationship among them. Activities like input (resources and
capabilities) management and processing have been shown as dominantly of
governance nature; and, activities like organizing (accomplishing the plan) and
output (outcome) have been classified as mix of both strategic and governance
factors. In fact, even in leading an activity of dominantly governance nature,
use of different motivational techniques involves strategies. Similarly, resource
and capability management, perceived primarily as strategic management of
human and financial resources, has major governance implications.
We can also see the interrelationship or interdependence between
governance and strategy through a chain in the reporting system in
organizations. We can more appropriately call this governance through report
or documentation system. A typical reporting system is shown in Figure 4.2.
Reports received
Beneficiaries
Limited reports
Trustees
Limited investment
performance reports
Investment
managers
Accounts
Analysts' reports
Company briefings
Board
Budgets/qualitative reporting
Executive
directors
Budgets/qualitative reporting
Senior
executives
Budgets/other
operating reports
Managers

Figure 4.2 Chain of Corporate Governance: Typical Reporting System


Source: G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6th ed. (Pearson
Education, 2005), 196 (Exhibit 5.2).
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 82

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

The reporting system/structure in Figure 4.2 shows the linkage between


ultimate beneficiaries of corporate governance or company performance and
the managers who drive the strategic management process. But, the reporting
structure also shows the distance between the two. It is even possible that
many beneficiaries may either be ignorant or indifferent to the details of
managerial activities or strategies of the company. Individual managers and/or
directors may adopt strategies which may mean effective management but,
may not be in the best interests of the beneficiaries. Also, as we have mentioned
above, all beneficiaries or shareholders do not have the same or common
interests; their interests may often clash. All these may lead to conflicts between
corporate governance and strategic actions. Table 4.2 shows some of these
conflicting situations.
Table 4.3 Some Common Conflicts Between Corporate Strategy
and Corporate Governance Corporate
Strategic

Conflict

Governance

Long-term growth

Sacrifice of short-term profitability, cash


flow and pay levels/hikes

Development/diversification to require
additional funding (share issue or loans)

Financial independence may be


sacrificed

Expanding capital base: public ownership


of shares

More openness and accountability from


the management

Cost efficiency through technology or


new investment

Job losses in the organization

Expanding into mass market; product and


price strategy

Decline in quality standards

Family businesses to grow; induction of


professional manager

Owners may lose control

Table 4.3 shows some typical conflict situations between strategy and
governance. These include conflicts between growth and profitability; growth
and control/independence, cost efficiency and jobs; volume/mass production
and quality/specialization; and, the problems of sub-optimization, i.e.,
development of one part of an organization at the expense of another.6
Many of these situations also reflect conflicts of stakeholder interests or
expectations. For example, shareholders want cost efficiency, higher productivity
and profit, but, this may lead to job losses and clash with employees interests.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 83

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Activity 1
Take a company of your choice and design the role of corporate governance
in the company. You may describe the corporate governance in terms of
organizational structure, rules, procedures and systems.

Self-Assessment Questions
7. Corporate governance and strategies play ________ roles in the smooth
and efficient functioning of organizations.
8. The interrelationship or interdependence between governance and
strategy can be seen through a chain in the ______ in organizations.
9. Activities like input (resources and capabilities) management and
processing have been shown as dominantly of _______nature
10. Activities like organizing (accomplishing the plan) and output (outcome)
have been classified as mix of both _____and _____factors.

4.6 Code of Best Practice


In strategic analysis, we consider benchmarking and best practices mostly with
reference to securing competitive advantage in the market. In governance
analysis, we not only talk of code of corporate governance, but also of code of
best practice for superior performance. For a company, the code of best
governance practice and best strategic practice may actually complement each
other for improving the overall organizational performance.
The Cadbury Committee has prescribed a code of best practice to serve
as a guideline to those companies which want to achieve higher standards of
corporate governance. The objective of the code of best practice is to balance
responsibility, authority and accountability in the governance process. Three
major constituents of the code prescribed by the Cadbury Committee are:
Separate positions of chairman and CEO: In every company, there should
be a separate CEO and chairman of the board of directors. When the
same person assumes the two roles, it vests too much authority with one
person with very little check on the use of such power. Separate positions
of chairman and CEO help balancing of authority.
Role clarity of chairman and CEO: Chairmans function should be to
manage the affairs of the board, including hiring and firing of the CEO of
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 84

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

the company. The CEO, on the other hand, is responsible for day-to-day
management of the organization. The day-to-day management function
of the CEO consists of planning, organizing and implementation of
policies, programmes and strategies approved by the board.
Professional inputs from independent directors: Every company should
have non-executive directors, who bring to the board their professional
experience and expertise. The argument is that these experienced
professional directors, already in senior/top executive positions in other
companies or independent consultants, would supplement the efforts of
the fulltime executive directors on the board. Their involvement would
also provide a validity check and balance the ways in which executive
directors tend to influence governance and strategic decisions at the board
level.7
We will discuss benchmarking and best practices in the strategic
perspective in detail later in Unit 12.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. The ________has prescribed a code of best practice to serve as a
guideline to those companies which want to achieve higher standards of
corporate governance.
12. One of the constituents of the code prescribed by the Cadbury Committee
are:
(a) Higher pay for directors
(b) Separate positions of chairman and CEO
(c) Greater role of chairman in decision making
(d) Lesser role of chairman in decision making

4.7 Strategic Audit


With increasing pressure on boards from external stakeholders to be more
active, many directors are seeking more practical ways to conduct strategic
overview of company management without getting directly involved in it.
Donaldson (1995) has suggested strategic audit as a new tool for systematic
review of strategy by board members without directly involving themselves with
management of companies.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 85

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Strategic audit is a formal strategic-review process, which imposes its own


discipline on both the board and the management very much like the financial
audit process8. But, it is different from management audit, which is undertaken
in many companies by the senior/top management on the progress and outcome
of important corporate activities. To understand strategic audit in the correct
perspective, one needs to analyse this in terms of its various elements.
Donaldson has specified five elements of strategic audit. These are:
1. Establishing criteria for performance
2. Database design and maintenance
3. Strategic audit committee
4. Relationship with the CEO
5. Alert to duty (by board members)
The performance criteria should be simple, well-understood and wellaccepted measures of financial performance. A number of measures of financial
performance are available. One common measure, used by many companies,
is return on investment (ROI). The ROI can be analysed like this: profit per unit
of sales (profit margin); sales per unit of capital employed (asset turnover); and,
capital employed per unit of equity invested (leverage). If these three ratios are
multiplied together, the resultant ratio will give profit per unit of equity. This
criterion would fulfil two objectives: first, sustainable rate of return on shareholder
investment, and, second, to decide whether the return is less, or equal to or
more than returns on alternative investments with comparable risk, i.e., whether
the companys chosen strategy is justifiable or not.
To calculate different performance ratios and monitor performance criteria,
a proper database is essential. This involves both database design and
maintenance. This has to be a regular and an ongoing process. Data on financial
performance can sometimes be sensitive to the managers/ employees of a
company. It is, therefore, suggested that financial and related data design,
maintenance and analyses should be entrusted to the auditors of the company
or outside consultants.
For effective strategic audit, a strategic audit committee should be
constituted. According to Donaldson, outside directors should select three of
their own members to form the committee.
This will impart regularity and more commitment to the strategic audit
process. The committee would decide on the frequency of their meeting,
periodicity of interaction with the CEO or top management of the company and,

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 86

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

also when they should make presentation to or hold discussion with the full
board.
A sensitive issue is the strategic audit committees relationship with the
CEO. Any CEO would be generally apprehensive of such a committee. The
strategic audit committee needs to create and maintain an atmosphere of
mutuality. It is true that whenever a question or a discussion on the strategic
direction of a company comes up in a board meeting, it is perceived by many
CEOs as an implicit criticism of the current strategy and leadership of the
company. It is also true that regular strategic process involving the CEO reduces
chances of unpleasant or confronting situations. In fact, ideally, the functioning
of the strategic audit committee should be seen as a low-key operation, positive
in approach, designed to lend support and credibility to company leadership
and management.
The strategic audit committee and also the board should always be alert
and vigilant to ensure that there are no slippages. Business cycles indicate that
period of success may be followed by a period of slump. The strategic audit
committee and the board should be alert enough to get signals so that they can
act in time. This is necessary because complacence develops after success
both in the board and in the management.
If properly conceived, designed and conducted, strategic audit, more than
management audit, can be a powerful tool for monitoring the strategic process
of a company and also strike a good balance between corporate strategy and
corporate governance.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. _________is a new tool for systematic review of strategy by board
members without directly involving themselves with management of
companies.
14. A performance criteria commonly used as a measure by many companies,
is _________.

4.8 Board and CEO Relationship


We have just discussed the sensitivity of the relationship between the board
and the CEO. In fact, this is part of a broader and more significant relationship

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 87

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

between the two. We have given below three observations on the boards role
and the boardCEO relationship.
The Board is responsible for the successful perpetuation of the corporation.
That responsibility cannot be relegated to management9John G Surale,
non-executive chairman, General Motors (GM).
The success of the non-executive chairman arrangement is heavily
dependent on the chairmans relationship with the CEO. If the chemistry
is not good, the relationship isnt going to work10 Sir Denys Henderson,
former chairman and CEO of Imperial Chemical Industries (ICI) and
presently non-executive chairman.
How can outside directors constructively review managements strategy
if they dont have a deep knowledge of the business?11Bernard Marcus,
Chairman, the Home Depot (a retail chain in the US).
Managers and directors in most companies agree that the board should
be an effective watchdog without undermining the managements ability to run
the business. They also feel that boards should determine/decide how to distance
themselves from their CEOs in the course of normal management of business,
but at the same time, maintain a constructive and positive relationship with
them. This means striking a balance between management strategy and
governance of a company. In connection with this, directors and CEOs have
raised many fundamental questions or issues. Some of the major questions or
issues are mentioned below.
Should the CEO be involved only with management of a company, or
should he (she) be also concerned with governance?
What role should the board (dominated by outside directors) play in
formulating and reviewing a companys strategy?
What are the advantages and disadvantages of splitting chairmans and
CEOs job instead of entrusting them to one person?
Should outside directors obtain information about the companyits
management and governanceon their own bypassing the CEO?
What should be the right mechanism for boards to evaluate management,
particularly the CEO?
How does a board ensure that its members have the necessary expertise
to judge managements performance or evaluate the strategic decisionmaking process?

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 88

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

We shall try to give some possible answers to these questions in terms of


thoughts, guidelines and practices in General Motors. The board of General Motors
has developed several guidelines which cover boardCEO relationship and, also
answer some of the issues raised above. These guidelines have evolved out of
GM boards interactions with the management during the last few years and, not
issued by the board for taking control over the management or the company.
GM guidelines clearly stipulate that the management of the company is
separate from the board. The board does not involve itself in management
decisions. The management team led by Jack Smith has full authority and, of
course, also the responsibilities for day-to-day operations of General Motors.
Activity 2
Choose a company that you are familiar with and design on double (CEO
and chairman) or single (either CEO or chairman) role of the chief executive.
Students should choose any other company and compare with Nestle.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. The Board is not responsible for the successful perpetuation of the
corporation.
16. The board should be an effective watchdog without undermining the
managements ability to run the business. (True/False)

4.9 Managed Corporation


The debate also implies the managed corporation and the governed corporation.
Pound (1995) analyses both the managed corporation and the governed
corporation, makes a comparison between the two and, suggests the governed
corporation as a model of successful corporate governance. We shall first discuss
the managed corporation and then the governed corporation.
The managed corporation is more like the traditional model of a company
or corporation. This is the model of governance where focus is on power
equations between management and control, boardCEO relationship or strategy
and governance conflict. In the managed corporation, senior managers are
responsible for leadership and decision making. Board function is to hire the
top-level managers, monitor them and fire them if they do not perform.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 89

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Shareholders role is to throw out the board if the company or the corporation
does not perform.12
Emergence and growth of the managed corporation can be traced in two
factors; first, change in the shareholding patterndispersion or distribution of
ownership among many shareholders (including the public) and, second,
emergence of a new class of professionals who were neither major stockholders
nor founders nor owners of companies. Because shareholders were dispersed,
they could not be directly involved in formulating corporate policy and strategy.
Therefore, there was the need for managers and leaders who could formulate
policies and strategies and promote organizational growth. The managed
corporation has dominated the corporate arena for decades. The managed
corporation model can be found in any modern organization; only the actual
form may vary from one organization to another.
In the managed corporation, boards and shareholders are kept away from
strategy formulation and policy making. A significant business proposal or a
major investment project may be discussed at the board level but, the managers
would be given the freedom to formulate and implement business strategies.
Board members are expected to intervene in business policies and strategies if
there is performance failure or the managers are found incompetent or corrupt.
If this happens, that is, if the directors have to get involved in corporate strategies,
may be it is time for the board to look for a new CEO.
If the major cause of corporate failure is management incompetence, the
governance system in the managed corporation may work. But, many
performance failures or crises are not results of incompetence, but are failures
of judgement. Managers tend to be biased towards strategies and decisions
which reflect their individual strengths. Managers also make mistakes. The
managed corporation model permits or ignores mistakes to go uncorrected till
they lead to major crisis or catastrophes. In the US, throughout the 1980s,
boards allowed flawed retail strategy to be followed in spite of clear evidence
that managers lacked retail skills. Some board members later admitted that it
was a mistake to allow company managements to pursue incorrect retail policies
and strategies. But, they did not intervene because they were following the
managed corporation model.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 90

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Box 4.1: Nestl Debate: Double C or Single C


One aspect of the debate on the boardCEO relationship is whether the
positions of both CEO and chairman should be combined in one person.
The Nestl debate is one of the latest to throw contrasting views on this.
Nestl shareholders voted Peter Brabeck Letmathe, the CEO, to the
chairmanship of the company as an additional responsibility. The majority
shareholders rejected the arguments of those who opposed a dual role for
Brabeck.
In a statement before the Annual General Meeting (AGM), Nestl said it
sought the double C-level status for Brabeck in the interest of the investors
as it assured strategic continuity and long-term value. According to the
company, the Austrian-born Brabeck, who had spent his entire working life
with Nestl, was the best person for the charimans job.
But some institutions had an opposite view. The Ethos Foundation, which
represents 83 Swiss pension funds in campaigning for good corporate
governance and the US-based Institutional Shareholder Services had
protested against the plan to combine the double power in one person at
the worlds biggest food group. They and others, who opposed the move,
said that a double mandate was acceptable in special cases, such as
turnaround processes where prompt action was needed but, that was not
the case with Nestl.
However, unlike Britain, where separation of the two top jobs is the norm,
in Switzerland, a combined top role is not uncommon. For example, heads
of drug companies Novartis and Roche hold dual positions of CEO and
chairman.
Brabeck assumed the dual role after his predecessor, Rainer Gut, retired.
I accept this mandate with a bit of disappointment because of the
circumstance in which it has been bestowed on me, Now, Brabecks main
challenge lies in making the company grow amidst the upheaval and
controversy that has surrounded him. Only time can tell whether the double
C is justified in case of Brabeck or not.
Source: Adapted from C D Team, Just Two Much, Economic Times (Corporate
Dossier), (April 29, 2005).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 91

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Self-Assessment Questions
17. The governed corporation has dominated the corporate arena for decades.
(True/False)
18. Managers tend to be biased towards strategies and decisions which reflect
their individual strengths. (True/False)

4.10 Governed Corporation


The answer to problems of corporate failure in the managed corporation lies in
the governed corporation. In the governed corporation, the focus is not on
powernot monitoring or controlling the managersbut, on improving decision
making. The objective is to minimize chances of mistakes; and, even if they
occur, to mutually work out effective ways to rectify the mistake rather than fire
the management. The result is a positive change in the way companies discuss,
decide and review policy.
Major differences in approach between the managed corporation and the
governed corporation in terms of boards role, characteristics and policies are
shown in Table 4.3. To create the governed corporation, companies should start
rethinking about the role of directors, and, also, of shareholders. Both the
directors and shareholders should be proactive, and, not reactive in the policymaking process. Managers will continue to play their roles. This means that
there are three critical constituents of the governed corporation: the board or
directors, the managers and shareholders. Directors should guide managers to
take best possible decisions; major shareholders should be able to communicate
directly with the senior managers/CEO and, also the directors about what they
think of corporate policies and decisions. With shareholders and board/ directors
participating in policy and decision making, and, the managers already involved,
the corporation is governed rather than managed because all the three critical
constituents (managers, directors and shareholders) have a voice in the
governance of the company.13

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 92

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Table 4.3 The Managed Corporation vs the Governed Corporation: Boards


Role, Characteristics and Policies
The Managed Corporation
Boards Role
Boards role is to hire, monitor and, when
necessary, change failed management.
Board Characteristics
Power sufficient to control the CEO and
the performance-evaluation process.
Independence to ensure that the CEO is
impartially evaluated and that directors are
not compromised or co-opted by
management.
Board methods and procedures to allow
outside directors to evaluate managers
independently and effectively.
Policies
Separate the CEO and chairman (or lead
outside director).
Board meeting may take place without
CEO being present.
Committee of independent directors to
evaluate the CEO.
Independent financial and legal advisors
available to outside directors.
Measurable norms or yardsticks for
judging CEOs performance.

The Governed Corporation


Boards Role
Boards role is to foster effective decisions
and monitor and reverse failed policies.
Board Characteristics
Expertise sufficient to allow the board to
add value to the decision-making process
and performance.
Incentives to ensure that the board is
committed to create organizational value.

Methods and procedures to foster open


debate and keep the board apprised of
shareholders concerns.
Policies
Vital areas of expertise must be
represented on the board such as core
industry and finance.
Minimum time commitment by the board
members (may be two days in a month).
Designated committee to evaluate new
policy proposals.
Regular meetings shareholders with large
shareholders.
Board members free to ask for
information from any employee.

Source: Adapted from J Pound, The Promise of the Governed Corporation, Harvard
Business Review (MarchApril, 1995)

Pound has suggested five major changes in the managed corporation for it
to evolve into a governed corporation. First, board members should be experts,
i.e., well versed with the companyits products, structure, functioning, policies
and practicesthe industry and environmental influences and governmental
regulations; second, board meetings should focus on discussions on new policies,
decisions and strategies, and not just on reviews of past performance; third,
directors should have better access to information on products, customers,
competitors, market conditions and critical strategic and organizational issues;
fourth, directors should devote a significant proportion of their professional time

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 93

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

to the company or the corporation to have more meaningful and effective


involvement in decision making; fifth, board members should have proper incentive
to develop and show the right commitment to the company. Directors cannot be
expected to take serious interest in formulation and implementation of company
policies and strategies unless they are sufficiently compensated for it.
The transition from the managed corporation to the governed corporation
may be slow. Such change may take years, particularly in companies which are
governed by individuals (managers, CEOs and directors) who have been
subscribing to the managed philosophy for decades. But, changes are taking
place. Many companies are moving in the right direction. Companies like General
Motors, IBM, Compaq Computer and Westinghouse have already taken steps
to become governed corporations.14

Self-Assessment Questions
19. In the governed corporation, the focus is not on powernot monitoring or
controlling the managersbut, on ___________.
20. _________ has suggested five major changes in the managed corporation
for it to evolve into a governed corporation.

4.11 Corporate Strategy and Corporate Governance:


Need for more Integrative Relationship
The analysis so far has focused on different aspects or characteristics of corporate
strategy and corporate governance, the way they are differentiated and, also,
areas of complementarities and some possible conflicts between the two.
The starting point of both are the same, i.e., achievement of organizational
objectives. But, it is also here that some difference begins between the two and
also is the source of some possible conflict. The most important objective of
corporate governance is to protect the interests of the stockholders whose
primary concern is maximization of return on investment or short-term profitability.
The objective of corporate strategy is more to focus on long-term growth and
profitability, which gives sustenance to the company. This, however, is a common
organizational conflict in many companies, i.e., matching or balancing the shortterm and long-term goals of the organization.
Balancing the stockholder interests and stakeholder expectations is another
issue. This also relates to strategygovernance relationship. Stakeholders include,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 94

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

in addition to stockholders, a number of other interest groupsboth internal and


external. Employees/managers are important internal stakeholders; creditors and
customers are vital external stakeholders, who strongly influence the course or
direction of a company. To serve the interests of all major stakeholders, good
corporate governance is not enough; effective corporate strategy is required in
important functional areas of manufacturing, finance and marketing to deal with
competition, market and business development.
In corporate governance, there is a growing emphasis on inclusiveness
or inclusive governance, i.e., focusing on the society, community and
environmental development. The strategic management processes of companies
are also trying to find ways to strike a balance between corporate social
responsibility (CSR) and profitability (discussed in Unit 4), realizing that, ideally,
both should coexist for optimal/proper organizational growth. This is one area
where both corporate strategy and governance are showing a common focus.
Companies like Bajaj Auto, Tata Motors and Nirma are good examples.
This is possible if the board and the CEO work in close unison. In fact,
this implies another vital aspect of strategygovernance balancing, i.e., board
CEO relationship. The board represents the owners; the CEO represents the
management. Therefore, there can be a conflict or, at least, sensitivity between
the two. But, in many companies, managers (CEO) and directors (board) realize/
agree that the board should only be a watchdog without undermining the
managements ability to run the business. The board should also decide how to
distance itself from the CEO in the course of normal management of business
and, at the same time, maintain a positive and constructive relationship. This
means striking a balance between management, the strategy and the
governance of a company.
This can be illustrated by the boardCEO relationship in General Motors.
This relationship is based on certain guidelines jointly evolved and not issued
by the board. The boards basic responsibility is to ensure that the company is
managed properly, in order to sustain the business and also serve the interest
of the owners. In other words, it acts as a monitor of management. The CEO
gives annually a management development report to the board. The
management realizes that a strong board (highly experienced professionals/
experts) can be a source of strength to the management and, also helpful in
building and sustaining competitive advantage of the company.
All this implies that, for effectiveness and success, the managed
corporation and the governed corporation should be as closely aligned as
possible. In other words, a company should be as much a managed company
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 95

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

as a governed company. This is the optimal way to serve both the stockholders
and the interest of the larger group of stakeholders.

Self-Assessment Questions
21. The starting point of both corporate strategy and governance are the
same, i.e., achievement of organizational objectives. (True/False)
22. In corporate governance, there is a growing emphasis on inclusiveness
or inclusive governance, i.e., focusing on the society, community and
environmental development. (True/False)

4.12 Case Study


Gray Line Corporation: Role of Ethics in Governance*
Corporate values and ethics are in a state of flux today, in India as well as
globally, which is illustrated by this case of Gray Line Corporation:
When S. Khopekar, the regional manager, had joined Gray Line Corporation
as the purchase manager, he had gone through the discipline and conduct
guidelines of the companys purchase department. A clause against
acceptance of gifts by staff of the purchase department had attracted his
attention. The clause read as follows:
Purchase department employees shall not accept gifts from vendors. This
is to ensure that no vendor is given any special treatment and employees
work only in the best interest of the firm at all times. Any deviation from the
above will be dealt with severely and can mean dismissal from the firm.
Khopekar made a note of this.
Months passed by and the New Year, a time for gifts, was approaching. The
rule in Gray Line was that no gift worth more than `50 should be accepted by
any employeepresumably an old rule that had not been revised.
One day, one of the vendors brought three wall clocksone for the
Managing Director (MD), one for the Vice-president (VP) procurement, and
one for Khopekar. The vendor, who had a long association with Gray Line,
was aware of the companys rule. He explained that the cost of the clocks
was `50 each, and therefore, there should be no problem in accepting
them as gifts. Khopekar found it very hard to believe that the clocks would
cost only `50 each. He decided to take the matter to the MD. The MD had

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 96

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

a look at the clock and asked his secretary to hang it on the wall in his
office. He asked Khopekar to distribute the other two as desired by the
vendor. He also mentioned that the clocks could cost `50 each if bought in
bulk. As per the MDs instruction, Khopekar sent one to the VP and took
one home and put it up in his living room.
Khopekar later accepted many gifts in Gray Line which were of different
values, but always presented as costing not more than `50. Gradually, he
also stopped feeling uneasy or bad about receiving the gifts. In fact, he was
getting used to it and, also started looking forward to the New Year. He,
however, knew very well that none of the gifts were worth less than `2000.
The next new year, Natarajan, executive secretary to the MD, came to
Khopekar. He wanted to know if gifts had started coming.

Natarajan clarified that it had been the practice with the earlier purchase
managers also to accept gifts from vendors and distribute them among
important officials of the company. He cautioned against discussing the
gifts with the MD, who would be annoyed and take action against him.
Khopekar thought about integrity and ethics, but a bigger test was waiting
for him.
Within few days, a vendor came with six baskets, each with bottles of Scotch
whisky, return air tickets for two to any destination in India and three-night
stay at a five-star hotel. The total value of each of the gift baskets was not
less than `1 lakh. The MDs secretary told Khopekar that such gifts were
not unusual. Khopekar was faced with a dilemma: to get reconciled to such
practices or look for a change? It is not an easy decision to make for any
manager in todays volatile business environment.
* Based on U C Mathur, Case study 24, (Textbook of Strategic Management)
(New Delhi: Macmillan India, 2005), 337. Names have been changed because of
the sensitive nature of the subject.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 97

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

4.13 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Corporate strategy and corporate governance are the two important tools
of functioning of any company. Corporate governance has more to do
with ownership of a company; corporate strategy has more to do with
management of a company. They are generally complementary to each
other, but, there can be conflicts between the two.
In companies, simultaneous focus on good corporate governance and
effective corporate strategies is important, as only this can lead to
simultaneous achievement of organizational objectives like profitability,
growth and diversification and stakeholder expectations like high return
on their capital, transparency, employee motivation and customer
satisfaction.
To resolve the conflicts between corporate strategy and corporate
governance, empowerment of the board may be a useful tool. The board,
by virtue of its position, is the single entity which can influence both
corporate strategy and corporate governance and try to strike a balance
between their conflicting demands.
Pound has distinguished between the managed corporation and the
governed corporation. The managed corporation is more like the traditional
model of a company or corporation. This is the model of governance
where the focus is on the power equations between management and
control, boardCEO relationship or strategy and governance conflict.

4.14 Glossary
Best practice: A technique or methodology that, through experience and
research, has been proven to reliably lead to a desired result.
Corporate governance: The framework of rules and practices by which
a board of directors ensures accountability, fairness, and transparency in
a company's relationship with its all stakeholders.
Corporate strategy: The overall scope and direction of a corporation
and the way in which its various business operations work together to
achieve particular goals

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 98

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

Inclusive governance: Governance that focuses on the society,


community and environmental development
Strategic analysis: Considers how an organization attempts to best
combine its own capabilities with the opportunities in the marketplace in
seeking to accomplish its overall objectives.
Strategic audit: A new tool for systematic review of strategy by board
members without directly involving themselves with management of
companies.
Strategic governance: The technique by which companies are directed
and managed. It means carrying the business as per the stakeholders
desires.

4.15 Terminal Questions


1. What is corporate governance? Explain the difference between corporate
strategy and corporate governance.
2. Discuss the growing importance of corporate governance.
3. Explain the complementarities and conflicts between corporate strategy
and corporate governance.
4. What is strategic audit? Explain its relevance to corporate strategy and
corporate governance.
5. What is a managed corporation? Illustrate the main features of a managed
corporation.
6. Define a governed corporation. Distinguish between the managed
corporation and the governed corporation in terms of boards role, major
characteristics and policies of a company.

4.16 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Corporate governance
2. Shareholders
3. False
4. True
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 99

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

5. board of directors
6. corporate governance
7. Complementary
8. reporting system
9. governance
10. Strategic, governance
11. Cadbury Committee
12. (b)
13. strategic audit
14. return on investment (ROI)
15. False
16. True
17. False
18. True
19. improving decision making
20. Pound
21. True
22. True

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Corporate governance is concerned with serving the interest of the owners
(stockholders) and, is much broader in perspective than corporate
management. Refer to Section 4.3 for further details.
2. A strong demand for evolving a good corporate governance system is
emerging from the corporate sector itself. Refer to Section 4.4 for further
details.
3. As stakeholders expectations not only warrant good corporate
governance, but also effective corporate strategies, simultaneous focus
on both is important. Refer to Section 4.6 for further details.
4. Donaldson (1995) has suggested strategic audit as a new tool for
systematic review of strategy by board members without directly involving

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 100

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

themselves with management of companies. Refer to Section 4.7 for


further details.
5. The managed corporation is more like the traditional model of a company
or corporation. Refer to Section 4.9 for further details.
6. There are major differences in approach between the managed corporation
and the governed corporation in terms of boards role, characteristics
and policies. Refer to Section 4.10 for further details.

4.17 References
1. Donaldson, G. A New Tool for Boards; Strategic Audit. Harvard Business
Review, JulyAugust, 1995.
2. Harvard Business Review on Corporate Governance, 2000. Boston:
Harvard Business School Press.
3. Johnson, G and K Scholes. 2005. Exploring Corporate Strategy. 6th edn.
Pearson Education.
4. Kumar, S. 2000. Corporate Governance: A Question of Ethics. New Delhi:
Galgotia Publishing Co.
5. Lorsch, J W. Empowering the Board. Harvard Business Review, January
February, 1995.
6. Mathur, U C. 2005. Corporate Governance and Business Ethics: Text
and Cases. New Delhi: Macmillan India.
7. Pound, J. The Promise of the Governed Corporation, Harvard Business
Review, MarchApril, 1995.
Endnotes
1

Definition given by the Advisory Board of the National Association of Corporate Directors
(NACD) New Delhi, reproduced in S Kumar, Corporate Governance (2000), 3

Definition given by Chandratre reproduced in S Kumar, Corporate Governance (2000), 4.

Reproduced in U C Mathur, Corporate Governance and Business Ethics: Text and Cases
(New Delhi: Macmillan India, 2005), 4.

J H, Dobrzynski, M Schroeder, G L Miles, and J Weber, Taking Charge, Business Week


3113 , (1989): 66.

A F Alkhafaji, Strategic Management (2003), 27.

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 4 th ed. (New Delhi: Prentice
Hall of India, 1999), 195.

U C Mathur, Corporate Governance and Business Ethics: Text and Cases (2005),
6163.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 101

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 4

G Donaldson, A New Tool for Boards: Strategic Audit, Harvard Business Review (July
August, 1995).

Harvard Business Review on Corporate Governance (Harvard Business School Press,


2000), 188.

10

Ibid .

11

Ibid.

12

J Pound, The Promise of the Governed Corporation, Harvard Business Review (March
April, 1995).

13

J Pound, The Promise of the Governed Corporation , Harvard Business Review (March
April,1995).

14

J Pound, The Promise of the Governed Corporation, Harvard Business Review (March
April, 1995).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 102

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Unit 5

Corporate Mission, Objectives


and Responsibility

Structure
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Caselet
Objectives
5.3 Definition of Business
5.4 Mission Statement
5.5 Corporate Philosophy
5.6 Corporate Objectives and Goals
5.7 Strategic Intent
5.8 Company Responsibility
5.9 Corporate Social Responsibility
5.10 Social Audit
5.11 Case Study
5.12 Summary
5.13 Glossary
5.14 Terminal Questions
5.15 Answers
5.16 References

5.1 Introduction
For formulation of corporate strategy, an organization needs to consider three
major things: first, the corporate mission and objectives; second, its internal
competence; and third, the external environment. We shall discuss corporate
mission and objectives in this unit. Internal competence and resources and the
environmental factors will be analysed in the next two units.
The starting point for the formulation of any strategy is the mission
statement of a company.
The mission statement actually starts with a definition of business of the
company. Related to mission is vision. Also related to mission statement or
development is corporate philosophy. From mission statement and corporate
philosophy follow corporate objectives, goals and also strategic intent. In
developing its mission and objectives, a company has certain responsibility to
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 103

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

its stakeholders and the society. This is expressed in stakeholders approach to


company responsibility and corporate social responsibility. Corporate social
responsibility also implies social audit. We will discuss all these in this unit.

5.2 Caselet
No corporation functions without a strategy; and the starting point for the
formulation of any strategy is the mission statement of a company. Microsoft
Corporation, an American multinational corporation, is no exception. The
largest and most well known software corporation in the world, it is best
known for its extremely popular Windows operating system and Microsoft
Office software. The company has a mission statement:
At Microsoft, we work to help people and businesses throughout the
world realize their full potential. This is our mission. Everything we do
reflects this mission and the values that make it possible.

The mission continues to guide Microsoft.

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Define what is business
Explain the terms corporate mission and corporate vision
Define what is corporate philosophy
Discuss the corporate objectives and goals of a company
Explain strategic intent and company responsibility
Explain the concept of corporate social responsibility
Discuss social audit as a tool to measure companies social performance

5.3 Definition of Business


It may appear very simple or obvious as to what a companys business is. A
steel mill makes steel; an engineering company makes engineering products;
an electronic manufacturer makes electronic goods; a courier company delivers
letters and parcels; a bank lends money, etc. But, it may not be as simple as
this. In fact, defining the business of a company precisely is a difficult job. Let
us explain this. A textile manufacturer makes textiles goods; but, this may mean
suitings, shirtings, sarees or inner garments; it may be cotton textiles, silk or
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 104

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

synthetics; it may be high-priced or premium product, medium-priced or average


product or low-priced or discount product.
To define a companys business with precision is the job or responsibility
of the planners and strategists. Precise or correct definition of business of a
company is the foundation for mission statement, objectives, priorities, plans,
strategies and work and resource allocations; and, therefore, along with the top
management, the strategists have an important role to play in this.
Many companies and managers are not clear about the exact nature of
their business, nor are they always aware of the significance of this. Precise
definition of the business of a company should be based on four major factors
or considerations: i. product, ii. technology, iii. customer segment and iv. market
competitiveness (Figure 5.1).
Product

Technology

Business
definition

Market
competitivenes

Customer
segment

Figure 5.1 Business Definition of an Organization

Management thinkers like Peter Drucker feel that business definition


should strongly focus on the customer. According to Drucker, in defining the
business, the following questions about the customer should be asked1:
Who is the customer?
o Where is the customer located?
o How does the customer buy?
o How can the customer be reached?
What does the customer buy?
What does the customer consider value?
In addition to focussing on customer behaviour, answers to these questions
also indicate the nature and quality of the product, production process or

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 105

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

technology and market environment or competitiveness. We can also see how


companies define their businesses. Business definitions of Hindustan Unilever,
Hero Honda, Kodak India and Hero Cycles are given in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Business Definitions of Hindustan Unilever, Hero Honda,
Kodak India and Hero Cycles
Company

Business definition

Hindustan Unilever To meet everyday needs of Indian people everywhere with


branded products
Hero Honda

World class auto products which provide the highest level of


customer satisfaction

Kodak India

A high quality photographic system for the customer who


desires instant photography

Hero Cycles

Functionally valuable bicycle which common people can afford


to buy

The above business definitions show that some generality in definition


remains. To remove the generality or make business definition more meaningful,
this should be read with mission statement and corporate objectives or goals.
These together give definiteness to the business of a company.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. To define a companys business with precision is the job or responsibility
of the _________and _________.
2. Management thinkers like Peter Drucker feel that business definition
should strongly focus on the__________.

5.4 Mission Statement


A business is not defined by its name, statutes or articles of incorporation.
It is defined by the business mission. Only a clear definition of the mission
and the purpose of the organization makes possible clear and realistic
business objectives.
Peter Drucker
But ... business mission is so rarely given adequate thought is perhaps the
most important single cause of business frustration.
Peter Drucker
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 106

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

This emphasizes the need for organizations to take their mission statement
seriously and formulate it properly. What is a mission statement? Or, what is a
company mission? The mission statement of a company is variously called a
statement of philosophy, a statement of beliefs, a statement of purpose and, a
statement of business principles. A mission statement is many in one. It embodies
the business philosophy of a companys decision makers, implies the image
the company wishes to project for itself, reflects the companys self-concept;
indicates the companys principal product or service areas and, the customer
needs the company seeks to satisfy. In short, it describes the companys product,
market and technological focus; and it does so in a way that reflects the values
and priorities of the companys strategic decision makers.2
The mission statement should be as explicit or comprehensive as possible.
Some feel that the mission statement should have seven dimensions or serve
seven different purposes or objectives.
These are:
To ensure unanimity of purposes within the organization
To develop a basis or standard for allocating organizational resources
To provide a basis for motivating the use of the organizations resources
To establish a general culture or organizational climate; for example, to
suggest a business-like approach
To facilitate the translation of objectives and goals into jobs and
responsibilities and assignment of tasks to responsible segments within
the organization
To serve as a focal point for those who can identify themselves with the
organizations purpose and business
To specify organizational purposes and inspire translation of these
purposes into goals in such a way that cost, time and performance
parameters can be assessed and controlled.3

5.4.1 Mission and Vision


Sometimes, mission and vision of a company are used synonymously or
interchangeably. This is not correct. A clear distinction exists between the two.
Mission is concerned more with the present; the vision more with the future.
The mission statement answers the question: What is our business? The vision
statement answers the question: What do we want to become or, which way
should we be going? The mission statement focusses on the present strategic
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 107

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

thrust, while the vision statement outlines the strategic path. All visionary
companies have a vision statement. The vision of Microsoft (since 1999) has
been to broadbase its outlook to empower people through great software
anytime, anywhere and on any device including the PC and an incredibly rich
variety of digital devices accessing the power of the Internet.
Most progressive companies develop both a mission statement and a
vision statement. Indian Oil Corporation (IOC) is a good example. Vision and
mission statements of IOC4 are:
Vision: Indian Oil aims to achieve international standards of excellence
in all aspects of energy and diversified business with focus on customer
delight through quality products and services.
Mission: Maintaining national leadership in oil refining, marketing and
pipeline transportation.
Vision and mission statements can be generally found in the beginning of
annual reports of companies. These statements are also seen in the corporate
or long-term strategic plans of companies. These also appear in many company
reports or documents like customer service agreements, loan requests, labour
relations contracts, etc. Many companies also display them at prominent points
or locations in company premises.

5.4.2 Mission Statements of Some Companies


Mission statements of individual companies vary widely. We give below, as
examples, mission statements of two Indian companiesTata Steel and Hero
Honda Motorsand, two US companiesPepsico and Dell computer. All these
companies are in different kinds of business.
Tata Iron and Steel Company (TISCO)
The fundamental mission of TISCO (Tata Iron and Steel Company Limited; now
Tata Steel) is to strengthen Indias industrial base through increased productivity,
effective utilization of manpower and material resources, and continued
application of modern scientific managerial methods as well as through
systematic growth in keeping with the national aspirations. The company
recognizes that while honesty and integrity are the essential ingredients of a
strong and stable enterprise, profitability provides the main spark for economic
activity. It affirms its faith in democratic values and in the importance of success
of individuals, collective and corporate enterprise for the emancipation and
prosperity of the country. Guided by its basic philosophy, the company believes

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 108

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

in discharging its responsibility towards shareholders, employees, customers


and the community.
Hero Honda Motors
It is our mission to strive for synergy between technology, systems and human
resources to produce products and services that meet the quality, performance
and price aspirations of our customers. While doing so, we maintain the highest
standards of ethics and societal responsibilities. This mission is what drives us
to new heights in excellence and helps us to forge a unique and mutually
beneficial relationship with all our stakeholders. We are committed to moving
ahead resolutely on this path.
Pepsico
Pepsicos mission is to increase the value of our shareholders investment. We
do this through sales growth, cost controls and wise investment resources. We
believe our commercial success depends upon offering quality and value to our
consumers and customers; providing products that are safe, wholesome,
economically efficient and environmentally sound and, providing a fair return to
our investors while adhering to the highest standards of integrity.
Dell Computer
Dell Computers mission is to be the most successful computer company in the
world at delivering the best customer experience in markets we serve. In doing
so, Dell will meet customer expectations of the highest quality with leading
technology, competitive pricing, individual and company accountability, best-inclass service and support, flexible customization capability, superior corporate
citizenship and financial stability.
Some companies combine their mission statements with statements of
values and guiding principles of the organization. Ford Motor Company is an
excellent example of this. Fords mission statement combined with statements
of values and guiding principles is presented in Box 5.1.

Box 5.1: Fords Mission, Values and Guiding Principles


Mission
Ford Motor Company is a worldwide leader in automotive and automotiverelated products and services as well as in newer industries such as
aerospace, communications and financial services. Our mission is to
improve continually our products and services to meet our customers needs,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 109

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

allowing us to prosper as a business and to provide a reasonable return for


our stockholders, the owners of our business.
Values
How we accomplish our mission is as important as the mission itself.
Fundamental to success for the Company are these basic values:
PeopleOur people are the source of our strength. They provide us
corporate intelligence and determine our reputation and vitality. Involvement
and teamwork are our core human values.
ProductsOur products are the end result of our efforts, and they should
be the best in serving customers worldwide. As our products are viewed,
so are we viewed.
ProfitsProfits are the ultimate measure of how efficiently we provide
customers with the best products for their needs. Profits are required to
survive and grow.
Guiding Principles
Quality comes firstTo achieve customer satisfaction, the quality of our
products and services must be our number one priority.
Customers are the focus of everything we doOur work must be done
with our customers in mind, providing better products and services than
our competition.
Continuous improvement is essential to our successWe must strive
for excellence in everything we doin our products, in their safety and
value and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness and
our profitability.
Employee involvement is our way of lifeWe are a team. We must
treat each other with trust and respect.
Dealers and suppliers are our partnersThe Company must maintain
mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers and our other
business associates.
Integrity is never compromisedThe conduct of our Company worldwide
must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands
respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society. Our doors
are open to men and women alike without discrimination and without regard
to ethnic origin or personal beliefs.
Source: Ford Motor Company

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 110

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Activity 1
Conduct a comparitive analysis of the mission and vision statements of
any three companies of your choice.

Self-Assessment Questions
3. The ________of a company is variously called a statement of philosophy,
a statement of beliefs, a statement of purpose and, a statement of business
principles.
4. Mission is concerned more with the ________; the vision more with
the__________.

5.5 Corporate Philosophy


Corporate or company philosophy is sometimes called company creed, and the
statement of corporate philosophy is called the creed statement. Normally, the
corporate philosophy statement accompanies or appears as part of the mission
statement. It envisages the basic beliefs, values, aspirations and philosophical
priorities of a company which the management or strategic decision makers
are committed to. The mission statement should reflect the corporate philosophy
of an organization as clearly demonstrated in the mission statements of
companies like Ford.
Generally, corporate philosophies should not vary widely from one company
to another. But, in practice, corporate philosophy statements of some companies
may appear quite different or contrasting in terms of the guiding values or principles.
ITC, the Indian multinational and Nissan Motor Manufacturing (UK) are two such
examples. Corporate philosophy of ITC highlights concerns for various
stakeholders whereas Nissan UKs philosophy focuses on two basic principles:
people principles and key corporate principles. Statements of corporate
philosophies of both the companies are given in Box 5.2.

Box 5.2: Corporate Philosophies of ITC and Nissan Motor (UK)


Corporate Philosophy of ITC
1. Concern for their ultimate customersmillions of customers.
2. Concern for their intermediate customersthe trade.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 111

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

3. Concern for their suppliersthe source of raw materials and ancillaries.


4. Concern for their employeestheir most valued assets.
5. Concern for their competitors whom they wish wellfor healthy
competition ultimately benefits the customers.
6. Concern for the national aspirationIndias future.
Corporate Philosophy of Nissan Motor (UK)
People Principles
(All other objectives can only be achieved by people)
Selection: Hire the highest calibre people; look for technical capabilities
and emphasize attitude.
Responsibility: Maximize the responsibility; staff by devolving decision
making.
Teamwork: Recognize and encourage individual contributions with
everyone working towards the same objectives.
Flexibility: Expand the role of the individual: multiskilled, no job description,
generic job titles.
Kaizen: Continuously seek 100.1 per cent improvements; give ownership
of change.
Communications: Every day, face to face.
Training: Establish individual continuous development programmes.
Supervisors: Regard as the professionals at managing the production
process; give them much responsibility normally assumed by individual
departments; make them the genuine leaders of their teams.
Single status: Treat everyone as a first class citizen; eliminate all illogical
differences.
Trade unionism: Establish single union agreement with AEU emphasizing
the common objective for a successful enterprise.
Key Corporate Principles
Quality: Building profitably the highest quality car sold in Europe.
Customers: Achieve target of No. 1 customer satisfaction in Europe.
Volume: Always achieve required volume.
New Products: Deliver on time, at required quality, within cost.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 112

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Suppliers: Establish long-term relationships with single-source suppliers;


aim for zero defects and just-in-time delivery; apply Nissan principles to
suppliers.
Production: Use most appropriate technology; develop predictable best
method of doing job; build in quality.
Engineering: Design quality and ease of working into the product and
facilities; establish simultaneous engineering to reduce development time.
Source: ITC Limited and Business Horizons, January-February, 1995, 51

Self-Assessment Questions
5. Corporate or company philosophy is sometimes called company creed.
(True/False)
6. Generally, the corporate philosophy statements of most companies appear
quite similar. (True/False)

5.6 Corporate Objectives and Goals


The mission statement of an organization is more generalized; corporate
objectives are more focused and specific and generally have a clear time frame
or period during which objectives should be fulfilled. Mission statements are
qualitative; objectives are usually quantitative. Most of the objectives should be
measurable in terms of results or achievements. But, the link between the mission
statement and objectives should be quite intimate; objectives should follow from
the mission statement or, be fully consistent with it.
Corporate objectives and goals are similar, but, a distinction is generally
made between the two. There is also difference of opinion among strategy
analysts about what should be the correct distinction, or, rather, relationship,
between the two. Ackoff has defined or distinguished the two as follows:
Desired states or outcomes are objectives. Goals are objectives that
are scheduled for attainment during planned period.5

One need not make too much of a distinction between the two, which
may become only a theoretical exercise without much of practical relevance. It
is evident that objectives and goals have overlapping connotations. We will
generally use the two terms synonymously with the only stipulation or rider that
goals may be of longer term than objectives. Objectives can sometimes be
purely short term.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 113

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

All businesses or companies have at least two common objectives: first,


to make profit and, second, to offer to the owners reasonable rate of return on
their capital. Most of the other objectives of a company either follow from or are
related to these two basic objectives. These objectives may sometimes be
tempered by some social or welfare factors or considerations, which may be
included as additional input(s) in the objective statement.
Details of objectives, however, including even profit objectives, can be
different from one company to another. For example, some companies may
seek short-term profit maximization or maximization of immediate financial
returns; some other companies may decide to sacrifice short-term profit in the
interest of long-term profitability. Some others may choose to have low profit on
a sustained basis for competitive survival.
Various company objectives can be broadly classified into three types or
categories: strategic, tactical or operational. Strategic objectives are generally
long term; tactical objectives are similar to strategic objectives, but, less strategic
in nature; operational strategies are purely short term or operational as the
name indicates. Examples of these three types of objectives are given below.
Strategic Objectives
Achieving a predetermined overall rate of return on capital employed
Becoming a market leader in a particular product/market group
Increasing shareholders earnings per share as far as possible
Reducing companys dependence on borrowed capital
Improving employee relations (particular focus on industrial relations)
Tactical Objectives
Increasing market share in some market segments
Opening a subsidiary in a particular country within a specific period
Extending the companys range of products or brands
Introducing a new technology or a new manufacturing process
Revising the organizational structure of one of the companys divisions or
SBUs
Operational Objectives
Improving plant utilization
Undertaking cost-cutting programmes
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 114

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Increasing sales during the next quarter


Managing cash inflows/outflows
Improving credit control or plant utilization measures6
Another way to distinguish among objectives is in terms of corporate
objectives and unit objectives, because these indicate different levels of
objectives with different characteristics. Corporate objectives, more correctly
called corporate-level objectives, relate to the entire organization and are primarily
expressed in financial termsprofitability, rates of growth of sales or turnover,
dividend rates, share valuations, etc. Corporate-level objectives can also be of
non-financial nature such as technology improvement or innovation, productmarket diversifications, objectives relating to stakeholders like customers,
suppliers, employees or the community. But, many of these objectives also
generally have a financial connotation.
Unit objectives or unit-level objectives relate to individual units or SBUs
and, not the entire organization. Unit-level objectives can be financial as well as
non-financial, but, they always pertain to the individual units. Most of the unitlevel objectives generally follow from the corporate-level objectives. For example,
an SBU may have a profit objective, but, this will be a translation of the corporate
profit objective into the business unit-level objective. Many unit-level objectives
are of an operational nature; and, because operations are many, multiple
objectives are more common at the unit level than at the corporate level.

5.6.1 Organizational Life Cycle, Objectives and Strategy


Glueck and Jauch (1984) have mentioned about organizational life cycles and
the linkages between life cycles, objectives and strategic focus of organizations.
They have distinguished seven stages in organizational life cycle: birth, infancy,
youth, youth adult, adult, maturity and old age. At each stage of the life cycle,
there is a thrust on a particular objective, which is most important at that stage
of the life cycle. Depending on the objective at each stage, the strategic focus
of the organization will vary.
Organizational life cycles vary from industry to industry and from company
to company. Generally, high technology industries and companies will have
shorter life cycles than low technology or labour-intensive industries and
companies. Most of the industrial products and consumer durables, particularly
consumer electronics, fall in the first category; consumer non-durables,
particularly FMCGs, fall in the second category.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 115

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

But, it is a fundamental fact that every organization passes through a life


cycle. And, during different stages of the life cycle, the predominant objectives
will be different and, so also organizational strategies or strategic focus. The
way to prolong the life cycle is to adopt newer technologies or to innovate. This
is what steel and engineering companies do. Tata Steel is a good example.

Self-Assessment Questions
7. Corporate objectives are more focused and specific compared to
the_____.
8. Birth, infancy, youth, youth adult, adult, maturity and old age are part of
the ______.

5.7 Strategic Intent


From corporate objective, we now move on to strategic intent. If a particular
objective of a company becomes extremely focused and directed towards a
specific target, the company is showing a strategic intent. To be a strategic
intent, the objective has to be both ambitious and aggressive.
The phase strategic intent was coined by Hamel and Prahalad (1989).
According to Hamel and Prahalad, strategic intent goes beyond the conventional
model of matching internal competence and resources with company objectives
or targets. Strategic intent indicates a stretch; it involves setting goals or targets
which demand stretching of the present resource base and capabilities for their
fulfilment.
Strategic intent may often mean challenging or overtaking the market
leader. Some of the examples are: Toyota vs General Motors; British Airways vs
Pan Am; Sony vs RCA; Komatsu vs Caterpillar and Titan vs HMT. Komatsus
strategic intent in challenging Caterpillar is analysed in Box 5.3.

Box 5.3: Komatsus Strategic Intent to Challenge Caterpillar


Komatsus strategic intent to challenge Caterpillar embodies the companys
changing mission, goal and objective. Today, Komatsu is the second largest
producer of earth-moving equipment in the world next only to its arch-rival
Caterpillar of US. The company has progressed to this position over a long

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 116

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

period of timea period characterized by clear strategic intent, goal


redefinition and evolving objective.
In the 1950s, Komatsu was producing a limited range of low-quality products
and, with a protected home market, had little or no incentive to improve.
This position changed almost dramatically when Japan opened its market
to foreign competition in the early 1960s. In 1964, Kawai succeeded his
father as the chairman of Komatsu and announced the goal of Maru C: to
encircle Caterpillar. This statement of strategic intentto concentrate all
its efforts on surpassing Caterpillarwas to be the driving force behind the
companys goal for more than two decades.
Komatsu focussed initially on the objective of improving product quality to
stop loss of sales in its home market. The company then signed licensing
agreements with Caterpillars competitors to gain access to the latest
American technology. This move enabled the company to expand its product
range which made it more attractive to dealer networksvital for Komatsu
to build up sales volume. The next step towards its goal was to enter
secondary export markets such as China and eastern Europe which helped
to build the critical mass required to challenge Caterpillar in the main markets
of Europe and the US. By the 1980s, Komatsu was very successful: its
growth from a regional producer of low-quality products to the second largest
producer was impressive, and this was primarily attributed to its goal of
challenging and encircling Caterpillar.
But, the goal and strategy which had served the company so well for over
two decades were beginning to be challenged by the changing business
environment. Komatsus sales began to fall as demand for heavy earthmoving equipment decreased and competition intensified. But, Komatsu
was less focussed on its market needs and continued to concentrate on
outdoing Caterpillar. This strategy was beginning to be questioned, but,
not the strategic intent of the company.
As a response to environmental changes, Katada, Komatsus third president,
changed the companys emphasis from providing construction equipment
to being a total technology enterprise, and the new goal of Growth, Global,
Groupwide was adopted. In three years since the new goal was introduced,
Komatsu has reversed its sales decline and registered a 40 per cent growth
in its non-construction equipment business.
Komatsus strategic intent of Maru C continues.
Source: Adapted from G Johnson and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy
(Prentice Hall of India, 1999), 245.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 117

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Strategic intent of a company is clear about the end or the target, but, it is
flexible with regard to the means and leaves room for creativity and improvization.
Pursuit of a strategic intent may initially create a misfit between targets or
ambitions and resources. This becomes a challenge to the top management of
a company. The management strives to bridge the gap by relentlessly building
new capabilities or strategic advantages. The essence of the strategy here lies
in creating competitive advantage faster than the target competitor or the leader.

Self-Assessment Questions
9. The phase ________indicates a stretch; it involves setting goals or targets
which demand stretching of the present resource base and capabilities
for their fulfilment.
10. The phase strategic intent was coined by ________and _________.
11. If a particular objective of a company becomes extremely focused and
directed towards a specific target, the company is showing a strategic
intent. (True/False)
12. Strategic intent does not mean challenging or overtaking the market leader.
(True/False)

5.8 Company Responsibility


In developing mission statements, corporate objectives and goals and, business
strategies, organizations must constantly remind themselves about certain
responsibilities. These responsibilities are towards various stakeholders and
the society at large.
If companies have to balance various stakeholder expectations, many
times, they may have to sacrifice short-term profit. Sometimes, profit objective
may lead to the neglect of corporate governance and responsibilities. Examples
are: Exxons oil leak in Alaska ; defective tyres of Firestone; Ford recalling many
of their trucks; Union Carbide gas leak in India (Bhopal gas tragedy), etc.
Companies, therefore, need to carefully examine the economic and social
impacts of their missions, objectives and strategies.

5.8.1 Stakeholder Approach to Company Responsibility


We had defined stakeholders in the previous unit. But, many authors and
practitioners of strategic management define stakeholders in a very broad sense.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 118

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

In the broadest sense, a stakeholder of a company is anybody or any organization


who/which has something to do with the company. In this sense, stakeholders
will include competitors, the government and the general public in addition to
those mentioned in Unit 4. All these stakeholders have their expectations from
the company and their own notions about company responsibility towards them.
An illustrative statement of stakeholders view of company responsibility in terms
of stakeholders claims is presented in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 Stakeholders view of Company Responsibility
Stakeholder

Expectations/Claims

Stockholders

Sharing of profits; additional stock offerings; assets on liquidation;


inspection of company books; transfer of stock; election of board of
directors; and applicable additional rights.
Creditors
Interest payments as due and return of principal amount; security of
pledged assets; relative priority in the event of liquidation;
management and ownership prerogatives if conditions exist with the
company (such as default of interest payments).
Employees
Attractive compensation package; job satisfaction; freedom from
arbitrary behaviour on the part of company officials; share in fringe
benefits; freedom to join union and participate in collective bargaining;
satisfactory working conditions.
Customers
Competitive price; service provided with the product; suitable
warranties; R&D leading to product improvement; facilitation of credit
on attractive terms.
Suppliers
Continuing business; timely payment and servicing of credit
obligations; professional relationship in contracting for purchasing and
receiving goods and services.
Governments
Taxes (income, excise, sales, etc.); adherence to public policy dealing
with the requirement of fair and free competition; discharge of legal
obligations of business people (and business organizations);
adherence to business law (MRTP, FEMA, etc).
Unions
Recognition as the negotiating agent for employees; to be recognized
as a participant in the business organization; managements cooperation in fair wage settlement.
Competitors
Observation of the norms for competitive conduct established by the
industry and society; ethical business practices; no price war.
Local communities Place for productive and healthy employment; participation of
company officials in community affairs; provision of regular
employment; fair play; interest in and, support of, local government;
support of cultural and charitable projects.
The general public Participation in, and contribution to, society as a whole; assumption of
some proportion of the burden of government and society; fair price for
products and generating healthy competition.

Source: Adapted from Pearce and Robinson (2000), 50 (Figure 2.3)

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 119

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

As shown in Table 5.3, each interest group of stakeholders has multiple


expectations or claims. For all the stakeholders taken together, the expectations/
claims are too many and varied. Many of them are conflicting. So, if an
organization attempts to incorporate all the interests of various stakeholder
groups in the mission statements or objectives, it becomes almost an impossible
task. Therefore, before attempting such an exercise, companies should do proper
stakeholder analysis. Four steps or tasks are involved in such analysis:
(a) Identification of important internal and external stakeholders
(b) Understanding stakeholders specific claims
(c) Reconciliation of stakeholders claims and prioritizing them
(d) Matching stakeholder claims with other inputs or elements of the
company mission or objectives.
Every business or company faces different types of stakeholder groups
which vary in number, size, influence and importance. Planners and strategy
makers must identify all the important stakeholder groups and assess their
relative weights and claims and their ability to affect companys performance
and success. This would also involve understanding or analysing stakeholders
claims carefully. Since claims can be too many, prioritization of claims is
necessary. After prioritization, the problem of reconciliation comes. Reconciliation
is essential to resolve the competiting, conflicting and contradicting claims of
stakeholders. Finally, the distilled stakeholder claimsprioritized and
reconciledhave to be matched or coordinated with other principal elements of
the mission statement or objectives. These elements relate to the business for
which the organization exists and, the product-market situation. When all these
factors or elements are combined in a harmonized way, the mission statement,
objective and strategies would be internally consistent and are likely to produce
desired results. Methodologically, this is presented in Figure 5.2.
Internal
stakeholders
Board of directors
Executive officers
Stockholders
Employees
Union*

Business/
product-market

Company
mission

External
stakeholders
Customers
Suppliers
Creditors
Government
Union*
Competitors
General public

Objectives

Figure 5.2 Stakeholders Chains, Company Mission and Objectives


*Union is shown both as internal and external stakeholder because there is a difference
of opinion on this.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 120

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Corporates have responsibilities towards various stakeholders and the
society at large. (True/False)
14. The competitors, government and the general public are all ______of a
company.

5.9 Corporate Social Responsibility


As mentioned above, external stakeholders of an organization are too many
and varied and many of them represent different sections or social groups. This
implies that organizations should be socially responsible; that is, in addition to
the interests of the shareholders, businesses or companies should also serve
the society. This is corporate social responsibility (CSR). Corporate social
responsibility can be defined as the alignment of business operations with social
values.
The conflict between internal and external stakeholders can go much
further than mentioned so far. Some feel that this is the most problematic issue
in deciding company responsibility. External stakeholders argue that internal
stakeholders demand be made secondary to the greater need of the society;
that is, greater good of the external stakeholders. Many of them feel that issues
like pollution, waste disposals, environmental safety and conservation of natural
resources should be the overriding considerations for formulation of policy and
strategic decision making. Internal stakeholders, on the other hand, think that
the competing or social claims of external stakeholders should be balanced in
such a way that it protects the company mission, objectives and profitability.
The debate continues.
Strong exponents of CSR also talk of social policy for companies. They
feel that social responsibilities of companies should be clearly enunciated and
declared as social policy. Social policies may directly affect a companys products
and services, technology, markets, customers and self-image. According to these
thinkers, an organizations social policy should be integrated into all management
activities including the mission statement and objectives. Many feel that corporate
social policy should be articulated during strategy formulation, administered
during strategy implementation and reaffirmed or changed during strategy
evaluation.7

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 121

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

5.9.1 CSR Practices in Corporates


Worldwide, companies are trying to integrate corporate social responsibility into
their business operations and strategies. Microsoft, Coca-Cola, McDonalds,
FedEx, IBM and Johnson & Johnson are some of the leading companies. In
India also, many companies are integrating CSR into their business practices
and making significant contributions to society. Companies like Infosys, Wipro,
Hero Honda, ITC, Dr. Reddys, Godrej, Mahindra & Mahindra and Tata Steel
are the foremost among them. Some of these companies have also established
foundations to cater to the needs of society.
Infosys and Wipro are two new-age companies which have integrated
CSR initiatives into their business capabilities and have achieved stronger brand
recognition through it. The Infosys Foundation works for both economic and
social upliftment of the villages it has adopted. The foundation focusses on an
overall development of the village. The developmental activities range from
conducting rehabilitation to construction of orphanages, setting up libraries and
promoting art and culture. Hero Honda has adopted a number of villages in and
around its plant in Dharughera (near Delhi) for integrated rural development.
ITCs E-choupals have not only helped to meet the information requirements of
rural households, but also immensely contributed to the establishment of better
relations with customers and rural suppliers. This has helped the process of
integrated rural development. Many banks and financial institutions along with
FMCG companies like Hindustan Unilever have recognized the importance of
development of the rural sector.
At the global level, CSR initiatives of companies are observed with interest.
The Wall Street Journal has rated top 15 companies in terms of their social
responsibility.8 These companies are
1. Johnson & Johnson

9. McDonalds

2. Coca-Cola

10. 3M

3. Wal-Mart

11. UPS

4. Anheuser Bush

12. FedEx

5. Hewlett-Packard

13. Target

6. World Disney

14. Home Depot

7. Microsoft

15. General Electric

8. IBM

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 122

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

It should be noted that there is a difference in focus between CSR initiatives


of Indian companies and the western companies. In India, CSR initiatives are
mostly designed for the upliftment of the economically backward classes or
sections of society with particular emphasis on the rural sector. In companies in
developed countries, the focus is more on adoption of environment-friendly
measures or schemes. A poll carried out by the American Society for Quality
(ASQ) in 2006 for the ISO 26,000 Social Responsibility standards shows growing
interest in CSR among organizations. Integration of CSR into business is likely
to receive greater thrust with the creation of ISO 26,000 standards. The ISO
26,000 would provide guidelines on social responsibility of corporations and
other organizations. This would help preparation of a road map by companies
wishing to align their business activities with social initiatives.9

5.9.2 Corporate Social Responsibility and Profitability


Milton Friedman said in 1962: Few trends could so thoroughly undermine
the very foundations of our free society as the acceptance by corporate
officials of a social responsibility other than to make as much money for
their stockholders as possible.
Capitalism and Freedom, 1962
Even after four decades since Friedman said this, corporate social
responsibility has remained a contentious issue. Managers are struggling to
decide to what extent they should adopt CSR in their strategy-building process.
The debate or dichotomy is clear: Should a company behave in a socially
responsible manner and make the profitability policy follow from this; or, should
a company aim at profit maximization and try to be as socially responsible as
possible. Exponents of CSR argue that business depends on, exists to serve
and, cannot be separated from the environment; the environment is represented
by external stakeholders like customers, competitors, suppliers, government
agencies, local communities and society in general. Proponents of profit
maximization like Friedman, on the other hand, think that a company has
responsibility only for the financial well-being of its stockholders; and other
objective or policy may threaten the health and prosperity of the company.
The relationship between CSR and profit is complex. Although the two
are not mutually exclusive, neither of them is a prerequisite for the other.
Advocates of corporate pragmatism suggest that CSR and profit need not
necessarily be viewed as two competing concepts. It may be more rational to
include CSR as a factor or component in the strategy-building process of the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 123

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

business which should determine, along with other objectives, how to increase
or maximize profit.
Several research studies10 have been undertaken to determine the
relationship between corporate social performance and financial performance.
But, none of these studies has been able to establish the precise nature of
relationship between the two. There may be a number of reasons for this. One
reason may be that there is no significant correlation between social and financial
performance. Another reason may be that the benefits of CSR are offset by its
negative effect on profitability with no consequentially visible financial impact
on the company. Other reasons include methodological weaknesses or
drawbacks and/or problems with operational definitions or inadequacy of the
conceptual models used in the studies. A general conclusion from these studies,
however, is that certain relationship between CSR and profitability may exist,
but, the nature of the relationship is not clear.
Activity 2
Choose any five companies that are well known for their CSR practices.
You may choose the companies mentioned in the text above. Write a report
on each of the companys CSR activities.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. _________can be defined as the alignment of business operations with
social values.
16. In India, CSR initiatives are mostly designed for the upliftment of the
economically backward classes or sections of society with particular
emphasis on the rural sector. (True/False)

5.10 Social Audit


Exponents of CSR do not just want companies to be socially responsible. They
also want to know how much or how far have they shown their social
responsibility, that is, what is their social performance against stated social
objectives. This can be measured through social audit. Social audit and social
accounting are sometimes used synonymously. But, there is a distinction
between the two. Social accounting is the process of selecting firm level
performance variables, measures and measurement procedures; systematically
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 124

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

developing information useful for evaluating the firms social performance to


concerned social groups, both within and outside the firm.11 Social audit, on the
other hand, is more specific or focussed; as just mentioned, social audit evaluates
or measures a companys performance against planned or laid down social
objectives or goals.
A social audit should be like a financial audit or a commercial audit. Some
even feel that social audit should be based on a social balance sheet with a
"credit" side and a "debit" side ("inputs" and "outputs" or "costs" and "benefits").12
A social audit may be undertaken internally by companies; or, they may engage
outside consultants to conduct the audit. But, as with financial audit, an outside
consultant or agency minimizes organizational biases and brings more credibility
to the evaluation process and the company.
Social audit is important not only because a company wants to ensure
that it has implemented CSR policy as planned or committed, but, also because
it improves its public image and social standing. Also, social audit is conducted
by some companies not only to evaluate their social performance, but, also for
other purposes which are connected with their corporate performance and image
building. Some companies, for example, use social audit to scan the external
environment and determine their vulnerabilities to it; some others conduct social
audit to improve their relations with the government and public bodies. Others
use social audit to institutionalize CSR within their companies.

Self-Assessment Questions
17. The social performance of companies can be measured against the stated
social objectives through_________.
18. A social audit is always undertaken internally by companies. (True/False)

5.11 Case Study


Corporate Social Responsibility: Tata Group Goes Green*
In India, many companies are integrating corporate social responsibility
(CSR) into their business practices and are making significant contributions
to society. Some of them have also set up foundations to cater to the needs
of the society. Tata Group of companies, along with some others, are
foremost among them. As an extension of CSR practices, Tata Group
companies are going green. From being on the fringe for some time, the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 125

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

green movement is gaining momentum within the group. The movement


covers all the major companies of the group, namely, Tata Steel, Tata Motors,
Tata Chemicals and Indian Hotels.
Tata Steel is planning to reduce carbon dioxide emissions at its Jamshedpur
plant from the current 1.8 tonne to 1.7 tonne per tonne of liquid steel made
by 2012. The ideal global benchmark though is 1.5. Tata Motors is setting
up an eco-friendly showroom using natural building materials for its flooring
and energy-efficient lights. The project is in its initial stages. The Indian
Hotels Company, which runs the Taj Chain, is in the process of creating
eco rooms, which will have energy-efficient minibars, organic bed linen
and napkins made from recycled paper. There will not be any carpets since
chemicals are used to clean these. And when it comes to illumination, the
rooms will have CFLs or LEDs. About 5 per cent of the total rooms at a Taj
hotel would sport a chic eco-room design.

Another eco-friendly consumer durable product that is in the works is Indica


EV, an electric car that will run on polymer lithium ion batteries. Tata Motors
plans to introduce the Indica EV soon.
The groups large companies such as Tata Steel, Tata Motors, Tata
Chemicals and Tata Consultancy Services contribute 80 per cent of the
groups overall emissions and a panel, headed by Tata Sons Director J J
Irani, has been formed to address this issue. Several companies have
already implemented or are in the process of implementing clean
development mechanism (CDM) projects. Tata Steel says it is currently
working on more than 17 CDM projects with Ernst & Young and these
projects are at various stages of approval at United Nations Framework

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 126

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Convention on Climate Change. Tata Power has said that of the total power,
it would generate in the next 10 years, 25 per cent would be from renewable
energy sources. Tata Motors is collecting environmental and energy data
across its dealer and supply chain to compute their carbon footprint and
indentify opportunities for cutting down on carbon dioxide emission. This
initiative will enable sharing and deployment of ideas throughout the value
chain.
One of the most interesting innovations has come in the form of a biogasbased power plant at Taj Green Cove in Kovalam, which uses the waste
generated at the hotel to meet its cooking requirements. Indian Hotels
Management has mentioned that all of its domestic and international hotels
would now be certified by Green Globe, an international agency.
Tata Group Chairman Ratan Tata had said during the launch of Swatch, a
low-cost water purifier made form natural ingredients: We have embarked
on a group-wise initiative to create awareness and implement eco-friendly
process wherever it is possible and in fact, look at some of our older
processes to see how we can ensure that they are in compliance with the
stateof- the-art exhibits. This is going to be long and expensive journey and
we are fairly committed to it.
This summarizes well the Tata Groups initiatives to promote the green
movement.
* Mostly based on Going green: Tatas new mantra, The Times of India (Times
Business), January 4, 2010.

5.12 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
To define a companys business with precision is the job or responsibility
of the planners and strategists. Precise or correct definition of business
of a company is the foundation for the mission statement, objectives,
plans, strategies and work and resource allocations.
A mission statement is many in one. It embodies the business philosophy
of a companys decision makers, implies the image the company wishes
to project, reflects the companys self-concept, indicates the companys
principal product or service areas and the customer needs the company
seeks to satisfy.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 127

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

Corporate or company philosophy is sometimes called company creed; it


envisages the basic beliefs, values, aspirations and philosophical priorities
of a company.
Corporate objectives are more focussed and specific compared to
corporate mission. The mission statement is more general and qualitative;
corporate objectives are usually quantitativemost of the objectives
should be measurable in terms of results or achievements. But, corporate
objectives should be fully consistent with the mission statement for its
performance.
Glueck and Jauch (1984) have mentioned about organizational life cycles
and the linkages between life cycles, objectives and strategic focus of
organizations. They have distinguished seven stages in organizational
life cycle; birth, infancy, youth, youth adult, adult, maturity and old age.
Worldwide, companies are trying to integrate corporate social responsibility
into their business operations and strategies. Microsoft, Coca-cola,
McDonalds, FedEx, IBM and Johnson & Johnson are some of the leading
companies.

5.13 Glossary
Corporate mission: The business philosophy of a company, declaring
what business the company is in and who its customers are. It provides
focus and direction for the corporate development.
Corporate philosophy: The beliefs, values, aspirations and philosophical
priorities of a company which the management or strategic decision
makers are committed to.
Corporate vision: Refers to a companys specific intentions that are broad,
all-intrusive and forward-thinking.
Organizational life cycle: A model which proposes that over the course
of time, business firms move through a fairly predictable sequence of
developmental stages.
Strategic intent: Setting goals or targets which demand stretching of the
present resource base and capabilities for their fulfilment.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 128

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

5.14 Terminal Questions


1. How would you properly define a business? Explain with a diagram.
2. What is a mission statement? Differentiate between a mission statement
and a vision statement.
3. Specify seven stages of organizational life cycle. Discuss the linkages
between organizational life cycle, corporate objectives and strategy.
4. What is strategic intent? How is strategic intent different from corporate
objective? Explain strategic intent with some examples.
5. What is corporate social responsibility (CSR)? Which are the issues
involved in analysis of CSR? Name three companies with high CSR rating.
6. Explain the concept of social audit. Discuss Tata Steels social audit. Would
you recommend social audit for every company?

5.15 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Planners, strategists
2. Customer
3. mission statement
4. present, future
5. True
6. False
7. mission statement
8. Organizational life cycle
9. strategic intent
10. Hamel, Prahalad
11. True
12. False
13. True

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 129

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

14. stakeholders
15. Corporate social responsibility
16. True
17. social audit
18. False

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. To define a companys business with precision is the job or responsibility
of the planners and strategists. Refer to Section 5.3 for further details.
2. The mission statement of a company is variously called a statement of
philosophy, a statement of beliefs, a statement of purpose and, a statement
of business principles. Refer to Section 5.4 and 5.4.1 for further details.
3. Glueck and Jauch (1984) have distinguished seven stages in
organizational life cycle: birth, infancy, youth, youth adult, adult, maturity
and old age. Refer to Section 5.4 and 5.7 for further details.
4. The phase strategic intent was coined by Hamel and Prahalad (1989).
Refer to Section 5.7 for further details.
5. Organizations should be socially responsible; that is, in addition to the
interests of the shareholders, businesses or companies should also serve
the society. Refer to Section 5.8 for further details.
6. A companys social performance against stated social objectives can be
measured through social audit. Refer to Section 5.9 for further details.

5.16 References
1. Aupperle, K E, A B Carroll, J D Hatfield. 1985. An Empirical Examination
of the Relationship between Corporate Social Responsibilities and
Profitability. Academy of Management Journal. 28 June.
2. CarrolL, A, and F Hoy. Integrating Corporate Social Policy into Strategic
Management. 1984. Journal of Business Strategy 4, Winter.
3. Drucker, P F. 1974. Management: Tasks, Responsibilities and Practices.
New York: Harper & Row.
4. Ghosh, P K. 2003. Strategic Planning and Management. New Delhi: Sultan
Chand & Sons.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 130

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 5

6. Hamel, G, and C K Prahalad. 1989. Strategic Intent, Harvard Business


Review, MayJune.
7. Pearce, J R, and R B Robinson. 2000. Strategic Management. 7th ed.
New Delhi: McGraw Hill.
Endnotes
1

P F Drucker, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities and Practices (New York: Harper &
Row, 1974), 63.

J R Pearce, and R B Robinson, Strategic Management, 7 th ed. (Mc Graw-Hill, 2000), 27.

W R King, and D I Cleland, Strategic Planning and Policy (New York: Van Nostrand
Reinhold, 1978), 124.

An Interview with M A Pathan, Chairman, IOC, Financial Express, August 30, 1999

R Ackoff, A Concept of Corporate Planning (New York: John Wiley, 1970).

R Bennett, Corporate Strategy , 2nd ed. (Financial Times/Pitman Publishing, 1999),


1819.

A Carroll, and F Hoy, Integrating Corporate Social Policy into Strategic Management,
Journal of Business Strategy, 4, No. 3 (Winter 1984).

R Alsop, Perils of Corporate Philanthrophy, Wall Street Journal (January 16, 2002).

Trying to Make a Difference, Financial Times (New Delhi: Times Publishing House, April
7, 2006).

10

Two important studies are: K E Aupperle, A B Carroll, and J D Hatfield, An Empirical


Examination of the Relationship between Corporate Social Responsibility and Profitability,
Academy of Management Journal, (1985) 446 63; W N Davidson, and D L Worrell, A
Comparison and Test of the Use of Accounting and Stock Market Data in Relating Corporate
Social Responsibility and Financial Performance, Akron Business and Economic Review,
21 (Fall 1990), 7 1

11

K V Ramanathan, Theory of Corporate Social Accounting, Accounting Review (July,


1976): 516 28.

12

C C Abt, The Social Audit for Management (New York: AMA, 1977): 44 45.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 131

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Unit 6

Internal Competences and Resources

Structure
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Caselet
Objectives
6.3 Competence Analysis
6.4 Resource Analysis
6.5 Value Chain Analysis
6.6 Cost Analysis
6.7 Financial Competence Analysis
6.8 External Sources of Competence
6.9 Case Study
6.10 Summary
6.11 Glossary
6.12 Terminal Questions
6.13 Answers
6.14 References

6.1 Introduction
For effectiveness, all management strategies should be based on or be
commensurate with the internal competences of a company or its organizational
capabilities. A number of theories or models have been put forward about
internal capabilities or core competences which companies must acquire or
use to survive in todays competitive market. Another way to put this is: the
strategy a company adopts should depend on its competence level in terms
of resources.
Time and again, companies have discovered and/or experienced this,
and they have achieved results. From 1980 to 1988, Canon grew by 264 per
cent and Honda by 200 per cent. Canons personal copiers, Hondas entry into
four-wheeler market, Casios small-screen colour LCD television, Yamahas
digital pianoall were developed by respective core competencies. In India,
Greaves introduced Garuda (the three-wheeler diesel auto) making use of its
competence in diesel engines; IFB-Bosch entered the washing machine segment
making use of its fine blanking technology. Dabur, with its expertise in traditional
Indian medicine, has entered into food products (juice, honey, mint, etc.).
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 133

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

6.2 Caselet
Core competence is the combination of processes and technologies that a
company possesses. It includes the knowledge and experience of
operations, the activities that bring the company high returns and the
qualities that are considered central to the success of the organization.
Core competence gives a company its competitive advantage by enabling
it to deliver value to its customers. Changing core competence requires
key skills and abilities in a new job or field of operations.
Xerox is an example of a company that diversified and adopted new core
competence to enable it to compete in a different market. In the early 20th
century the company came into being with the invention of xerography,
which was the precursor of photocopying technology. Through innovation,
the company invented Ethernet technology, which helped prepare the
foundation for the Internet of today. The shift from hard copy to digital
technology required new core competence. Any core competence
developed by a company stays with it for a long time.
Source: http://smallbusiness.chron.com/examples-changing-core-competencies18422.html

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Define competence of an organization and the various types of
competences
Describe resource analysis
Explain the concept and practice of value chain analysis
Analyse the financial competence of an organization through cost analysis
Discuss external sources of competence, including strategic outsourcing

6.3 Competence Analysis


Competence is the ability to perform a task or achieve some objectives.
Competence levels vary across organizations, and, also, within an organization
from time to time. Difference in performance among companies in the same
market and product category is, due to the difference in their competence levels.
This happens because only some companies are able to demonstrate the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 134

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

competences demanded by particular competitive situations. This applies to a


particular company also. Just for survival, a company needs to possess a
particular level of competence; but, for clear competitive advantage or sustained
growth, a company would require a different level or type of competence. Four
major types or levels of competence may be distinguished:
1. Core competence
2. Distinctive competence
3. Strategic competence
4. Threshold competence

6.3.1 Core Competence


Core competence of a company is one of its special or unique internal
competence. Core competence is not just a single strength or skill or capability
of a company; it is interwoven resources, technology and skill or synergy
culminating into a special or core competence. Core competence gives a
company a clear competitive advantage over its competitors. Sony has a core
competence in miniaturization; Xeroxs core competence is in photocopying;
Canons core competence lies in optics, imaging and laser control; Hondas
core competence is in engines (for cars and motorcycles); 3Ms core competence
is in sticky tape technology; JVCs in video tape technology; ITCs in tobacco
and cigarettes and Godrejs in locks and storewels.
Hamel and Prahalad, two of the greatest exponents of core competence,
argue in The Core Competence of the Corporation (HBR, 1990) that the central
building block of the corporate strategy is core competence. Hamel and Prahalad
defined core competence as the combination of individual technologies and
production skills that underlie a companys product lines. According to them,
Sonys core competence in manufacturing allows the company to make
everything from the Sony walkman to video cameras to notebook computer.
Canons core competence in optics, imaging and microprocessor controls have
enabled it to enter markets as seemingly diverse as copiers, laser printers,
cameras and image scanners.
To achieve core competence, a particular competence level of a company
should satisfy three criteria:
(a) It should relate to an activity or process that inherently underlies the value
in the product or service as perceived by the customer. This is important
because managers often take an internal view of value and either miss or
deliberately overlook the customer perspective.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 135

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

(b) It should lead to a level of performance in a product or process which is


significantly better than those of competitors. Benchmarking is a good
way and is generally recommended for undertaking performance standard
and also for differentiating between good and bad performance. (We will
be discussing benchmarking in Unit 11).
(c) It should be robust, i.e., difficult for competitors to imitate. In a fast changing
world, many advantages gained in different ways (like a superior product
feature, a new marketing campaign or an innovative price policy/strategy)
are not robust and are likely to be short lived. Core competence is not
about such incremental changes or improvements, but, about the whole
process through which continuous change and improvement take place
which lead to or sustain clearly differentiated advantage.1

6.3.2 Distinctive Competence


Core competence may not be enough, because it focuses predominantly on
the product or process and technology, or, as Hamel and Prahalad put it; The
combination of individual technologies and production skills. There are two
problems with this. First, strong and aggressive competitors may develop, either
through parallel innovations or imitations, similar products or processes which
are highly competitive. This is what Japanese companies have done in the
fields of electronics and automobiles, and now South Korea is doing to Japanese
electronics; IBMs core computer technology is also facing the same problem.
Second, to secure competitive advantage, only product, process or technology
or technological innovation may not be enough; this has to be amply supported
by special capabilities in the related vital areas like resource or financial
management, cost management, marketing, logistics, etc.
Hamel and Prahalad themselves have said later (1994):
We have to look at the organization as a portfolio of competencies, of
underlying strengths, and, not just a portfolio and business unit .... We
must also identify those core competencies that would allow us to create
new products; and we must ask ourselves what we can leverage as we
move into the future, and what we can do that other companies might
find difficult.2

Distinctive competences may provide an answer to some of these points.


Distinctive competence is based on the assumption that there are different
alternative ways to secure competitive advantage and not only special technical
and production expertise as emphasized by core competence.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 136

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Distinctive competence includes core competence as one of the


alternatives. But, there are other alternatives that are also based on
organizational capabilities. So, distinctive competence is more broad based.
Thompson and Strickland (1992) have defined distinctive competence as:
Distinctive competence is the unique capability that helps an organization
in capitalizing upon a particular opportunity; the competitive edge it may
give a firm in the marketplace.3

So, the focus in distinctive competence is on exploiting a market


opportunity. And, depending on the market or competitive situation, one or some
of the alternative competences may work ; for example, product or process
superiority (core competence), product differentiation (situational or adaptability),
cost effectiveness or cost efficiency to support a price strategy, special capability
in marketing or distribution, etc. Under given circumstances, one of these, or a
combination of some of these, will produce a distinctive competence which
would be appropriate or best suited to exploit the opportunity and produce desired
results.
Since resources are limited, identification of distinctive competence may
also help efficient allocation of resources. Reliance Industries, for example, has
developed its distinctive competence in conceiving, implementing and managing
large scale projects and mobilizing requisite resources for that. They do not
think in terms of core competence. Mukesh Ambani, Chairman and MD, has
described it like this:
We do not believe in core competence; we believe in building
competence around people and processes to create value.4

6.3.3 Strategic Competence


Strategic competence coexists with, or supports, core competence and distinctive
competence. Strategic competence is the competence level required to
formulate, implement and produce results with a particular strategy, for example,
to outwit competitors. Hindustan Unilever did this. In the mid- and the late 80s,
they used their strategic competence to out manoeuvre Nirma (which was
launched very aggressively) and re-establish their leadership in the detergent
market. Strategic competence may also involve combination or convergence of
different capabilities as in the case of Hindustan Unilever.

6.3.4 Threshold Competence


Threshold competence is the competence level required just for survival in the
market or business. The competence level of a company may be weaker than
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 137

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

many of its competitors. Threshold competence may be adopted by No. 5 or


No. 6 player in the market or those struggling to survive. Companies with
threshold competence can, over time, graduate to a higher level of competence.
But, continued threshold competence can also lead to closure of business.
Multi-product or multi-SBU companies may often possess a portfolio of
competences. In some product or business, they may have core competence,
but, not in all. ITCs core competence is in tobacco and cigarettes, but, they
have distinctive competence in hospitality business and agri-business. Hindustan
Unilever has distinctive competence and strategic competence in many
businesses. But, they had been surviving with threshold competence in vanaspati
business (Dalda) for some time, and finally, they exited from that business. A
conceptual portfolio of organizational competence consisting of core
competence, distinctive competence, strategic competence and threshold
competence is shown in Figure 6.1.

Figure 6.1 Portfolio of Organizational Competence

Activity 1
Now that you know what is core competence, choose any three companies
and compare their core competence. Write a comparative analyis on the
same.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The ability to perform a task or achieve some objectives is called ______.
2. Sonys competence in miniaturization; Xeroxs competence in photo
copying; Canons competence in optics, imaging and laser control are
examples of _______competence.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 138

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

3. The unique capability that helps an organization in capitalizing upon a


particular opportunity; the competitive edge it may give a firm in the
marketplace is called:
(a) Strategic competence
(b) Core competence
(c) Distinctive competence
(d) None of these
4. The competence level required to formulate, implement and produce
results with a particular strategy, say, to outwit competitors, is known as
strategic competence . (True/False)

6.4 Resource Analysis


Resources create competences. Resources also limit competences because
for developing certain types or levels of competences or capabilities,
commensurate resources may not always be forthcoming. This shows that
competence analysis and resource analysis are intrinsically related. Resources
do not mean only financial resources. In strategic management analysis,
organizational resources can be classified into four major categories:
Physical resources
Financial resources
Human resources
Intangible resources
Physical resources are buildings (factory or office), machines or production
capacity. The nature and quality of physical resources depend on the age,
condition, location and capability of these resources. Financial resources include
cash, capital, debtors, creditors and suppliers of funds (shareholders, banks,
financial institutions, etc.). Financial resources are the source of all investments
of a company. Human resources are people. Human resources include skills,
knowledge applications and adaptability of people or employees in an
organization. In knowledge-based economies and todays complicated business
management systems, human resource has become the most valuable asset.
Intangible resources are also called intellectual capital, and, of late, are being
recognized as of strategic importance to companies. Intangible resource includes
knowledge or intellectual capital in the form of patents, brands, business systems,
customer databases and relationships with strategic partners. Intangible resource
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 139

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

or intellectual capital also includes goodwill or corporate image of an


organization which helps immensely during business transactions. Intellectual
capital forms an important asset of many organizations, and, there are thoughts
to find ways of assessing and accounting for value of intangibles.5
Like competences, resources can also be of different levels of adequacy
or effectiveness. For example, threshold resources, like threshold competences,
are resources required to stay in business or in a market or segment. Threshold
resources may sometimes be the minimum level required for market entry. But
to stay in business, the threshold level has to increase over time because of the
actions of the competitors and/or new entrants. So, the threshold resource level
is always relative to the market position of a particular product. In contrast,
unique resources like core competence or distinctive competence enable an
organization to establish or sustain its product or business better than competitors
resources. Uniqueness of the resources also makes these difficult to imitate.
Resources may have to be continuously developed and/or adjusted to
competence levels to secure or sustain competitive advantage. Due to the
development of technology and changes in competition levels, some resources
may become redundant at some point of time. Unless organizations are able to
dispose of or abandon redundant resources and develop new resources, they
may not be able to stay in competition. Banking sector is a good example. In
the US and Europe, many traditional banks are still operating with a large number
of branches. However, in the new technology world, many new competitors do
not have any branches and have invested heavily in call centres and Internet
banking. In 2000, average transaction cost with branch operation was 1
compared with 54 p through telephones and only 15 p through the Internet.
Also branch transaction costs are rising as volumes are falling and more
customers are switching to e-banking.6
So, the message is clear. Organizations may have to change their resource
base as competitive situation demands.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. In strategic management analysis, organizational resources can be
classified into categories:
(a) Physical and non-physical resources
(b) Financial and human resources

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 140

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

(c) Physical, financial and human resources


(d) Physical, financial, human and intangible resources
6. Knowledge or intellectual capital in the form of patents, brands, business
systems, customer databases and relationships with strategic partners is
classified as ________resource.
7. In order to secure or sustain competitive advantage, _________ may
have to be continuously developed and/or adjusted to competence levels.
8. Absence of _____may lead to underutilization or wastage of resources.

6.5 Value Chain Analysis


Various competences and resources of an organization can be integrated into a
chain of activities which an organization performs to meet customer demand.
Since each of these activities is expected to create value when it is performed,
the chain can appropriately be called a value chain. Michael Porter (1985)
introduced the concept of value chain analysis. Now, it has become common
for professional companies to do this analysis.
Value chain analysis helps in understanding how value is created in
organizations through various activities. These activities can be divided into two
broad categories: primary activities and support activities. Primary activities are
directly concerned with the creation or delivery of a product or service or customer
value. Support activities, as the name indicates, support the primary activities,
or, more, correctly, help to improve the effectiveness or efficiency of primary
activities.
Primary activities can be divided into five major areas: inbound logistics,
operations, outbound logistics, marketing and sales and service.
Inbound logistics: These are activities concerned with receiving, storing
and distributing raw materials and inputs to the production or service division.
Inbound logistics also include materials handling, stock control, transportation
of inputs, etc.
Operations: These are activities involved in transforming various inputs
into final product or service. Operations also include machinery, packaging,
assembly, testing, etc.
Outbound logistics: These include collecting, storing and distributing or
delivering final products to customers. For tangible products (industrial or

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 141

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

consumer goods), this would include warehousing, materials handling,


transportation, etc. In the case of service, these may be more concerned with
arrangements for bringing customers close to the service location. (e.g., sports
events, entertainment events, etc.).
Marketing and sales: These comprise activities such as advertising, sales
promotion, selling, sales force management, pricing, channel selection, channel
management, etc. Marketing and sales provide the most important link between
the company and the customer.
Service: These include activities which maintain or enhance value of a
product or service such as installation, repair, training, supply of spares and
prompt after-sales service, etc.
Support activities can be divided into four categories: procurement,
technology development, human resource management and organizational
infrastructure.
Procurement: This relates to the processes for acquiring or purchasing
various resource inputs like raw materials, intermediate inputs, equipment,
machinery, etc. Procurement primarily supports inbound logistics and operations.
Technology development: Technology is involved in all value creations.
Key technologies are concerned directly with the product, (e.g., R&D, product
design, quality control, etc.,) or with processes, (e.g.,process development).
Technology development is fundamental to the innovative capacity of an
organization. Technology mainly supports operations.
Human resource management: This provides support to all primary
activities in the value chain. More specifically, HRM is concerned with recruiting,
managing, training and developing people within the organization.
Infrastructure: This is the organizational system including finance, MIS,
general management, strategic planning, etc. Infrastructure also comprises
organizational structures, values and culture. Infrastructure, directly or indirectly,
supports all primary activities.
Figure 6.2 shows the value chain in an organization in terms of primary
activities and support activities and the value or margin these activities are
expected to create. Primary activities and support activities may appear to be
two separate blocks, but, in reality, they are all interconnected activities in a
cohesive value chain.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 142

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Figure 6.2 Value Chain in an Organization


Source: M E Porter, Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior
Performance (New York: The Free Press, 1985).

Competences or activities in the value chain can contribute to customer


value in two ways. First is competences in individual activities (for example,
operations or production or marketing). Second is the competence in linking
activities together. This includes the ability to integrate all the separate activities
(both primary and support activities) to deliver some customer value, and, thereby
ensure that they do not contribute to conflicting goals. An organization may
have core competence in manufacturing processes that produce engineering
products of unique specifications very difficult for competitors to match or imitate.
But, the company may not be able to gain competitive advantage from this
unless it is able to take care of its inbound logistics, outbound logistics and
marketing and sales. It is the combined effect of all these activities which creates
or destroys value.
Organizations can effectively use value chain analysis to identify the weak
links (and also the strong links) in the chain for further analysis, review and
necessary action. In using the value chain, an organization should concentrate
on two aspects. First, it should ascertain how different activities, both primary
and support, are being performed so that contribution of each activity to
organizational objectives or goals can be measured. If a particular activity is not
contributing satisfactorily, required changes can be made in that. This is the job
of strategic management. The second aspect is the coordination or integration
of various activities into a cohesive value chain. Many companies perform
individual activities efficiently, but, in the absence of a proper coordination
mechanism, their overall effectiveness is low. The solution to this is integrated
value chain. Many companies are re-engineering their organizational processes
for performing various activities in their value chain in an integrated way.7 Value
chain analysis of Hero Cycles is given as an example in Box. 6.1.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 143

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Box 6.1: Value Chain Analysis of Hero Cycles


Hero Cycles is a single product company and concentrates exclusively on
manufacturing bicycles. Hero Cycles has positioned its product as lowpriced, functionally useful and suitable for mass marketing. Its strategy is
based on overall cost leadership and has adopted commensurate strategies
for all activities in the value chain to become the most competitive in the
industry. Value chain analysis of Hero Cycles is given here in terms of
primary activities and support activities.
Primary Activities
The first primary activity in the value chain is inbound logistics. This involves
inward movement of different types of materials. These materials are divided
into three categories: raw materials (mostly steel); components requiring
further machining at the companys plant; and, components and parts (like
tyres, tubes and other accessories) which can be assembled without any
further processing. The company saves cost in inbound logistics in several
ways. First, except for some critical components, it procures components
from small-scale manufacturers in the neighbourhood which enjoy cost
advantage in terms of lower overhead and also transportation. Second, the
company pays its vendors in cash and enjoys cash discount. Third, the
company has trained many component manufacturers and because
component manufacturing does not involve high technology, they produce
quality components at reasonable cost.
In operations, the company saves cost through higher productivity which is
achieved through motivated and loyal workers. In few cases like rim
manufacturing, automation helps higher productivity.
In outbound logistics, Hero Cycles has adopted just-in-time approach for
finished products in which bicycles are transported within one week of their
manufacturing. The company has appointed stockists in almost all cities of
the country to make outbound logistics more effective.
In marketing and sales, the company has reduced the number of
intermediaries in its distribution channel and goes directly to the stockists
and, through the stocktists, to customers. The company believes that in
the present competitive environment, satisfied customers are the best
source of publicity and promotion. This way, marketing and selling cost of
the company is very low, if not negligible.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 144

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

In service, the company does not have to do much in terms of managing


the activity because bicycle requires very little after-sales service.
Support Activities
Hero Cycles conducts various support activities in such a way that it either
saves cost on these activities directly or they provide strong support to
primary activities.
Firm infrastructure which includes general management, finance, accounts,
etc., performs efficiently. The company is able to achieve significant cost
saving in finance area. Since it is a cash rich and debt-free company, it
does not have to bear any interest burden in contrast to some others in the
industry.
In human resource management, the company is far superior to its industry
competitors, and its HR policies and practices can even be the envy of
many organizations outside the bicycle industry. The companys HRM
practices are based on one basic value: employees even at the lowest
level are treated at par with owners and shareholders and top-level
managers. Even the chairman remembers the names of workers and calls
each of them by his/her name. This infuses a feeling of belongingness
among the employees.
In technology development, the company has adopted a policy of
informalization rather than structuring too many processes and systems.
Its R&D activities are always aimed at making bicycles more functionally
useful rather than adding styles and colours which are reserved for cycles
for the export market.
In procurement, there are two centralized systems; one for human resource,
and the other for physical resource. Procurement system for physical
resources gives ample support to inbound logistics.
In conclusion, it can be said that Hero Cycles value chain provides high
value to its customers and also to the organization. This differentiates the
company from its competitors.
Activity 2
Having read the value chain analysis of Hero Cycles, choose another
company and compare its value chain with that of Hero Cycles.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 145

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Self-Assessment Questions
9. The chain of activities that an organization performs to meet customer
demand is called _________.
10. The various activities in a value chain can be divided into two broad
categories:
(a) primary and secondary activities
(b) primary and support activities
(c) high-level and low-level activities
(d) priority and non-priority activities
11. Inbound logistics, operations, outbound logistics, marketing and sales
and service are classified under
(a) primary activities
(b) secondary activities
(c) tertiary activities
(d) support activities
12. Activities that help to improve the effectiveness or efficiency of primary
activities are known as _______.

6.6 Cost Analysis


Price or market competitiveness of a product or business depends on its cost
competitiveness. Cost competitiveness itself is a competence or capability.
Therefore, cost management becomes a very important strategic function of an
organization.
Cost competitiveness implies two thingscost efficiency and cost
effectiveness. Both may appear same or similar as concepts, but analytically
the difference between the two is quite significant. Efficiency is an input-output
relationshiphow much has been produced or achieved per unit of input or
cost. Given an input or cost level, higher the output, more efficient is the
production process. Conversely, cost efficiency may be defined as the level of
resources or cost required to produce a particular output or create a given
value. So, lesser the resources or cost, more efficient is the value creation
process. Effectiveness is more plan-output relationshiphow much of the plan
has been fulfilled or realized given a resource level or cost. Effectiveness,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 146

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

therefore, is the ability to contribute to the defined level of objectives or goals or


to produce results.
Both cost efficiency and cost effectiveness are important dimensions of
cost management. Cost efficiency and cost effectiveness are not exclusive to
each other. So, companies can simultaneously aim at cost efficiency and cost
competitiveness which can lead to cost competence. Cost competence, achieved
through proper cost management, can also contribute to cost efficiency and
cost effectiveness (Figure 6.3).

Figure 6.3 Cost Management, Cost Competences, Cost Efficiency


and Cost Effectiveness

6.6.1 Cost Efficiency


Various factors contribute to cost efficiency in an organization. These may even
include factors which are not directly related to cost or cost management like
general work environment or culture in the organization, motivation levels of
managers, approach of the top management, etc. However, here we shall
consider the factors that are directly related to cost competence or cost efficiency.
Four major factors may be identified: economies of scale, supply cost or cost of
raw materials and inputs, product or process design, and experience or
experience effect (Figure 6.4).

Figure 6.4 Sources of Cost Efficiency


Source: G Johnson, and K Scholes, (2005), 166.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 147

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Economies of scale: We know from economics that economies of scale


are the most conventional and, also a very important source of cost efficiency.
In manufacturing organizations, fixed cost (per unit of output), which initially
remains very high, starts going down progressively as output increases. Because
of this, average cost of output decreases as output increases, or the scale of
operations increases. This also means increase in capacity utilization of plant
and machinery. In non-manufacturing organizations or non-manufacturing
activities, economies of scale can be effected through mass advertising, mass
marketing, extensive distribution, etc. Economies of scale can also be achieved
through global partnering and global networks. Many MNEs sustain their
competitiveness in the market through scale advantage.
Supply cost: Costs of raw materials and various inputs constitute supply
cost. Inputs generally include raw material inputs or intermediate inputs and
energy inputs. In an extended sense, these inputs can include factor inputs like
labour also. In highly raw material-intensive industries like steel, cement and
non-ferrous metals, supply costs constitute a very high proportion of total cost
of the product and, therefore, become a very important determinant of the level
of cost efficiency. In these industries, location influences supply cost because
transportation becomes a significant component of total raw material cost. This
is the reason why, in these industries, many plants are located near the raw
material source or mines. This gives cost advantage to companies. In such
industries, ownership of raw material can also give definite cost advantage.
This is why steel manufacturers like Tata Steel and nonferrous metal
manufacturers, like NALCO, BALCO, and HINDALCO, have their own captive
sources of raw materials (ores). In fact, NALCO, primarily because of its captive
sourcing of high quality bauxite, is one of the lowest cost producers of aluminum
in the world. Even in those industries which are not highly raw material-intensive,
supply cost management becomes an important determinant of cost advantage
or cost disadvantage. Inventory (of raw materials, components and spares)
planning and management are also part of this. Companies are becoming
increasingly aware of this. The automobile sector is a good example. All Japanese
automobile manufacturers have established close linkages with their vendors
suppliers of automobile ancillariesthrough different kinds of partnerships and
alliances and implementation of JIT principles. Maruti in India is also a very
good example. Companies are also reducing the number of vendors to make
the raw material supply chain more cohesive and cost efficient.
Product/process design: Product design starts at the R&D stage even if it
is an imitation. Many feel that product design is the first step in efficient cost
management, because the nature of the product determines, to a large extent,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 148

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

the raw material and other input requirements and supply cost. Cost efficiency
in production processes can be achieved through better process engineering,
increase in productivity (depends partly on the technology level) and better
working capital management. Many companies have achieved cost efficiency
through these methods.
Cost competitiveness through product design need not, however, be
confined to manufacturing or production process alone. Innovative product design
can lead to cost saving through its influence on other parts of the value chain
also like distribution or after-sales service. Canon proved this in its battle with
Xerox. Xeroxs competitive advantage was built on its service and support
network. Canon designed a copier which needed far less servicing8 and, through
this, made one of the strong competence areas of Xerox largely redundant. In
the process, Canon also achieved cost efficiency by spending much less on its
service network.
Experience: Experience in any activity in an organization can be an
important source of cost advantage or cost efficiencybe it manufacturing or
any other functional area. Many studies have been conducted to establish the
relationship between cumulative experience gained in an organization and its
unit cost. The relationship is generally expressed as an inverse relationship
between cumulative output and unit costunit cost decreases as cumulative
output increases.
This is shown in the experience curve (Figure 6.5).

Figure 6.5 The Experience Curve

The experience curve is the result of two major factors, namely, the learning
effects and economies of scale. Learning effects refer to cost saving which
comes from learning by doing. Labour, for example, learns through repetitive
processes, how to perform a task more efficiently on the shop floor or in assembly
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 149

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

lines. Due to this, labour productivity increases and this leads to cost reduction
or cost efficiency. Similarly, in a new production process, management learns
over time, how to manage the new operations more efficiently; and, management
efficiency eventually leads to cost efficiency. Same applies to operations like
logistics. Economies of scale as mentioned above contribute to cost reduction
by distributing fixed cost over larger output.
Learning effects, however, may die out after some time. Some feel that
learning effects are really important during the start-up period of a new process.
Even if it is a complex assembly process, workers may almost reach perfection
after a few years, and all effects on the experience curve may cease after two or
three years. Any further downward slope of the curve (that is, cost reduction) may
occur only because of economies of scale which can continue over larger output.
In a cost-conscious organization, all the four major factors, i.e., economies
of scale, supply cost, product/process design and experience may play active
roles for achieving cost efficiency. However, economies of scale and experience
effect can occur only after an organization has been in operation for sometime.
Newly launched companies or products must concentrate on product/ process
design and supply cost and try to reduce the experience cycle through a more
efficient management system.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Cost competitiveness implies two things_______and __________.
14. Factors like economies of scale, supply cost or cost of raw materials and
inputs, product or process design, and experience or experience effect
contribute to __________in an organization.
15. The more the resources or cost, more efficient is the value creation
process. (True/False)
16. Companies that achieve cost efficiency and cost competitiveness also
achieve _________.

6.7 Financial Competence Analysis


Financial competence or financial health of an organization can be analysed
with the help of various financial ratios. Financial ratios are computed from a
companys income statement and balance sheet. Comparison of ratios over
time, and with industry averages, give meaningful statistics which can be used
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 150

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

to identify and analyse or evaluate financial strengths and weaknesses. Various


financial ratios of an organization can be classified into five major categories:
(a) Liquidity ratios
(b) Leverage ratios
(c) Activity ratios
(d) Profitability ratios
(e) Growth ratios
Liquidity ratios relate to current assets and liabilities and indicate an
organizations short-term obligations. Leverage ratios pertain to debts and show
the extent to which an organization has been financed by debt. Activity ratios
relate turnover to resources and measure how effectively an organization is
using its resources. Profitability ratios pertain to returns and margins and show
different measures of returns/margins on sales and investment. Growth ratios
relate to organizational growth indicators and measure an organizations growth
in sales, income, etc.
Ten key financial ratios for a company are given below:
1. Current ratio

2. Debt-to-equity ratio

3. Inventory turnover ratio

4. Total assets turnover ratio

5. Gross profit margin

6. Net profit margin

7. Return on total assets (ROA)

8. Return on equity (ROE)

9. Earnings per share

10. Price-earnings ratio

Generally speaking, higher the values (or percentages) of the above ratios
(except debt-equity ratio), better are they as indicators of financial competence
or health of a company. The most desirable ratios for a company would depend
on factors like nature of the companys business, market or competitive situation
and the industry average. Financial ratio analysis should be carried out by
financial analysts in the company or the strategic planning group or outside
consultants. Such analysis should not be done in isolation; this should be done
in relation to other resources and competences to optimize overall internal
competence of an organization.
Financial ratio analysis, however, is not without limitations. Financial ratios
are based on accounting data, and, companies differ in their treatment of items
like depreciation, inventory valuation, reserves, tax provisions, R&D expenditures,
etc. These factors can affect comparative ratios. Therefore, conformity to industry
ratios does not automatically mean that a company is performing well. Similarly,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 151

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

deviations from industry averages also do not indicate that a company is doing
badly. For example, a high inventory turnover ratio can indicate efficient inventory
management and, a strong working capital position, but, it can also mean a
serious inventory shortage and a weak working capital position.9

Self-Assessment Questions
17. Financial ratios are computed from a companys ________statement and
balance sheet.
18. Financial ratio analysis should be done in relation to other resources and
competences to optimize overall internal competence of an organization.
(True/False)

6.8 External Sources of Competence


Not many companies can hope to possess all the competences required to
survive in todays highly complex and rapidly changing market. Many
organizations are, therefore, entering into alliances, joint ventures or network
relationships with others within their business system to overcome identified
internal weaknesses.
Studies conducted by the Nordic Business Schools on the performance
of Swedish firms in international markets revealed that many companies faced
a competence inadequacy situation, e.g., not owning appropriate technology or
not having the marketing skills to enter a new market segment. And many of
these companies sought solutions to this problem by entering into network
relationships with other companies (Hakansson, 1989). Studies also showed
that one of the commonest forms of business networking was forming alliances
to achieve faster rates of product and/or process innovation.
Conway (1987) has constructed a framework in an attempt to define
various potential participants (or actors) whom a company might like to bring
together for formation of a network to overcome an identified innovation
competency problem. These include :
(a) Upstream innovators found among the companys suppliers.
(b) Downstream actors found within the companys customer base.
(c) Horizontal actors found from companies within the same market
system.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 152

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

(d) Knowledge participants such as universities and research institutes.


(e) Regulatory actors, e.g., governments or statutory bodies.
(f) Environmental actors, e.g., environmental pressure groups.
The implications of the Conway framework are that the company which
feels that internal innovation competences are not sufficient to adequately support
future business plan, is now able to consider the formation of external alliances
to overcome this problem.

6.8.1 Strategic Outsourcing


Capability sourcing is becoming the new trend. It is no longer a companys
ownership of capabilities which matters, but, what matters is its ability to make
the most of available critical capabilities whether they reside inside or outside
the company. Outsourcing is becoming so sophisticated that even core functions
like engineering, R&D, manufacturing and marketing canand often should
be moved outside. And, this trend is changing the way companies think about
their organizations, their value chains and, their competitive position.10
Experience of companies like Chrysler, American Express and 7-Eleven
(the US retailer) have shown that strategic outsourcing can significantly improve
a companys competitive position.
Gottfredson, Puryear and Phillips (2005) have suggested a framework
for capability sourcing or strategic outsourcing. To complete the outsourcing
process, a company has to move progressively in three steps.
The first step is to identify the competences or capabilities of business,
which constitute the core of the core of a company. These are activities which
the company does better and cheaper than its rivals. For 7-Eleven, the core of
the core is in store merchandising and product ordering; for Pfizer, it is developing
and marketing pharmaceutical compounds; for American Express, it is identifying
customer segments and card offering tailored to them. Everything exists in the
company to support the core of the core.
In deciding what to outsource, and what not to, a company should consider
two factors; first, whether a capability is proprietary, that is, possessed only by the
company and, also unique to itself and second, whether it is common enough
and possessed by many in the industry. Based primarily on these two factors, a
company should decide which capabilities have high outsourcing potential and
which should remain under the companys control. This can be seen more clearly
in a sourcing probability map. This is given in Figure 6.6. The vertical axis of the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 153

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

map depicts how proprietary a process or function or capability is; the horizontal
axis shows how common a process or function is. The less proprietary and more
common a process or capability is, the stronger a candidate it is for outsourcing.

Figure 6.6 Outsourcing Probability Map


Source: M Gottfredson, R Puryear, and S Phillips, Strategic Sourcing: From Periphery
to the Core, Harvard Business Review (February, 2005), 138.

Activities or capabilities which appear in the lower left segment of the


map are strong prospects for captive sourcing. Such capabilities may even be
candidates for insourcing, that is, if a company feels that it is really the best at/
in a given process or capability, it should have an opportunity to perform the
activity for other companies also. A good example of successful insourcing is
FedEx. FedEx plans and manages inbound transportation for more than 1500
product suppliers into 26 General Motors power train facilities. This capability
puts FedEx at the leading edge of the $225 billion logistics outsourcing industry.11
Capabilities, which fall in the upper right segment of the map, are strong
candidates for outsourcing. Capabilities, which fall in the middle of the sourcing
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 154

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

map, generally require more detailed analysis of the company and the industry.
An organization needs to consider such factors as substitute products, standards
and regulations to make out how these capabilities will shape in the future. A
decision for outsourcing should be based on these considerations.
The second step in the capability sourcing process is for a company to
decide how it should outsource the identified capabilities. There is a cost for
capability sourcing: there is a quality angle also. How does a company decide on
these factors? A capability assessment map (Figure 6.7) can be a good guide.

Figure 6.7 A Capability Sourcing Map


Source: M Gottfredson, R Puryear, and S Phillips, Strategic Sourcing: From Periphery
to the Core, Harvard Business Review (February, 2005), 138.

The map depicts each capability according to its cost and quality relative
to the top-performing competitors or suppliers (industry median). This map helps
a company decide which key capability gaps it should fill. For example, activities
or capabilities which fall in the upper-left segment (relatively high cost capabilities
whose quality levels exceed requirements) should be outsourced to low-cost
providerseven if it means a reduction in quality.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 155

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

The third and final step in capability sourcing is a reality check or more a
feasibility check in terms of location or physical proximity of the capability to be
outsourced. For example, if it is a tangible product or technology, physical
proximity becomes an important factor because of cost and time implications.
But, for intangibles like R&D, design, engineering, etc., physical proximity may
be much less important. A company, however, has to look into this reality or
feasibility aspect.
According to Gottfredson, Puryear and Phillips, if a company goes through
the proposed three-step process, it will have the right framework for a
comprehensive capability sourcing strategy.

Self-Assessment Questions
19. One of the commonest forms of business networking is forming ______to
achieve faster rates of product and/or process innovation.
20. In order to improve their competitive position, companies are adopting
______, that is, moving one or more of the functions in the value chain
outside.

6.9 Case Study


Southwest Airlines: Excellence through Integrated Cost Management
According to many, Southwest Airlines is the best airline in the US and one
of the best in the world. Analysts and even competitors attribute this to
Southwests low-cost strategy. But, closer analysis reveals that it is integrated
cost management or leadership which gives the company its competitive
position in the global airlines industry and is also the source of its profitable
operations.
Six strategic factors contribute to Southwests integrated cost management
leadership. These are: very low ticket prices; limited passenger service (for
example, no meals, no baggage transfers); lean and highly productive
ground and gate crews; frequent, reliable departures; high aircraft utilization;
and short-haul, point-to-point routes between mid-sized cities and secondary
airports.* These factors or activities are linked in a kind of value chain that
leads to highly effective cost management. This also results in high
profitability.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 156

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

It is often asked, how does Southwest make high profits? The answer is to
be found, in addition to other factors, in price risk management or hedging
of aviation fuel price. Southwest has concluded hedging agreements till
2009 with hedge price not exceeding $35 per barrel for at least 25 per cent
of its annual fuel requirements. It can also exercise option for about 25 per
cent of its fuel needs for $26 per barrel. In a highly volatile crude oil/ fuel oil
market, price hedging gives very significant cost advantage to a company.
Due to its successful integrated cost management, Southwest has become
highly competitive in the airline industry. Many full service airlines have
tried to adopt Southwests cost strategy, but they have remained
unsuccessful, primarily because they have not been able to properly emulate
or integrate various cost management actions/ functions. Kelly, Southwests
CEO, said: I feel very good about our competitive position as long as we
continue to improve. In Southwest Airlines, cost management, competitive
action and growth are closely interlinked.
Integration of, and fit among, critical activities is key to sustainable
competitive advantage of all Companies, including Southwest Airlines. Porter
describes it like this:
Strategic fit among many activities is fundamental not only to competitive
advantage, but also the sustainability of that advantage. It is harder for
a rival to match an array of interlocked activities than merely to imitate
a particular ... approach.**
* Hitt et al, Management of Strategy (Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2007), 107.
** M E Porter, What is Strategy? Harvard Business Review, 74, no. 6 (1996).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 157

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

6.10 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
For effectiveness, all management strategies should be commensurate
with internal competencies or capabilities of a company. Four major types
or levels of competence are: core competence, distinctive competence,
strategic competence and threshold competence.
Resources create competences. Resource also limits competences
because of resource crunch. In strategic management analysis,
organizational resources can be classified into four major categories:
physical resources, financial resources, human resources and intangible
resources.
Various competences and resources of an organization can be integrated
into a chain of activities which performs to meet customer demand. This
chain of activities is a value-creating process and is more appropriately
described as a value chain.
Activities in the value chain are divided into primary activitiesactivities
directly concerned with the creation of a product or customer valueand
support activities.
Price or market competitiveness of a product on business depends on
cost competitiveness, Cost competitiveness itself is a competence or
capability. Cost competitiveness implies two thingscost efficiency and
cost effectiveness.
Financial competence or financial health of an organization can be
analysed with the help of five categories of financial ratios: liquidity ratios
(relate to current assets and liabilities), leverage ratios (pertain to debts),
activity ratios (relate turnover to resource), profitability ratios (returns/
margins on investment/sales) and growth ratios (growth indicators).
Capability sourcing is becoming the new trend and it can significantly
improve competitive position.

6.11 Glossary
Competence: The ability to perform a task or achieve some objectives.
Core competence: The special or unique internal competence of a
company.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 158

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

Distinctive competence: The combination of individual technologies and


production skills of a company.
Economies of scale: Reduction in cost per unit resulting from increased
production, realized through operational efficiencies.
Liquidity ratios: Ratios that measure a firm's ability to meet its shortterm financial obligations on time, such as the ratio of current assets to
current liabilities.
Outsourcing: When a company or corporation will either buy products it
intends to resell or hire another company to perform certain functions
that would cost them too much to do themselves
Strategic competence: The competence level required to formulate,
implement and produce results with a particular strategy, say, to outwit
competitors.
Threshold competence: The competence level required just for survival
in the market or business.
Value chain: Various competences and resources of an organization that
can be integrated into a chain of activities which an organization performs
to meet customer demand.

6.12 Terminal Questions


1. Distinguish between core competence, distinctive competence, strategic
competence and threshold competence. Use examples.
2. Distinguish between different kinds of resources. Which are intangible
resources?
3. What is a value chain? Analyse the roles of primary activities and support
activities in a value chain.
4. Explain the concept of cost efficiency of an organization. Analyse the
major determinants of cost efficiency.
5. State five major categories of financial ratios of a company. Explain each
of them.
6. Explain an outsourcing probability map. Use a diagram.
7. What is a capability sourcing map? Illustrate with a diagram.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 159

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

6.13 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Competence
2. Core
3. (c) Distinctive competence
4. True
5. Intangible
6. (d) Physical, financial, human and intangible resources
7. Resources
8. resource analysis or audit
9. value chain
10. (b) primary and support activities
11. (a) primary activities
12. support activities
13. cost efficiency, cost effectiveness
14. cost efficiency
15. False
16. cost competence
17. income
18. True
19. Alliances
20. strategic outsourcing

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Four major types or levels of competence are: core competence, distinctive
competence, strategic competence and threshold competence. Refer to
Section 6.3 for further details.
2. Organizational resources can be classified into four major categories
physical, financial, human and intangible resources. Refer to Section 6.4
for further details.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 160

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

3. Various activities which an organization performs to meet customer


demand can appropriately be called a value chain. Refer to Section 6.5
for further details.
4. Various factors contribute to cost efficiency in an organization. Refer to
Section 6.6.1 for further details.
5. The various financial ratios of an organization can be classified into five
major categories: liquidity ratios, leverage ratios, activity ratios, profitability
ratios and growth ratios. Refer to Section 6.7 for further details.
6. To complete the outsourcing process, a company has to move
progressively in three steps. Refer to Section 6.8.1 for further details.
7. A capability assessment map (Figure 6.10) can be a good guide for a
company to decide how should it.outsource the identified capabilities.
Refer to Section 6.8.1 for further details.

6.14 References
1. Aaker, D A. 1995. Strategic Market Management. 4th edn. New York:
John Wiley & Sons.
2. Gottfredson, M, R Puryear, and S Phillips. Strategic Sourcing: From
Periphery to the Core. Harvard Business Review, February, 2005.
3. Hamel, G, and C K Prahalad. The Core Competence of the Corporation.
Harvard Business Review, MayJune, 1990.
4. Hamel, G, and C K Prahalad. 1994. Competing for the Future. Boston:
Harvard Business School Press.
5. Porter, M E. 1985. Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining
Superior Performance. New York: The Free Press.
6. Thompson, A A, and A J Strickland. 1994. Strategic Management: Concepts
and Cases. Texas: Business Publications.
Endnotes
1

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6 th ed. (Pearson Education,


2005), 157.

G Hamel, and C K Prahalad, Competing for the Future, (Boston: Harvard Business School
Press, 1994).

A A Thompson, and A J Strickland, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, (1994),


77.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 161

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 6

A V Desai, A Rival of Your Size, BusinessWorld (October 9, 2000), 16.

V Baruch, HR Accounting : The Issue Can No Longer be Ignored, The International


Journal of Applied Human Resource Management 1, no. 1 (2000).

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6 th ed. (Pearson Education,


2005), 154.

M Hammer, and J Champy, Re-engineering the Corporation (New York: Harper Business,
1993).

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy (2005), 167.

F R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases (2003), 140.

10

M Gottfredson, R Puryear, and S Phillips, Strategic Sourcing: From Periphery to the


Core, Harvard Business Review (February, 2005), 132.

11

M Gottfredson, R Puryear, and S Phillips, Harvard Business Review (2005), 139.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 162

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

Unit 7

External Environmental Factors

Structure
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Caselet
Objectives
7.3 Environmental Factors
7.4 Scanning of Environment
7.5 Environment Forecasting
7.6 Environmental Opportunity and Threat Analysis
7.7 SWOT Analysis
7.8 Case Study
7.9 Summary
7.10 Glossary
7.11 Terminal Questions
7.12 Answers
7.13 References

7.1 Introduction
Companies have internal competences or capabilities that enable them to face,
among others, the external environment for formulating and implementing
corporate strategies. The external environment does not refer only to the
macroeconomic environment or broad macro-parameters like socio-economic
factors, government policy and legislations; it also includes technology, competitors,
intermediaries and suppliers; in short, all those factors or forces which together
constitute the market environment within which a company operates.
Analysis of the external environment consists of identification of
opportunities and threats, and exploiting opportunities and meeting threats based
on organizational strengths and weaknesses. Companies that do this effectively
on a regular basis become successful. Companies that ignore the environment
or do not analyse or scan the environment properly, could face disastrous results.
We have many examples of companies that ignored the changing environment
and perished as a result. Hindustan Motors and Premier Automobiles lost their
pre-eminent market position to Maruti Udyogs Maruti 800. Mahindra and
Mahindra was shaken by Marutis Gypsy petrol jeeps. Television giants like
Nelco, Weston, Crown, Bush, etc., lost to companies and brands like Onida
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 163

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

and Videocon and new brands like LG and Samsung. Titan watches shook the
giant HMT. The Surf and Nirma story is well known.

7.2 Caselet
The Nirma success story of how an Indian entrepreneur took on the big
MNCs and rewrote the rules of business:
It was in 1969 that Dr. Karsanbhai Patel started Nirma and went on to
create a whole new segment in the Indian domestic detergent market.During
that time, the domestic detergent market only had the premium segment
and there were very few companies, mainly the MNCs.
Karsanbhai Patel used to make detergent powder in the backyard of his
house in Ahmedabad and then carry out door-to-door selling of his
handmade product. He gave a money back guarantee with every pack that
was sold. Karsanbhai Patel managed to offer his detergent powder for `3
per kg when the cheapest detergent at that time was `13 per kg and so he
was able to successfully target the middle and lower middle income segment.
Sabki Pasand Nirma
Karsanbhai Patel had good knowledge of chemicals and he came up with
Nirma detergent which was a result of innovative combination of the
important ingredients. Indigenous method was used, and also the detergent
was more environment friendly.
Consumers now had a quality detergent powder, having an affordable price
tag.
Source: http://toostep.com/insight/success-story-of-nirma

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Analyse the major factors of environment that impact a business
Explain the techniques of environmental scanning
Discuss environment forecasting
Distinguish between environmental threat and opportunity (ETOP) analysis
and SWOT analysis
Conduct organizational SWOT analysis using different approaches

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 164

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

7.3 Environmental Factors


All these and many other such cases point to an important facet of business
sensitivity of strategy to the external environment. The major environmental
factors a business strategist should reckon with are:
Political factors
Economic factors
Sociological factors
Government policies/controls
Technology
Competition
Intermediaries
Suppliers
Competition analysis would be undertaken in detail in Unit 11. Competition
is not just an element or factor of the environment. It has more direct and vital
implications for an organizations business and strategy. This is the reason why
competition or competitors would be analysed separately in a more
comprehensive way. We shall, however, make references here about competition
as a factor of environment. All other major environmental factors mentioned
above are discussed below.

7.3.1 Political Factors


Political factors or political conditions can have significant impact on industry,
business and the corporates. Political stability improves business environment
and encourages economic and business activities. Political instability produces
the opposite effects. Political factors do not refer to only national political
conditions or relations, but also to international relations. Improved political
relations between the US and China in the mid-70s resulted in trade agreement
between the two countries. The trade agreement provided opportunities to US
electronics manufacturers to commence operations in China. There are many
instances where deteriorating political relations between countries (India and
Pakistan), have affected business conditions.
Rubock (1971) has developed an analytical framework for identifying and
assessing political risks which may affect business conditions. Sources of political
risks can be many. Major risk factors identified by Rubock are: electoral majority

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 165

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

of the party in power; internal dissensions within the ruling party; strengths of
the parliamentary opposition parties; conflicting political ideologies; insurgencies
in border areas, international power alignments and alliances, etc.
Given below are two contrasting Indian examples of the impact of political
environment on business.
The progressive political philosophy of Chandrababu Naidu during his
tenure as the chief minister of Andhra Pradesh led to the creation of Cyberabad.
IT companies have found Hyderabad, nicknamed by the media as Cyberabad,
to be the most hospitable location for development of IT, mostly because of
highly supportive political climate. Chandrababu had taken keen personal interest
in IT; and, had encouraged and ensured use of IT in governance by simplifying
rules and procedures, offering concessions and building good supportive
infrastructure.
The Ayodhya-Babri Masjid episode became a political issue and provoked
violence in different parts of the country, and caused serious law and order
problems during December,1992 and January 1993. Apart from the
apprehensions of political instability, the events disrupted transport, slowed down
industrial production and growth of exports, and, also reduced government
revenue.1

7.3.2 Economic Factors


Economic environment is an amalgam; it comprises all aspects or areas of
economic activitynational income (GDP or GNP), the manufacturing sector,
the services sector, capital or financial sector, investment, savings, etc. All these
areas or sectors together influence the structure and trends of the economy
and determine the economic environment.
The major economic factors, which influence any market system, are:
(a) GDP or GNP
(b) Income distribution or income levels
(c) Business cycles or different phases of the cycle like boom, recession,
depression and recovery
(d) Price levels of goods and services, i.e., whether the trend is
inflationary or deflationary
(e) Rate of interest on market borrowing
Each of these and other such macroeconomic factors can be an
opportunity or a threat to a company depending on how it reacts to or exploits
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 166

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

the factor. For example, inflationary trends can generally pose a serious threat
to a companys competitiveness in terms of input costs and selling prices. But a
smart company with a definite strategy may use this as an opportunity or
challenge to analyse all its cost drivers (activities which affect the cost structure)
to minimize cost and increase competitiveness. Porter (1980) has identified a
number of cost drivers:
Economies of scale
Pattern of capacity utilization
Linkages with suppliers and channels
Coordination among different activities
Interrelationships with other business units within a company
Timing of an activity
Management of institutional factors like government regulations, tax
holidays/rebates, tariffs, etc.

7.3.3 Sociological Factors


Sociological factors include demographic factors or population profiles, value
system in society and lifestyles of individuals.
Demographic factors or population profiles reflect age and sex composition
of the population, occupational patterns, literacy levels, etc. Demographic
parameters are a very intimate component of the market environment because
they directly affect consumer behaviour. For example, today there is a lot of
focus on the youth and many products and brands are promoted for the young
generation. Apart from Pepsi (which has been specially positioned on the age
factor), mobikes Hero Honda, TVS Suzuki and Kawasaki Bajajall are focusing
on this segment. Readymade garment companies are invading the childrens
sector. Many FMCG brands are targeted at women of particular age groups.
Occupational patterns and literacy levels are also influencing consumption
patterns of males and females.
Besides demographic factors, changes in the value system and lifestyles
greatly affect purchasing patterns. Strong family bonding and love for family
have been a big influencing factor in the Indian market. The Vicks Vaporub
theme (the child with cough and cold and the mothers concern for him) is a
very good example of exploiting core Indian values for marketing
communications.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 167

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

The international exposure of Indian consumers is increasing and changing


lifestyles are getting reflected in preferences for international brands of readymade garments (Peter England Pizza Hut, Baskin Robbins, etc). These are
important environmental developments for the strategists in the FMCG and
services sector.

7.3.4 Government Policies and Controls


Government policies have a more direct impact on business decision and
marketing strategies than macroeconomic indicators like GDP or GNP.
Government regulations and controls have even more immediate impact than
government policies. Policies and controls can be of three types as shown in
Figure 7.1.
Government Policy

Monetary
policy

Bank
rates

Physical
policy controls)

Fiscal
policy

Credit
controls

Taxes

Subsidies

Investment
and
production

Prices
and
distribution

Figure 7.1 Government Policies and Controls

At any point of time, the corporate tax structure, various lending rates of
banks and financial institutions, monetary controls like the bank rate, price
controls, etc., offer a particular economic or business climate. An extension of
the regulatory controls is to be found in economic or business legislation. Two
good examples of this are the Foreign Exchange Regulation Act (FERA) and
Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices (MRTP) Act. Given these policies
and controls, the corporate management has to match these through appropriate
strategies for cost control and effectiveness, pricing strategy, marketing
efficiency, etc.

7.3.5 Technology
Technology, as an environmental factor, influences strategic planning and
management in a number of ways.
Technological changes lead to the shortening of product life cycles and
create new sets of consumer expectations. Electronic products are a good
example. This sector is experiencing the most rapid changes today. One can
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 168

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

clearly see the technological revolution in the colour TV market. Sometimes,


advance signals on technological developments are available through research
and development and industry/trade journals and magazines. Companies in
the pharmaceutical industry, for example, are continuously aware of
developments in new formulations and drugs in the world through medical
journals and periodicals. Developments in information technology are greatly
affecting the competitive position of companies.
In a different way, technological developments affect a companys raw
material, packaging, operations, products and services. For example,
developments in the plastics and packaging industry have brought in new
packaging in the form of tetrapacks, pet bottles, cellophane, etc.
This has made the packing more attractive, carrying of the product more
convenient and has definitely reduced the cost of packaging and the product.
Similarly, containerized movement of cargo, deep freezers and trawlers have
influenced the operations of the companies.
Technological development also provides an opportunity to companies to
develop new products. On the other hand, companies which ignore these
developments face a crisis and eventually may even face extinction. The Indian
automobile industry gives a good illustration.
With the introduction of Maruti 800 which caught the imagination of
consumers, Hindustan Motors (Ambassador) and Premier Automobiles (Padmini)
had to improve their vehicle performances in terms of fuel efficiency, driving
comfort, aesthetic appeal, etc. But what they did was to bring in peripheral
changes only and those were not enough. The result: Padmini is extinct today
with Ambassador following suit (some extension of life has been given to
Ambassador by the government and the public sector).

7.3.6 Intermediaries
The primary role of intermediaries is to link the producers to the end-user market
in those cases where the latter are unable or unwilling to manage the delivery
or the distribution process.
Intermediaries play a really big role in consumer goods2, particularly in
FMCGs. FMCG majors such as Kelloggs, Heinz and Unilever (Hindustan
Unilever in India) and many other companies utilize the services of large
supermarket chains to distribute their products to households.
The selection of appropriate intermediaries is a matter of marketing choice
and strategy. A company has to take into account a number of factors while
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 169

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

selecting an intermediary or a channel. First, a company should take into account


the purchase behaviour or pattern within the end-user market. For example,
consumers may be prepared to travel up to 50 or 100 km to buy a specific brand
of furniture but may be unwilling to exhibit the same behaviour while purchasing
a packet (or box) of detergent. So, the location of the intermediary is important.
Second is the willingness of the intermediaries to carry their goods. The problem
currently faced by many FMCG companies in the US and Europe is that the
supermarket chains want to expand sales of their own-label products and brands
and, therefore, reduce the number and volume of equivalent branded items of
other companies in their stores. Another problem may be the supermarket chains
preference or commitment to promote some other companys brands. The third
factor is the capability of an intermediary to provide appropriate support services
to the market. There are many discount retailers who are not willing to offer
installation or repair services on the electrical goods they sell, and this almost
boils down to negative marketing.
It is important for companies to identify shifts in consumer behaviour and
emerging trends in customer-buying patterns and the intermediaries willingness
to service the changing end-user market. An example of consumer behaviour
shift and changing expectations is the field of personal computers (PC). In the
PC market in the US, many large customer organizations now expect distributors
to go beyond just selling boxes and give advice on selection, installation and
post-sales operations of sophisticated computer systems. A number of
distributors, known as value added resellers (VARs) are now available who
specialize in supplying certain types of systems and/or serving particular market
segments.
In the late 1980s, IBMs policy of dealing directly with the industrial
customers might have resulted in their being rather slow in building strong
relationships with leading VARs. Many feel that because of such a decision,
sales were adversely affected particularly in those sectors which preferred to
purchase their systems through VARs instead of dealing directly with computer
manufacturers.

7.3.7 Suppliers
Suppliers to a company can be raw material suppliers, energy suppliers, suppliers
of labour and capital; and the suppliers can affect the competitive position and
business capabilities and therefore, the corporate strategy of a company.
According to Porter, the relationship between suppliers and a company
represents a power equation between them. The equation is based on, or
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 170

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

governed by, the market environment, industry conditions and the extent to
which one is dependent on the other.
The buyer company has better bargaining power under the following
conditions:
The buyer is a monopolist (single seller) or a monopsonist (single buyer)
and buys large volumes relative to sellers sales.
The buyer can easily switch vendors it has a choice of alternative
sources of supplies.
The suppliers product is not very important to buyers finished products/
services.
The supplier has stronger bargaining power in the following situations:
The supplier is a monopolistic or an oligopolistic firm.
The suppliers product is a significant input to the buyers finished product.
The buyer is not an important customer of the supplier.
The suppliers products are well differentiated and it has built up significant
switching costs.
A company should evaluate the two sets of strengths or bargaining powers
and ascertain where it stands in the power equation with a particular supplier
and then decide on the choice of the supplier depending on the cost effectiveness,
indispensability, etc. This is the general or classical prescription.
But, the trend is changing. Now the slogan is: collaborate with the suppliers.
Companies are taking equity in supplier companies; some are even taking part
in the management of the vendor companies. The Japanese are leading the
way. But, even in such cases, the initial choice of the supplier may depend on
the relative power equation.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The national income (GDP or GNP), the manufacturing sector, the services
sector, capital or financial sector, investment, savings, etc., constitute the
________environment.
2. Occupational patterns and literacy levels are also influencing _______
patterns of males and females.
3. Technological changes lead to the shortening of product _______ and
create new sets of consumer expectations.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 171

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

4. In which condition does the buyers company have better bargaining


power
(a) When the buyer is a monopolist (single seller)
(b) The buyer can easily switch vendors
(c) The suppliers product is not very important to buyers finished
products/services.
(d) All the above

7.4 Scanning of Environment


In any business or product category, a companys task of finding market
opportunities is generally constrained by lack of sufficient information about the
environmentgovernment policies and controls, the customers, the competitors,
channel members, etc. Therefore, understanding the environment and properly
analysing or scanning it are vital for the formulation of any strategy and, more
so, for the success of it. Scanning is a continuous process because it involves
analysing changes and sometimes even forecasting the impact of developments
in the environment. Some call it external audit.3
Various environmental factors or influences are generally expressed in
one or more of four forms events, trends, issues and expectations. Events
are specific occurrences which take place from time to time like elections,
formation of government, bilateral trade talks or negotiations, etc. Trends are
prevailing tendencies, courses of action or events taking place over time like
movements in national income, inflationary tendencies, growth in industrial
production, etc. Issues are current concerns about events and/or trends like
high/low growth of national income, high rate of inflation, low rate of savings,
stagnant industrial production, etc. Expectations are hopes or demands of
different interest groups like the government expects companies to be constantly
aware of their tax obligations and social responsibilities. So, while planning
environmental scanning, organizations should analyse each important
environmental factor in terms of events, trends, issues and expectations (as
applicable).
The task involved in scanning the environment is to assess the possible
impact of various environmental factors in an interaction matrix or an impact
linkage matrix. Such a matrix is shown in Figure 7.2.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 172

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Strategy
Factor

Env.
Factor

Government
Policy

Rate of
Interest

Controls

Unit 7

Technology

Customer Choices
and Preferences Competition

Liberal credit for


important customers
Price cut/Discount
Increasing dealer
network
Focus on customer
satisfaction
Intensifying
advertising
New product launch

High Impact Linkage

Impact Linkage Normal

Weak or Minimal Impact Linkage

Figure 7.2 Environmental Impact Linkage Matrix

The matrix in Figure 7.2 has been constructed for six major environmental
factors and six business strategy factors. The matrix can be extended to more
number of factors (by using a computerized model) to make it more
comprehensive. Such matrix should be developed by the strategic planning
group. Establishing the impact linkages correctly is difficult and involves objective
assessment of various factors and working of linkage values as far as possible.
Judgemental factor of the planning team, however, cannot be completely ruled
out. But, once constructed, the matrix builds the right linkages between the
environment and corporate strategies or action plans. On the basis of this, the
possible outcome of a particular strategy can be more easily anticipated or
worked out.

7.4.1 Sources of Information for Environmental Scanning


The first step in scanning the environment is to identify proper sources of
information to be used for scanning. Because environmental factors are too
diverse, even for scanning the relevant or operating environment, an organization
has to tap the right sources of information. Sources of information can be primary
or secondary; internal or external; formal or informal; written or verbal. Even
market gossip can be a good source of information or signal for possible changes
in the environment. Various sources of information for environmental scanning

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 173

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

can be classified into some major types or categories. These are mentioned
below in terms of primary and secondary sources and internal and external
sources.
Secondary or Published Sources
1. Internal: Annual reports, corporate strategic plans, company files and
documents.
2. External: Different types of publications like books, journals, magazines,
newspapers, government publications, industry association reports and
newsletters, annual reports of competitors, etc.
Primary Sources
1. Internal: MIS, special databases, managers/employees
2. External:
Stakeholders like customers, competitors, marketing intermediaries
or channel members, suppliers; and also industry trade associations,
government agencies, etc.
Mass media like radio, television and the Internet Special studies
conducted (for the company) by consultants, market research
agencies, educational institutions, etc.
Surveillance or intelligence by ex-employees of the company,
employees or ex-employees of competitors, industrial espionage
agencies, etc.
Activity 1
Choose a company an automobile, cell phone or FMCG producer and
conduct an environmental scanning on its behalf. You will need to express
various environmental factors in terms of events, trends, issues and
expectations in an interaction matrix.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. ________is a continuous process that involves analysing changes and
sometimes even forecasting the impact of developments in the
environment.
6. Scanning is also called______by some people.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 174

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

7. Prevailing tendencies, courses of action or events taking place over time


like movements in national income, inflationary tendencies, growth in
industrial production, etc., are known as _______.
8. The first step in scanning the environment is to identify proper sources of
________to be used for scanning.

7.5 Environment Forecasting


To understand the emerging or evolving environment better, some have
suggested environmental forecasting. Any forecasting is a hazardous job; and,
so is environmental forecasting. But, forecasting is a better approximation than
not knowing anything about the future. That is the reason why forecasting has
become inseparable from economic and business analysis.

Strategic Parameter: sales,


profit, capacity

In environmental forecasting, planners have to start by answering a basic


question: how far ahead should they look, that is, the time horizon for forecasting.
An approach which has been found quite useful is determining the time horizon is
Gap Analysis. Gap analysis should logically be the starting point for environmental
forecasting. The gap analysis projects over time, the gap between the desired
change in strategic parameters like sales, profitability, market share, etc., and
actual change with continuation of present strategy, that is, not responding to
changes in the environment. Gap analysis is shown in Figure 7.3.

A1
Gap
A2

Time

Figure 7.3 Gap Analysis for Strategic Forecasting

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 175

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

In Figure 7.3, A1 shows the desired change in strategic parameter, say,


growth in sales (as per company objective or target). A2 shows projected growth
in sales with continuation of present strategy. (A1 A2) is the gap in achievement
of the target, and the gap starts emerging after the second year. This gap has
been created because of a new product or brand (like Nirma was introduced
and a gap was created in sales of Surf), product/brand or market expansion by
a competitor, slump in the market, etc. In the case of Hindustan Unilever, they
not only did not foresee the entry of Nirma, they had even ignored it for sometime.
That is why the battle was so long for Surf to regain its position. Correct and
timely forecasting of the environment and introduction of necessary changes in
the strategy can help to eliminate or reduce the gap.
Based on gap analysis, an appropriate technique can be chosen for
environmental forecasting. Different authors have suggested different methods
or techniques. Detailed description and analysis of different techniques can be
found in the works of these authors. Two such works or names of authors should
be mentioned here. Lebell and Krasner (1977) have described nine techniques
which range from highly mathematical or statistical techniques to structured
and unstructured opinion methods. Fahey, King and Narayanan (1988) have
mentioned 10 techniques, mostly quantitative, in their survey of environmental
scanning and forecasting. These include scenario writing, simulation and game
theory.

7.5.1 Scenario Building


Forecasting has its limitations. All forecasting is based on certain assumptions
and some database, both of which can be incorrect or imperfect. Therefore,
achieving exactness in forecasting is hardly possible. Forecasters also realize
this. That is why, instead of exact forecasting, many have suggested alternative
scenario development which is quite common in forecasting exercises.
A scenario is a detailed and probable view of how the business environment
of an organization may develop in the future based on the analysis of key
environmental influences and factors of change about which there is a high
degree of uncertainty.4 Planners and strategists should develop alternative
scenarios and, should try to indicate the most probable scenario. Or, else,
decision makers may have to decide the right alternative.
Scenario building has to be a systematic process and it should be
completed in stages. Four major steps should be followed:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 176

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

1. Identify the key environmental factors or forces which should form the
basis for scenario building. For example, three such factors for scenario
building for competitive environment may be market growth rate,
competitive situation in the industry and likely move or behavior of the
market leader. Number of factors would be, in most situations, more than
three, but, this would depend on the environmental situation to be
projected.
2. Formulate or write down the key assumptions for scenario building
assumptions about the future pattern of environmental forces which have
been identified. In the above example, a relevant assumption can be that
there would be no dramatic change in the structure of the industry. It is
advisable to keep the assumptions low because complexity in scenario
building generally increases as the number of assumptions increases.
3. Understand the historical trend in environmental factors or forces which
have been used in assumptions. Also consider their impact on present
market conditions and likely future impact. This analysis is done to establish
a logic for the assumptions and, also to make inferences based on the
assumptions.
4. Build scenarios which are internally consistent. Build alternative scenarios;
may be, an optimistic future, a pessimistic future and a mainline or
mean future. Experts feel that two to four scenarios are generally
appropriate.
Some have suggested a more elaborate, step-by-step, process for
scenario development. One such sequential process is given in Figure 7.4.5
Shells long-term scenario building for the oil industry (favourable and
unfavourable) is given in Box 7.1.

Figure 7.4 Sequential Scenario Development Process

Self-Assessment Questions
9. The logical starting point for environmental forecasting should be _______.
10. Achieving exactness in forecasting is always possible. (True/False)
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 177

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

11. A ______is a detailed and probable view of how the business environment
of an organization may develop in the future.
12. Planners and strategists should develop _______scenarios and, should
try to indicate the most probable scenario.

7.6 Environmental Opportunity and Threat Analysis


The objective of environmental analysis or scanning or even scenario building
is to identify opportunities and threats in the environment and formulate strategies
accordingly. This can be done more directly through environmental appraisal,
that is, assessing the environment for clearly identifying major opportunities
and threats. There are many methods for environmental appraisal. One such
method, suggested by Glueck (1984), is preparation of an environmental threat
and opportunity profile (ETOP) of an organization.
Preparation of ETOP involves dividing the total environment into different
factors or sectors, and, analysing the impact of each sector on the organization.
A more detailed ETOP requires dividing each environmental sector further into
subsectors and, then, assessing the impact of each subsector on the
organization. A summary ETOP, however, may only show the major factors. An
example of ETOP is given in Table 7.1 This example is for a sports cyclemanufacturing company operating both in the domestic market and export
market. The example relates to a hypothetical company but, is realistically based
on the current Indian business environment.6 An actual ETOP of BHEL is given
Table 7.2.
Preparation of ETOP enables planners and strategists to identify specific
sectors or subsectors which have clear impact on the organization either as an
opportunity or a threat. ETOP can also help to analyse the nature and intensity
of impact of different sectors or subsectorsfavourable or unfavourable. Based
on ETOP, an organization can formulate appropriate strategies to exploit the
opportunities and counter the threats from the environment.
Conclusion : Sports cycle manufacturing is a recommended business
because the environment provides many opportunities; there is only one threat
(international).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 178

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

Table 7.1 Environmental Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP) for a Sports Cycle
Manufacturer
Environmental
Sector

Nature of impact

Market

Technological

Supplier

Economic

Regulatory
Political
Socio-cultural

International

Sector position/development
Industry growth rate for bicycles 7 to 8 per cent per
annum; growth rate for sports cycles 30 per cent;
largely unsaturated demand
Technological upgradation in the industry in progress;
import of machinery simple
Mostly ancillaries and associated companies supply
parts and components; imported raw materials easily
available
Growing affluence among urban consumers; export
potential promising
Bicycle industry a thrust area for exports
No significant factor
Customer preference for sports cycles; durable and
easy to ride
Emerging threats from cheap imports from China

indicates favourable impact or opportunity ; indicates unfavourable impact or threat; indicates


neutral impact.

Table 7.2 Environmental Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP) for BHEL
BHEL : ETOP
Environmental sector
Socio-economic

Technological
Supplier
Government
Competition

Impact
(+) Opportunity/() Threat
(+) Continued emphasis on infrastructural development which
inc ludes power supply for indus try, trans port and domes tic
consumption.
() Severe resource constraints.
(+) High growth envisaged in industrial production and technology
upgradation.
() Sources of technology will become scarce due to forma-tion of
technology cartels.
(+) Liberalization of technology import policy.
() Customers will become more discerning in their requirements
due to an increasing role of power plant consultants.
() Public sector will find it increasingly difficult to retain specialists
and highly qualified personnel.

Source: Bharat Heavy Electricals Ltd (BHEL)

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 179

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

Box 7.1: Long-term Scenario Building by Shell for the Oil Industry
Every two or three years, the Central Planning Group of Shell prepares
scenarios about the future of the oil industry on behalf of the Shell Group.
The process generates two scenarios. The objective of scenario generation
is to sensitize decision makers in the group to receive signals for possible
changes in the global environment. The logic is that a more timely and
appropriate business response can take place instead of changes coming
as a surprise.
For formulating strategies for 25 years between 1995 and 2020, the Shell
Group has developed two global scenarios projecting the future of the oil
industry in two different ways. These two scenarios can be termed as
favourable or optimistic and unfavourable or pessimistic.
Favourable or Optimistic
In this scenario, economic and political liberalization increases wealth
creation in the countries which adopt them. However, big upheavals are
also experienced as long-standing barriers are dismantled, and economically
weak countries assert themselves claiming a larger role in world economic
activity and growth. High economic growth of 56 per cent is sustained in
these developing countries. But, there is slow erosion of wealth of the
developed world which produces its own problems. Big companies find
themselves increasingly challenged as cheaper capital and fewer
international barriersboth tariff and non-tarifflead to an environment of
relentless competition and innovation. This creates a high level of oil and
energy demand, and substantial new resource development and
improvement in efficiency are required to propel this growth. Growth should
be high enough so that demand does not outstrip supply, and there are no
inflationary trends. Stagflationary tendencies should also be curbed.
Unfavourable or Pessimistic
In this scenario, liberalization is resisted because people fear that they
might lose what they need mostjobs, power, autonomy, cultural identity.
This creates a world of regional, economic and cultural conflict in which
international business cannot operate efficiently. Markets are difficult for
outsiders to enter as reforms are structured to help insiders. Oil prices are
depressed because of instability and, also, uncertainty; oil prices also
suddenly shoot up as trouble flares up in the Middle East. There is increasing
divergence between rich and poor economies as many developing countries
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 180

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

become marginalized mostly because of lack of foreign investment. In the


developed world, due to convergence of or conspiracy by green and other
political interests, energy is regarded as something bad and polluting. The
unfavourable investment climate which this produces is reinforced by high
disparities around the world. Widespread poverty and environmental
problems are experienced in poorer countries. The richer countries face
problems of shrinking labour force and ageing population. These become
their major concerns.
Source : Adapted from G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy,
3rd ed., 4th ed and 6th ed. (Prentice Hall of India and Pearson Education, 1995,
1999 and 2005), 8687, 105 and 109.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. The objective of environmental analysis or scanning or even scenario
building is to identify ______ and ________in the environment and
formulate strategies accordingly.
14. The preparation of an environmental threat and opportunity profile (ETOP)
of an organization was suggested by_________.

7.7 SWOT7 Analysis


ETOP and EFEM focus only on the opportunities and threats from the environment.
But, to exploit an opportunity or to consider a threat, a company should have
required strengths or competence. A company also needs to know its weaknesses
in terms of competence, because weaknesses may affect its capability to take
advantage of an opportunity or negotiate a threat. So, simultaneously with
environmental analysis or appraisal, organizations also need to assess their internal
strengths and weaknesses. This is done through SWOT analysis.
Companies have been using SWOT analysis for long, whether for general
business strategy or for marketing strategy. In SWOT, S and W relate to
internal competence factors, and O and T pertain to external environment
factors:
S Strengths
Internal competence factor
W Weaknesses

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 181

Strategic Management and Business Policy

O Opportunities

Unit 7

External environmental factors

T Threats
A strength is a resource, skill, capability or any other advantage relative to
competitors and in relation to markets. A weakness is a limitation or deficiency
in resource, skills and capabilities or any other disadvantage relative to
competitors which impedes performance of an organization.
SWOT analysis can be a useful tool to analyse the extent to which strategy
of an organization and its more specific strengths and weaknesses are capable
of dealing with the changes in the business environment. And, this would decide
whether a particular factor in the environment is an opportunity or threat to the
organization with reference to the particular strategy.
For systematic SWOT analysis, major strengths and weaknesses of the
organization for the strategy should be worked out. Then, the important factors
in the environment relevant to this strategy should be identified. Finally, the
strengths and weaknesses should be matched with the environmental factors
through matching analysis or a matrix.
Some potential or likely strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats
are shown in Table 7.3, and a hypothetical SWOT analysis for an international
retail chain is presented in Table 7.4.
Table 7.3 Potential/ Likely Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats
Potential Strengths

Abundant financial resources


Well-known brand name
# 1 ranking in the industry
Economies of scale
Proprietary technology
Patented processes
Lower costs (raw materials or processes)
Respected, company/product/brand image
Superior management talent
Better marketing skills
Superior product quality
Alliances with other firms
Good distribution skills
Committed employees

Sikkim Manipal University

Potential Opportunities

Rapid market growth


Rival firms are complacent
Changing customer needs/tastes
Opening of foreign markets
Mishap of a rival firm
New uses for product discovered
Economic boom
Government deregulation
New technology
Demographic shifts
Other firms seek alliances
High brand switching
Sales decline for a substitute product
New distribution methods

Page No. 182

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

Potential Weaknesses

Potential Threats

Lack of strategic direction


Limited financial resources
Weak spending on R&D
Very narrow product line
Limited distribution
Higher costs (raw materials or processes)
Out-of-date products or technology
Internal operating problems
Internal political problems
Weak market image
Poor marketing skills
Alliances with weak firms
Limited management skills
Undertrained employees

Entry of foreign competitors


Introduction of new substitute products
Product life cycle in decline
Changing customer needs/tastes
Rival firms adopt new strategies
Increased government regulation
Economic downturn
New technology
Demographic shifts
Foreign trade barriers
Poor performance of ally firm

Source: OC Ferrell, M D Hartline, and G H Lucas Jr, Marketing Strategy, 2nd ed. (Thomson South
Western,Vikas Publishing House), 2003, p. 57.

Table 7.4 SWOT Analysis for an International Retail Chain Seeking


Entry into the Indian Market
KEY ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Strength/Weaknesses

New
Technology

Major Strengths
Capacity to innovate
O
Market research

Global base/international brands O


Major Weakness
New in India/Developing
countries

Existing brand suited for

US/European markets
High cost products
T
O (Opportunity)
2
T (Threats)
1
OT
1
indicates neither opportunity nor threat

Customer Choices Competition Market


& Preferences
Growth

International
Exposure

O
O
O

O
O
O

O
O
O

O
O
O

T
T

T
T

O
O

O
O

T
3
3
0

T
3
3
0

T
5
1
4

O
6
0
6

In SWOT analysis in Table 7.4, opportunities far outweigh threats (O T


= 11)shown in the last row. On this basis, it can be said that the environment
is project or strategy friendly and the project is recommended. If threats are
more than opportunities, the environment is to be considered hostile unless
some threats can be converted into opportunities by working on the weaknesses.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 183

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

If opportunities are equal to threats, the matter should be put to vote of the
senior/top management for decision.
The matrix in Table 7.4 can also be presented in a more clear quantitative
form by assigning numbers in places of O and T. Numbers would indicate
relating significance of opportunities and threats . Opportunities will have positive
signs; threats will have negative signs. On this basis, the matrix and the outcome
of SWOT analysis can be reformulated as shown in Table 7.5.
Table 7.5 SWOT Analysis for an International Retail Chain
Seeking Entry into the Indian Market
KEY ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Strength/Weaknesses
Major Strengths
Capacity to innovate
Market research
Global base/International
brands
Major Weaknesses
New in India/Developing
countries
Existing brand suited for
the US/European markets
High cost products
O (Opportunity)
T (Threats)
OT

New
Technology

Customer Choice Competition


& Preferences

Market International
Growth
Exposure

2
3

2
2

2
2

2
2

3
2

2
2

1
1

1
2

1
5
1
4

2
7
7
0

3
6
7
1

1
7
1
6

1
11
0
11

indicates neither opportunity nor threat

Pearce and Robinson (2002) have suggested an alternative form of SWOT


analysis more directly in terms of strategy. Based on four different combinations
of strengths and weaknesses and opportunities and threats, four strategic
situations develop. These four strategic situations imply four different strategic
actions: aggressive strategy, diversification strategy, defensive strategy and
turnaround type strategy. These are shown in Figure 7.5. Cell 1 is the most
favourable situation ; there are several environmental opportunities and the
organization has substantial internal strengths to exploit opportunities. Such
condition suggests aggressive growth strategies to take advantage of the
favourable match between strengths and opportunities. IBMs intensive market
development strategy in the PC market was driven by a favourable match
between its strengths (reputation and resources) and ample opportunity for
market growth. In Cell 2, an organization with key strengths faces an
unfavourable environment.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 184

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

In such situation, strategists should use current strength to create


opportunities in other products/ markets, that is, to go for diversification. An
organization in Cell 3 has plenty of market opportunities, but, is constrained by
major internal weaknesses. Businesses in this cell are like question marks in
the BCG Matrix. The focus of strategy here should be to remove internal
weaknesses to capitalize on existing opportunities, that is, to follow some kind
of a turnaround strategy. Cell 4 is the least favourable situation with the
environment posing major threats and the organization suffering from major
weaknesses. The most immediate strategy in this situation is to defend or sustain
current position. Organizations in this cell should also work on internal
weaknesses or competences to be able to negotiate environmental threats as
Chrysler Corporation did in the 1980s when analysis revealed that the company
was in Cell 4.
Numerous
environmental
opportunities

Critical
internal
weaknesses

Cell 3: Supports
a turnaroundoriented strategy

Cell 1: Supports
an aggressive
strategy

Cell 4: Supports
a defensive
strategy

Cell 2: Supports
a diversification
strategy

Substanial
internal
strengths

Major
environmental
threats

Figure 7.5 SWOT Analysis and Recommended Strategies


Source: I A Pearce II, and R B Robinson Jr, Strategic Management, 3rd ed. (Irwin Series
in Management, Reprint India, 2002), 274.

All the four strategies mentioned above, i.e., aggressive or offensive


strategy, defensive strategy, turnaround strategy and diversification strategy
would be discussed in details in the later units.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 185

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

SWOT analysis, as presented in Tables 7.4 and 7.5 and also Figure 7.5
involves subjectivity.
Judgement of the strategic planning group or SWOT analysis team plays
a very important role.
Therefore, no SWOT analysis should be taken as exact. This should be
understood as a good approximation to matching a companys strengths and
weaknesses with key environmental factors as opportunities or threats. This
should be always done with respect to a particular business (e.g., entry of an
international retail chain in India as shown above). Such analysis, however, is
an essential starting point for a more detailed and rigorous exercise on strategic
investment decisions in terms of costs and returns and organizational objectives
and priorities.
As mentioned, SWOT analysis gives the initial signalspositive or
negativefor launching of a project or product, market entry, etc. Even if initial
SWOT analysis is not favourable, i.e., threats outweigh opportunities, this does
not mean that the project has to be abandoned. This, in fact, provides basis for
re-examination of the strengths and weaknesses and the possibility of converting
some weaknesses into strengths by investing more resources and improving
skills and capabilities. This would make possible conversion of some of the
threats into opportunities so that matching improves (Figure 7.6) and the project
can still be considered on the basis of investment levels and costs and returns
analysis.

Figure 7.6 SWOT Analysis: a Continuing Process


Source: F R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases (2003), 111.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 186

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

Activity 2
Choose a company or organization that you are familiar with and conduct a
SWOT analysis for it. Analyse the results.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. A _______is a resource, skill, capability or any other advantage relative
to competitors and in relation to markets.
16. A _________is a limitation or deficiency in resource, skills and capabilities
or any other disadvantage relative to competitors which impedes
performance of an organization.

7.8 Case Study


General Motors: Slow Response to Environmental Demand
In the 1970s, General Motors (GM) was the largest automobile manufacturer
in the world, with a market share of more than 50 per cent. In 2005, GMs
market share was just about 25 per cent and it was still declining. GM
remained (in 2005) the largest automobile manufacturer in the world, but,
Toyota (No. 2) was fast catching up because of its competitiveness in terms
of quality and differentiated products. According to one automobile analyst:
GM has found itself stuck in second gear for a quarter of a century. Another
analyst observed: The bedrock principle upon which GM was builtoffering
a car to feed every market segmenthas degraded into a series of contrived
brands, most with little identity and bland, overlapping product lines.
GMs problems are too many. Managerial ego or lethargy (which often leads
to inaction or inefficiency) is one of the more important ones. The company
failed to quickly adapt to earlier demand for compact cars and more recent
trend towards hybrid vehicles. It has negotiated badly with unions incurring
massive costs and creating future liabilities. Due to such commitments and
costs, the company has made compromises in car design and engineering.
The result has been automobiles with outdated designs unable to compete
with more modern and attractive models from competitors like Toyota and
others.*

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 187

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

GM has also become quite bureaucratic in its management approach


implying slow systems and proceduresoften non-responsive to situations.
GMs senior executives have shown a tendency for poor strategic decisions
and inability to capitalize on opportunities in the market. Here is an example.
GM was an early mover into China. It invested more than $1 billion in China
since 1998. But, because of intense competition, it suffered a 35 per cent
decline in sales during 2005 in Shanghai, the largest automarket in China.
In contrast, Hyundai and a local company, Chery, increased their sales
substantially during this period. This means that those competitors have
outweighed GM in designing and manufacturing cars which Chinese buyers
want.**
Because of organizational inertia for response to changing environmental
conditions, GM has landed itself into the present serious situation. An
important development took place for GM in 2009. Billionaire investor Kirk
Kerkorian increased his stake in GM to approximately 9 per cent. To ensure
adequate return on his investment, Kerkorian might urge GMs Board of
Directors to sell off non-core assets, cut costs or restructure the bloated
auto business faster than current management appears inclined to do.
But, can GM do it? And, if so, how soon? We must remember that we are
in the auto generation of 2010. Speed and adaptability are vital for survival
and success.
* M A Hitt et al., Management of Strategy, Indian Edition (Cengage Learning,
2007), 139.
**M A Hitt et al., (2007), 139.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 188

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

7.9 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
The external environment consists of a large number of factors which
influence a companys business. Major environmental factors are: political
factors, economic factors, sociological factors, government policies/
controls, technology, competition intermediaries and suppliers.
Organizations should be generally concerned with relevant environment
and operating environment. The operating environment, also known as
competitive environment consists of factors in the immediate competitive
situation like customer profile, level of competition, the industry structure,
technology, any specific regulations affecting the company or industry,
etc.
Since the environment is too diverse, scanning of environment (some call
it external audit) is necessary to elicit information relevant to a particular
organization. Environmental information occurs in one or more of four
forms; events, trends, issues and expectations.
To understand the emerging or evolving environment better, some have
suggested environmental forecasting. For environment forecasting, Gap
analysis is a good starting point.
Forecasting is a hazardous exercise, and exactness in forecasting is
hardly possible. That is why many have suggested alternative scenario
building for the futuresay, optimistic, pessimistic and mean scenario.
Shells long-term scenario building for the oil industry is a good example.
For identifying opportunities and threats in the environment, organizations
should undertake environmental appraisal, i.e., assessing the environment
for clearly identifying major opportunities and threats. One method for
environment appraisal, suggested by Glueck, is preparation of an
environmental threat and opportunity profile (ETOP).
Simultaneously with environmental analysis or appraisal (ETOP or EFEM),
organizations also need to assess their internal strengths and weaknesses
to exploit opportunities and negotiate threats. This is done through SWOT
analysismatching organizational strengths and weaknesses with
environmental opportunities and threats.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 189

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

7.10 Glossary
Forecasting: Estimate or prediction of future developments in business
such as sales, expenditures, and profits.
Gap analysis: Projections, over time, of the gap between the desired
change in strategic parameters like sales, profitability, market share, etc.,
and actual change with continuation of present strategy, that is, not
responding to changes in the environment.
Scenario: A detailed and probable view of how the business environment
of an organization may develop in the future based on the analysis of key
environmental influences and factors of change about which there is a
high degree of uncertainty.
SWOT analysis: A tool used by organizations to match their internal
strengths and weaknesses with factors of the environment.

7.11 Terminal Questions


1. Enumerate major environmental factors. Which of these, according to
you, are more important and why?
2. What is scanning of environment? Mention the major sources of
information for environmental scanning.
3. What is gap analysis ? Explain its relevance to environmental forecasting.
4. What is ETOP? Prepare an ETOP for a sports cycle manufacturing
company.
5. What is SWOT analysis? Explain SWOT analysis in the form of a matrix.
6. Explain Pearce and Robinsons form of SWOT analysis. Use the relevant
diagram for the analysis.

7.12 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Economic
2. Consumption
3. life cycles
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 190

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

4. (d) All the above


5. Scanning
6. external audit
7. Trends
8. Information
9. Gap analysis
10. False
11. Scenario
12. Alternative
13. Opportunities, threats
14. Glueck (1984)
15. Strength
16. Weakness

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. The external environment consists of a large number of factors which
influence a companys business. Refer to Section 7.3 for further details.
2. Scanning of environment (some call it external audit) is necessary to elicit
information relevant to a particular organization. Refer to Section 7.4 for
further details.
3. Gap analysis refers to the projections, over time, of the gap between the
desired change in strategic parameters like sales, profitability, etc., and
actual change with continuation of present strategy. Refer to Section 7.5
for further details.
4. Environmental threat and opportunity profile (ETOP) is one of the many
methods for environmental appraisal. It was suggested by Glueck (1984).
Refer to Section 7.6 for further details.
5. SWOT analysis is a tool used by organizations to match their internal
strengths and weaknesses with factors of the enviroment. Refer to Section
7.7 for further details.
6. Pearce and Robinson have suggested a form of SWOT analysis more
directly in terms of strategy. Refer to Section 7.7 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 191

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 7

7.13 References
1. David, F R. 2003. Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, 9th ed.
New Jersey: Pearson Education.
2. Fahey, L, W R King, and V K Narayanan. 1983. Environmental Scanning
and Forecasting in Strategic Planningthe State of the Art. In The Truth
about Corporate Planning: International Research into the Practice of
Planning, edited by D Hussey. Oxford: Pergamon Press.
3. Mandell, T S. 1983. Future Scenarios and Their Uses in Corporate
Strategy. In The Strategic Management Handbook, edited by K J Abert.
New York: McGraw Hill.
4. Pearce, II, J A, and R B Robinson Jr. 2004. Strategic Management. 7th
ed. McGraw Hill/Irwin, Ch.6.
5. Porter, M.E. 1980.Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industry
and Competition. New York: The Free Press.
Endnotes
1

P K Ghosh, Strategic Planning and Management, 10 th ed. (New Delhi: Sultan Chand &
Sons, 2003), 106.

In many industrial markets and some consumer goods markets, intermediaries may be
absent because companies decide to deal directly with the end users. Here, we are
talking of personal selling or direct marketing.

R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases (Pearson Education, 2003), 80.

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy , 9 th ed. (2005), 107

T S Mandel, Future Scenarios and Their Uses in Corporate Strategy in The Strategic
Management Handbook , ed. K J Albert (McGraw Hill, 1983), 10 11.

A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 2 nd ed . (New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill, 2002), 125.

Some prefer to use C in place of W , C standing for Constraints because Weaknesses


sounds discouraging or negative. So, instead of SWOT , it is called SCOT analysis.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 192

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Unit 8

Stability Strategies

Structure
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Caselet
Objectives
8.3 What is Stability Strategy?
8.4 BCG Portfolio Model
8.5 Four Generic Strategies
8.6 Mass Customization
8.7 Strategies for Industry Leaders
8.8 Concentration Strategy
8.9 Corporate Parenting
8.10 When Best to Pursue Stability Strategy
8.11 Stability Strategies in Practice
8.12 Case Study
8.13 Summary
8.14 Glossary
8.15 Terminal Questions
8.16 Answers
8.17 References

8.1 Introduction
Definition of corporate mission, objectives or goals, analyses of internal
competences and resources and the external environment lead to the generation
of business strategies or strategic alternatives. In strategic management literature,
various corporate strategies are mentioned and analysed. Some of these strategies
are corporate-level strategies; some are business-level strategies. Some of these
strategies are more appropriate under certain circumstances than in others. All
these strategies are available to organizations to consider, adopt or pursue. All
such strategies can be broadly classified into three categories: stability strategies,
strategies for managing change and growth or expansion strategies. These are
also called master, grand, generic or basic strategies. These three strategies
along with their major elements or components are shown in Figure 8.1.
We shall discuss stability strategies in this chapter. In this, we shall analyse
portfolio models and other generic strategies, strategies for industry leaders,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 193

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

strategies for challengers or runner-up companies, strategies for followers,


simulation strategy, concentration strategy, corporate parenting, etc. We shall
discuss strategies for managing change and strategies for growth and
diversification in Units 9 and 10 respectively.

Figure 8.1 Corporate Strategies: Stability Strategy, Strategy for


Change and Expansion Strategy

8.2 Caselet
It has been rightly pointed out that if an organization aims for growth, it may
at least achieve stability. Companies have to regularly review their
competence levels, resource base, product portfolios, cost structure or cost
management and, react or respond timely to market developments. Such
an approach has helped Maruti maintains its leadership in the market. The
year 1984 saw the beginning of the biggest success story in the Indian
automobile industry. It all started with the launch of the Maruti 800, a car
that revolutionized the car market in India. The company has not looked
back since then, having sold more than 2.5 million 800s and becoming
Indias best selling car.
Having attained leadership position, a leaders most strategic concern is to
maintain stability or defend its market position for continuing dominance in

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 194

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

the industry. Maruti, too, has not rested on its laurels several new brands
have been launched, including the Maruti 1000, Indias first sedan. Examples
of innovative initiatives include the Maruti Driving School, partnership with
State Bank of India to launch an auto finance scheme and insurance services
at low premium schemes. It is these innovations that have helped Maruti
retain its leadership in the industry and continue its success story.

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Discuss the concept and meaning of stability strategies
Analyse the portfolio model the BCG
Differentiate among four generic strategies and modern modifications
Analyse defensive strategies for a leader
Illustrate the concept of corporate parenting

8.3 What is Stability Strategy?


Stability strategy is most commonly used by organizations. But, the nomenclature,
stability strategy often creates confusion among managers, planners and
strategists. Stability does not mean static. Most organizations, which follow
stability strategy, look for growth and do not remain stable or static for a long
period of time. Therefore, some prefer to call it stable growth strategy. The
basic approach in stability is to maintain present course; steady as it goes.
Stability strategy can be defined as below:
In an effective stability strategy, companies will concentrate their
resources where the company presently has or can rapidly develop a
meaningful competitive advantage in the narrowest possible product
market scope consistent with the firms resources and market
requirements.1

As the definition indicates, stability strategy implies that an organization


will continue in the same or similar business as it currently pursues with the
same or similar objectives and resource base. Three distinctive features of a
stability strategy are:
1. No major change takes place in the product, market, service or functions;
2. Focus is on developing and maintaining competitive advantage consistent
with present resources and market requirements;
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 195

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

3. The strategy thrust is not only on maintenance of the present level of


performance, but also on ensuring that the rate of improvement achieved
in the past is sustained.2
In following stability strategies, companies pursue certain objectives which
are consistent with overall corporate stability. Companies generally have one or
more of the four objectives in view:
1. Incremental growth: Small incremental growth in sales or market share,
sometimes to offset the effects of inflation, is quite consistent with general
corporate stability. This is different from quantum or discontinuous growth
targeted in expansion strategies.
2. Profitability: The purpose is to sustain profitability if it is tending to drift.
The objective is to achieve stability, if not increase in profit.
3. Sustainability in growth: Past growth in sales or revenue should be
maintained so that the company does not become static.
4. Pause or caution: Stability is a phase of caution or consolidation before
an organization embarks on expansion strategies. This can also be a
period of pause or rest after a blistering pace of expansion.
Organizations follow stability strategies because they neither go for any
major internal changes or restructuring nor embark upon any ambitious
expansion strategies. But, stability or sustenance also is neither simple nor to
be taken for granted. It is often said, and correctly too, that if an organization
aims for growth, it may at least achieve stability, but, if it aims at stability, it is
most likely to slip into deceleration. Companies have, therefore, to regularly
review their competence levels, resource base, product portfolios, cost structure
or cost management and, react or respond timely to market developments.
Many models, techniques or strategies pertaining to these are available which
can be important ingredients of stability strategies. We shall now discuss such
techniques or strategies. At the end, we shall make more observations on stability
strategies with reference to these models or techniques and, also as final remarks
on the use of these (stability strategies).

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The basic approach in _________is to maintain present course; steady
as it goes.
2. In stability strategy, the focus is on _____and _______competitive
advantage consistent with present resources and market requirements.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 196

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

3. Organizations that follow stability strategy remain stable or static for a


long period of time. (True/False)
4. Organizations follow stability strategies because they neither go for any
major internal changes or restructuring nor embark upon any ambitious
expansion strategies. (True/False)

8.4 BCG Portfolio Model


The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) model is a growth-market share matrix,
depicting a companys competitiveness (cash flow generation or profitability) in
terms of market growth rate, and, its relative market share. The model is also
known as a portfolio matrix because, on the basis of the BCG matrix, a company
can determine its optimal product portfolio on the basis of cash flow or profitability
analysis of each of its products or product groups in terms of two dimensions,
i.e., market growth and market share. The BCG model is based on the
assumption that relative market share is a good indicator of profitability of a
product or product group.
The BCG model was originally conceived and developed in the early 1970s
for analysis of performance or cash flow generation of strategic business unit
(SBU) of a company. A strategic business unit is a division or a product/product
group unit which operates as a separate profit centre that has its own set of
market and competitors and its own business strategies. The company or the
corporate unit consists of related businesses and/or products grouped into SBUs
which are homogenous enough to manage and control most factors which affect
their performance. Resources are allocated to the SBUs in relation to their
contributions to the corporate objectives, growth and profitability.
The original BCG formulation had used cash use for growth rate3 and
cash generation for market share. Four performance situations of product
groups of SBUs were identified as four quadrants in the matrix, namely, stars,
cash cows, question marks (also called wild cats or problem children) and
dogs. The BCG matrix is shown in the Figure 8.2.
Stars are high market share products or SBUs operating in high-growth
markets. The model predicts that stars will have very strong need to support
their growth. But, because they are in a strong competitive positionthey are,
in fact, the highest-share competitorsit is assumed that they will produce high
margin and generate large amounts of cash. Therefore, they will be both users
and generators of large cash flows. On balance, they should generally be selfsupporting with respect to their cash needs.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 197

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Figure 8.2 The BCG Matrix: Stars, Cash Cows, Questions Marks, Dogs

Cash cows are high-share products or SBUs operating in a low-growth


market. Because of their market position, their cash generation should be high,
but, because the market is assumed to be mature, their cash investment needs
to be small. And these products or businesses should be a source of substantial
amounts of cash which can be channelled to other areas or businesses.
Question marks/problem children are low-share businesses in high-growth
markets. They are assumed to have cash needs because they need to finance
growth. But, they generate little cash. If a question marks/problem childs market
share cannot be changed, it will continue to absorb cash. If, however, market
share can be adequately improved, a question mark/problem child can be
converted into a star. Usually, such a strategy will require heavy investment in
the short run. Improved position should enable it to generate cash, become a
star and ultimately a cash cow.
Dogs are low-share businesses in low-growth markets. Because of their
low share, it is assumed that their progress is low and, therefore, their profits
will also be low or non-existent. Since growth is low, expansion of share is
assumed to be very costly. Dogs are cash users and probably even cash traps
products or businesses that perpetually absorb cash.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 198

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Activity 1
Choose a multi-business company and construct a BCG model for this
company.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. In the BCG model, BCG stands for
(a) Business contact group
(b) Boston Consulting Group
(c) Boston Communication Group
(d) Business Consulting Group
6. The BCG model is also known as _________.
7. The BCG model was originally conceived and developed in the early _____
for analysis of performance or cash flow generation of strategic business
unit.
8. In a BCG model, _______are high-share products or SBUs operating in a
low-growth market, while __________are low-share businesses in lowgrowth markets.

8.5 Four Generic Strategies


Porter (1985) evolved the theory that there are four generic strategic options
available to companies. These are:
Cost leadership
Focused cost leadership
Differentiation
Focused differentiation
Porters theory is based on the concepts of niche marketing and mass
marketing and product proposition to be offered by different companies. Two
dimensions of the strategy analysis are market coverage and basis of product
performance. Porters theory or the strategy option matrix is shown in Figure 8.3.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 199

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Figure 8.3 Porters Four Strategy Options Matrix

Cost leadership strategy is based on exploiting some aspects of the


production process, which can be executed at a cost significantly lower than
that of competitors. There can be various sources of this cost advantage:
i. lower input costs, (e.g., the price paid by New Zealand timber mills for the logs
produced by the countrys highly efficient forestry industry or cheap source of
high quality bauxite for National Aluminium Company (NALCO) in India from its
mines); ii. in-plant production costs, (e.g., lower labour costs enjoyed by Japanese
companies locating their video assembly operations in Thailand); iii. lower delivery
cost because of proximity of key markets, (e.g., the practice of major beer
producers in Europe to locate micro-breweries in or around major metropolitan
cities).
Focused cost leadership exploits the same advantages as in cost
leadership strategy, but the company occupies a specific niche or niches serving
only a part of the total market. For example horticulture enterprise, which operates
an onsite farm shop, offers low-priced fresh vegetables to the inhabitants in the
immediate neighborhood area.
Porter has mentioned that cost leadership and focused cost leadership
represent a low scale advantage because it is quite likely that eventually a
companys capabilities will be eroded by rising costs (labour cost in particular)
or its market position will be challenged by an even lower cost producer of
goods, (e.g., Russias post-Perestroika entry in the world arms market offering
extremely competitive prices).
Differentiation strategy is based on offering superior performance, and
Porter argues that this is a high scale advantage because, first, the producer
can usually command a premium price for its product and, second, competitors
are less of a threat, because to be successful, they must be able to offer an
even higher performance product.
Focused differentiation, which is typically a strategy of smaller and most
specialist companies, is also based on superior performance. The only difference
is that in this strategy, a company specializes in serving the needs of a specific
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 200

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

market or markets. For, e.g., the Cray Corporation supplies super computers
to the aerospace and defence industries.

8.5.1 Best-cost Strategy


Thompson, Strickland and Gamble (2005) have extended Porters four strategic
options framework to include a fifth generic strategy, i.e., best-cost provider
strategy. Best-cost provider strategy is deemed to be a central strategy striking
a middle course between low-cost advantage and differentiation advantage on
the one hand and broad or mass market and narrow or niche market, on the
other (Figure 8.4). Best-cost provider strategy is designed to provide customers
more value for money by incorporating good-to-excellent product features at
lower cost than competitors; the objective is to offer the lowest (best) costs and
prices with same or comparable product attributes as those offered by rivals.

Figure 8.4 Five Generic Competitive Strategies


Source: A A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble, Executing Strategy: The
Quest for Competitive Advantage (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2005), 116.

Box 8.1: Toyotas Best-cost Strategy for Its Lexus Models


Toyota is widely known as a low-cost producer among motor car
manufacturers of the world. Toyota has achieved low-cost leadership,
simultaneously with its product quality, because it has developed
considerable skills in supply chain management and low-cost assembly
capabilities. Its models are also positioned in the low-to-medium end of the
price spectrum where high production volume can lead to low unit cost.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 201

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

When Toyota decided to launch its new Lexus models to compete in the
luxury car market, it adopted a best-cost provider strategy and, not a low
cost strategy. Toyota took four significant steps for designing and
implementing its Lexus strategy:
1. Designing and incorporating a series of high performing characteristics
and upscale features into the Lexus models. This made these car
comparable in performance and luxury to other high-end models like
Mercedes, BMW, Jaguar, Cadillac and others in the same category.
2. Transferring the companys capabilities in making high-quality Toyota
models at low cost to making premium quality Lexus models at a cost
lower than those of luxury car manufacturers. Toyotas supply chain
capabilities and low-cost assembly know-how allowed it to incorporate
high-tech performance features and upscale quality into Lexus models
at substantially less cost than Mercedes and BMW.
3. Establishing a new price point for Lexus by using Toyotas relatively
lower manufacturing cost and beating Mercedes and BMW on pricing.
Toyota believed that with its cost advantage, it could price Lexus cars
low enough to attract price-conscious buyers away from Mercedes and
BMW and also induce dissatisfied Lincoln and Cadillac users (or
potential buyers) to move up to Lexus.
4. Establishing a new network of Lexus dealers, separate form Toyota
dealers, dedicated to providing personalized customer service
unmatched in the industry. This was a very innovative differentiation.
Lexus models have consistently been ranked among the top 10 models
in J D Power and Associates quality survey. In terms of cost and price
competitiveness, Lexus models are several thousand dollars cheaper
than those of comparable Mercedes and BMW models. This is a clear
indication that Toyota has succeeded in becoming a best cost producer
with its Lexus cars.
Source: Adapted from A A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble (2005),
131 (Illustration Capsule 5.3).

Self-Assessment Questions
9. In Porters theory the four generic strategic options available to companies
include cost leadership, focused cost leadership, differentiation and
______.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 202

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

10. Porters theory is based on the concepts of ______ and mass marketing
and product proposition to be offered by different companies.
11. Differentiation strategy is based on offering superior performance.
(True/False)
12. Best-cost provider strategy is deemed to be a central strategy striking a
middle course between low-cost advantage and differentiation advantage
on the one hand and broad or mass market and narrow or niche market,
on the other. (True/False)

8.6 Mass Customization


Porters four strategic options matrix provides a good conceptual framework. It
can be the basis or starting point for formulation of competitive strategies by
companies. But, because of its simple form, the usefulness of the model today,
as a practical tool of analysis, may be rather limited. Also, the model may involve
major risks if the users act on the assumption that the four alternative strategic
propositions are mutually exclusive, which has been presumed in the model. It
is true that in the 1980s, many western companies assumed that one should
strive to be either a low-cost leader or the producer or supplier of differentiated
goods. Thus, German companies concentrated on premium price, superior goods
market segments. In Spain, on the other hand, lower labour cost stimulated the
establishment of manufacturing processes for serving downmarket pricesensitive sectors.
But, this is in sharp contrast to the situations in the Pacific Rim countries
like Japan and South Korea. In these countries, introduction of flexible
manufacturing processes enabled companies to develop products which offer
both high standards of performance and a low price. Through appropriate cost
performance (technology) mix, these companies succeeded in gaining major
market share in product areas such as cars, televisions, VCRs, video cameras
and watches and, thus gave rise to strategic options not postulated in the
Porterian model. One such option is mass customization. More and more
companies are now adopting flexible manufacturing processes and mass
customization as strategy. Motorola offers more than 29 million different
combinations of pager features to suit specific customer needs. L&T is one of
the engineering companies to adopt flexible manufacturing technologies. Even
McGraw Hill, the book publishing company, customizes specialized textbooks
in quantities or numbers of 100 or more.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 203

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

On the basis of such developments, it is logical to argue that companies


can increase the nature and number of strategic options available to them by
adding the choices of multi-performance and mass customization to traditional
Porterian strategic options matrix. Such modified matrix may increase the number
of options from four to nine. Chaston (2000) has suggested one such expanded
matrix. This is shown in Figure 8.5.

Figure 8.5 An Expanded Strategic Options Matrix


Source: I Chaston, New Marketing Strategies (New Delhi: Response Books, 2000), 55.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Development of products which offer both high standards of performance
and a low price has been made possible through
(a) appropriate technology mix
(b) mass customization
(c) flexible manufacturing processes
(d) All the above
14. The usefulness of Porters model today, as a practical tool of analysis,
may be rather limited because of its
(a) simple form
(b) complex form
(c) flexibility
(d) None of the above

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 204

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

8.7 Strategies for Industry Leaders


Industry or market leaders typically employ proven strategies linked either to
low cost or differentiation or best cost or mass customization; these strategies
are, in turn, based on their core competence or distinctive competence or
capabilities. We have many examples of companies which have demonstrated
this: Walmart, Microsoft, McDonalds, Gillette, Nokia, AT&T, Intel, Dell Computer,
Kodak, Levi Strauss, Sony, Maruti, Hindustan Unilever, Titan and others.
Stability strategies are very relevant for industry leaders. Having attained
leadership position, a leaders most strategic concern is to maintain stability or
defend its market position for continuing dominance in the industry. Leaders
generally employ one of the four defensive strategies (Figure 8.6).
Position defence
Counter offensive
Retreat
Pre-emptive defence

Figure 8.6 Four Defensive Strategies


Source: I Chaston, New Marketing Strategies (Response Books, 2000), 80.

We shall discuss each of these strategies below with particular focus on


pre-emptive strategies.

8.7.1 Defensive Strategies


The classic form of retaining existing (civil) territory is to mount a position defence
by constructing strong ramparts to keep out the enemy. In business, position
defence is typically built by developing high levels of customer loyalty. But, the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 205

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

problem with many organizations is that the defender often becomes complacent
and, does not realize that the enemy is making slow, but steady, inroads into
the customer base. One of the unfortunate examples of this situation is IBM.
The company built a big global business in the computer industry based on
unmatched customer loyalty. But, IBM ignored the threats, may be unknowingly,
posed by the advent of the networked PC and more powerful operating systems.
The company realized, rather late in the 1990s, that customer loyalty had been
completely eroded by competitors who were more strongly committed to fulfilling
the changing needs of customers.
Counter-offensive strategy has a different advantage. It has the advantage
of not having to respond before one measures up the real nature of the
competitive threat. Nevertheless, it is a belated response, and there is always
the risk that by waiting until you see the whites of the enemys eyes, a company
may be forced to spend massive resources to recover lost grounds. Xerox
Corporation is an example. Xerox had been forced to make large investments
in R&D, technology, manufacturing process and organizational structure during
the last few years to regain some of the lost ground in the photocopier market
to competitors such as Canon.
Retreat is sometimes a good defence. After a careful review of
circumstances, if it is evident that the competitor has the potential to overwhelm
the company, then there may be very little logic in defending a position which
will be eventually lost to the enemy. Under these conditions, the defender may
well withdraw to a more protected segment of the market; and in the meantime,
try to determine how the development of new superior product/service packages
might make a recovery of the lost market position possible at a later stage.
Lotus is a good example of this. During the 1980s, Lotus lost its dominant position
in the computer-based spreadsheet market to new software products such as
Microsofts excel package. After being acquired by IBM, Lotus is now using its
world beating Lotus Notes as a platform from where it can reposition itself as
the leading provider of Internet-based group ware communication systems.

8.7.2 Pre-emptive Strategies


Attack is the best form of defence is the basis of pre-emptive defence strategies.
As the name indicates, in pre-emptive defence strategies, companies, after
having identified a possible threat, take action ahead of competitors. An excellent
example of this strategy is Microsoft. Microsoft watches advances made by
competitors in the software industry and quickly moves to introduce another
upgrade to sustain its market leadership position.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 206

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Pre-emption is considered by many as one of the smartest strategies.


Pre-emption, as a strategy, requires a close understanding of the planned and
potential moves of competitors for slowing down or blocking those moves. To
develop pre-emptive strategies, companies need to consider five steps.
1. Ascertain where the market or competitors are moving or might move;
2. Identify potential strategies for getting there first or for blocking the
competitors moves;
3. Ascertain whether these strategies are consistent with the companys
current strategic goals;
4. Determine whether these strategies are feasible in terms of resources
and competences;
5. Determine whether and how far they are likely to affect the competitors
objectives, actions and reactions.
The ability to pre-empt requires companies to be creative or innovative.
In fact, creativity or innovation is often a key resource in pre-emption. It allows
companies to see the unexpected opportunity, threat or competition and design
the strategy in advance.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. In business, _______is typically built by developing high levels of customer
loyalty.
16. When companies, after having identified a possible threat, take action
ahead of competitors, it is called________.
17. Brainstorming sessions, analogies and war games and simulations are
aids or approaches for generating _____strategies (through creativity).
18. _______involve analysis of analogous situations in other markets,
products, industries and countries.

8.8 Concentration Strategy


We have enumerated above a number of models, techniques and strategies,
which can be used by companies to remain in business or sustain stability, and,
also to secure growth (incremental). Different companies may adopt different
strategies or some combinations of these strategies depending on the particular

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 207

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

product, market and environmental situations. The use of these strategies should
help companies to concentrate better in their present markets.
One of the commonest stability strategies is concentration on the current
business. An organization directs its resources to the profitable growth of a
single product, in a single market and with a single technology4 or a narrowly
defined product and market focusing on a dominant technology.5
The concentration strategy works under certain specific environmental
conditions. First is a market condition in which the demand for the product is
stable and the industry is resistant to major technological change. Paper
manufacturing, for which the basic technology has not changed for almost a
century, is a good example. A second favourable situation for concentration
strategy is when a companys product markets are sufficiently distinctive, and,
the company is strong enough to retaliate if a potential competitor plans to
invade its territory. John Deere abandoned its plans for entering into the
construction machinery business when mighty Caterpillar threatened to enter
farm machinery business, Deeres mainstay, in retaliation. A third favourable
condition for concentration growth exists when a company has stable sourcing
of inputs in terms of price, quantity and timely availability. Maryland-based Giant
Foods is able to concentrate on the grocery business largely because of its
stable long-term arrangements with suppliers of private label goods.
A fourth situation for favourable concentrated growth prevails if market
generalists are effective operators and thrive on general market segments leaving
particular pockets or segments for the specialists. For example, hardware store
chains like, Home Depot, concentrate mostly on routine household repairs and
leave special solutions to the specialists. This also gives the generalists a big
customer base. Finally, concentrated growth becomes successful if the market
is stable and, not subject to seasonal or cyclical fluctuations. Many products
like seeds, pesticides, fertilizers and agricultural equipment have a seasonal
demand and manufacturers of these products may need to diversify into other
products and markets.6
Many companies have been successful by following a concentration strategy.
We have given some examples above. Some other examples are McDonalds,
Dominos Pizza, Good year and Apple Computers. Small and medium enterprises
(SMEs ) are generally more successful with concentration strategy because they
have a clearly defined market and are mostly content with it.
Under stable conditions, concentrated growth poses lower risk than any
other strategy, but, in a changing market environment, this may not produce
desired results. Concentrating in a single-product market segment makes a
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 208

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

company vulnerable to changes in that segment. In the fast changing computer


software market, manufacturers of IBM clones faced such a problem when IBM
adopted OS/2 operating system for its PC line. The change made existing clones
out of date. If the strategic management team feels that the combination of
their current product(s) and market(s) will no longer provide the basis for
achieving organizational objectives or goals, they have two options which involve
both cost and risk: market development and product development. These are
discussed later in Unit 10.

Self-Assessment Questions
19. The _______strategy works under market condition in which the demand
for the product is stable and the industry is resistant to major technological
change.
20. _______enterprises are generally more successful with concentration
strategy.

8.9 Corporate Parenting


In multi-business or multi-SBU organizations, corporate parenting becomes an
important subject for analysis because of its bearing on stability strategies (and
also strategies for change and expansion strategies). Corporate parenting relates
to the manner in which the corporate headquarters or centre manages and
nurtures individual businesses or SBUs. Corporate parent can also be described
as the level(s) of management above business units, and, without direct
interaction with customers and competitors. In corporate parenting, the total
organization is viewed in terms of resources and capabilities which can be
used to develop individual business, and, also create synergies among
businesses. The objective of corporate parenting is to focus on value creation
from the relationship between the parent and the SBUs.
For strategic corporate parenting, Campbell and others have suggested
that multi-SBU corporations should address three issues:
(a) Which businesses should the corporation own and why?
(b) What organizational structure, management systems and strategies would
ensure superior performance of the SBUs?
(c) What should be the proper relationship or fit between the parent
corporation and the business units?
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 209

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

On the basis of the answers to these questions, a parenting fit matrix may
be constructed to depict the positive contributions and negative effects of
parenting characteristics and SBU success factors. Such a matrix is shown in
Figure 8.7. SBU performance is presented through critical success factors
(CSFs). Critical success factors, also called key success factors, are those
which are vital for organizational success. Strategists consciously look for or
identify such factors to become successful. For example, one of the CSFs for
Tata Motors for Indica is to capture the tourist vehicle segment.
As can be seen in Figure 8.7, there are five types of business possibilities
or fit (or misfit) situations: Heartland businesses, edge-of-heartland businesses,
ballast businesses, value-trap businesses and alien territory businesses.

Figure 8.7 A Parenting Fit Matrix


Source: Adapted from M Alexander, A Campbell, and M Goold, A New Model for
Reforming the Planning Review, Planning Review (JanFeb 1995), 17.

Heartland businesses are ideal businesses in terms of parenting fit


businesses where the fit between parenting opportunities and parenting
characteristics is high and the fit between critical success factors and parenting
characteristics is also high. Such businesses should have strong influence on
formulation of corporate strategy because the parent understands their CSFs
well and good opportunities exist for the parent to make improvements.
Expansion strategies are recommended for heartland businesses. Stability
strategies can be used only as a pause.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 210

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Edge-of-heartland businesses show some parenting characteristics which


fit the business well but others do not. The parent has to understand and analyse
these businesses further. With additional investment in terms of resources and
capabilities, such businesses may elevate to heartland category . In the case
of such businesses, the parent has a special responsibility for value addition.
Ballast businesses fit well with parenting characteristics but, do not provide
enough opportunities to the parent for improvement. These are somewhat like
cash cows. Ballast businesses are those which have been established for long
and contribute well to corporate revenue. Such businesses should generally
adopt stability strategies, but, care should be taken to ensure that these do not
slip to alien territory.
Value trap businesses fit reasonably well with parenting opportunities,
but fit poorly with parents understanding of business units CSFs. This may
mean two things; either these businesses do not match the core competences
of the corporation or organizational capabilities or the CSFs need re-examination.
If the CSFs cannot be redefined or reworked, these businesses should be milked,
and, eventually divested. Such businesses can adopt stability strategies for
prolonging the period of milking.
Alien territory businesses show very little promise or opportunity because
there is a misfit between parenting characteristics and business units and also,
poor fit between parenting opportunities and characteristics. Such businesses
can often be the results of misguided diversifications in the past and, are best
candidates for withdrawal or divestment.
As shown in Figure 8.7 and explained above, if there is lack of fit between
parenting opportunities and characteristics and, also between business units
CSFs and parenting characteristics, corporate parenting may not add value to
businesses. In fact, a story is told in a major multinational corporation that,
historically, there had never been a business within their portfolio which, having
been divested, had not done better on its own or with someone else.7
This implies that activities of corporate parents may not always be moving
in the right directions. If parenting does not add enough value to businesses,
the parent may become a cost to those businesses, and may reduce or destroy
value created by them instead of adding to it. There is a clear difference of
opinion among strategic management analysts on whether parenting adds value
or destroys it.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 211

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

Self-Assessment Questions
21. The manner in which the corporate headquarters or centre manages and
nurtures individual businesses or SBUs is called________.
22. Ideal businesses in terms of parenting fit are_________.
23. _______businesses fit well with parenting characteristics but, do not
provide enough opportunities to the parent for improvement.
24. _________businesses show very little promise or opportunity because
there is a misfit between parenting characteristics and business units.

8.10 When Best to Pursue Stability Strategy


Good parenting can help SBUs to follow any strategy effectively including stability
strategies. In large multi-business organizations, some SBUs may follow stability
strategy; some other SBUs may have to adopt strategy for internal change and
restructuring; other SBUs may pursue expansion strategy. Stability strategies
are followed by organizations as corporate-level strategy also. In fact, most
organizations (single business or multi-business) follow stability strategies for a
period of time; some organizations follow this for a longer period than others. It
has been generally observed that as companies/corporations grow older, they
get more rooted in structures and systems and, are more likely to follow a
stability strategy. L&T is an example. We can also identity some specific situations
when it is best to pursue stability strategy:
(a) Perception of management about performance: If the management is
satisfied with present performance and, is not willing to take market risks,
they may like to adopt stability strategy and continue with it. The
management may consider change of strategy only if results are not
forthcoming.
(b) Slowness to change: Some organizations are slow to change or resistant
to change. This is particularly true of public sector companies. Many such
companies are not organizationally equipped for fast or sudden change
and lack the ability to cope with risk and uncertainty inherent in such
change.
(c) Frequent past changes: If a company had made frequent strategic changes
in the past, it should follow stability strategy for some period for more

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 212

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

efficient management. In fact, it is always recommended that, after a


period of internal change and restructuring or expansions, stability strategy
should be pursued as a pause or rehabilitation. Otherwise, the organization
may show signs of destabilization.
(d) Strategic advantage: If an organizations strategic advantage lies in the
present business and market, it should pursue stability strategy. If, for
example, an organization has high market share, it can continue in the
same business and defend its position through incremental strategic
changes.
(e) Profit objective/maximization: Every company has some profit objective
which is commensurate with the level of investment, output level, market
structure, willingness to take risk, etc. If the stability strategy helps the
company achieve its profit objective, the company should stick to this.
Sometimes, stability strategy may even help in profit maximization.
(f) Stable environment: Given the organizational resources and capabilities,
the nature of environment determines, to a large extent, the kind of strategy
to be followed by a company.
If the environment is generally stable in terms of macroeconomic situation,
government policy regulations and competition, stability strategy may be the
best. The particular strategy to be followed depends on the precise nature of
the environmental impact. If the environment is hostile or volatile, stability strategy
is not recommended.

Self-Assessment Questions
25. Sometimes, stability strategy may even help in profit_________.
26. Stability strategy is not recommended if the environment is
_______or_______.

8.11 Stability Strategies in Practice


In practice, many companies in India and various other countries follow stability
strategies. The reasons or situations can be those mentioned above. Such factors
and circumstances relate to conditions in a particular country. In India, in addition
to the situations mentioned above, reasons for pursuit of stability strategy by
companies are of three types:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 213

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

1. Overcapacity or underutilization of capacity;


2. Regulatory restrictions or controls;
3. Lack or withdrawal of budgetary support for expansion.
The steel industry, cement industry and coal industry in India have
overcapacity. This is one of the most important reasons why companies like
SAIL, Coal India and ACC are adopting the stability strategy. Such companies
cannot go for expansion strategies. Instead, they are concentrating on improving
their operational efficiency. Cigarette and alcoholic beverages industries are
subject to regulatory restrictions and there is strict control over expansion of
these industries. Companies in the cigarette industry, like ITC, are going for
growth and diversification in agri business, hospitality business and export.
Many companies in the public sector are forced to adopt stability strategy
because of governments policy of privatization or divestment and curtailing or
stopping budgetary support for any expansion programme. Many public sector
companies in India also adopt stability strategies because of their size, slowness
to change, unwillingness to take risk and the accountability system. Examples
are many: BHEL, BPCL, HPCL, IOC, HCL, RCF, STC, MMTC, etc., in addition
to SAIL and Coal India.
Activity 2
Many examples of stability strategies have been given in the unit. Choose
any two companies and compare the nature of their stability strategies.

Self-Assessment Questions
27. The steel industry, cement industry and coal industry in India pursue
stability strategy because they have _______.
28. Many companies in the public sector are forced to adopt stability strategy
because of governments policy of __________.

8.12 Case Study


Larsen and Toubro: Growth with Stability
Larsen & Toubro (L&T), founded in 1938, is one of the largest engineering
companies and one of the top five private sector companies in India. Over
the years, L&T has acquired a very high reputation for its capabilities in
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 214

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

executing engineering projects. In 1994, Kulkarni took over as the CEO of


L&T and announced that the company would fulfil its mission of being a
`10,000 crore entity by the end of the century. An independent survey named
L&T to be one of the best managed companies in Asia and another by
Business India mentioned L&T as one of the most transparent companies
and a leader in corporate governance. The company adopts a combination
business strategycombination of growth strategy and stability strategy
or growth with stability.

L&T has been setting new challenges in defining core capabilities and core
competence. Generally speaking, core competence of the company lies in
its ability to synthesize, integrate and harmonize its diverse world-class
engineering, manufacturing, procurement, construction and fabrication skills
around turnkey projects mostly in core sectors. This is backed by a world
class vendor base, high quality technological alliances, excellent IT
infrastructure, sophisticated fabrication facilities and its people. People
L&Ts dedicated team of managers/employeesstand for one of the
companys key capabilities.
L&T implements its vision and business philosophy through effective
management approaches. In terms of structure, the company adopts
decentralized decision making and a less hierarchical system. The concept
of SBUs is actively encouraged and implemented. Budget allocations are
made in the beginning of a financial year and SBUs are assigned
responsibilities, along with necessary delegation of powers to achieve the
targets. The CEO directly gets involved only in matters like diversification,
restructuring, business divestment, etc.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 215

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

The company strongly believes in empowerment, teamwork and continuous


training of employees. According to Kulkarni: Only through empowerment
and decentralized decision making can a highly diversified company like
L&T be managed.
The TQM movement, initiated in 1993, has taken firm roots in L&T. Training
of a large number of employees has facilitated the launch of many quality
improvement programmes. A large number of managers and staff have
participated in continuous improvement (Kaizen) and small group activities.
Several cross-functional teams regularly operate in the area of design,
manufacturing, marketing and services. The principles of TQM are applied
to customer service also. The TQM Awareness Programmes have also
been extended to the stockists and vendors to bring improvement in
operations and customer service.
L&T is consolidating its business in four major areasengineering,
construction, cement and equipment manufacture. The company has
identified Engineering Project Construction (EPC) as a thrust business for
the future. In the EPC business, major domestic competitors are BHEL,
Punj & Lloyd and RITES. The core infrastructure sectors such as power,
telecom, and roads are the key focus areas for the country. Most players in
project/construction business have specific competences which cater to
specialized areas. L&T is perhaps the only company which competes in
almost every sector by virtue of its diversified technical competence and
expertise.
L&Ts achievement so far has been highly impressive. It has set a good
example of growth with stability. Its growth has hardly been unbalanced.
However, there are some points of caution or concern. First is global
competition. In international EPC business, the company faces tough
competition from global majors, like Hyundai, Kematsu and Caterpillar. L&T
has partially overcome this through strategic and technological alliances
with major international players. Some of its alliances in certain countries
are even with companies like Caterpillar and Marubeni, which are
competitors in other countries. Another area of concern for L&T is its low
productivity in certain businesses compared to international benchmarks.
Lack of strong/ enough cost competitiveness or cost efficiency is another
relatively weak area. The company needs to take necessary corrective
measures to remain strong in its growth trajectory.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 216

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

8.13 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Organizations follow stability strategies because they neither go for any
major internal changes or restructuring nor embark upon any ambitious
expansion strategies. In following stability strategies, companies pursue
certain objectives which are consistent with overall corporate
The BCG model is a growthmarket share matrix, a matrix depicting a
companys competitiveness (cash flow generation or profitability) in terms
of market growth rate and, its relative market share. The model is also
known as a portfolio matrix, a company can determine its optimal product
portfolio in terms of stars, cash cows, question marks and dogs.
Porter (1985) evolved the theory that there are four generic strategic
options available to companies cost leadership (mass market), focused
cost leadership (niche market), differentiation (mass market) and focused
differentiation (niche market).
Thompson, Strickland and Gamble have extended Porters framework to
include a fifth generic strategy, i.e., best-cost provider strategy. Best-cost
strategy strikes a middle course between the mass market and niche
market on the one hand and, low-cost advantage and differentiation
advantage, on the other.
Stability strategies are very relevant for industry leaders. Having attained
leadership position, a leaders strategic concern is to maintain stability or
defend its market position for continuing dominance in the industry.
Leaders generally employ one of the four defensive strategies: position
defence, counter-offensive, retreat and pre-emptive defence.
Concentration strategy is one of the commonest stability strategies. In
concentration strategy, an organization directs its resources to the
profitable growth of a single product in a single market and with a single
technology or, a narrowly defined product and market focusing on a
dominant technology.
Corporate parenting relates to the manner in which the corporate
headquarters or centre in amulti-business organization manages and
nurtures individual businesses or SBUs. A corporate parent may be value
adding or value destroying.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 217

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

8.14 Glossary
BCG matrix (Boston Consulting Group model): A growth-market share
matrix, depicting a companys competitiveness (cash flow generation or
profitability) in terms of market growth rate, and, its relative market share.
Cash cows: High-share products or SBUs operating in a low-growth
market.
Dogs: Low-share businesses in low-growth markets.
Pre-emptive defence strategy: A strategy under which a company, after
having identified a possible threat, takes action ahead of competitors.
Question marks/problem children: Low-share businesses in highgrowth markets.
Stability strategy: A strategy in which companies will concentrate their
resources where the company presently has or can rapidly develop a
meaningful competitive advantage in the narrowest possible product
market scope consistent with the firms resources and market
requirements.
Strategic business unit: A product/product group unit which operates
as a separate profit centre that has its own set of market and competitors
and its own business strategies.

8.15 Terminal Questions


1. Define stability strategy. Does stability mean being static? Explain with
reference to the objectives of stability strategy.
2. What is the BCG model? Explain stars, cash cows, question marks,
and dogs in the context of this model.
3. What are the four generic strategies? What is the best-cost provider
strategy? Explain.
4. What is the general strategy for the industry leader? Explain, with
examples, the four defensive strategies.
5. What is concentration strategy? Is concentration strategy a stability
strategy? Explain with details.
6. Define corporate parenting. Illustrate both the value-adding role and the
value-destroying role of corporate parent.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 218

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

7. Discuss six situations when it is good/best to pursue stability strategy.


Give some Indian examples.

8.16 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Stability
2. Developing, maintaining
3. False
4. True
5. Boston Consulting Group
6. portfolio matrix
7. 1970s
8. Cash cows, dogs
9. Focused differentiation
10. niche marketing
11. True
12. True
13. (d)
14. (a)
15. position defence
16. pre-emptive defence strategies
17. pre-emptive
18. Analogies
19. Concentration
20. Small and medium
21. Corporate parenting
22. Heartland businesses
23. Ballast
24. Alien territory
25. maximization
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 219

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

26. Hostile, volatile


27. Overcapacity
28. privatization or divestment

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Stability strategy implies that an organization will continue in the same or
similar business as it currently pursues with the same or similar objectives
and resource base. Refer to Section 8.3 for further details.
2. The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) model is a growth-market share
matrix, depicting a companys competitiveness in terms of market growth
rate, and, its relative market share. Refer to Section 8.4 for further details.
3. Porter (1985) evolved the theory that there are four generic strategic
options available to companies. Refer to Section 8.5 for further details.
4. Industry or market leaders typically employ proven strategies linked either
to low cost or differentiation or best cost or mass customization. Refer to
Section 8.7 for further details.
5. One of the commonest stability strategies is concentration on the current
business. Refer to Section 8.8 for further details.
6. Corporate parenting relates to the manner in which the corporate
headquarters or centre manages and nurtures individual businesses or
SBUs. Refer to Section 8.9 for further details.
7. There are some specific situations when it is best to pursue stability
strategy. Refer to Section 8.10 for further details.

8.17 References
1. Campbell, A, M Goold, and M Alexander. 1994. Corporate Level Strategy:
Creating Value in the Multibusiness Company. New York: John Wiley &
Sons.
2. Hasperlag, P. Portfolio PricingUses and Limits. Harvard Business
Review, JanFeb, 1982.
3. Nag, A. 2008. Strategic Marketing. New Delhi: Macmillan India.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 220

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 8

4. Pearce II, J A, and R B Robinson Jr. 2005. Strategic Management:


Formulation, Implementation and Control. 9th edn, New Delhi: Tata
McGraw Hill.
5. Porter, M. 1980. Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analysing Industries
and Competitors. New York: The Free Press.
6. Thompson, Jr, A A, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble. 2005. Crafting and
Executing Strategy: The Quest for Competitive Advantage. New Delhi:
Tata McGraw Hill.
Endnotes
1

R L Katz, Management of Total Enterprise (New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1970).

P K Ghosh, Strategic Planning and Management (New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons,
2003), 204 5.

More cash would be required to support high growth and less cash would be used to
finance low growth

J A Pearce II, and R B Robinson Jr, Strategic Management: Strategy Formulation and
Implementation (New Delhi: AITBS Publishers and Distributors, 2002), 251.

J A Pearce II, R B Robinson Jr, Strategic Management: Strategy Formulation and


Implementation and Control , 9 th ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2005), 203.

J A Pearce, and R B Robinson Jr (2005), 201 02.

G Johnson and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy (2005), 270.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 221

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Unit 9

Strategy for Managing Change

Structure
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Caselet
Objectives
9.3 Corporate Restructuring
9.4 Divestment Strategy
9.5 Liquidation Strategy
9.6 Turnaround Strategy
9.7 Managing Radical Change
9.8 Strategic Change in the Public Sector
9.9 Some Strategic Guidelines for Managing Change
9.10 Case Study
9.11 Summary
9.12 Glossary
9.13 Terminal Questions
9.14 Answers
9.15 References

9.1 Introduction
We had distinguished between stability strategies, strategies for managing change
and expansion strategies in Figure 8.1 (in the previous unit). This distinction should
be clearly understood, because, change is involved in almost all strategies,
including stability strategies and expansion strategies. However, by change, we
here mean internal organizational change. Many companies, during different
phases of organizational life cycles, reach a stage when organizational change
becomes essential for survival and growth. Analysis of such changes, and various
issues related to these, is the subject matter of this unit.
Organizations have to adopt appropriate strategies for managing the
change. Companies commonly adopt one of the four major strategies: corporate
restructuring, divestment, liquidation and turnaround strategies. Besides these,
organizations use strategies to manage radical change and also during period
of uncertainties. Companies may sometimes adopt a doomsday management
approach. Some have also suggested change during good times for progressive
companies. Some of these changes are reactive, some are proactive (Figure
9.1) We will discuss all these in this unit.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 223

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Managing Change

Reactive

Divestment
Corporate
restructuring

Liquidation Corporate
turnaround

Proactive

Managing
radical
change

Managing
uncertainty

Doomsday
management

Change
curing
good times

Figure 9.1 Managing Organizational Change: Reactive and Proactive

9.2 Caselet
Immediately after the announcement of liberalization measures by the
Government of India in July 1991, the Tata Group in 1992 embarked on a
restructuring programme in the form of a strategic plan.
The objective was to create a system of integrated planning, rationalize
companies or businesses, create synergy among overlapping units and
consolidate holdings in the group companies. The strategic plan or the
restructuring programme aimed at reducing the existing 25 businesses and
107 operating companies to 12 businesses and less than 30 operating
units.
In 1996, the group hired McKinsey & Co to prepare a detailed restructuring
plan. As a sequel to the restructuring plan, the group has divested, over the
years, companies/businesses such as Goodlass Nerolac, Tata Oil Mills
(soaps, hair oils and other consumer products), Lakm and TISCOs (now
Tata Steel) cement division. Simultaneously, the group has strengthened
businesses like cement and tea through consolidation. Future plans of the
group include investment in new economy businesses like B2B Internet
service and cellular telephony.

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Analyse corporate restructuring as a strategy
Discuss restructuring in the Indian corporate sector
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 224

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Discuss corporate turnaround strategy: surgical and non-surgical


Analyse divestment as a strategy
Focus on managing radical change
Discuss strategic guidelines for managing change

9.3 Corporate Restructuring


Corporate restructuring means organizational change to create a more efficient
or profitable enterprise. Similar terms which are used for restructuring are
revamping, regrouping, rationalization or consolidation.
Corporate restructuring has three meanings or connotations: organizational
restructuring, business-level restructuring and financial restructuring.
Organizational restructuring means changes in the structure of the organization
changing or reducing hierarchies or delayering, down sizing, i.e., reducing the
number of employees, redesigning positions, reallocation of jobs or portfolios
or changing the reporting system. Business-level restructuring (applies to multibusiness organizations) deals with changes in the composition of a companys
businesses or product portfolios. The changes are done on the basis of
movements in market share or performance of different businesses or products
to improve efficiency or profitability at the corporate level. Financial restructuring
is concerned with changes in financial management in terms of equity pattern
or equity holdings, debt-equity ratio, borrowing pattern, debt servicing schedule,
etc. More common forms of restructuring are organizational restructuring and
business-level restructuring. Sometimes, when major crisis develops,
restructuring may be comprehensive, which may simultaneously involve, rather
combine, business-level restructuring, organizational restructuring and even
financial restructuring. This may happen more during a turnaround situation
(discussed later).
Restructuring is essentially an adaptation strategy. It is about adaptation
to change and is mostly incremental in nature. In contemporary business, most
companies are in the process of constant change. Often older companies require
more restructuring than the newer ones. This may happen for a number of
reasons. First, those companies might have over-diversified including
diversification into unrelated areas; second, the organizational structure might
be very hierarchical not fitting into a dynamic market environment; third, there
might be a conservative financial management system in relation to funds flow
and investments.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 225

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

A survey by the All India Management Association (AIMA) shows that


corporate restructuring is a continuous process, and, in India, it accelerated
after 1991 with the initiation of the liberalization process. The main objective of
restructuring in the Indian companies was to gain customer focus.1
Another research study on corporate restructuring revealed that most of
the restructuring exercises carried out by the Indian companies after 1991 were
at business portfolio level followed by changes in ownership or shareholding
structure. The instruments of restructuring in these companies were primarily
joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and diversification into newly opened
sectors like power and telecom. These are actually expansion strategies and
are discussed in detail in the next unit. The conclusion of the study is that large
traditional business houses, medium-sized enterprises of recent origin and public
sector enterprises are the major participants in restructuring, their primary
concern being delivering better shareholder value.2

9.3.1 Restructuring in the Indian Corporate Sector3


We had mentioned above that restructuring processes are more commonly
observed in large diversified companies. Restructuring programmes in some
Indian companies in the private corporate sector, including multinationals and
public sector are mentioned below. The companies are: Hindustan Unilever,
L&T, Tata Industries, SAIL and SBI (The restructuring by the Tata Group has
been discussed in the caselet above).
Hindustan Unilever
Hindustan Unilevers restructuring plan was christened Project Millennium. This
was primarily a project on business restructuring. This was a comprehensive
transformation programme to restructure the company from being a large,
diversified conglomerate to becoming a configuration of empowered virtual
companies, each built around a single category of products. The objective was
to reduce or regroup over 50 existing businesses into 18 businesses grouped
under seven major divisions: detergents, beverages, personal products, frozen
foods, culinary products, agribusiness and oil-fats. The restructuring programme
envisaged a combination of different strategies including acquisition in the
identified core business, dairy products, animal feeds and specialty chemicals.
Larsen and Toubro (L&T)
L&T had developed Vision 2005 as the basis for its restructuring. The company
had a minor restructuring in 1993 in which it divested non-core businesses like

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 226

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

shipping and shoe manufacturing. The objective of Vision 2005 was to focus
on its core businesses and deliver better shareholder value. The core businesses
were re-identified as engineering projects, construction and software. As part of
the restructuring programme, the company had planned for entering into joint
ventures for cement, tractors and earth-moving equipment businesses.
Divestments are to continue for minor businesses like glass bottles and crown
caps.
Steel Authority of India (SAIL)
SAIL had made massive investments in modernization programmes undertaken
during 199293. The investments later turned out to be untimely, and also the
modernization project suffered from cost overruns and also problems of financial
cost-benefits. This had affected the financial and operations management of
SAIL. Subsequent to this, revival efforts were initiated primarily in terms of
financial restructuring of the company. Restructuring also aimed at business
restructuring focussing on the core business of SAIL, that is, steel, and
intensification of strategies for four steel plantsDurgapur, Bhillai, Bokaro and
Vizagto improve operational efficiency.
The restructuring programme also involved divestment of non-core
subsidiaries like stainless steel and alloy steel or operating them as joint ventures.
State Bank of India (SBI)
Like many other companies, including L&T and Tata Group, SBIs restructuring
plan was also induced by the liberalization measures initiated by the government
in 1991. In 1993, SBI had commissioned McKinsey & Company to prepare a
restructuring plan for the bank. Restructuring was aimed at developing an
international perspective for SBI and making it a world class bank.
Corporate restructuring consisted of both organizational restructuring and
business restructuring. The restructuring process was to focus on profitable
areas or operations to improve corporate profitability. To achieve this objective,
SBI was restructured into different banking groups on SBU model. These groups
are: corporate banking, national (retail and other commercial) banking,
international banking, and associate and subsidiary banking.
Restructuring sometimes involves a retrenchment strategy. Retrenchment
strategy means that a company is aiming at contraction of its activities or
operations through significant reduction or elimination of one or more of its
businesses to improve organizational performance or efficiency.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 227

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Retrenchment is not just incremental contraction; contraction here is more


significant. Retrenchment actually involves trimming the fat and creating a leaner
and fitter organization devoid of unprofitable or unproductive businesses or
activities. In many cases, retrenchment implies a divestment strategy which is
discussed in the following section.
Activity 1
Carry out a research on corporate restructuring and write a case study of
an organization that undertook corporate restructuring to emerge as a more
efficient or profitable enterprise. You can use reference books or the Internet
for your research.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. Organizational change to create a more efficient or profitable enterprise
are referred to as _________.
2. Downsizing, redesigning positions, reallocation of jobs or portfolios or
changing the reporting system is known as ________.
3. Often newer companies require more restructuring than the older ones.
(True/False)
4. A company aiming at contraction of its activities or operations through
significant reduction or elimination of one or more of its businesses to
improve organizational performance or efficiency
(a) adopts retrenchment strategy
(b) changes product portfolios
(c) changes the terms of equity pattern
(d) undertakes divestment

9.4 Divestment Strategy


Divestment, also called divestiture, means selling a part of a companya major
division or an SBU. Divestment is usually a part of corporate restructuring or
rehabilitation programme as indicated above. Divestment can be part of an
overall downsizing or retrenchment strategy of an organization to get rid of
businesses which are unprofitable or which require too much capital or which

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 228

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

do not fit well with the companys other existing businesses or activities.4
Divestment is many a time used to raise capital for new acquisitions or
investment. Sometimes divestment becomes a forced option when an attempt
has been made to turnaround the business, but, has not been successful.
Divestment can be done in two ways: selling a business outright or spinning
it off as an independent company. Selling a business outright is the more
commonly used form of divestment.
A business becomes a good candidate for spinning off as an independent
company if it possesses sufficient resource strength to compete successfully
on its own. Spinning off business into a separate company may be done because
of some strategic reason; may be, it does not fit well with the core business of
the company. If a company decides to spin off a business, one important decision
the corporate parent has to take is whether to retain partial ownership in the
divested business. Retaining partial control is generally recommended if the
business to be divested has good profit prospects. Spinning off a business, with
or without partial ownership, may be done either by selling shares to the public
through an initial public offering (IPO) or by distributing shares of the new
company to the existing shareholders of the corporate parent.5
Selling a business outright involves finding a suitable buyer. Finding a
suitable buyer may be easy or difficult depending on the nature of the business
to be divested. It also depends on the structure, size and growth of the industry
or market. Many times, businesses are sold not necessarily because they are
unprofitable, but because of strategic or environmental reason, say, emerging
competitive threat. Parle Products sold its profitable soft drinks business to
Coca-Cola because the company did not want to get involved into a marketing
warfare with giants like Coke and Pepsi. Also, while selling a business, the
seller company should look for a buyer who finds the business a good fit with
their existing product mix or product portfolio. For example, for Coca-Cola, buying
the soft drink business of Parle Products was a perfect strategic fit. This way
the seller company also gets a good price, that is, the divestment becomes
profitable.
Divestments are common in corporate functioning of multi-business
organizations including multinational companies. From time to time, large
companies sell or spin off businesses and add or acquire new businesses in
conformity with environmental changes and organizational objectives or goals.
The underlying driving force is competitiveness. Given below are some examples
of recent divestments (Table 9.1).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 229

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Table 9.1 Selected Recent Divestments


Parent company

Part/business divested

Acquiring company

Procter & Gamble


Dell Computer
Citigroup
General Motors
DuPont
Voltas
Tatas
Hindustan Unilever
Voltas

Jif peanut butter


Web-hosting division
Citi Capital
Hughes Electronics
Drug Division
Chemicals
TOMCO
Vanaspati (Dalda)
Air conditioners,
Refrigerators
Lakm

J M Smucker
FON Group
GE Capital Fleet Services
EchoStar Communications
Bristol-Myers-Squibb
Ralechem
Hindustan Unilever
Bunge Ltd
Electrolux

Tatas

Hindustan Unilever

Self-Assessment Questions
5. Divestment means
(a) reducing the number of employees
(b) redesigning positions
(c) reallocation of jobs
(d) selling a part of a company
6. Divestment can be done in two ways: _______or spinning it off as an
independent company.
7. Many times, profitable businesses are sold because of ______or
environmental reasons.
8. The underlying driving force behind divestment is ____________.

9.5 Liquidation Strategy


Liquidation means closing down a company and selling its assets. Liquidation
can also be defined as selling of a companys assets, in parts, for their tangible
worth.6 This should be the strategy of last resort when no other alternatives like
turnaround, restructuring or divestment are applicable or workable. Liquidation is
actually a recognition of defeat. But, at some stage of the organizational life cycle,
it is advisable to cease operating than continue to operate and accumulate losses.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 230

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Liquidation should be planned. Liquidation may be the toughest decision


for a company, but, if it is unavoidable/inevitable, it should be done at the right
time and, in a planned manner. Planned liquidation involves a systematic process
for maximum benefits for the company and its shareholders. If liquidation is
unplanned or haphazard, the company may incur avoidable or unnecessary losses.
In India, liquidation is governed by the Companies Act, 1956. In the
Companies Act, liquidation is officially termed as winding. The Act defines
winding up of a company as the process whereby its life is ended and its property
administered for the benefit of its creditors and members. The Act stipulates
appointment of a liquidator who handles the liquidation process. The liquidator
takes control of the company, collects its assets, pays its debts and, finally,
distributes any surplus among the members, according to their rights.7 According
to the Act, liquidation or winding up may be done in three ways:
(a) Voluntary winding up;
(b) Voluntary winding up under supervision of the court;
(c) Compulsory winding up under an order of the court
The Act also provides for dissolution of a company in which case it ceases
to exist as a corporate entity for all practical purposes and, all its operations
remain suspended for a period of two years. During these two years, the company
may be liquidated. Part VII (Sections 425 to 560) of the Act deals comprehensively
with various legal aspects of liquidation including dissolution.
Thousands of small businesses in different countries, developed and
developing, liquidate every year because of unviable operations. Liquidation,
however, is not confined to small business only. General Motors terminated
production of its Chevrolet Camera and Pontiac Firebind in 2002 and closed the
Canadian manufacturing plant when the operation became totally unviable. In
India, Navsari Mills and Swadeshi Mills (both of Tata Group), Binny, Shri Ambica,
Sriram and India United are some of the companies whose products/brands
were quite popular at one time, but, ultimately, had to be closed down. Many
jute mills in eastern India had the same fate. In China and Russia, thousands of
government-owned businesses liquidate as these countries try to privatize and
consolidate industries.
Under certain situations, liquidation is particularly recommended. David
(2003) has suggested three situational guidelines for liquidation to be an effective
strategy:
1. An organization has pursued both a retrenchment strategy and a
divestment strategy, but, neither has been successful;
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 231

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

2. For an organization, only alternative left is bankruptcy; liquidation, in this


case, represents an orderly and planned means of obtaining maximum
possible cash for the organizations assets. A company can legally declare
bankruptcy and then liquidate various divisions or businesses to raise
funds or capital;
3. The stockholders of a company can minimize their losses by selling the
companys assets through liquidation.8

Self-Assessment Questions
9. Closing down a company and selling its assets is known as ________.
10. In India, liquidation is governed by the _________.
11. The Companies Act stipulates appointment of a _______who handles
the liquidation process.
12. The stockholders of a company can minimize their losses by selling the
companys assets through liquidation. (True/False)

9.6 Turnaround Strategy


Corporate turnaround may be defined as organizational recovery from business
decline or crisis. Business decline for a company means continuous fall in
turnover or revenue, eroding profit, or accrual or accumulation of losses. So,
business or organizational decline, like business performance, is understood in
relative terms, that is, compared with the past. But, some strategy analysts
describe business decline in terms of current comparisons also; for example,
relative to industry rates or averages or even relative to economic growth of the
country. Corporate crisis means deepening or perpetuation of a decline.
Turnaround strategies are usually required for crisis situations. If
organizational decline is not continuous or severe, corporate restructuring can
provide the solutions. That is why turnaround strategy may be said to be an
extension of restructuring strategy. When restructuring is very comprehensive
and leads to corporate recovery, it almost becomes a turnaround strategy as
mentioned above in the case of Voltas.
Corporate or business decline manifests itself in many forms or symptoms,
including profitability. These symptoms are actually different performance criteria
of companies. Major symptoms or criteria or situations which signal towards the
need for a turnaround strategy are:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 232

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Steadily declining market share;


Continuous negative cash flow;
Negative profit or accumulating losses;
Accumulation of debt;
Falling share price in a steady market;
Mismanagement and low morale.
With some or all these symptoms becoming clearly visible (these
symptoms are generally interrelated) for a company, a turnaround or recovery
becomes highly imperative. But, the situation should be carefully reviewed to
assess the extent of recovery possible before undertaking any such programmes.
Given a strategy, in some situations, recovery may be more or less successful
than in others. Slatter (1984) contends that there are four recovery situations in
terms of feasibility or success. These situations are:
(a) Realistically non-recoverable situation;
(b) Temporary recovery situation;
(c) Sustained survival situation ;
(d) Sustained recovery situation.
Realistically non-recoverable situation is one in which chances of survival
are very little, because the company is not competitive, the potential for
improvement is low, clear cost disadvantage exists and demand for the
companys product is in decline stage. In such a situation, divestment or
liquidation may be a better option.
Temporary recovery situation exists when there can be initial successful
recovery, but, sustained turnaround is not possible. This can happen because
repositioning of the product is possible.
Some cost reduction programmes may be successful, and revenue
generation is also possible at least for some time.
Sustained survival situation means that recovery is possible but potential
for future growth does not exist. This may happen primarily because the industry
is in a declining phase (say, black and white TV, audio cassettes, VCR). A
company in such an industry or situation can either go for divestment or
turnaround if it foresees or can create a niche in the industry and if the growth
prospects can be created.
Sustained recovery situation is one in which successful turnaround is
possible for sustained growth. In such cases, business decline might have been
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 233

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

caused by internal organizational factors or external or environmental conditions


which the company is able to deal with effectively. Inherently, the company is
strong in terms of competence.9
Surgical Turnaround and Non-surgical Turnaround
Generally, there are two methods of corporate turnaround: surgical and nonsurgical. The surgical method, more commonly practiced in the West, involves
sweeping changes like firing of staff, managers, wholesale reshuffling of portfolios,
closing down operations, etc. Some call it bloodbath or bloodshed. Non-surgical
turnaround adopts the opposite approach, that is, peaceful meansrevamping
or recovery through meetings, discussions, persuasions, consensus, etc.
The operations in surgical turnaround are like this: the first step is to replace
the chief executive of the ailing company by a new iron chief. The new chief
promptly gets into action; he asserts his authority. He issues pre-emptory orders,
centralizes functions and spears some convenient scapegoats. Then he goes
about firing employees en masse and auctioning/selling whole plants and divisions
until the fat is satisfactorily cut to the bone. The bloodbath over, the product mix
is revamped, obsolete machinery is replaced, marketing is strengthened, controls
are toughened, accountability for performance is focussed and so on. How bloody
this sort of turnaround can be may be seen from the examples of companies like
the US video games manufacturer Atari, which, among other actions, cut its labour
force by two-thirds to 3500 to turn itself around. At British Leyland, 84,000
employees (40 per cent) were axed to complete the surgery. At GE, 1,00, 000 of
a workforce of 4,00, 000 lost their jobs; at Imperial Chemical Industries (ICI), the
labour force was reduced from 90,000 to 59, 000; half the staff at Chrysler
Corporation disappeared; at British Steel, half the companys production capacity
and 80 per cent of workforce were gone.10
Turnaround management of the humane type may involve negotiated
and humane layoffs and divestiture, but, not a bloodbath. This type of turnaround
also is generally brought about by the new helmsman. But, he spends a great
deal of time in trying to understand organizational problems and deliberating on
them. He takes all the stakeholders including unions into confidence; forms
groups within the organization to brainstorm together on what needs to be done
to get over the crisis; tries to create a new work culture; and, generally infuses
a strong sense of participation among the employees and many critical decisions
become participative decisions. There are many examples of successful
turnarounds of the humane type including Enfield, Volkswagen, Lucas, Air India,
SPIC, BHEL and SAIL.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 234

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

We give here the example of SAIL, the Indian public sector steel giant. Its
losses were about `100 crore during 198283 and `200 crore in 198384. A price
rise during 198485 saw SAIL break even in that year. But, rapid increases in
coal prices and freight rates threatened a loss in 198586. The steel ministry and
SAIL management then called for another price hike. Krishnamurthy entered the
scene as Chairman, SAIL in mid-1985. He promptly lobbied against price increase
on the ground that efficiency had to be improved. Indian steel was already the
costliest in the world and any further increase in steel price would have ruinous
effects on the economy, contended Krishnamurthy. He spent several months talking
to small groups of executives, officials, staff and workers in SAIL. He estimates
that he talked to over 25,000 employees to identify operating problems, got
perception of how the company was doing and what employees thought should
be done to improve performance and turn around the company. The turnaround
strategy finally emerged from discussions at all levels.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Organizational recovery from business decline or crisis is known as
_______.
14. Turnaround strategies are usually required for _________situations.
15. A situation in which recovery is possible but potential for future growth
does not exist is called_________.
16. Generally, there are two methods of corporate turnaround: _______and
_______.

9.7 Managing Radical Change


Turning corporates around is like implementing or managing radical change.
There is, however, one difference. Corporate turnarounds, as we have just
discussed, are prompted by business decline or crisis. But, all radical changes
do not take place because of crisis situations only. Radical change also takes
place when an apparently insignificant new entrant grows radically to take on
an industry giant or the undisputed leader. Radical changes are also implemented
and managed when a small marginal player grows almost dramatically to become
one of the most dominant players in the industry. Ghoshal and others (2002)
deal extensively with the phenomenon of radical change and how visionary
companies manage them. We shall analyse here management of radical change

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 235

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

with reference to three companies in three different industry situations. These


companies are Hastings Jute Mills, Canon and Electrolux.
9.7.1

Hastings Jute Mills

The management of Hastings Jute Mills (Kajaria brothers) made jute business
attractive by defying the conventional rules of jute business through innovation,
entrepreneurship and transforming the employee-management relationship. The
company has been successful in radically improving productivity and creating
innovative products which have found new use in international markets.11
The jute industry in West Bengal has, for long, been characterized by
sick units and closures. The industry represents one of the worst cases of adverse
relations between the owners and the unions which have been destroying the
jute business. Added to this are stagnant or obsolete technology and falling
market prices.
Amidst this highly hostile environment, the Kajaria brothers took over the
management of Hastings Jute Mills in 1994. In the jute industry, wages are
almost 40 per cent of the cost of production; raw material constitutes 35 per
cent; power accounts for 8 per cent; stores 7 per cent; and, other costs are 10
per cent. Kajaria brothers knew that, to be competitive, manufacturing cost had
to be slashed. They also realized that, as they themselves put: ... to improve
productivity and reduce the processing costs, we needed the cooperation of
labour, and, for this, we had to build a very different mindset.
Hastings had 14 trade unions. The first task of the new management was
to convince the trade unions and the individual workers that, unless both the
management and the unions/workers adopted a win-win attitude, the mill might
close down. The unions were initially sceptical because they always have
apprehensions about the management. But, a major breakthrough in trust
building was achieved when the company regularized about 700 ghost workers.
The goodwill and confidence created by this gesture yielded some result; the
union leaders came to the negotiating table. Their hostility gradually gave way
to understanding; both sides agreed on enhanced productivity norms and
incentive schemes.
But, the biggest achievement of the management was an innovative
training scheme for young workers. The scheme was born out of necessity. At
Hastings, about 200 workers retired every year and the annual gratuity bill was
about `1 crore. But, the company was not earning enough to spend so much.
Instead, the management promised to employ one member of the family of the
retiring worker. In addition to this, the company would train a young member of
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 236

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

the retiring employees family for three years. The management also guaranteed
that the new trained worker would be a regular employee of the company. This
worked well with the unions and the worker community.
The feeling of togetherness and sharing a common destiny by the
management and the workers did not come about easily. It was achieved at a
significant cost. It took four years, two strikes, a lockout and hundreds of
meetings. But, eventually, the results achieved were stupendous. Wage cost
declined from 40 per cent to 33 per cent (from 52 man-days per tonne to 42)
and a saving of `5 lakh per month. In 1998, the Indian jute industry comprised
73 composite mills of which 22 were sick, 25 per cent of installed capacity was
idle and productivity was generally low. But, at Hastings, every mill was busy
and productivity in some section of the mill was 90 per cent against laid down
norms. Turnover accelerated from about `13 crore during 199495 to `43 crore
in 199596 and to about ` 91 crore during 199697. Profits also increased
steadily from `0.9 crore during 199495 to about `3.50 crore during 199697.
Kajarias summarize their changed management success strategy at
Hastings like this: One can buy peace for some time, but, not for always. For
long-term benefits, mindsets have to change and be flexible. We could do this
because we did not inherit the thinking of the old jute dynasties.

9.7.2 Canon
Canon is the second largest global player in the photocopier business, closely
behind the market leader Xerox. Canon is today the biggest challenger to Xerox.
Since the launching of Canon as a small camera company in Japan, it has
successfully stood up to the challenge of radical change or performance
improvement to come to its present position.
Xerox was enjoying near monopoly and almost 100 per cent market share
in the global photocopier market (in 1995, it was 93 per cent). Xerox technology
was protected by over 500 patents. The company had a massive marketing and
service support organization working directly for Xerox in the US and for its joint
ventures abroadRank Xerox in Europe, Fuji Xerox in Japan and Modi Xerox
in India. The company had worldwide manufacturing infrastructure and was
one of the few companies whose brand name became generic for the product.
Photocopying was often referred to as Xeroxing.
Canon, the small camera company from Japan, entered the photocopying
business in the late 1960s. It was less than one-tenth of the size of Xerox and,
had no sales and support organization to adequately service the photocopier

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 237

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

market. It also did not have a process technology to bypass Xeroxs patent. To
make matters worse, Canons entry took place at a time when corporate giants
like IBM, Kodak and 3M were already in the market challenging Xerox. So,
most of the corporate observers were sceptical about Canons plans. One
investment analyst sarcastically remarked about Canon that a photocopier is
not a large camera.12
But, to the amazement of many, Canon rewrote the rules of the photocopier
business during the next three decades. Canon showed, in its own inimitable
way, how photocopiers were to be produced and sold to shake out the market
and progressively snatch market share from the king of photocopying. From
almost insignificant sales, the company amassed an annual turnover of over $6
billion. It even surpassed Xerox in terms of the number of units sold. Clear
evidence of such phenomenal success is visible in Xeroxing by Canon signs in
photocopying shops in different parts of the world, including India.

9.7.3 Electrolux
Electrolux is the global market leader in home appliance business. Electrolux is
a unique case of managing aggressive acquisitive growth. The companys
achievement is spectacular considering the fact that acquisitions and mergers
have a high rate of failure. Transformation of Electrolux has also been very
radical.
Electrolux made almost an insignificant beginning. In the early 1960s, it
was a small and marginal player in home appliances business. The company
had to compete with global rivals like GE in the US, Philips and Siemens in
Europe and Matsushita in Japan. Its product range was very narrow consisting
primarily of vacuum cleaners and absorption type refrigeratorssuch
refrigerators becoming increasingly uncompetitive against technologically
superior compression type refrigerators manufactured by the global competitors.
With outdated production facilities and no inhouse R&D, the company was
making losses. It was, in fact, fast approaching bankruptcy.13
Around this time, Wallenberg, Swedens most influencial business family,
took over the ownership of Electrolux. Changes were made in top management
of the company; and, the leadership of the company was handed over to Hans
Werthen, who became a management legend in Sweden.
During the next two decades, under the leadership of Werthen, Electrolux
started rewriting corporate history. Between 1962 and 1988, the company made
over 200 acquisitions in 40 countries including big names in the US, France,
Italy and Sweden. Most of the acquisitions were strategic successes. In most of
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 238

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

the home appliances businesses, Electrolux established dominant position in


Europe and significant market shares in a number of other markets including
the US, and, had achieved leadership in many technology areas. By late 1980s,
the company had a diversified portfolio of 30 product lines in five business
areas and it became the worlds largest manufacturer of home appliances.

Self-Assessment Questions
17. Turning corporates around is like implementing or managing radical
change. (True/False)
18. A company whose brand name became generic for the product is
(a) Hastings
(b) Canon
(c) Xerox
(d) Electrolux

9.8 Strategic Change in the Public Sector


Change during good times is not confined to the private sector only. The public
sector is also realizing the advantages of this. This is always less costly in
terms of resources and, more justified in terms of cost-benefits. This is the
reason why big and well-performing public sector companies like ONGC, IOC,
GAIL, BPCL and HPCL are implementing change during good times.
Deregulation, competition and newly discovered global ambitions are
prompting these PSEs to re-invent themselves as organizations which can
compare with the best in the private sector (benchmarking). These PSEs realize
that to move to the next level, they need to develop internal managerial talent
which will embrace change. Most of these companies have undertaken a
competency-based mapping of its people, and, then, devised developmental
programmes based on a gap analysis.14
Several of these PSEs have engaged top-notch management consultants
to guide the change process. ONGC commissioned the services of McKinsey &
Co. to deliver a solution which could help in optimizing manpower and, also
overhauling the existing manning norms and practice.
According to Balyan, Director, HR, ONGC: We felt that though technical
developments had taken place in ONGC, the people development hadnt kept
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 239

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

pace. To fill this gap, Project R3roles, rosters and responsibilitywas


undertaken to define each activity and number of people required for that activity,
and the role of each person defined to the smallest detail. Contends Balyan:
Now we have benchmarked ourselves with the best of international companies.
Chairman Raha himself had been leading the change in ONGC.
HPCL realizes that, for a world class future, companies need to adopt the
best practices, and, follow the best thought leaders. To fulfil the dream of a
world class company, HPCL is benchmarking itself against global oil majors like
British Petroleum. BPCL, in collaboration with the Public Enterprises Selection
Board (PSEB), has even come out with a compulsory model for Indian CEOs
based on a study conducted by the Hay Group. For the company, that is the
path to the future.
As these PSEs negotiate change, each one of them is experimenting
with and exploring new possibilities. Some are going through a process of
corporate introspection since a leap to the next level should also involve an
overhaul of old value systems. IOC, for example, is trying to develop a set of
values which embodies the new vibrant organization that it wants to move
towards. The company conducted a workshop for developing an entirely new
value system from the positive stories told by people about their most moving
interactions with one another. Transformation of values means that the urge to
change runs deep in these organizations.
Implementing change in any organization, particularly a public sector
organization, is a tough task because people resist change. But, each of the
PSEs has devised ways to manage the change process. As part of its
organizational transformation project, HPCL has trained 20 coaches from
various departments who are preaching change. This has inspired the entire
organization. Everyone in HPCL wants to participate in the programmes now.
ONGC has 60 change agents who are promoting change. Sentiment is similar
in GAIL. According to Banerjee, CMD, GAIL: We pushed the change initiatives
and we have less and less people voicing apprehension and reservations.
In all these PSEs, change is giving new directions to the companies. The
leaders are also finding changes satisfying and viewing them as a critical
component of future strategy of their companies. The company has gone through
a large transformation and a sea change not only in attitudes and appearances,
but, in every little activity we do, says Banerjee. Balyan, Director, HR, ONGC,
concurs with Banerjee : ONGC is changing and changing very fast. We make
comparisons with other companies and, we feel proud. Whats more, peoples

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 240

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

expectations have changednow they look for excellence and want to compete
with the best.
A common feature in managing change during good times in different
companies, like a turnaround and doomsday management, is the pivotal role of
the leaders in these companies.
Leaders become the most important change agents: Welch in GE,
Ganguly, Dutta and Dadiseth in HUL, Palmisano in IBM, Raha in ONGC, Banerjee
in GAIL, etc.
Activity 2
We have discussed strategic change in public sector enterprises in India.
Choose any two public sector companies that have undergone such changes
and carry out a comparitive analysis of the strategic changes in these
companies.

Self-Assessment Questions
19. Public sector companies are not implementing change in their
organizations. (True/ false)
20. PSEs are benchmarking themselves against the best in the private sector.
(True/False)

9.9 Some Strategic Guidelines for Managing Change


So far we have discussed different kinds of change and various strategies
adopted by companies for managing change. We have also analysed different
organizational situations, environmental factors, change agents, leadership, etc.
From all these, we can formulate some general guidelines for managing change
which can be followed by companies. Kanter et al. (1992) have formulated a set
of comprehensive guidelines for managing organizational change. They call
these 10 commandments for executing change. These are analysed below:
1. Analyse the organization and its need for change
(a) Understand an organizations business and operations;
(b) Analyse how the organization functions in its environment;
(c) Determine what are the organizational strengths and weaknesses; and
(d) Examine how the organization will be affected by proposed changes.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 241

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

2. Create a shared vision and common direction


One of the first steps in engineering change is the creation of a common vision.
It is like an organizational dreamit stretches the imagination and motivates
people to rethink what is possible.
3. Deviate from the past (or pattern breaking)
It is difficult for an organization to create or uphold a new vision for the future
until it has isolated the structures, practices and routines which no longer work
and has decided to move beyond them.
4. Create a sense of urgency
It is critical to rally an organization for change. Sense of urgency for change
does not exist in most organizations; it has to be created.
5. Support a strong leaders role
Leaders, as change drivers, play a pivotal role in creating a companys vision
and evolving an organizational structure which consistently rewards those who
contribute towards realization of the vision.
6. Line-up support/sponsorship
Leadership alone may not be able to bring about large-scale change. The leaders
success depends on a broader base of support from individuals or institutions
which first act as followers, then as helpers, and finally, as co-owners of change.
This coalition building should include the holders of important organizational
resources.
7. Design an implementation plan
Changing strategy without a proper implementation plan may not succeed.
Implementation involves what to do, when to do and how to do. This change
plan is a road map for execution of change.
8. Develop enabling structures
These may range from the symbolicsuch as changing the organizations name,
logo, lay out/interiors, etc.,to the practicalsuch as setting up pilot tests,
workshops, training programmes, new reward systems, etc.
9. Communicate and involve people
Open communication and involvement of people (managers and staff) are
effective tools for overcoming resistance and, giving employees a personal stake
in the transformation process and the outcome of it.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 242

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

10. Reinforce and institutionalize change


Managers and leaders should continually exhibit their commitment to the
transformation process, reward risk taking and incorporate new attitudes and
values. This phase refers to shaping and reinforcing a new culture that fits with
the revitalized organization.15

Self-Assessment Questions
21. The 10 commandments for executing change were given by ________.
22. One of the first steps in engineering change is the creation of a _________.

9.10 Case Study


Restructuring of Samsung
Organizations in general, and multinational companies in particular, revise
or reformulate their business strategies over time in response to changes
in the environment or market. This has also happened in Samsung.
During the Asian financial crisis in the 1990s, many Korean companies
were under severe stress. Samsung was one of them. The company decided
to undertake strategic changes to overcome the problems it was facing.
During the planning for restructuring, Samsung was convinced that the old
model, which had served the company for so long, was not relevant any
more. It was looking for a new model and, therefore, a change in strategic
focus. Accordingly, a change model was formulated. The major elements
of the change model were as follows.
From chasing market share, the model changed to seeking value
creation and profitability
The company needed to be innovative for creating products and markets
The organization was looking for a new thought process, systems and
a new set of skills
The company had to build on creating brand equity and using R&D for
new product development
The company needed a new marketing formula in 2000; by 2001, it
should become a truly global brand strategy.
The cornerstone of the change model was exploitation of the digital
technology. To have a global brand strategy, Samsung needed great
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 243

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

products for securing sustainable competitive advantages. The thrust came


from the companys leadership, since the 1980s, in digital technology. Taking
advantage of the early adopters (young age people) who were open to new
ideas and were changing to digital, brand building was launched with all
earnestness. The company seized the opportunity by concentrating on
wireless phones, digital audio, MP3 and video DVD and digital personal
information management; thus digitalizing homes, mobiles and offices.

The marketing and advertising strategy laid focus on the single brand
Samsung instead of several brands they were promoting earlier when each
country manager/head was following his own advertising. Samsung
established a single brand, a single-brand strategy and one global agency.
In addition to this, it had a single central budget and a uniform brand theme.
The process of change and strategic transformation faced some resistance
from traditional managers who generally suffer from inertia against change.
But, the top management was committed to the change and new strategy,
and it was carried through. The restructuring process was successful in reestablishing brand Samsung.

9.11 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Corporate restructuring means organizational change to create a more
efficient or profitable enterprise. It may involve organizational restructuring
or business-level restructuring or financial restructuring, or, some or all of
these simultaneously.
Divestment, also called divestiture, means selling part of a companya
major division or an SBU. Divestment is usually a part of corporate
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 244

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

restructuring or rehabilitation programme. It can also be part of an overall


downsizing or retrenchment strategy.
Liquidation means closing down a company and selling its assets.
Liquidation should be the strategy of last resort when no other alternative
like restructuring, divestment or turnaround are applicable.
Corporate turnaround may be defined as organizational recovery from
business decline or crisis. Business decline for a company means
continuous fall in turnover or revenue, eroding profit or accrual or
accumulation of loss.
Turning corporates around is like implementing or managing radical
change. But, all radical changes are not prompted by business decline or
crisis.
Kanter et al. have formulated a set of 10 guidelines for managing strategic
change. These are: (i) analyse the organization and its need for change ;
(ii) create a shared vision; (iii) deviate from the past; (iv) create a sense of
urgency; (v) support a strong leader; (vi) line-up support/sponsorship;
(vii) design an implementation plan; (viii) develop enabling structures; (ix)
communicate and involve people; and (x) reinforce and institutionalize
change.

9.12 Glossary
Corporate restructuring: Organizational change to create a more efficient
or profitable enterprise.
Corporate turnaround: Organizational recovery from business decline
or crisis.
Divestment: Selling a part of a companya major division or an SBU.
Liquidation: Closing down a company and selling its assets.

9.13 Terminal Questions


1. What is corporate restructuring? Analyse corporate restructuring in some
Indian companies.
2. What is divestment or divestiture? Is divestment a part of corporate
restructuring? Explain with examples.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 245

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

3. Explain liquidation strategy. When would you recommend liquidation of a


company?
4. Define corporate turnaround. Distinguish between surgical and nonsurgical turnaround. Explain with some examples.
5. Analyse, with examples, management of radical change. Explain with
special reference to Hastings Jute Mills.
6. Discuss the strategic guidelines for managing change as suggested by
Kanter, et al.

9.14 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Corporate restructuring
2. Organizational restructuring
3. False
4. (a) adopts retrenchment strategy
5. (d) selling a part of a company
6. selling a business outright
7. strategic
8. competitiveness
9. Liquidation
10. Companies Act, 1956
11. liquidator
12. True
13. Corporate turnaround
14. Crisis
15. Sustained survival
16. Surgical, non-surgical
17. True
18. (c) Xerox
19. False

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 246

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

20. True
21. Kanter, et al
22. common vision

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Corporate restructuring means organizational change to create a more
efficient or profitable enterprise. Refer to Section 9.3 for further details.
2. Divestment means selling part of a companya major division or an SBU.
Refer to Section 9.4 for further details.
3. Liquidation means closing down a company and selling its assets. Refer
to Section 9.5 for further details.
4. Corporate turnaround may be defined as organizational recovery from
business decline or crisis. Refer to Section 9.6 for further details.
5. Turning corporates around is like implementing or managing radical
change. Refer to Section 9.7 and 9.7.1 for further details.
6. Kanter et al. have formulated a set of 10 guidelines for managing strategic
change. Refer to Section 9.9 for further details.

9.15 References
1. Balogun, J, and V H Hailey. 1997. Exploring Strategic Change. London:
Prentice Hall.
2. Dumaine, B. Let the Bad Times Roll. Business Today (Reprinted from
Fortune), August, 721, 1993.
3. Ghoshal, S, G Piramal, and C A Bartlett. 2002. Managing Radical Change:
What Indian Companies Must Do to Become World Class? New Delhi:
Penguin Books.
4. Hamel, G, and C K Prahalad. 1994. Competing for the Future:
Breakthrough Strategies for Seizing Control of Your Industry and Creating
the Markets of Tomorrow. Boston: Harvard Business School Press.
5. Kanter, R, et al. 1992. The Challenge of Organizational Change. New
York: The Free Press.
6. Slatter, S. 1984. Corporate Recovery: Successful Turnaround, Strategies
and Their Implementation. New York: Penguin.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 247

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 9

Endnotes
1

National Management Forum, Corporate Restructuring ( A Survey of India Experiences )


(New Delhi: AIMA, 1995).

N Venkiteswaran, Restructuring of Corporate India: The Emerging Scenario, Vikalpa


22, no.3 (1997): 7.

This section is based on Corporate Restructuring by Indian Companies in A Kazmi,


Business Policy and Strategic Management, 2 nd ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005),
Ch. 6.

F R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, 9 th ed. (Pearson Education,


2003), 173

A A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble, Crafting and Executing Strategy:
The Quest for Competitive Advantage (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2005), 272.

FR David (2003), 173.

A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management , 2nd ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill, 2005), 208.

F R David (2003), 174.

S Slatter, Corporate Recovery (Penguin, 1984).

10

P N Khandwala, Innovative Corporate Turnaround (Sage Publications, 1996), 72.

11

S Ghoshal, G Piramal, and C A Bartlett, Managing Radical Change (Penguin Books,


2002) 18.

12

S Ghoshal, and others (2002), 19.

13

S Ghoshal, and others (2002), 118.

14

V Mahanta, and D Ganguly, Never Too Old to Rock and Roll , The Economic Times
(Corporate Dossier), August 26, 2005.

15

R Kanter, et al. The Challenge of Organisational Change (New York: The Free Press,
1992).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 248

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Unit 10

Expansion Strategies

Structure
10.1 Introduction
10.2 Caselet
Objectives
10.3 Ansoff Matrix
10.4 Penetration Strategy for Growth in Existing Markets
10.5 Product Development in Existing Markets
10.6 New Product Development
10.7 Market Development for Existing Products
10.8 Expansion through Diversification
10.9 Strategic Alliance
10.10 Joint Venture (JV)
10.11 Takeover or Acquisition
10.12 Merger
10.13 Integration Strategy
10.14 Case study
10.15 Summary
10.16 Glossary
10.17 Terminal Questions
10.18 Answers
10.19 References

10.1 Introduction
Securing competitive advantage, controlling market share and generating profit
are not enough. Companies have to constantly look for growth and expansion
because only this can give long-term sustainability in terms of market leadership
or position. Growth here does not mean incremental growth or change as is
understood in stability strategies; this should be more visible or distinct. Growth
or expansion may be defined as distinct increase in sales or turnover or market
share (and also profit). Different strategies can lead to growth or expansion.
These include penetration into the existing market, product or market
development, integration and diversification. Diversification can be in terms of
strategic alliance, merger, joint venture and takeover or acquisition. Corporate

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 249

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

strategists have to consider all alternative growth strategies which are available
and choose the most appropriate one based on the companys resource base,
business assets and skills and the competitive environment. We shall discuss
these and related issues here.
Before we proceed with the main analysis, it would be useful to define
market penetration, product development, market development, diversification
and integration. Market penetration takes place when an organization gains
market share. Product development means that an organization supplies
modified or new products to existing markets. Market development occurs when
existing products are offered in new markets. Diversification means entering
into new product or business and/or new markets which may also require new
resources and competence. Integration takes place when a company enters
into an upstream or downstream or parallel activity in the same product line/
flow. These concepts or strategies would be more clear when we discuss their
applications later.

10.2 Caselet
In todays competitive world, introduction of new products or new product
features has become a main source of competitive advantage. The best
example of this strategy is that of Pepsi Co. For decades, Pepsi Cola and
Coca Cola battled for supremacy in the cola market. In 1996, it seemed
that PepsiCo had lost the cola war, and the proof was everywhere. The
companys profit trailed that of its rival by 47 per cent. However, losing the
cola war was the best thing that ever happened to Pepsi. It prompted Pepsis
leaders to look outside the confines of their battle with Coke. PepsiCo
embraced bottled water and sports drinks much earlier than its rival. Pepsis
Aquafina is the No. 1 water brand, with Cokes Dasani trailing; in sports
drinks, Pepsis Gatorade owns 80 per cent of the market while Cokes
Powerade has 15 per cent.
But Pepsis strongest business lies outside drinks altogether. Over the past
ten years, the Frito-Lay division has become a powerhouse, controlling 60
per cent of the US. snack-food market. So strong is Pepsi in this arena, in
fact, that many investors no longer judge it by how it stacks up against
Coke. Most people think of Pepsi and Coke fighting it out, observes Eric
Schoenstein, an analyst at Jensen Investment Management, which owns

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 250

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

shares of both. But we dont see it that way. Pepsi isnt really a beverage
company anymore: Its a food company that also sells beverages. John
Carey, manager of the Pioneer fund, which has 1.6 million PepsiCo shares,
says he bought the stock because of Frito-Lay: Theres no Coca-Cola in
that business.
Source: http://money.cnn.com/magazines/fortune/fortune_archive/2006/02/06/
8367964/index.htm

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Highlight alternative expansion strategies
Analyse different diversification strategies
Focus on joint venture and issues involved in it
Discuss integration strategy: vertical and horizontal
Analyse takeover or acquisition and post-takeover integration issues

10.3 Ansoff Matrix


We start with Ansoffs (1987) product-market expansion matrix which has been
the basis for further research and development in growth strategies. The Ansoff
matrix is shown in Figure 10.1.

Figure 10.1 Ansoffs Product Market Expansion Matrix

As shown above, expansion strategies are always worked out in terms of products
or businessesexisting or new, and marketsexisting or new. Johnson and
Scholes (2005) have presented alternative expansion strategies in a more
specified form (Figure 10.2).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 251

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Figure 10.2 Alternative Product Market Expansion Matrix


Source: G Johnson, and K Scholes. Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6th ed. (Pearson
Education, 2005), 362, (Exhibit 8.1).

Self-Assessment Questions
1. Expansion strategies are always worked out in terms of _________or
_________.
2. The ________ matrix has been the basis for further research and
development in growth strategies.

10.4 Penetration Strategy for Growth in Existing Markets


A company has a number of ways for penetrating into the existing markets and
generating growth. The most obvious way to grow is to increase market share.
Companies like Bajaj Auto have successfully penetrated the existing market
and sustained their market share. But, this generally happens in a high growth
market or industry (like two-wheelers). Also, one companys share gain is another
companys share loss. Therefore, market share battle increases competitive
pressures, and, market share gain may soon be neutralized, or, in the least,
may be difficult to sustain.
An alternative strategy which may pose lesser threat from competitors
(and which may also ultimately lead to increase in market share) is to increase
the product usage. There are three ways to increase product usage, namely,
the frequency of use, the quantity used and new applications and users. Of the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 252

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

three ways, the last one, that is, new applications and users, may be the most
effective. Cadbury had shown this. Cadbury Dairy Milk Chocolate (CDM) was
the market leader. But, with a market share of already 70 per cent, winning
away customers from competitors in the slow-moving market was almost
impossible. Cadbury found the solution in new users among parents (elderly
people) who were earlier keeping away from CDM.1
The best way to identify new uses or applications is to conduct market
research or surveys. Such research or survey would include ascertaining details
about applications of competing products and brands, that is, substitutes. Cost
of such research or studies, and, also, subsequent advertising and promotion
should be taken into consideration to determine the cost effectiveness of such
programmes. Investment in research should be justified by returns in terms of
results or findings, and, applicability of the results.
Arm & Hammer conducted more than 150 market research studies to
support its programmes for development of new applications and products.
Hindustan Unilever undertakes such studies for its FMCG products on a regular
basis. And, many companies have achieved results. Arm & Hammer succeeded
in achieving ten-fold growth in its baking soda sales by persuading people to
use the product as a refrigerator deodorizer. Sales of Lipton soup increased
when it included recipes for new uses on packets/boxes and in ads that say:
Great meals start with Liptonrecipe soup mix-soup. A chemical process used
by oil fields to separate water from oil is used by water plants to eliminate
unwanted oil.

Self-Assessment Questions
3. The most obvious way for a company to grow is to increase__________.
4. An alternative strategy which may pose lesser threat from competitors
(and which may also ultimately lead to increase in market share) is to
increase the _______usage.
5. The best way to identify new uses or applications is to conduct________.
6. Product usage can be increased by
(a) the frequency of use
(b) the quantity used
(c) new applications and users
(d) All the above
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 253

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

10.5 Product Development in Existing Markets


Product development goes a step further than effecting increase in usage of
products. A simple way of product development is to make additions to product
features. Different variants of a particular car model (say Indica, Esteem or
Ford Ikon) clearly show the additional benefits of augmented features which
help market penetration. A company making PCs can have a built-in software
as additional feature. A company making industrial products or inputs may add
a special feature to the product or input to make it more tailor-made for certain
customers leading to increase in sales. In services, special tour packages for
individual customers are good examples.
Another type of product development may be through product line
extensions. This may also include developing new generation products in the
same category which make the existing products obsolete in terms of technology
or usage. This happens in the electronics field almost on a regular basisbe it
computer, CTV or cellular phone. Introduction of disposable contact lenses by
Hindustan Ciba-Geigy almost meant arrival of new generation products in the
visioncare market.
In product development through line extensions (additional features) or
new-generation products, some issues should be considered to make the
strategy workable or effective. First, is the companys R&D, manufacturing and
marketing functionally integrated to undertake the proposed changes? Second,
is the new product line compatible with the existing product or brand? If it is not,
it may almost be like new product development, and, cost and resource
implications can be quite different. Third, can the existing assets and skills be
applied to the product line extension? If not, there can be asset-skill-product
development mismatch. Philip-Morris underestimated the problems of applying
its existing marketing skills to the 7UP business and, finally gave up because of
lack of success.

Self-Assessment Questions
7. A simple way of product development is to make additions to product
features. (True/False)
8. Developing new generation products in the same category, making the
existing products obsolete in terms of technology or usage is a common
in the ________industry.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 254

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

10.6 New Product Development


A new product adds the third or final dimension to product development.
A company may use its core competence or R&D manufacturing-marketing
synergy to develop a new product which is different from the existing product
lines and, generate additional sales and growth. Originally a machine tool
manufacturer, HMT developed watches as a new product line. With its core
competence in heavy commercial vehicles (HCVs) and light commercial vehicles
(LCVs), TELCO successfully added passenger cars to its product basket. Godrej,
traditionally known for its locks, storewels and refrigerators, has expanded into
FMCG products including packaged tea. There are several such examples in
every country.
One good way of new product development is to use the existing brand
image or brand equity and exploit its market strength for extending it to a new
product category. This becomes particularly useful if the company has an
umbrella brand like Ford, Tata, Sony, Maruti, Godrej, etc. Duracells Durabeam
flashlights, Arm & Hammers oven cleaners, Sears kiosks and storesall thrived
on existing brand names.
Marketers should ensure that the new product does not dilute or damage
the association of the brand through wrong promotions or marketing.

10.6.1 Market Testing


To ensure this, and, also, to ascertain acceptability and commercial viability of a
new product, it is necessary to conduct test marketing before launching the
product. In industrial products, test marketing may be comparatively easy and
simple because of small number of customers. If the prototype development is
successful, the new product can be immediately launched given its cost-benefits
or cost-effectiveness. This may also be largely true of specialized service
products. But, for most of the consumer goods, test marketing is generally
more complex and difficult. In a particular market segment, test marketing should
assess the likely performance of the new product against competitive offerings
(present or expected) in terms of product awareness, trial rate, repeat purchase,
likely market share achievement, etc. In relation to consumer response, there
are four possible outcomes of a test market product as shown in Table 10.1.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 255

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Table 10.1 Possible Alternative Test Marketing Outcomes


Situation

Trial Rate

Repeat Rate

Test Outcome

High

High

Successful

Low

High

Review/Improve

High

Low

Terminate

Low

Low

Rework

In situation 1, the new product can be launched almost immediately. In


situation 2 , the high repeat rate means that the product appeal is positive; but
the reason for low trial rate may be inadequate awareness. This can be rectified
through increased consumer campaigns and promotional activity. Situation 3 is
more worrying. This situation indicates that having tried the product, consumers
remain unconvinced about its merit or performance and, hence, the low repeat
rate. The decision in this case may be to terminate the product launch plan
unless the company wants to make necessary changes in the product features
(that is, go back to manufacturing) to make it more acceptable. In situation 4,
the trial rate and repeat rate are both low, and, this should mean that the test
marketing process is incomplete. The company might not have taken it very
seriously or, there is a missing link in the test marketing process. The whole
process may, therefore, have to be reworked to come to clear conclusions about
the result of market testing.

Self-Assessment Questions
9. Originally a machine tool manufacturer, HMT developed ______as a new
product line.
10. To ascertain acceptability and commercial viability of a new product, it is
necessary to conduct ______before launching the product.

10.7 Market Development For Existing Products


Market development for existing products can take place in two ways; first,
geographic expansion in the existing market segment(s); and second, developing
new market segments.
Geographic expansion in the same market or customer segment would
mean graduating from a local market or, from a regional market to a national
market or, from a national to an international market. Nirma started with the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 256

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

western regional market but, quickly expanded to the national market achieving
significant growth. Indica has moved from the national to the international market;
so, also, many multinational brands like Ford, Honda, Peter England, Levi
Strauss, Ray-Ban and service brands like KFC, McDonalds, Dominos Pizza,
etc.
Expanding into new market segments is another potential avenue for
growth. This can also be more challenging. Cadburys (CDM) rejuvenation is a
good example of expanding into new market segmentfrom predominantly
child market to the market for parents and elders. Johnson & Johnsons baby
shampoo was steadily losing market share till the company turned towards
adults who use shampoo more frequently. Both the Cadbury and Johnson &
Johnson examples show that the most common way to expand into new market
segments is to bring the present non-users into the fold through appropriate
promotion. Companies, should, however carefully assess market viability in terms
of competing products and brands before making investment in the expansion
programme. Federal Express (FedEx) had an unhappy experience. The company
wanted to expand into the European market. But it lacked first-mover advantage
in that market. DHL and some other courier companies had implemented the
FedExs concept much earlier. This seriously affected FedExs competitiveness
in the European market.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. Apart from geographic expansion in the existing market segment(s),
market development for existing products can take place by developing
_______.
12. Cadburys rejuvenation of _____ is a good example of expanding into
new market segment.

10.8 Expansion through Diversification


Diversification, as a strategy, may generate growth in a number of ways. Product
development and market development are two different methods to diversify,
and, we had discussed these two methods earlier. Diversification can also take
place through both new products and new markets. And, a diversification strategy,
whether through product development, market development or both or any other
way, may, mean a new business venture of the company, a joint venture, etc.
We shall discuss here the related issues of diversification and their implications.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 257

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

It is useful to distinguish between related diversification and unrelated


diversification.
Related diversification means that the new business has commonalities
with the core business or core competence of the company; and, these
commonalities provide the basis or strength for generating synergies or
economies of scale or higher returns by exploiting existing resources and skills
in R&D, production process, distribution process, etc. Unrelated diversification,
on the other hand, is less related to the present business and skills and resources
(except financial) and, may mean venturing into an entirely new area. The
company may have to acquire new skills and expertise for this. The main reason
or motivation for unrelated diversification may be high growth potential in terms
of revenue, market share or profitability. There can be a number of other reasons
also.
In strategic management literature, related diversification is more
commonly known as concentric diversification and unrelated diversification, as
conglomerate diversification, although some analysts may like to make some
distinction between the two.

10.8.1 External Expansion or Diversification


Expansion or diversification, related or unrelated (concentric or conglomerate),
into new products or businesses may be internal or external, i.e., it may take
place within the company without involving any other company; or, it may
associate another company as part of the expansion or diversification
programme. External diversification is a common characteristic of corporate
strategy in the developed countries, particularly in the US. In counties like India
also, such diversification is taking place. Expansion or diversification, which
involves another company as part of the expansion/diversification programme,
can be of four major types:
1. Strategic alliance
2. Joint venture (JV)
3. Takeover/acquisition
4. Merger
Activity 1
Carry out a desk research on the diversification strategy of ITC. Mention
the main features of the strategy, focusing on the different products and
markets. You may use the Internet and company literature for your research.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 258

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Diversification cannot take place through both new products and new
markets. (True/False)
14. The kind of diversification in which new business has commonalities with
the core business or core competence of the company is called_______.

10.9 Strategic Alliance


Strategic alliance may be defined as cooperation between two or more
organizations with a common objective, shared control and contributions (in
terms of resources, skills and capabilities) by the partners for mutual benefit.
This definition can be expanded and made more comprehensive in terms of
essential features or characteristics of strategic alliance. A typical strategic
alliance exhibits five essential features or characteristics:
(a) Two or more organizations join together to pursue a defined objective or
goal during a specified period, but, remain organizationally independent
entities;
(b) The organizations pool their resources and investments and also share
risks for their mutual (and not individual) interest/benefit;
(c) The alliance partners contribute, on a continuing basis, in one or more
strategic areas like technology, process, product, design, etc;
(d) The relationship among the partners is reciprocal with partners sharing
specific individual strengths or capabilities to render power to the alliance;
(e) The partners jointly exercise control over the performance or progress of
the arrangement with regard to the defined goal or objective and share
the benefits or results collectively.

10.9.1 Objectives and Forms of Strategic Alliance


The basic objective behind all strategic alliances is to secure competitive or
strategic advantage in the market. All strategic alliances have long-term objective
or purpose. Many companies realize that they do not possess adequate
resourcesfinancial and managerialto pursue an innovation, develop a new
product or technology. They look towards other organizations to supplement or
augment their resources or capabilities for the fulfilment of their objective. It can
also be a functional area where they have very little expertise. Different authors
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 259

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

have analysed the objectives or purposes or reasons for strategic alliance. Six
objectives or purposes are more commonly observed:
(a) Development of a new product: In the pharmaceutical industry, new product
development takes place on a continuous basis, and, in this, many strategic
alliances are formed between pharmaceutical companies and research
laboratories and institutions for R&D. We have already given the example
of Boeing and their Japanese partners.
(b) Development of a new technology: Development of technology is a longterm process, and, also, many times, involves considerable cost.
Collaboration leverages the resources and technical expertise of two or
more companies.
(c) Reducing manufacturing cost: Co-production, common in the
pharmaceutical industry, is a good form of strategic alliance to reduce
manufacturing cost through economies of scale.
(d) Entering new markets: This is often the objective in international business.
Many foreign companies enter into strategic alliances with some local
companies (host country) to enter into and establish themselves in that
country. Piggybacking is a common form of strategic alliance. Some of
the Japanese electronic manufacturing companies like Matsushita
Electricals, during their initial years, had entered into strategic alliances
with some US electrical or electronic manufacturers for entering into the
US market.
(e) Marketing and Sales: This is common in both national and international
business. Many manufacturers in India have marketing and sales
arrangements with companies like MMTC and Tata Exports for both
domestic and international marketing.
(f) Distribution: In pharmaceutical and other industries where distribution
represents high fixed cost, potential competitors swap their products for
distribution in the respective markets where they have well-established
distribution systems. Many such alliances exist between the US and
Japanese pharmaceutical companies.
Strategic alliances are non-equity based, i.e., none of the parties invest
any equity capital in such alliances. But, funding is involved and funding can be
by one of the parties or all of them. The nature of funding depends on the type
of strategic alliance, i.e., whether new product development, technology
development or transfer, marketing or sales, etc., and also the parties involved.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 260

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

For example, if research laboratories or institutions are involved, most of the


funding is done by the corporate concerned.
As mentioned above, many areas of businessfrom R&D to distribution
provide scope for strategic alliance. In the semi-conductor industry, many
companies in the US and Japan feel short-handed in their R&D, and they swap
licences. In a multiple alliance, which includes both technology and operations,
Samsung Electronics and IBM Korea have entered into an agreement to swap
patents for design and manufacture of semiconductors. IBM and Apple Computer,
have formed an alliance for development of hardware and software technology
for a new generation of desktop computers. Ranbaxy has formed a strategic
alliance with Eli Lilly of the US to fulfil its mission of becoming a research-based
international pharmaceutical company. In the telecommunication sector, a
number of strategic alliances have been formed between Indian and foreign
companies: Crompton Greaves and Millicom; Usha Martin and Telekom Malaysia;
SPIC group and Telstra, etc. A good example of synergistic benefits from a
strategic alliance is that of Taj hotels and British Airways; both create mutual
advantages through complementarity of hotel and airline services. In the field
of agricultural development, Hindustan Unilever and ICICI have entered into a
partnership project for contract farming of wheat and rice in MP and Haryana.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. Cooperation between two or more organizations with a common objective,
shared control and contributions by the partners for mutual benefit is called
_________.
16. The basic objective behind all strategic alliances is to secure______or
_______advantage in the market.

10.10 Joint Venture (JV)


If a strategic alliance involves equity participation by both (or all) the parties, it
becomes a joint venture. A joint venture may be defined as a business venture
in which two or more independent companies join together, contribute to equity
capital in equal or agreed proportion and establish a new company. JVs are
long-turn ventures formed for an indefinite period. Some JVs can also be
contractual, that is, formed for a fixed period of time and dissolved at a specified
date. Contractual JVs are non-equity based. They are recommended or are
useful under five conditions:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 261

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

The new business is uneconomical for a single organization to undertake;


The risk of the business should be distributed or shared, and, therefore,
there is need for more than one participating company;
The technology for the new business can be shared only through a joint
venture, or, there exists a need to introduce a new technology quickly;
Competence or capabilities of two or three companies can be brought
together to produce synergy for better market impact, competitiveness
and success of business;
A joint venture is the only way to gain entry into a foreign market, particularly
if the foreign government requires that, for entry into that market, a local
partner has to be chosen (OTIS and Mitsubishi elevators in China).
All joint ventures, formed under any of the conditions mentioned above, exhibit
some common or essential characteristics. Five important characteristics are:
An agreement between the parties for common long-term business
objectives such as production, marketing/sales, research cooperation,
financing, etc. Production joint ventures are more common;
Pooling of assets and resources, like plant, machinery, equipment, finance,
management know-how, intellectual property rights, etc., by the parties
for achievement of the agreed objectives;
Characteristics of the pooled assets and resources as contributions by
the respective parties;
Pursuance of the agreed objective through a new management system
or structure, which is separate from the existing management systems of
the parties;
Sharing of profits from the joint venture between the parties usually in
proportion to their capital (equity) contributions. The liabilities of the parties
are also normally linked to their capital contributions.2
Joint ventures are commonly formed within the same industry. But, JVs can
take place across industries also. Joint ventures can take place within the same
country or between companies in two countries, or, sometimes, even more than
two countries. Classified this way, five types or forms of joint ventures are
possible:
Between two (or more) companies in the same industry;
Between two (or more) companies across different industries;

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 262

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Between a local company and a foreign company with technological


capability in the home country (Maruti Udyog -Maruti Suzuki, Hero HondaKinetic Honda)
Between a local company (home country) and a foreign company in the
foreign country (host country);
Between a local company (home country) and a foreign company in a
third country.3

10.10.1 JVs in Practice


If we analyse various JVs in operation in different countries, we can classify
them into three major categories:
1. JVs within the same country and within the same industry or related
industries;
2. JVs between the domestic companies and foreign companies in foreign
countries in the same industry or related industries;
3. JVs between the foreign companies and local companies in the domestic
country in the same or related industries.
JVs in the first category are very few. Most of the operating JVs are in
Category 2 or Category 3. In developed countries, majority of the JVs are in
Category 3.
JVs between Indian companies: IPITATA Sponge Iron Ltda JV between
TISCO (now Tata Steel) and IPICOL, a wholly owned company of the
Government of Orissa.
Neelanchal Ispata JV between MMTC and Orissa Mining Corporation
for manufacturing steel; Metal Junctiona JV between SAIL and TISCO for
online (Internet) trading of steel and steel scrap. There are other examples
also.
JVs between Indian companies and foreign companies in foreign countries:
Aditya Birla Group companies in Malaysia, Indonesia, Thailand and other
countries for textiles, sugar and viscose staple fibre; Tata group companies in
UK, Germany, and other countries in commercial vehicles, cars and hotels;
Kirloskars in Malayasia and other countries for compressors and other
engineering products; Oberois in Australia and other countries for hotels and
others.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 263

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

JVs between Indian companies and foreign companies in India: Maruti


Udyoga JV between Government of India and Suzuki of Japan; Hero BMW
between Hero Motors and BMW, AG, Germany for assembling BMW cars; Hero
Hondabetween Hero group and Honda Motors for two wheelers; ThermaxFujibetween Thermax Ltd and Fuji Electric Company of Japan for manufacture
of industrial boilers; HCL HPbetween Hindustan Computers (HCL) and
Hewlett-Packard, US for PCs; Tata Information Systemsbetween IBM World.
Trade Corporation and Tata Industries Ltdfor development of information
technology.
Reliance Industries and Nynex Corporation, A V Birla Group and AT&T,
Tata Industries and Bell Canada, Ashok Leyland and Singapore Telecom for
development of telecommunication; and others.
We have given many examples of JVs which are in operation and have
been working satisfactorily. But, there are many JVs which have not worked
well and have resulted in failure. Several studies have found a failure rate of 30
per cent for joint ventures in developed countries and 4550 per cent in
developing countries. Most of these JVs are between companies in two different
countries, i.e., a foreign company and a local partner (Category C).
There can be many reasons for the failure of a JV. One of the common
reasons is that foreign companies set up their fully owned subsidiaries and,
either withdraw from the JVs or the subsidiaries run parallel to the JVs affecting
their performance. Japanese automakers like Honda, Toyota and Nissan have
abandoned their European distribution partners and set up their own dealer
network. BMW has done the same in Japan. In India, a number of foreign
multinationals, like Pfizer, Honda Motors and ABB have established fully owned
subsidiaries in addition to being JV partners. In such cases, the subsidiaries
usually get more attention, including latest technology and the JVs suffer. Another
very common reason for failure of JVs is conflicts between foreign and domestic
partners. Conflicts can arise on many issues: sourcing of raw material inputs or
components, operating procedures and controls, domestic sales versus export,
etc. Some of the examples are: Tata Unysis (between Tatas and Unysis); Procter
& Gamble-Godrej India (between P&G and Godrej); TDT Copper (between
Tomen Corporation, Japan, Delton Cables, India and Taihan Corporation, South
Korea).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 264

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Self-Assessment Questions
17. A strategic alliance that involves equity participation by both (or all) the
parties is called a_________.
18. Joint ventures are short-term ventures formed for an definite period.
(True/False)

10.11 Takeover or Acquisition


In takeover or acquisition, one company takes over another organization its
resources, management and control. Another way to define or describe
acquisition is that an organization develops its resources and competence by
taking over another organization. Takeover or acquisition can be friendly or
hostile. If the takeover is through mutual agreement between the acquiring and
the acquired company, it is friendly acquisition; but, if the takeover/acquisition is
through stock market operations or financial institutions against the wishes of
the company, it becomes a hostile takeover.
Some have suggested that takeover should be a systematic process,
and the company seeking acquisition should follow a prescribed course. A sixstep procedure has been recommended:
Spell out the objective or reason for takeover
Work out or specify how the objectives would be fulfilled
Assess management quality of the prospect
Check the compatibility of business styles of the two companies
Anticipate and solve takeover problems promptly so that
complications do not prolong the process
Treat people with care during the period of takeover.4
In reality, however, many companies do not follow a prescribed or a
systematic course, particularly in cases of hostile takeover. The NEPC takeover
bid for Modiluft is a good example of non-systematic hostile takeover. In this
case, Modiluft management got the news of takeover from leading dailies. The
takeover attempt finally got mired in controversy. Several similar takeovers India
have been controversial. Peaceful or friendly takeovers are normally systematic
and follow a more rational path. Some examples of friendly takeovers are given
in Table 10.2.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 265

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Table 10.2 Selected Acquisitions by Indian Companies


Acquiring company

Acquired company

Hindustan Unilever

TOMCO

Tata Tea

Consolidated Coffee

Tata Tea

Asian Coffee

TISCO (Tata Steel)

Metal Box (Bearing Unit)

Deepak Nitrite

Mafatlal (Dyestaff Unit)

ICICI

ITC Classic Finance

ICICI

Anagram Finance

India Cement

Visaka Cement

R.P. Goenka group

Ceat Tyres

R.P. Goenka group

Calcutta Electric Supply Corporation (CESC)

Some of the more recent acquisitions in Indian are Sahara Airlines by Jet Air
and Air Deccan by Kingfisher Airlines.
Many acquisitions also take place at international level. A select list of
acquisitions among foreign companies and international acquisitions is given in
Table 10.3.
Table 10.3 Selected Foreign and International Acquisitions
Acquiring company

Acquired company

Hewlett-Packard

Compaq Computer

Pepsico

Quaker Oats

Daimler-Benz

Chrysler Corporation

BMW

Rolls Royce (Car Division)

Ford

Volvo (Auto Division)

Procter & Gamble

Clairol (Bristol-Myers Squibb)

Japan Airlines

Japan Air System

Volvo

Renault (Truck Division)

Ford

BMW (Rover)

eBay

HomesDirect

Tata steel

Corus

Mittal Steel

Arcelor

10.11.1 Post-takeover Integration


In takeover or acquisition, post-takeover action or management becomes an
important issue. This is primarily the problem of integrationintegrating the
acquirer and the acquired company. Integration may take place in two ways:
merging the two companies or keeping the acquired company independent and
integrating it with the organizational culture, structure and functioning of the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 266

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

present company. Merger after acquisition is appropriate or recommended if it


produces synergy. Majority of the friendly takeovers can lead to mergers except
for strategic reasons. Some of the good examples of acquisitions (shown in
Table 10.3) resulting in mergers are: ICICIITC Classic Finance and Anagram
Finance for diversification in retail financing; Tata-TeaConsolidated Coffee and
Asian Coffee for consolidation of tea and coffee business; Hindustan Unilever
and TOMCO to strengthen consumer goods business.
But, in many acquisitions, such synergy may not exist or may not be
available or the two companies may be kept separate for strategic reasons,
and, those have to be managed as independent entities. In such cases, the
process of integration becomes more difficult. Ghoshal (1999) has suggested
some measuresstepwise processfor integrating the acquired company with
the existing organization.
One of the important issues in post-acquisition integration is cultural fit.
There are three approaches to the post-acquisition cultural fit. First is
assimiliation; the parents (acquiring companys) culture will remain and effort
will be made for assimilating the joiner into that culture. Second is to build a
hybrid culture which should combine the features of both the organizations.
This is the most difficult thing to do. Third is to keep the cultures of the two
organizations separate. This is more appropriate when the reason for acquisition
is financial rather than strategic, and integration of cultures and activities may
not be so vital.5
There may be number of other operational problems also in postacquisition integration. Many times, benefits of synergy may not be realized
because the process of integrating the new company into the activities and
management style of the existing company may not be very successful because
human values are involved. This actually centres around the problem of cultural
fit. In cases where acquisition is used to acquire new competences, clash of
cultures may be more dominant; and, consequently, the acquirer may not be
able to add sufficient value to the acquisition. This is the issue of corporate
parenting (discussed in Unit 8).
Many acquisitions are intended to produce financial synergy or improve
financial gain or performance. Company experiences show that acquisition is
not an easy or guaranteed strategy for improving financial performance. It may
take considerable time for the acquiring company to secure any significant
financial benefits from acquisition. Research reveals that as as much as 70 per
cent of acquisitions end up with lower returns to shareholders of both the
organizations.6
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 267

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Self-Assessment Questions
19. In________ or _______, one company takes over another organization
its presources, management and control.
20. Takeovers always tend to be unsystematic and hostile. (True/False)

10.12 Merger
A merger is a combination of two or more organizations, in which one acquires
the assets and liabilities of the other in exchange for shares or cash, or the
organizations are dissolved, and a new company is formed, which takes over
the assets and liabilities of the dissolved organizations and new shares are
issued. So, combination or merger takes place, either through acquisition or
amalgamation or consolidation. For the company which acquires another
company, it is acquisition; for the company which is acquired, it is a merger. If
both or more organizations dissolve themselves and form a new organization, it
is amalgamation or consolidation. More common forms of mergers are through
acquisition. There are many reasons why two or more organizations like to
merge. There are reasons for buyer organization; there are reasons for the
seller organization. Glueck and Jauch (1984) have identified several reasons
both for the buyer and the seller:
Why the buyer wishes to merge:
(a) To increase value of the companys stock;
(b) To make profitable investment and increase the growth rate;
(c) To balance, complete or diversify product line;
(d) To improve stability of sales and earnings;
(e) To reduce or eliminate competition;
(f) To acquire resources quickly;
(g) To avail tax concessions/benefits;
h. To take advantage of synergy.
Why the seller wishes to merge:
(a) To increase the value of investment and stock
(b) To increase revenue and growth rate
(c) To acquire resources to stabilize operations
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 268

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

(d) To benefit from tax legislation


(e) To deal with top management succession problems
(f) To take advantage of synergy7

10.12.1 Types of Mergers


Mergers can be differentiated on the basis of activities or businesses currently
pursued by the merger partners, and, also, the nature of activity or business to
be added during the process of merger. Based on these, four major types of
mergers may be distinguished:
1. Horizontal merger
2. Vertical merger
3. Concentric merger
4. Conglomerate merger
Horizontal merger takes place when there is a combination of two or more
companies in the same business or product group or product. For example, a
cement company combines with another cement company or a pharmaceutical
company merges with another pharmaceutical company and so on.
Vertical merger takes place when there is a combination of two or more
companies which are not in the same business but in related businesses or
products. The combination or merger takes place to create complementarity of
businesses or products. For example, a refrigerator-manufacturing company
combines with a compressor-manufacturing company.
Concentric merger takes place when there is a combination of two or
more companies related to each other in terms of production process, technology
or market. For example, a leather shoe-manufacturing company combines with
a leather goods company making purses, handbags, jackets, etc.
Conglomerate merger takes place when there is a combination or two or
more companies which are not related to each other in terms of production
process, technology or market. For example, a shoe manufacturing company
merges with a pharmaceutical company or an FMCG company.
As mentioned above, one of the major objectives of merger is to obtain
advantages of synergy.
A study has analysed synergistic benefits in different functional areas
accruing from different types of mergers8 (Table 10.4).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 269

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Table 10.4 Synergistic Advantages under Different Types of Merger


Areas of synergy (in percentage)
Type of merger

Finance

Marketing

Technology

Production

Conglomerate

100

58

20

32

Concentric-technology

100

72

72

57

Concentric-marketing

100

100

57

72

Horizontal

96

100

41

29

All categories

100

74

33

36

Source: J Kitching, Why do Mergers Miscarry? Harvard Business Review, NovemberDecember, 1967.

We had mentioned earlier that common forms of mergers are through


acquisition. We had given examples of such mergers in Table 10.2 (mergers in
India) and Table 10.3 (mergers in foreign countries including international
mergers). Some more examples of mergers through acquisition are: TVS
Whirlpool Ltd with Whirlpool of India Ltd; Sandoz (India) Ltd with Hindustan
Ciba Geigy Ltd and Polyolifin Industries with NOCIL.
Mergers through amalgamation or consolidation are less common than
through acquisitions.
Some examples are: Nirma Detergents Ltd, Nirma Soaps and Detergenets
Ltd, and Shiva Soaps and Detergents Ltd into Nirma Ltd; Hi Beam Electronics
and other two companies formed Tristar Electronics subsequently named as
Solidaire India Ltd; British Motor Corporation and Leyland Motors into British
Leyland Motors (in UK); likely amalgamation/consolidation: United Airlines and
US Airways; Delta Airlines and Continental Airlines.
As mergers take place, demergers (merger in reverse) also take place,
although they are not very common. Demerger means Spinning of an unrelated
business/division in a diversified company into a stand-alone company along
with a free distribution of its shares to the existing shareholders of that original
company.9 Some examples of demergers are: Sandoz India from Sandoz
renamed as Clariant India; Ciba Speciality from Ciba India and Aptech from
Apple Industries.

Self-Assessment Questions
21. A _________ is a combination of two or more organizations, in which one
acquires the assets and liabilities of the other in exchange for shares or
cash, or the organizations are dissolved, and a new company is formed.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 270

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

22. When there is a combination of two or more companies in the same


business or product group or product, it is called _________.
23. When there is a combination or two or more companies which are not
related to each other in terms of production process, technology or market,
the merger is called__________.
24. Which of these mergers involves a combination of two or more companies
which are not in the same business but in related businesses or products?
(a) Vertical merger
(b) Horizontal merger
(c) Concentric merger
(d) Conglomerate merger

10.13 Integration Strategy


Integrationforward, backward and also horizontalcan be used as a strategy
for growth. Forward integration takes place when a company enters into a
downstream activity with respect to the same product line/flowfor example, a
garment manufacturer starts its own retail chain.
Backward integration means moving upstreamthe same garment
manufacturer enters into fabric production. Both backward and forward
integration are vertical integration strategies involving a value chain. Horizontal
integration takes place when a company acquires a competing business or two
or more companies in competing businesses merge (Figure 10.3).

Figure 10.3 Vertical and Horizontal Integrations


Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 271

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

A number of factors or considerations govern the decision for diversification


through integration. We can also call them integration benefits. Some of the
major factors or considerations are:
Improving supply chain
Better control over raw material supply
Strengthening marketing/distribution
Operating economies
Diversifying product portfolio
Direct access to demand or customers
Cost effectiveness
Decision for integration or adoption of integration strategy can also be analysed
in terms of transaction cost economics. According to transaction cost analysis,
a company should take a make or buy decision during procurement of inputs
and sale directly or through others for sales of finished products. Relative costs
of these alternatives should be evaluated, and a decision should be taken on
backward or forward integration. If, for example, the cost of making a product
(input) is less than the cost of procuring it from the supplier, the company should
move up the value chain and manufacture the product itself. Similarly, if the
cost of selling the finished product directly is less than the price paid to other
sellers to do the same thing, then, it is profitable for the company to move down
in the value chain and perform the selling operation itself. In both these cases,
the company is adopting an integration strategyin the former case, it is
backward integration and in the latter case, it is forward integration.
Companies have gained advantages through both backward and forward
integrators. Hewlett- Packard lost vital time in supplying workstations to the
market because a key supplier of chips delayed delivery by six months, whereas
IBM, with integrated sources was on time, and, therefore, enjoyed a clear
competitive advantage. To establish upstream linkages, Japanese automobile
manufacturers like, Honda and Toyota participated in equity capital, and, also in
the management of some of the ancillary units. To gain access to major
customers, American car manufacturers, as an integration move, invested in
car rental companiesFord invested in Hertz and Budget, General Motors in
Avis and National, and, Chrysler owns Thrify and Snappy. In India, Modern
Suitings went for both backward and forward integrationintegrating backward
in the wool processing and integrating forward by diversifying into worsted
suitings.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 272

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Experience of companies shows that vertical integrationwhether


backward or forward can be profitable. Buzzell (1983) analysed about 1650
businesses in the PIMS (Profit Impact of Marketing Strategy) database to
ascertain the impact of vertical integration on profitability. In the study, vertical
integration has been defined in terms of value addition as percentage of sales.
The analysis shows that net profit (PAT), as percentage of sales, increases with
vertical integration, but, net profit as percentage of investment or return on
investment (ROI) does not.
Activity 2
Choose a company either Tata or Godrej and analyse the integration
process, either forward or backward or both.

Self-Assessment Questions
25. _________ integration takes place when a company enters into a
downstream activity with respect to the same product line/flowfor
example, a garment manufacturer starts its own retail chain.
26. _______integration means moving upstreamthe same garment
manufacturer enters into fabric production.

10.14 Case Study


Tata Steels Acquisition of Corus
Tata Steel realized that success in the global market was not possible with
greenfield plants or projects. More recently, Tata Steel showed its renewed
interest in overseas acquisitions, particularly in Europe and in USA. Corus,
the second largest steel producer of Europe and the fifth largest in the
world, gave an inviting signal. Corus expressed its interest in China, Brazil
and India for cheaper steel. This induced Tata Steel to cash in on the
opportunity and decided to make a bid for Corus. Corus was also interested
in setting up a modern steel distribution network in India. Tata Steel decided
to leave no stone unturned to mark its European presence.
Tata Steels audacious, but successful bid for Corus at an enterprise value
of 6.7 billion, gives it a capacity of 28 million tonnes, including 8.7 million
tonnes of its own. But, the immediate stock market reaction to Tata Steel
almost running away with Corus in a head-to-head bidding with Brazils
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 273

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

CSN was negative. Market participants thought Corus at 608 pence,


representing a premium of 153 pence on the opening offer, was an expensive
buy. Whether the Tatas were paying an inflated price for Corus would remain
a subject of debate for some time. Ratan Tata was emphatic that he was
not paying anything that was beyond prudence. It might not have looked so
at that point, but the acquisition cost for the Tatas would be justified, as the
valuation of steel assets around the world would keep on rising. Tata Steel
finally acquired Corus in 2006, scoring over Brazils CSN at $12.15 billion
(around `55,000 crore) in cash and made it the largest acquisition by an
Indian company and the second largest in the industry after Mittal Steels
$38.3 billion acquisition of Arcelor.

The acquisition of Corus by Tata Steel is consistent with Tata Steels stated
objective of growth and globalization. Tata Steel has identified a number of
specific benefits that it sees from a combination with Corus. Enhanced scale
will position the combined group as the fifth largest steel company in the
world by production, with a meaningful presence in both Europe and Asia.
The powerful combination of lowcost upstream production in India with the
high-end downstream processing facilities of Corus will improve the
competitiveness of the European operations of Corus significantly. The
combination will also allow the crossfertilization of research and development
capabilities in the automotive, packaging and construction sectors, and there
will be a transfer of technology, best practices and expertise of senior Corus
management from Europe to India.
Tata Steel also believes that between the two companies, there exists a high
degree of cultural compatibility which would facilitate an effective integration
of the businesses over time. Tata Steel expects to lead the enlarged group
with a combined management team. The acquisition process shows that
Tata Steel has largely taken care of strategic fit, organizational fit and postintegration management issues and economics of the acquisition.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 274

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

10.15 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Different strategies can lead to growth. These include market penetration,
product or market development, diversification, integration, etc. Marketers
have to decide on the most appropriate one based on resources, business
assets and skills and the environment.
Diversification, as a strategy, can generate growth in a number of ways
product development, market development, both product and market
development or any other. Diversification may take the form of either a
new business venture of the company or strategic alliance or joint venture
or acquisition or merger.
Strategic alliance is cooperation between two or more organizations with
a common objective, shared control and resource contributions by the
partners. Strategic alliances, like all partnerships, are delicate to manage,
and, alliance partners have to share their responsibilities for smooth
operation of the alliance.
If a strategic alliance involves equity participation by both (or all) the parties,
it becomes a joint venture (JV). The JVs are long-term ventures unlike
strategic alliances which are short-term for a fixed period.
Takeover or acquisition means that one company takes over another
companyits resources, management and control, it can be friendly or
hostile.
A merger is a combination of two or more organizations either through
acquisition or amalgamation or consolidation.
Integration, both forward and backward, can be used as a strategy for
growth.

10.16 Glossary
Diversification: A growth strategy through new products and new markets.
Strategic alliance: Cooperation between two or more organizations with
a common objective, shared control and contributions (in terms of
resources, skills and capabilities) by the partners for mutual benefit.
Joint venture: A strategic alliance involving equity participation by both
(or all) the parties.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 275

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

Takeover: (also called acquisition) when one company takes over another
organization its resources, management and control.

10.17 Terminal Questions


1. What is Ansoff Matrix? Explain with the help of a diagram.
2. Distinguish between related or concentric diversification and unrelated or
conglomerate diversification. Give some examples.
3. Define strategic alliance. Discuss the different forms of strategic alliance.
4. What is a joint venture? Give some examples of joint ventures between
Indian companies and foreign companies in India.
5. Define takeover or acquisition and distinguish between friendly and hostile
takeovers. Discuss the main issues in post-takeover integration.
6. Define merger and distinguish between acquisition and amalgamation.
Discuss the main issues in managing a merger.
7. What is integration strategy? Explain forward integration and backward
integration with examples.

10.18 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Products, businesses
2. Ansoff
3. market share
4. product
5. market research or surveys
6. (d) all the above
7. True
8. Electronics
9. watches
10. test marketing
11. new market segments
12. Dairy Milk

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 276

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

13. False
14. Related diversification
15. Strategic alliance
16. Competitive, strategic
17. Joint venture
18. False
19. Takeover, acquisition
20. False
21. Merger
22. Horizontal merger
23. Conglomerate merger
24. (a) Vertical merger
25. Forward
26. Backward

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Ansoffs (1987) product-market expansion matrix has been the basis for
further research and development in growth strategies. Refer to Section
10.3 for further details.
2. Related diversification means that the new business has commonalities
with the core business or core competence of the company. Refer to
Section 10.8 for further details.
3. Strategic alliance is cooperation between two or more organizations with
a common objective, shared control and resource contributions by the
partners. Refer to Section 10.9 for further details.
4. If a strategic alliance involves equity participation by both (or all) the parties,
it becomes a joint venture (JV). Refer to Section 10.10 and 10.10.2 for
further details.
5. Takeover or acquisition means that one company takes over another
companyits resources, management and control. Refer to Section 10.11
and 10.11.2 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 277

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 10

6. A merger is a combination of two or more organizations either through


acquisition or amalgamation or consolidation. Refer to Section 10.12 and
10.12.2 for further details.
7. Integration, both forward and backward, can be used as a strategy for
growth. Refer to Section 10.13 for further details.

10.19 References
1. Ansoff, H I. 1987. Corporate Strategy. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
2. Buzzell, R D. Is Vertical Integration Profitable? Harvard Business Review,
JanuaryFebruary, 1983.
3. Ghoshal, S. Integrating Acquisitions. Economic Times (Corporate
Dossier), January 1, 1999.
4. Glueck, W F, and Jauch, L R. 1984. Business Policy and Strategic
Management. 4th ed. New York: McGraw Hill.
5. Johnson, G, and K Scholes. 2002. Exploring Corporate Strategy. 6th ed.
London: Prentice Hall.
6. Porter, M E. 1980.Competitive Strategy. New York: The Free Press.
Endnotes
1

Cadburys rejuvenation of its Dairy Milk chocolate (CDM) in the Indian market during
199394 makes a very interesting story. Refer to A Nag, Strategic Marketing, 2nd ed.
(New Delhi: Macmillan India, 2006), Ch. 9.

M B Rao, Joint Venture: International Business with Developing Countries (New Delhi:
Vikas Publishing House, 1999), 2-3.

A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 2nd ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Co., 2002), 189.

P Chandra, Financial ManagementTheory and Practice (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill,
1987), 660-61.

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), 377.

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), 377.

W F Glueck, and L R Jauch, Business Policy and Strategies Management, 4th ed. (New
York: McGraw Hill, 1984), 224.

J Kitching, Why do Mergers Miscarry, Harvard Business Review (NovDec, 1967).

N Venkiteswaran, Restructuring of Corporate India: The Emerging Scenario, Vikalpa


(22) 3 : 7.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 278

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Unit 11

Industry and Competition Analysis

Structure
11.1 Introduction
11.2 Caselet
Objectives
11.3 Definition of Industry
11.4 Industry Types and Structure
11.5 Industry Structure and Competitive Strategy
11.6 How to Conduct Industry Analysis
11.7 Identifying Competitors
11.8 Models of Competition
11.9 Porters Competitive Threat Model
11.10 Competitive Advantage Analysis
11.11 Case Study
11.12 Summary
11.13 Glossary
11.14 Terminal Questions
11.15 Answers
11.16 References

11.1 Introduction
Selection of corporate strategy by an organization should be guided by three
sets of factors: organizational mission, objectives or goals (discussed in Unit
5), internal competences and resources and the external environment factors.
Given the mission, objectives or goals based on organizational philosophy or
priorities, the choice of strategy should depend, among other things, on company
competences or capabilities (that is, strengths and weaknesses) and the
environmental factors; or, more correctly, on compatibility or balancing between
the two which is attempted through SWOT analysis. The final selection of
strategy, however, depends on some additional selection criteria including
benchmarking and best practices. These are discussed in the next chapter.
One of the most important components of the environment is competition
or competitors. This would be analysed here. As we talk of competition, we also
imply the industry to which the company belongs. Analysis of industry and
competition leads to the determination of competitive advantage or competitive
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 279

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

disadvantage of an organization. So, industry, competition and competitive


advantage (or disadvantage) become three interrelated fields of analysis in an
interactive cycle or circle as shown in Figure 11.1. These analyses will be
undertaken in this unit.

Figure 11.1 Industry, Competition and Competitive Advantage

11.2 Caselet
There are numerous well-documented reasons why the Japanese
automobile firms were able to penetrate the US market successfully,
especially during the 1970s. One important reason, however, is that they
were much better than U.S. firms at doing competitor analysis. David
Halberstam, in his account of the automobile industry, graphically described
the Japanese efforts at competitor analysis in the 1960s. They came in
groups. . . . They measured, they photographed, they sketched, and they
tape-recorded everything they could. Their questions were precise. They
were surprised how open the Americans were.
The goal of competition analysis is insight that influences the development
of successful business strategies. The analysis should focus on the
identification of threats, opportunities, or strategic uncertainties created by
emerging or potential competitor moves, weaknesses, or strengths.
Competitor analysis starts with identifying current and potential
competitors.This is an exercise that was successfully done by the Japanese
automobile firrms.
Source: D Halberstam, The Reckoning (New York: William Morrow, 1986), 310.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 280

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Discuss the different industry types and structures
Analyse industry structure and competitive strategy
Show how to conduct industry analysis
Identify and analyse competitors existing and potential
Conduct competitive advantage analysis

11.3 Definition of Industry


An industry can be broadly defined as the group of firms producing products
that are close substitutes for each other.1 There is, however, a great deal of
controversy over an appropriate definition of industry. The debate or controversy
mostly centers around how close substitutability needs to be in terms of product,
process or geographic market boundaries.2 For example, if we take computers,
desktop computers may be an industry; similarly laptop computers may be
another industry. But, because there is a good deal of substitutability between
desktop and laptop computers, an appropriate industry definition may be
personal computer which includes both.
An important point in the debate or controversy over industry definition is
about overlooking latent sources of competition which may affect a company.
Any definition of an industry is essentially a matter of choice about where to
draw the line between established competitors and substitute products, between
existing companies in the industry and potential entrants and, between existing
manufacturers of the product(s) and suppliers of inputs and buyers. Drawing
these lines may, many times, be a matter of degree, but, it has implications for
choice of strategy by a company.
Definition of an industry should not be thought to be same as definition of
the business in which a company wants to compete. Industry may be broadly
defined or narrowly defined. If industry is broadly defined, it does not follow that
business should also be broadly defined without focus. If we take the example
of personal computer industry again, some companies like Compaq were
focussing their operations more on the desktop computers; companies like HP
(Compaq merged with HP in 2002) and Dell computer focus on both desktop
and laptop computers; others like Toshiba, Sony, IBM, concentrate more on the
laptop segment. Industry in all such cases sets the product boundaries. Business
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 281

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

of a company focusses on a specified product or a product category based on


its technology, resources and capabilities, and accordingly, the company
formulates its competitive strategy.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The group of firms producing products that are close substitutes for each
other are known as_________.
2. Definition of an industry should not be thought to be same as definition of
the ________in which a company wants to compete.

11.4 Industry Types and Structure


Industries can be of various typeseach major product group constitutes an
industry (subject to the definition above). Industries can also be classified in
terms of size of the constituent units or companies, state or pace of development
of the industry, spread of the market, etc. These are important ways of looking
at the structure of an industry. Based on such factors, various industries can be
broadly classified into five categories according to Porter:
1. Fragmented industry
2. Emerging industry
3. Mature industry
4. Declining industry
5. Global industry
Fragmented industry
As fragmented industry is characterized by the existence of a large number of
small and medium units, and, no single company has any significant market
share, and, none of these units can individually affect the market or industry
outcome. The uniqueness of a fragmented industry is the absence of any market
leader, and, typically, the market share of the largest unit does not exceed 10
per cent.
Fragmented industries are common in certain sectors of the economy
including services, retailing, distribution and agricultural products. Fragmented
industries in some of these sectors are characterized by product differentiation,
whereas undifferentiated products more commonly exist in fragmented industries
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 282

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

in other sectors. For example, computer software, television network/programme


and fast food industries are characterized by products or services which are
differentiated; but, agricultural produce, ATMs, dry cleaning, etc., essentially
involve undifferentiated products. Fragmented industries also vary widely in
technological sophistication ranging from high technology operations like solar
heating to non-technological activities like retailing and distribution.
Emerging industry
An emerging industry is a developing or newly formed industry in which market
for products initially exists in latent form, and, becomes visible later. An emerging
industry may be created by technological innovations, new consumers or
industrial needs for economic or sociological changes which create the
environment or potential market for a new product or service. Emerging industries
are being created all the time; or, to put it in other words, most of the existing
industries today were emerging industries at some point of time or the other.
Examples are word processors, photocopiers, computers, VCR/VCP, CTV, etc.
Different emerging industries may have different structuresstructural
details always vary. But, most of the emerging industries exhibit some common
structural characteristics.
Mature industry
A mature industry is one which has passed through transition from period of
fast growth to more modest or stable growth. Maturity is an important or critical
phase in the industry life cycle. During this period, fundamental changes often
take place in the competitive environment, and, companies are usually faced
with difficult strategic decisions for survival and growth because competition
becomes very intense. Industry maturity, in some cases, may be delayed or
postponed because of innovations or other events or developments including
environmental changes. This would mean prolonging the industry growth cycle
or the transition to maturity.
Transition to maturity is associated with important changes in the industry
structure and competitive environment. Industry maturity is characterized by
new trends or tendencies for change. Porter (1980) has identified and analysed
nine such trends or tendencies.
Declining industry
A declining industry is one with negative growth, that is, an industry which has
registered absolute decline in sales over a sustained period of time. Such decline
in sales is not because of business cycles or any other short-term factors like
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 283

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

strike, lockouts or material shortages. Therefore, a declining industry does not


represent a short-term discontinuity, but, a trend expressed in falling industry
output, sales, profitability and dwindling number of competitors. In industry life
cycle, decline follows maturity. Decline sets in generally because of product
obsolescence or emergence of a strong substitute product. For example, demand
for oil-based laundry soaps for cloth washing declined fast because of
introduction of synthetic washing materials.
In-depth study of a wide cross-section of declining industries shows that
industry reactions and the nature of competition during decline vary markedly.
Some industries age gracefully; these industries have avoided losses by exiting
either before the decline or in time during the decline. Many other industries in
similar situations have got involved in bitter marketing warfare, prolonged excess
capacity and heavy operating losses.3
Global industry
In global industry, the strategic position of companies in different countries or
national markets are governed by their overall global positions. For example,
IBMs strategic position in competing for computer sales in France and Germany
has improved significantly because of technology and marketing skills developed
in other countries, and a worldwide manufacturing system which is well
coordinated. To be called a global industry, an industrys economics and
competitors in different national markets should be considered jointly rather
than individually.4
Distinction should be made between an international industry and a global
industry. An industry in a country may be international if it comprises a number
of multinational companies. But, industries with multinational competitors are
not necessarily global industries. To be a global industry, as explained above
about IBM, an industry should have multi-locational manufacturing facilities,
and, compete worldwide to secure global synergy or competitive advantage.

Self-Assessment Questions
3. The existence of a large number of small and medium units is found in
(a) Mature industry
(b) Declining industry
(c) fragmented industry
(d) Emerging industry
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 284

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

4. An industry that has passed through transition from period of fast growth
to more modest or stable growth is known as
(a) mature industry
(b) declining industry
(c) Emerging industry
(d) None of the above

11.5 Industry Structure and Competitive Strategy


We have analysed above five types of industries: fragmented, emerging, mature,
declining and global. Each of these industries has its own structure in terms of
companies or competitors and the nature of competition. Let us discuss the
competitive strategy in each type of industry.

11.5.1 Competitive Strategy in Fragmented Industries


Porter has suggested a framework or steps for formulating competitive strategies
in fragmented industries. This is a five-step framework. The steps actually consist
of finding answers to five vital questions relating to strategy formulation in
fragmented industries. Table 11.1 shows the framework or steps for formulating
competitive strategies in fragmented industries.
Table 11.1 Framework or Steps for Formulating Competitive Strategies
in Fragmented Industries
Step 1

: What is the structure of the industry and position of competitors?

Step 2

: Why is the industry fragmented?

Step 3

: Can fragmentation be overcome? How?

Step 4

: Is overcoming fragmentation profitable? Where should the firm be


positioned to do so?

Step 5

: If fragmentation is inevitable, what is the best alternative for coping with


it?5

The five steps or the answers to the five questions indicate a logical process
for formulation of competitive strategy in fragmented industry. Step 1 consists
of undertaking a thorough industry and competitor analysis to identify sources
of competitive forces in the industry and positions of important competitors.
Step 2 is to identify cause or sources of fragmentation. Once the causes of

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 285

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

fragmentation are ascertained, it may be possible to find out if fragmentation


can be overcome. This is analysed in Step 3. Step 3 consists of analysing, in
detail, each of the causes of fragmentation, and, finding out if fragmentation
can be overcome through strategic moves. Less fragmented a market is, more
organized it is, and it becomes easier to analyse various competitive forces.
The objective in Step 4 is to ascertain if fragmentation is profitable, and, if so,
when and/or how a particular company should position itself to take advantage
of industry consolidation or restructuring. If chances of overcoming fragmentation
are remote based on analysis in Step 3, a particular company should select and
adopt the best strategy from among the alternatives available to cope with
fragmentation. This should be done in Step 5, and this should be commensurate
with the companys resources and capabilities.

11.5.2 Competitive Strategy in Emerging Industries


Due to the structural characteristics of uncertainty and associated risk,
formulation of strategy in emerging industries becomes a very difficult task. As
Porter puts it: The rules of the competitive game are largely undefined, the
structure of the industry unsettled and probably changing and competitors hard
to diagnose.6
But, these also imply the other side of the emerging industries: lot of
freedom, flexibility and leverage exist for companies in these industries for choice
of strategy because the industry is in the formative stage. And, entrepreneurial
and aggressive companies can exploit these leverages to formulate competitive
strategies for improved operations which can lead to more efficient performance
and better results. The entrepreneurial pioneer can, in fact, design the structural
form, build the structure of the industry in terms of product policy, marketing
approach (pricing in particular) and competition strategy in such a way that it
can secure the strongest position in the long run. This is what companies like
Xerox did when it emerged in the photocopier industry.
The pioneering leader, however, will face problems as the industry
develops, competitors emerge and the course of competition becomes
unpredictable. A common problem in emerging industries is that the pioneer
may spend excessive resources in defending high market share as Xerox did.
It may be generally appropriate to respond to competitors aggressively in the
emerging phase, but, a company should concentrate more on building its own
strength and consolidating its position. In practice, as experiences show, it may
not be feasible to defend a monopoly market share for long because competitors
will emerge and some of them may be very strong like Canon in the photocopier
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 286

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

market. In such situations, the pioneer leader should be prepared for shifts in
strategy orientation including redefinition of roles of linkage agents like suppliers
and distributors or distribution channels.
Companies which enter emerging industries during the course of their
development also have a choice to make about which industries to enter. Here,
again, they often have a choice between alternative emerging industries. The
choice in such cases would depend on current returns or profitability and likely
future growth of the industry. The best alternative is one which promises highest
long-term growth and profitability.

11.5.3 Competitive Strategy in Mature Industries


Compared to emerging industries, mature industries pose almost the opposite
problem, i.e., of competitive overcrowding and its impact on formulation of
strategy. During transition to maturity there is volatility in the industry in terms of
emerging participants and competitive levels. But, at maturity, the industry is
already overcrowded and competition is intense. In such an environment,
competitive strategies of companies have to adjust to changing priorities.
Focus has to shift to factors which directly contribute to efficiency and
help securing competitive advantage in a low-margin market. Cost reduction,
true marketing (as opposed to pure selling) in terms of product-price offerings
and better customer service should receive the highest attention. Redefining or
repositioning old products/brands rather than introducing new products is the
recommended strategy. Less attention to creativity and more attention to
improving the existing value chain is required for edging out competitors. For
achieving this, to any significant extent, organizational change cultural change
in particularmay also be required. There may be resistance to change, but,
this has to be overcome.
This raises a number of issues which companies in a mature industry
have to cope with. Some of these issues relate to business performance; others
relate to organizational change. Three issues or factors which should be
particularly highlighted are: business growth, financial performance and
profitability, and organizational discipline and recentralization.

11.5.4 Competitive Strategy in Declining Industry


In terms of strategic choice in declining industries, companies are confronted
with the decision about whether to continue in the industry or harvest or divest.
There are implications of both in terms of strategic details and their impacts on
organizations.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 287

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Porter has given a perspective on competitive strategies in declining


industries which should be mentioned here. He has suggested four possible
alternative strategies: leadership, niche, harvesting and divesting quickly
(Table 11.2).
Table 11.2 Alternative Strategies in Declining Industries
Leadership

Niche

Harvest

Divest quickly

Seek a leadership
position in terms of
market share

Create or defend a
strong position in a
particular segment

Manage a controlled
disinvestment using
strengths

Liquidate the
business or
investment as early
as possible

Source: M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 267 (Figure 12.1).

The leadership strategy may work out as below. In a declining industry,


many unprofitable or loss-making units divest and exit. One of the remaining
companieswho are not many in number may have the potential to achieve
above-average profitability, and leadership position is possible for such a
company. The company strives to be the only one or one of the few competitors
remaining in the industry. Porter suggests a number of strategic steps for
executing the leadership strategy:
Investment in aggressive competitive actions in marketing (focus
on pricing) and other areas to increase market share;
Purchasing market share by acquiring competitors or competitors
business;
Purchasing and retiring competitors production capacity. This also
reduces exit barriers;
Reducing competitors exit barriers in different ways to induce or
force them to exit;
Demonstrating superior strengths through competitive moves in the
market;
Demonstrating a strong commitment to continue in the business
through public statements or pronouncements.7
In niche strategy, it may be possible for a company to identify a segment
or a sub-segment in a declining industry which will not only sustain stable demand
but, may also allow high returns or margins. The company then invests to
consolidate its position in this segment or sub-segment. For this, a company
may also adopt some of the leadership strategies mentioned before. The primary
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 288

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

objective of these strategies is to reduce exit barriers or induce exit of competitors.


The company is then secure in the niche for sometime.
Ultimately, however, companies adopting a leadership strategy or a niche
strategy may have to switch over to a harvesting strategy or divesting strategy.

11.5.5 Competitive Strategy in Global Industries


Competition in global industries poses a different kind of challenge because it
cuts across national boundaries and, international or global forces come into
play. These forces create, among others, two distinctive pressures: cost pressure
because of global competition and, pressure for local responsiveness, that is,
adaptation to local needs or values and consumer tastes and preferences. For
some products, cost pressure may be more: for some others, the need for local
adaptation is more. Guided by these two factors and product type or structure,
companies, which wish to compete globally, generally adopt one of the four
strategies:
International strategy, multi-domestic strategy, global strategy, and
transnational strategy (Figure 11.2).

Figure 11.2 Four Basic Global Competitive Strategies

International strategy can be adopted for those products and services


which are not available in some countries and can be transferred from other
countries. These are standard products with little or no differentiation.
International strategies are not very common or popular. Some examples are:
Kelloggs, Indian software, and Indian handicrafts.
Multidomestic strategy is almost opposite of international strategy.
Multidomestic strategy involves high degree of local responsiveness or local
content. Products are highly customized to suit local requirements or conditions.
Because of high customization, cost pressure is less; cost effectiveness may

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 289

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

be also difficult to achieve because of lack of scale economies. Examples :


Asian Paints (paints in general), Indian garments.
Global strategy suits companies which make highly standardized
sophisticated products, and, are in a position to reap benefits of economies of
scale and experience effects. These also include high technology products which
have universal applicability and hardly require any local adaptation. Examples
are: Intel, Motorola, Microsoft, Texas Instruments. Global retail chains like
Walmart and Marks & Spencer also come under this category.
Transnational strategy is the most difficult strategy to follow because this
is based on a combination of two apparently contradictory factors, i.e., cost
effectiveness and local adaptation. But, this may be a true global strategy
because, in global business, there is always a price pressure or cost pressure;
and, also the need to make the product as close to a particular countrys
expectation as possible to maximize value offerings. In fact, many, including
Bartlett and Ghoshal (1989), feel that the transnational strategy is the only viable
competitive strategy in global business. Many companies are adopting this
approach to become successful. Some good examples are : Caterpillar (taking
on Komatsu and Hitachi), McDonalds, Coca-Cola, Pepsi and Dominos Pizza.
Many multinational FMCG companies like Unilever and Procter & Gamble follow
transnational strategies through their fully owned subsidiaries in different
countries.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. In ________ industry, the pioneering leader faces problems as the industry
develops, competitors emerge and the course of competition becomes
unpredictable.
6. In ________ industries, the problem faced is that of competitive
overcrowding and its impact on formulation of strategy.
7. Global strategy suits companies that make highly standardized
sophisticated products. (True/False)
8. Transnational strategy is quite an easy strategy to follow. (True/F alse)

11.6 How to Conduct Industry Analysis


Understanding industry structure and formulating competitive strategies imply
industry analysis. But, conducting a proper industry analysis is a very big task.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 290

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

To conduct such an analysis, the industry analyst has to find answers to many
important questions:
What should be the starting point?
Which types of data one looks for?
Should one look for only published or secondary data?
Or, should one also generate primary data from industry observers
(participants)?
What are the analytical techniques to be used for data processing and
analysis?
Answers to these questions would make possible an appropriate industry
analysis. This is about complete or comprehensive industry analysis. If, however,
one is interested in a particular aspect of an industry, say, only industry growth,
one can also conduct a partial industry analysis with respect to the particular
object. In that case, data requirements would be less, and data processing and
analysis also would be much easier.
Porter (1980) has suggested some detailed guidelines for conducting
industry analysis. These are contained in How to Conduct an Industry Analysis
(Appendix B) in Competitive Strategy (1980). Porter discusses sources of
published or secondary data, generation or collection of primary data, various
categories of data, scheme of data processing and strategy for industry analysis.
He has also suggested a broad framework for industry analysis in terms of
categories of data and competition. The framework is shown in Box 11.1
Industry analysis should follow a number of logical or strategic steps.
These are shown below:
Step 1 : Determine or specify the objective or objectives so that there
is no lack of focus.
Step 2 : Collect and scan through available published or secondary data.
Step 3 : Identify data or information gaps for generation of primary data.
Step 4 : Generate primary data (through survey, interviews, meetings,
etc.,) to fill the data information gap.
Step 5 : Process/tabulate various data as mentioned in Box 11.1
Step 6 : Prepare a general overview of the industry using the processed/
tabulated data/information.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 291

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Step 7 : Prepare specific sectoral analysistechnology, product,


marketing pattern, competition analysis .
Step 8 : Draw inferences or conclusions to complete the analysis.

Box 11.1: A Broad Framework for Industry Analysis


Data Categories

Compilation

Product lines

By company

Buyers and their behaviour

By year

Complementary products

By functional area

Substitute products
Growth
Rate
Pattern (seasonal, cyclical)
Determinants
Technology of production and distribution
Cost structure
Economies of scale
Value added
Logistics
Labour
Marketing and Selling
Market segmentation
Marketing practices
Suppliers
Distribution channels (if indirect)
Innovation
Types
Sources
Rate
Economies of scale

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 292

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Competitorsstrategy, goals, strengths and


weaknesses, assumptions
Social, political, legal environment
Macroeconomic environment
Source: M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 370 (Figure B-1)

The real significance of competition or competitor analysis has been shown


by the Japanese companies. There are many reasons why Japanese automobile
companies were able to penetrate the US market successfully in the 1970s.
But, one of the most important reasons is that they were much better at doing
competitor analysis than US companies. The Japanese conducted a careful
and detailed analysis of the US auto matket (See Caselet). They similarly studied
the European market, particularly the design and engineering of the automobile
manufacturers. In contrast, the Americans were late even at recognizing the
competitive threat from Japan and were never so good in analysing the
competitive environment they were going to face.
Competition analysis can be divided into two main parts: one, identifying
the existing and potential competitors, and two, understanding and evaluating
competitors. To properly structure competitor analysis, one can start with a set
of questions on identifying competitors and understanding and evaluating them.
A series of exploratory questions are posed below. The analysis below would
be generally based on answers to these questions and related issues.
Identifying Competitors
Who do we usually compete against? Who are our most intense
competitors? Who are less intense, but, still serious competitors? Who
are makers of substitute products?
Can various competitors be divided into strategic groups on the basis of
their assets, skills or strategies?
Who are the potential competitors or potential entrants? Is there anything
that can be done to discourage them early?8
Understanding and Evaluating Competitors
What are competitors objectives and strategies? What are their levels of
commitment and seriousness?

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 293

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

What is competitors cost structure? Do they have a cost advantage or


disadvantage or cost neutrality?
What is their image and positioning strategy?
Who are the most successful competitors? Who are the unsuccessful
ones? Why?
What are the strengths and weaknesses of each competitor or competitor
groups?
What are the leverages competitors have over us (our strategic
weaknesses, customer problems, etc.,) which they can exploit to enter
the market or become stronger competitors?
What are competitors special assets and skills that can be used against
us?
Activity 1
Choose an electronic goods industry (colour TV, cell phone, desktop or
laptop computers) and carry out an industry analysis in terms of the steps
and guidelines given in the text.

Self-Assessment Questions
9. Competition analysis can be divided into two main parts: (1) identifying
the existing and potential competitors, and (2) __________.
10. Japanese automobile companies were able to penetrate the US market
successfully in the 1970s as they were much better at doing _______
than US companies.

11.7 Identifying Competitors


There are two different ways of identifying existing competitors: customer-based
approach and strategic group approach. The customer-based approach analyses
thoughts (likes, dislikes, preferences, etc.,) of customers who make their choices
among competing suppliers of products. This gives a basis for grouping
competitors to the extent they compete for customers choice. The strategic
approach for competitor identification attempts to classify competitors into
strategic groups on the basis of their competitive strategies.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 294

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.7.1 Customer-based Approach


Primary competitors, i.e., competitors in the same product category and, not in
substitute product category, are clearly visible and more easily identifiable. For
example, if one takes the Indian soft drinks market, Coca-Cola and Pepsi are
the most immediate competitors followed by Thums Up, Sprite, Fanta, Limca,
etc. Whenever consumers think of a soft drink, they will first think of one of
these brands. But, secondary competitors, i.e., competitors in substitute product
categories are not so easily visible, and, are more difficult to identify. For example,
lemon soda, canned and packaged fruit drinks (like Frooti), slush, etc., also
compete with soft drinks. Customers have a choice, and, many times, they ask
for these products/brands in place of soft drinks, and secondary competitors
compete with primary competitors.
The above examples illustrate an important point. In most industries,
competitors can be usefully identified in terms of how intensely they compete
for the business or product which attracts or induces customers. There are
several very direct competitors; others who compete less directly; and, still others
who compete indirectly, but, are still relevant. A knowledge of this pattern can
lead to a proper understanding of the market structure and the competitive
situation.

11.7.2 Strategic Group Approach


Strategic group approach provides an alternative way of identifying competitors
in an industry or market. A strategic group generally exhibits the following
features:
Possess similar characteristics, (e.g., size, competences, resource base,
etc.)
Possess similar assets and skills, (e.g., cost efficiency, quality, image,
etc.)
Pursue similar competitive strategies, (e.g., use of same or similar sales
promotion and advertising methods, aggressive or offensive approach,
etc.)
In many industries or markets, there are a large number of competitors
(like in monopolistic competition) and, it is difficult to analyse each of them
individually. It may be possible to track the leader or one or two large competitors,
but, it may not be very feasible, even cost-wise, to analyse individually, say, 30
or 40 competitors. Reducing such large numbers to small strategic groups makes

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 295

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

the analysis easy and more usable from strategy formulation point of view. Let
us take the Indian detergents market. In this market, Surf (with brand extensions)
and Ariel may be placed in one strategic group; Tide, Rin, Wheel, Sunlight and
Nirma may be classified into a second strategic group; Ghadi and similar regional
brands can be in a third group; and, many local brands can be put together in
the fourth group. Each of these groups will show some distinct features or
characteristics like resource base, ability to compete, marketing skills, etc., and,
such grouping will give a company a clear strategic perspective to analyse
competition.

11.7.3 Potential Competitors


Existing competitors are the most immediate threats to a company. But, there
are also potential competitors who are potential threats. Companies generally
remain busy with formulating strategies or counter-strategies to meet threat
from existing competitors, and, they tend to ignore potential competitors or
entrants. But, this is a very short-term or short-sighted approach, because, in
due course, potential competitors can become stronger than some of the existing
competitors as Titan has shown to HMT.
Aaker (1995) has mentioned six different types of potential competitors
or potential competing situations.
(a) Market expansion: Any company planning market expansion, that
is, planning to enter into a new market, is a potential competitor for
all those already operating in that market. Walmart, for example,
has decided to enter into the Indian market through a JV with Bharti
Enterprise. This is a big potential threat to the entire Indian retailing
industry.
(b) Product expansion: Product expansion, like market expansion, is a
potential competitive threat. ITC diversified into hospitality business
and agri-business, and during the planning stage of diversification,
was a potential competitor for all those in agri-business and hospitality
business.
(c) Backward integration: Present customers can be potential sources
of competition. General Motors bought many component
manufacturers during the initial years of its operation in a backward
integration move. Many can users like Campbell Soup have
integrated backward by making their own containers. Backward
integration is usually more common in business-to-business products.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 296

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

(d) Forward integration: Suppliers or vendors are also potential


competitors. AST, a major computer manufacturer in the US at one
time, started as a component (add-on-boards) manufacturer for IBM
computers. TVS Motors (earlier Lucas-TVS), traditionally a
manufacturer of electrical accessories for automobiles and
motorcycles/scooters, has integrated forward by entering into
manufacture of motorcycles. Like backward integration, forward
integration also is more typical in business-to-business markets.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. While identifying competitors, the ________ approach analyses the
preferences of customers who make their choices among competing
suppliers of products.
12. The ________ approach for competitor identification attempts to classify
competitors into strategic groups on the basis of their competitive
strategies.
13. Primary competitors, i.e., competitors in the same product category and,
not in substitute product category, are clearly visible and more easily
identifiable. (True/ false)
14. Existing competitors are the most immediate threats to a company.
(True/False)

11.8 Models of Competition


In addition to analysing various factors which influence competitor actions, one
can also get insight into competitors or competition through different models of
competition. Competition takes various forms and can be of different intensities.
Different models of competition try to analyse this. We shall discuss three
important models of competition:
1. The Economic Model
2. The Life Model
3. The War Model

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 297

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.8.1 The Economic Model


Industrial or business economists do not look at business strictly in terms of
market forms. They look at business in different ways. In a competitive
environment, businesses can be classified into four different categories:
specialized businesses, volume businesses, fragmented businesses and
stalemated businesses. Such classification is based on two factors; first, the
potential size of advantage a company can derive from a particular business,
and, second, the number of ways such advantage can be secured. In terms of
these two factors, four business categories are shown in Figure 11.3.9

Figure 11.3 Classification of Business Based on Competitive Environment

As shown in the figure, businesses in which potential size of the advantage


is large and approaches to achieve this are many, may be called specialized
businesses. Most consumer products fall under this category. In such businesses,
few large players dominate the market. The dominant players (national-level
products/brands) control about 80 per cent of market share and the balance is
shared by a number of small playersregional and local. Take the market for
detergents. National brands like Surf, Ariel, Nirma, Rin, Tide and Wheel dominate
the market. But there are also many regional and local detergents (branded
and even non-branded) which exist in the market.
Volume business consists of industrial products. Products like basic
chemicals (e.g., caustic soda) and industrial raw materials which are consumed
in large quantities, fall under such business. In these businesses, bigger the
market share, larger is the profitability. Hence, size gives the greatest competitive
advantage and the competition is mostly cost based cost efficiency through
economies of scale and other factors.
Businesses which have many small players, with the largest ones having
less than 10 per cent market share, are fragmented businesses. In these
businesses, size does not offer any great advantage. These apply primarily to
service products. Hotels and restaurants (except 5-star hotels), studios
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 298

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

(photographers), dry cleaning, courier services, etc., are good examples.


Competition in these businesses is based on product-price packages.
Stalemated businesses are those which are sort of chokedpotential
size of advantage is small and the number of ways to secure competitive
advantage are also limited. These are businesses which are on the decline
either because of technological obsolescence or changes in consumer tastes
and preferences. Examples of products in the category are radio, music records
(HMV and others) black and white TV, etc.

11.8.2 The Life Model


The life model or the product life cycle (PLC) approach analyses competitive
intensities during different phases of life cycles of a product. Although some
management and marketing academics have raised doubts about the validity
of PLC in real world, it is, nevertheless, a useful tool for analysing competition
and determining appropriate strategies for competitive survival and growth during
different stages of PLC: introduction, growth, maturity and decline.

Figure 11.4 Product Life Cycle (PLC): Sales and Profit

At the introduction stage, that is, when a new product enters the market,
it starts as a monopoly and competition is nil. As the product moves to the
growth stage, competitors start entering the market and competition begins. As
the product matures, competition intensifies and competitive rivalry reaches its
peak. Sales and profit also peak during this period. In the decline phase,
competitive pressure decreases because sales and profit start declining, and
many companies withdraw from the market or close down. Between introduction
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 299

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

and growth, and, in the decline phase, competitive pressures are low, but,
mortality rates of products or businesses are high (Figure 11.4).
The lifespan of a product, and also speed or steepness in growth, maturity
and decline vary according to its nature or category. (This is what explains the
relative flatness (Figure 11.5) and relative steepness [of different PLC curves.)
Most electronic products have a shorter lifespan and also a steep PLC compared
to electrical or mechanical appliances. During the PLC, most markets witness
one market leader, one or a couple of market challengers and a number of
market followers. During the PLC, some niche players also develop in the market
who stay away from mainstream competition. In the toothpaste market, Colgate
is the leader, Pepsodent and Close-Up the challengers and Promise the follower.
Some say Vicco and Neem are niche players, but, there may be difference of
opinion on this.
Different studies have hypothesized different market structures, particularly
during the maturity phase, in terms of market shares of different players. These
studies indicate different types and levels of competition. The first of these studies
is by the Strategic Planning Institute, Cambridge, Massachusatts, popularly
known as PIMS Study. The second study is by Kotler, and, the third by Boston
Consulting Group (BCG). Buzzel (1981) has done consolidation and a
comparative analysis of these studies. The study results for market structures
in mature industries are summarized in Table 11.3.
Table 11.3 Market Structure in Mature Industries: Market Shares
Market Player

Market Share (%)


PIMS

Kotler

BCG

Market leader

52.7

40.0

50.0

Market challengers

28.8

30.0

25.0

Market followers

11.6

20.0

15.0

6.9

10.0

10.0

Market nichers

Source: R D Buzzel, Are there Natural Market Structures? Journal of Marketing, 45


(Winter, 1981).

11.8.3 The War Model


The war model of competition is based on close parallel between military
strategies for war and marketing strategies. Many marketing strategists have
found close similarities between the two. Most common forms of war strategies

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 300

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

are defensive warfare, offensive warfare, flanking warfare and guerrilla warfare.
Ries and Trout (1986) are among the greatest exponents of marketing warfare
based on military strategies. Principles of marketing warfare enunciated by them
are given in the following:
Principles of Defensive Warfare
1. Only the market leader should adopt a defensive strategy
2. The best defensive strategy is the courage to attack yourself
3. Strong competitive moves should always be blocked
Principles of Offensive Warfare
1. The strength of the leader is the most important consideration for mounting
an offensive attack
2. Find the leaders weakness and attack it
3. Launch the attack on as narrow a front as possible
Principles of Flanking Warfare
1. A good flanking move is made into an uncontrolled area of the opposition
2. Tactical surprise should be an important element of the strategy
3. The pursuit is as crucial as the attack itself
Principles of Guerrilla Warfare
1. Find a small segment for intermittent attack; avoid confrontation
2. However successful you may be, never act like the leader
3. Be prepared to quit/exit at very short notice
Offensive and defensive strategies signify different competitive moves
and are of almost universal application in strategic business management today.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. According to classical economic theory, markets begin as _________,
move towards ______, then to monopolistic competition and ultimately
towards pure or perfect competition.
16. In a competitive environment, businesses can be classified into four
different categories: specialized businesses, volume businesses,
fragmented businesses and _______businesses.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 301

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

17. The Economic Model, Life Model and War Model are models of
(a) Competition
(b) Production
(c) Marketing
(d) Business strategy
18. Music records (HMV and others) black and white TV are examples of
(a) specialized businesses
(b) stalemated business
(c) volume businesses
(d) fragmented businesses

11.9 Porters Competitive Threat Model


A vital task of a strategist is to anticipate and/or recognize the nature of
competition and potential threat from competitors and to develop appropriate
response strategies. The most difficult task in this is to properly assess the
magnitude of existing competition and correctly foresee the threat from new
and emerging competitors. Porter (1980) in his pioneering work on competitive
strategy had identified five major types of competitive threats (Figure 11.5),
which are valid even today. These are:

Figure 11.5 Porters Five Forces Model


Source: M E Porter, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analysing Industries and
Competitors (New York: The Free Press, 1980).
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 302

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

1. Industry (existing) competitors


2. Threat of substitutes
3. Bargaining power of buyers
4. Bargaining power of suppliers
5. Threat of new entrants
Industry competitors: Various degrees or intensities of competitive rivalry
exist in the market for a product. This is the battle for market share and is the
most immediate concern of a company, particularly if it is a market leader or
challenger. Ongoing battles between Coca-Cola and Pepsi, Surf and Ariel,
Colgate and Pepsodent are good examples. Competitive intensity or rivalry
depends, to a large extent, on the stage of the product life cycle. Competition is
practically non-existent at the introduction stage, then starts growing steadily
and becomes significant till the product enters the decline stage.
Threat of substitutes: Substitute products reduce demand for a particular
product or a category of products because some customers switch over to the
alternatives. Substitution depends on whether an alternative product offers higher
perceived value to the customers. Substitution may take three different forms:
product-for-product substitution, substitution of need and generic substitution,
Product-for-product substitution or substitution for the same use are same; for
example, e-mail substituting for postal service or mobile phones substituting for
landlines. Substitution of need means that a new product or service makes an
existing product or service redundant. For example, IT has provided e-Commerce
as a tool which has generally made secretarial services or printing redundant to a
large extent. Generic substitution takes place when different products or services
compete for a share in the same family income or household income: for example,
air conditioner manufacturers competing with colour televisions or music systems
or home theatres for snatching a share in fixed household income.
Bargaining power of buyers: Buyers are generally in a better bargaining
position. But, they can become stronger bargainers or create competition among
suppliers under certain specific conditions. Some of these conditions are: i. the
buyer purchases a very significant proportion of total output of the supplier
can happen typically in industrial products; ii. the industry consists of a large
number of small operators so that buyers can easily create competition among
them; iii. cost of switching a supplier is low, i.e., substitutes are available or
there is no product differentiation, or, for industrial or service products, there is
no long-term contract; iv. backward integration into suppliers producta truck
or car manufacturer beginning to make components or accessories like Tata
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 303

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

Motors or an air conditioner manufacturer also making compressors like Carrier


Aircon or a colour TV manufacturer also making picture tubes like Sony.
Bargaining power of suppliers: Suppliers, or sellers, generally in a weak
bargaining position, can be strong bargainers under certain conditions. Such
market conditions are : i. no close substitutes available for the product offered
by the supplier ; ii. the product(s) sold by the supplier(s) is an important or
critical input in the buyers product; for example, ICs and chips in electronic
products which can be bought only from few or selected suppliers; iii. high
switching cost of changing a suppliermay be because the supplier
manufactures a special product or the product is clearly differentiated; iv. forward
integration into buyers product; for example, a carbon black producer entering
into tyre manufacturing and competing with tyre manufacturers or TVS (earlier
Lucas-TVS), traditionally a component or accessories maker, enters into
production of motor cycles (TVS-Suzuki).
Threat of new entrants: Many times, new entrants pose a major threat to
the existing market players. Examples of entry of Toyota and Honda in the US
car market (and also in the global market), Maruti Suzukis entry into the Indian
car market, Vimal fabrics in the Indian textile market and Titan in the Indian
watch market are well known. In fact, most of the established products and
brands in consumer and industrial markets today were new entrants at some
point of time. Forecasting the emergence of new entrants is very important for
existing competitors and it is also one of the most difficult jobs. But, companies
which fail to foresee the new entrants or ignore them may even face disastrous
results. We have the examples of Padmini (earlier Fiat) cars, HMT watches,
Weston TV, etc.
Activity 2
Choose any FMCG or consumer durable product or brand.and analyse the
competition for this product in terms of Porters five forces model.

Self-Assessment Questions
19. Ongoing battles between Coca-Cola and Pepsi is a good example of
_____ competitors.
20. Air conditioner manufacturers competing with colour televisions or music
systems or home theatres for snatching a share in fixed household income
is an example of ________ substitution.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 304

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.10 Competitive Advantage Analysis


Competitive advantage, also called strategic advantage, is essentially a position
of superiority of an organization in relation to its competitors. A more formal
definition of competitive advantage is:
Competitive advantage exists when there is a match between the
distinctive competences of a firm and the factors critical for success
within its industry that permits the firms to outperform competitors.10

The definition shows that superiority of a company over its competitors


exists because the company has developed some unique competencecore
competence or distinctive competencewhich matches the environmental
factors or success factors in the industry in a better way than the capabilities of
competitors. South (1981) has given a definition of competitive advantage which
also gives a good perspective:
The process of strategic management is coming to be defined, in fact,
as the management of competitive advantage, that is, a process of
identifying, developing and taking advantage of enclaves in which a
tangible and preservable business advantage can be achieved.11

11.10.1 Developing Competitive Advantage


Competitive advantage can be secured through two primary routes: product
manufacturing and marketing route. The product manufacturing route reflects
core competences, special capabilities, superior product design, etc. The
marketing route reflects marketing mix application, positioning, offering a bundle
of benefits or value to the customer, etc. The product-making route and the
marketing route are obviously not exclusive to each other; they are, in fact,
complementary to or supporting or reinforcing each other (Figure 11.6).

Figure 11.6 Competitive Advantage: Product and Marketing

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 305

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

A corporate strategy can consist of various individual strategies like product


strategy, pricing strategy, promotion strategy, distribution strategy, competition
strategy, etc. Many forms of competition exist. But these strategies or the way
a company competes is not the only key to, or the complete course for success.
There are at least three other strategic factors which are essential for creation
of a competitive advantage which can be sustained over time. These three
factors are: how to compete (basics), i.e., business assets and skills, where to
compete, i.e., productmarket selection, and whom to compete against, i.e.,
competitor position (Figure 11.8).

Figure 11.7 Factors Contributing to Competitive Advantage (CA)

For securing competitive advantage, corporate strategy should be based


on appropriate assets, skills and capabilities. Important business assets are
customer base, quality reputation, good management or company image, proper
engineering or skilled staff, etc. For example, a product strategy for an industrial
good without proper design, manufacturing and quality control capabilities will
not deliver the results or any sustainability to the product or quality.
Special assets and skills of a company can also be termed as core
competence or distinctive competence of the company. According to Hamel
and Prahalad (1990), advantages of companies and businesses are based on
core competence of these companies, and therefore, developing and managing
core competence are the keys to strategic success. Core competences, however,
are not the only sources of competitive advantage. We shall see this later.
The next important factor is the choice of the target product-market. A
well-planned strategy duly supported by assets and skills may not succeed
because it does not work in a particular market. Procter and Gambles Pringle
potato chips had many assets like consistent quality, long shelf life and national
distribution. But, these assets adversely affected the taste perception which
was considered to be the most important factor in the market.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 306

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

The third important factor for competitive advantage is competitor position.


The objective or goal here is to employ a strategy to thwart competitors who
may lack strength in relevant assets and skills or is weak in some other strategic
applications. For example, flight safety is important to airline passengers: so, if
an airline is perceived to be strong on safety, then a competitive advantage can
exist in terms of provision of flight safety or better flight security.

Self-Assessment Questions
21. A position of superiority of an organization in relation to its competitors is
called __________.
22. Various individual strategies like product strategy, pricing strategy,
promotion strategy, distribution strategy, competition strategy make up
the ________. strategy
23. According to Hamel and Prahalad (1990), advantages of companies and
businesses are based on core competence of these companies.
(True/False)
24. While securing competitive advantage, the product-making route and the
marketing route are exclusive to each other. (True/ False)

11.11 Case Study


Coca-Cola and Pepsi: Is Coke falling behind in competitive rivalry?
Coca-Cola and Pepsi are intense rivals in the global beverages market. In
some countries, Coca-Cola is the market leader with Pepsi the challenger
(No. 2); in some other markets, it is the opposite. But, competition continues
with fluctuating fortunes.
For quite sometime, Coca-Cola was the best-known brand in the world.
But, since 1998, the company has undergone a number of unsettling
developments which affected its performance and brand image. These
included management mistakes; and also change in the top management.
After unsuccessful, and also controversial, tenures of a couple of CEOs,
Neville Isdell was called out of retirement to become Cokes CEO in 2004.
During 200005, 13 highest-level executives left their jobs indicating chaos
at the top of the comapny.*
Coca-Cola was going flat**. In the first quarter of 2005, Coke reported a
decline of 11 per cent in profits because of continuing poor sales in the US
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 307

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

and Europe. In contrast, Pepsico registered a 13 per cent increase in profit.


Pepsico attributed the increase to aggressive investments in North American
beverages, international business operations and its plan to increase these
investments in future. This may mean further trouble for Coca-Cola. Both
companies are heavily dependent on their beverages businesses. The
increase in Pepsicos business in North American and international markets
has, at least partly, been due to Cokes declining performance, image and
losses.***

Neville Isdell is fully seized with the challenges that his company is facing.
He, however, claims that the system isnt broken; but, some analysts may
not agree with him. One analyst pointed out that Coca-Cola has not produced
a successful new soda since 1982. Consultant Tim Pirko has suggested
that the company should invest heavily in developing new brands. He feels
that the company needs to take some new risks, if necessary, to ensure
that the consumers again become excited about Coke products. ****
The company is also aware of it. Coca-Cola has been investing heavily to
rejuvenate the companys stronger brands, and also in new products/drinks.
During 2005, the company invested in the growing non-calorie soda market
with Coca-Cola Zero; it acquired a stake from Danone in bottled water joint
venture; it bought a majority stake in a milk drink company; it started
distributing the Rockstar energy drink. In response to all this, Pepsi gave a
big push to its new products through Pepsi One, Pepsi Lime and Propel
fitness water.
In this scenario, will Coca-Cola be able to recover lost grounds and fully
rehabilitate itself?
* The Coca-Cola company announces changes to senior management and operating
structure,www.2.coca-cola.com, March 2005.
** D Faust, Gone Flat, Business Week, December 20, 2004.
*** B Morris, Coca-Cola: The Real Story, Fortune, May 17, 2004.
**** B Morris (2004).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 308

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.12 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Competition is one of the most important components of business
environment.
Industries can be of various typesalmost each major product group
constitutes an industry. Industries can also be classified in terms of size
of the constituent units or companies, state or pace of development of the
industry, spread of the market, etc.
Various industries can be classified into five categories fragmented
industry, emerging industry, mature industry, declining industry and global
industry.
Competition can be understood better by analysing competitor actions.
More important factors which govern competitive action are objectives or
goals, size and growth, organizational culture, strengths and weaknesses,
cost structure, profitability, image and positioning, and current and past
strategies.
Various models of competition are mentioned in strategic marketing
literature. Competition takes various forms and can be of different
intensities. Different models of competition try to analyse this. Three
important models of competition are: the economic model, the life model
and the war model.
Porters competitive threat model (Five Forces Model) analyses five major
types of competitive threats a company can face in the marketplace. These
are: industry (existing) competitors, threat of substitutes, bargaining power
of buyers (backward integration), bargaining power of suppliers (forward
integration) and threat of new entrants.

11.13 Glossary
Competitive advantage: A position of superiority of an organization in
relation to its competitors
Industry: A group of firms producing products that are close substitutes
for each other
Monopoly: A condition in which there is single seller with no close
substitute product
Oligopoly: A condition in which there are few sellers
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 309

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.14 Terminal Questions


1. Describe briefly the various types of industries classified by Porter.
2. What is a fragmented industry? Analyse the main features of competitive
strategy in a fragmented industry.
3. Distinguish the major characteristics of emerging industries and mature
industries. Also discuss the contrasts of competitive strategies in these
two types of industries.
4. What is a global industry? Explain with examples, international strategy,
multi-domestic strategy, global strategy and transnational strategy.
5. Distinguish and analyse the economic model, the life model and the war
model of competition. Are there any similarities among the three models?
6. Explain Porters competitive threat model (Five Forces Model). Also explain
forward and backward integration.

11.15 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. Industry
2. Business
3. (c) fragmented industry
4. (d) mature industry
5. Emerging
6. Mature
7. True
8. False
9. understanding and evaluating competitors
10. competitor analysis
11. customer-based
12. strategic

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 310

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

13. True
14. True
15. Monopolies, oligopoly
16. Stalemated
17. (a) Competition
18. (b) stalemated business
19. Industry
20. Generic
21. Competitive advantage
22. Corporate
23. True
24. False

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Porter broadly classified various industries into five categories. Refer to
Section 11.4 for further details.
2. Porter has suggested a framework or steps for formulating competitive
strategies in fragmented industries. Refer to Section 11.5.1 for further
details.
3. Formulation of strategy in emerging industries is very difficult task due to
structural characteristics of uncertainty and associated risk. In contrast,
mature industries pose almost the opposite problem, i.e., of competitive
overcrowding. Refer to Section 11.5.2 and 11.5.3 for further details.
4. In global industry, the strategic position of companies in different countries
or national markets are governed by their overall global positions. Refer
to Section 11.5.5 for further details.
5. There are three important models of competition Economic Model, Life
Model and the War Model. Refer to Section 11.8 for further details.
6. Porter identified five major types of competitive threats. Refer to Section
11.9 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 311

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 11

11.16 References
1. Aaker, D A, 1995. Strategic Market Management. 4th ed. New York: John
Wiley & Sons.
2. Day, G S. 1984. Strategic Market Planning: The Pursuit of Competitive
Advantage. St. Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Co.
3. Day, G S. 1990. Market Driven Strategy. New York: The Free Press.
4. Porter, M E. 1990. Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analysing
Industries and Competitors. New York: The Free Press.
5. Porter, M E. 1990. The Competitive Advantage of Nations. New York: The
Free Press.
6. Thompson Jr, A A, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble. 2005. Crafting and
Executing Strategy: The Quest for Competitive Advantage. New Delhi:
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
Endnotes
1

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analysing Industries and Competitors


(New York: The Free Press 1980). 5.

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 5

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 255.

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 275.

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 213.

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 22930

M E Porter, Competitive Strategy (1980), 268

A Aaker, Strategic Market Management, 4th ed. (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1995),
65.

M J Xavier, Strategic Marketing: A Guide for Developing Sustainable Competitive


Advantage (New Delhi: Response Books, 1999), 21314.

10

P D Bennett, ed., Dictionary of Marketing Terms, (Chicago: American Marketing


Association, 1988), 35.

11

S E South, Competitive Advantage: The Art of Strategic Thinking, The Journal of Business
Strategy, 4 (Spring 1981).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 312

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Unit 12

Selection and Activation of Strategy

Structure
12.1 Introduction
12.2 Caselet
Objectives
12.3 Process of Strategic Choice
12.4 Strategy Selection Factors or Criteria
12.5 Selection of Final Strategy
12.6 The Strategic Plan
12.7 Preparation of Strategic Budget
12.8 Allocating and Managing Resources
12.9 Case Study
12.10 Summary
12.11 Glossary
12.12 Terminal Questions
12.13 Answers
12.14 References

12.1 Introduction
In the last unit, we moved closer to selection of strategy by an organization.
Various industry types and structures were analysed and important aspects of
competitive strategies in these industries were discussed. Most companies belong
to one of these types of industries. Competition analysis was undertaken in detail,
which enables a company to understand clearly competitor signals, moves and
actions which can pose competitive threats to companies. Finally, various factors
which determine or affect competitive advantage or disadvantage of companies
were analysed. All these give vital guidelines to companies for selection of an
appropriate strategy, or a combination of strategies, under given conditions.
The present unit is more like an extension of the previous one. We will
discuss some additional factors or criteria here. These factors or criteria should
guide a company in selecting a final strategy from among the various alternative
strategies discussed in Unit 7 (stability strategies), Unit 8 (strategies for managing
change) and Unit 9 (expansion strategies) or a combination of some of these
strategies depending on the particular company situation and the competitive
environment. These factors include the process of strategic choice, evaluation
of strategic alternatives, criteria for selection of strategy, benchmarking and
best practices and critical success factors (CSFs). We shall also discuss in this
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 313

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

chapter various factors or issues involved in activating strategies and organizing


for success.

12.2 Caselet
An organization can determine whether its current capabilities represent
strengths or weaknesses in industry competition by analysing industry
structure, industry competitors, cost structure, customer needs, availability
of substitutes, barriers to entry, etc.,.A good example of this is the General
Cinema Corporation, the largest US movie theatre operator for many years.
The company reassessed that its internal capabilities in site analysis, creative
financing, marketing and management of geographically dispersed
operations were key strengths compared to major success factors in the
soft drink bottling industry. This assessment proved correct and timely for
the company. Within 10 years of entering the soft drinks bottling industry,
General Cinema became the largest franchised bottler of soft drinks in the
US. It was handling jobs for Pepsi, 7UP, Dr. Pepper and Sunkist.1
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Analyse the process of strategy choice or selection
Discuss strategy selection factors or criteria
Highlight different benchmarking practices
Analyse the process of activation of strategies
Discuss the process of preparation of strategic budget
Focus on allocating and managing resources

12.3 Process of Strategic Choice


Choice of a final strategy or strategies from the alternative strategies available
is the most critical and, also the most difficult job in the strategic planning process.
Glueck and Jauch (1984) have defined strategic choice in terms of selecting
the best among the alternatives.
Strategic choice is the decision which selects from among the alternative
grand strategies which will best meet the enterprises objectives. The
choice involves consideration of selection factors, evaluation of the
alternatives against these criteria, and, the actual choice.2
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 314

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Many companies go through the process of strategic choice or decision


making, but not in a very organized or systematic way. They do not guard against
the possible pitfalls, and, as a result, imperfection or mistakes may creep in.
Imperfection may creep in because of four major reasons:
(a) Not analysing carefully the impact of the strategic choice or decision
on organizational objective.
(b) Tendency to ignore problems in the false hope that those would
disappear or resolve themselves.
(c) Incomplete evaluation of strategy alternatives.
(d) Avoidance of risk which may usually be associated with strategic
planning and decision-making process.
In a more positive sense, strategy choice or selection should consist of
four interrelated steps. These steps actually follow from the definition given
above:
1. Focussing on strategy alternatives
2. Evaluating strategy alternatives
3. Considering/using the selection factors or criteria
4. Selecting the final strategy or strategies
Selection of factors or criteria should be generally objective. But, many
times, subjective factors also play dominant roles. Including these factors, the
process of strategic choice may be schematically shown as given in Figure
12.1.

Figure 12.1 Process of Strategic Choice

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 315

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

12.3.1 Focusing on Strategy Alternatives


As discussed in the previous units, strategy alternatives available to a company
are many. Most companies are faced with a dilemma: should they consider all
possible alternative strategies or should they limit themselves to selected
alternatives on the basis of certain given guidelines. Consideration of all possible
alternatives makes the process very broad based, and, it may be theoretically
recommended. But, the practical problems may be many. There is also the
question of time and resources. On the other hand, if only few alternatives are
considered, there is the possibility or risk of omission of some important
strategies.
This clearly indicates the need for a middle course in terms of the number
of alternatives. A reasonable number of alternatives should be chosen initially
on the basis of certain company considerations. First, every organization has a
corporate mission or philosophy. This would dictate elimination of some of the
strategy choices. For example, Reliance Industries, as a corporate policy, does
not consider any project with outlay of less than `1000 crore. Similarly, Tata
Group has decided on a policy that group companies will operate only in those
industries in which they can occupy one of the first three positions. Second,
investment requirements may eliminate some choices, i.e., strategy alternatives
with very high investment requirements may not be considered. Third, gap
analysis (discussed in Unit 6) also helps in the initial selection of some probable
alternatives and exclusion of others. The gap analysis essentially shows or
measures the gap between present performance and desired performance based
on organizational goals or priorities. Only those strategies which are relevant
for bridging the performance gap should be considered to begin with. The final
selection of strategy would be made on the basis of other factors or
considerations.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. Strategic choice is the decision which selects from among the alternative
grand strategies which will best meet the enterprises objectives.
(True/ False)
2. Companies must consider all possible alternative strategies before making
a strategic choice. (True/ False)

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 316

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

12.4 Strategy Selection Factors or Criteria


Contingency strategies are exceptional strategies for exceptional situations or
circumstances. Under normal circumstances, the choice of strategy has to
proceed in a logical sequence or step-wise process. After evaluating various
strategic alternatives in terms of company and industry/market characteristics,
the next step is to use appropriate selection factors or criteria. For further
evaluation of the alternatives or narrowing down the choices to more specific
strategies, we shall consider two selection factors or criteria:
1. SPACE technique or approach
2. Benchmarking and best practices

12.4.1 Space Framework or Technique


Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) matrix or framework can be
considered an improvement over the portfolio analysis (various models discussed
before) and more comprehensive as a technique for evaluating or selecting
strategies. Compared to the two dimensions of the portfolio matrices/models,
SPACE framework consists of four dimensions two internal and two external
factors.
Internal

External

Financial strength

Industry strength

Competitive advantage

Environmental stability

Each of these factors can be rated on a 5-point scale (05) to determine its
relative effectiveness. Based on the relative effectiveness of these factors and
their different combinations, different strategies can be selected (See Figure 12.2).
Four quadrants in the figure represent four different postures: conservative,
aggressive, defensive and competitive. The ideal quadrant is 2 (aggressive)
where both the internal factors are strong and both industry strength and
environmental stability are high. Companies/businesses in this quadrant should
follow expansion strategies like diversification and integration. Actual or final
form of the strategy may be decided based on additional factors or considerations
(discussed later). Companies/businesses in quadrant 4 (competitive) possess
high financial strength but, low competitive advantage; environmental stability
is high but industry strength is low. Such companies/businesses should adopt
merger strategy through amalgamation or consolidation to improve synergy.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 317

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

They may also undertake corporate restructuring or turnaround strategies to


improve competitive advantage and become more competitive. Similarly,
businesses in quadrant 1 (conservative) should predominantly adopt stability
strategies. Companies/businesses in quadrant 3 are in the worst situation with
both internal and external factors very weak. They should adopt strategies for
divestment and liquidation.

Figure 12.2 SPACE Matrix/Framework


Source: Adapted from H Rowe et al. Strategic Management and Business Policy:
Methodological Approach (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.,
1983), 155.

SPACE matrix/framework considers several individual factors for


determining financial strength, competitive advantage, industry strength and
environmental stability. These are shown in Table 12.1.
Table 12.1 SPACE Factors: Internal and External
Internal Factor

External Factor

Financial Strength

Industry Strength

Cash flow

Growth potential

Working capital

Profit potential

Liquidity

Financial stability

Return on investment

Technological know-how

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 318

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Leverage

Resource utilization

Ease of exit

Capital intensity

Risk in the business

Ease of market entry


Productivity, capacity utilization

Competitive Advantage

Environmental Stability

Technological know-how

Technological change

Product quality

Competitive pressure

Product life cycle

Demand variability

Market share

Rate of inflation

Customer loyalty

Price change of competing products

Competitors strengths/weaknesses

Price elasticity of demand

Control over suppliers and distributors

Entry barriers

Note: Each individual factor is rated to arrive at an average or overall score between 0
and 5 for two internal factors and two external factors.
Source: H Rowe et al., Strategic Management and Business Policy: Methodological
Approach (Massachusetts: Addisson-Wesley Publishing Co., 1982), 15556.

12.4.2 Benchmarking and Best Practices


An organizations strategic capability or strategic choice is to be always
understood in relative terms because it involves comparison with competitors
or industry norms. This implies that organizations need to understand and analyse
performance standards, i.e., what constitutes good and bad performance. Since
performance is intrinsically related to strategy formulation and implementation,
the relativity factor should be kept in mind during the process of selection of
the strategy itself. A strategy, along with resource base, should be so selected
that it can deliver results of high standards or standards which can compare
with the best in the industry. This necessitates an analysis of benchmarking and
best practices.
Benchmarking is comparison with, and adherence to, prescribed norms,
standards or practices. Benchmarking can also be defined in a more functional
way:
Benchmarking is a process of identifying, understanding, and adopting
outstanding practices from the same organization or from other
businesses to help improve performance.3
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 319

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Based on the above definitions, five important features or characteristics


can be identified:
(a) Benchmarking enables an organization to analyse where it stands
in comparison to other organizations, where it excels or lags behind.
So, benchmarking is a useful diagnostic tool.
(b) Benchmarking involves identification of two things: first, what is to
be compared, i.e., product, process, performance, etc.; and, second,
whom to compare with, i.e., competitors, organizations in the same
industry, organizations outside the industry, etc.
(c) Benchmarking is applicable to all facets of business products,
processes, services, methods, etc. It goes beyond traditional
competitor analysis and focusses on understanding what are the
best practices and, how the best practices can be emulated, if not
improved upon further.
(d) Benchmarking is not confined to comparison only with direct product
competitors but, all those businesses or organizations which are
recognized as industry leaders or the best.
(e) Benchmarking is a continuous process and not just one-off initiative.
Industry standards and practices constantly change, and an effective
benchmarking initiative has to regularly monitor these changes and
accordingly adapt itself.
Types of Benchmarking
Benchmarking can be broadly divided into two major types or categories: the
first category is primarily based on what is to be benchmarked, and the other
type is dominantly based on whom to benchmark against.
What is to be benchmarked
(Dominant factor)

Whom to benchmark against


(Dominant factor)

Product benchmarking

Internal benchmarking

Process benchmarking

Competitive benchmarking

Functional benchmarking

Generic benchmarking

Performance benchmarking
Strategic benchmarking

Product benchmarking is a comparison of product(s) with competitors or


industry leader to ascertain what customers value most. Process benchmarking
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 320

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

means emulating best processes, i.e., corporate practices and methods.


Functional benchmarking involves comparison of major functions production,
marketing, logistics, distribution, etc., with competitors or non-competitors.
Performance benchmarking is overall comparison of organizational performance
including processes, functions, and results with competitors or industry
participants. Strategic benchmarking is the adoption of strategybuilding system,
planning process, strategic decision making, etc. Internal benchmarking involves
comparison among units and developments within the same organization to
improve unit level or departmental performance. Competitive benchmarking is
a direct comparison of an organizationss competitive strengths and weaknesses
with the best of competitors. Generic benchmarking means comparing
organizational methods and practices with the best practices anywhere in any
type of organization within or outside the industry.
More common forms of benchmarking, however, are based on comparison
with competitors and success factors within the same industry. Organizations
which are more progressive and strive for excellence adopt generic
benchmarking. In practice, benchmarking often involves combining different
types (or more than one type) to improve organizational performance and results.
Benchmarking: Comparison with Competitors
A major, and very common, benchmarking practice is to develop an organizations
resources and competences in comparison with existing and potential
competitors. Different companies in the same industry have different financial
resources, technical know-how, managerial talent, marketing skills, operating
facilities, etc. These resources and competences can become relative strengths
or weaknesses depending on the strategy a company chooses. In selecting a
strategy, the management should compare the organizationss key capabilities
with those of competitors for securing competitive advantage.
Sears and GE are major competitors in home appliance industry in the
US. Sears principal strength is its retail networks. But, for GE, the distribution
systemthrough independent franchised dealershas been a relative
weakness. On the other hand, GEs resource base, particularly financial
resources, to support its modern production system, has enabled the company
to maintain both cost and technological advantage over its competitors,
particularly Sears. This major strength of GE is a relative weakness of Sears.
Maintenance and repair services are important in the appliance business. Sears
always had strength in this area because it maintains fully staffed service
components and distributes the cost of components over various departments
in different retail locations. GE, in contrast, has to depend on regional service
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 321

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

centres and franchised local dealers. The comparison between Sears and GE
shows that benchmarking efforts of the two companies should focus on
distribution network, technological capabilities, operating costs and service
facilities. Management in both companies, in fact, developed successful
strategies based on relative benchmarking. By benchmarking each other, they
have developed ways to build on relative strengths, and at the same time,
avoiding dependence on capabilities in which the other company excels.4
Comparison with key competitorsessentially process benchmarking or
competitive benchmarkingcan be very useful in ascertaining whether resources
and capabilities of an organization are competitive strengths or weaknesses.
Identification of differences (strengths and weaknesses) with competitors provide
important inputs for choice and development of strategy. Also, through
competitive benchmarking, a company can concentrate on those strategies which
it can effectively use to its advantage. Box 11.1 illustrates how UPS used
competitor comparison with FedEx to assess its strengths and weaknesses in
the package transportation and delivery industry for selection of its strategy.
Benchmarking against Success Factors in the Industry
Industry analysis (presented in the previous unit) enables a company to identify
factors which account for strategic success in a particular industry. Key
determinants of success in an industry can be used to assess an organizations
competitive strengths and weaknesses. By analysing industry structure, industry
competitors, cost structure, customer needs, availability of substitutes, barriers
to entry, etc., an organization can determine whether its current capabilities
represent strengths or weaknesses in industry competition. Porters 5-forces
model (discussed in the previous unit) of competitive levels/threats in an industry
provide a useful framework for such analysis.
A good example of this is General Cinema Corporation (see Caselet).
Many other companies have successfully benchmarked industry success factors
for development of competitive strategy. Avery Dennison is another example.
Avery Dennison used industry evolution benchmarking against 3M to create a
new successful strategy.
Best-in-class Benchmarking
Comparison with competitors or benchmarking against industry success factors
has a major shortcoming. They only help an organization to succeed or excel
within the industry. But, best methods or practices need not be confined to only
within ones own industry. These can easily exist in some other business or
industry which may be really exemplary. As mentioned earlier, organizations
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 322

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

which aspire to be comparable to the best among all businesses or strive for
excellence should adopt generic or best-in-class benchmarking.
Best-in-class benchmarking is a comparison of an organizations methods
and practices or performance against the best in any business or industry and
adoption of the same. Best-in-class benchmarking urges organizations to search
for best practices wherever those may be found. In best-in-class benchmarking,
the potential for change is enhanced, and the forces and direction of change
are facilitated by locating practices or forming partnerships across industries or
sectors. For example, British Airways improved aircraft maintenance, refuelling
and turnaround time by studying the processes used in Formula One Grand
Prix motor racing pit stops.5 A police force wanting to improve the way it responds
to emergency telephone calls studied call centre operations in the banking and
IT sectors for benchmarking the response pattern.6
Best-in-class benchmarking becomes particularly relevant for service
organizations. A characteristic feature of service organizations is that improved
performance in one sectorparticularly in factors like speed and reliability
raises the general level of expectations among customers about the same (speed
and reliability) from all companies in all sectors. So, in the service sector, bestin-class benchmarking urges organizations to stretch their core competence or
develop newer capabilities to exploit opportunities in different fields or markets.
Benchmarking Practices in Indian Corporates
With the increase in competitive intensities and exposure to globalization, Indian
companies, like many others in different parts of the world, are constantly seeking
to improve their performance. Benchmarking, therefore, is becoming a logical
strategic initiative. Different companies are trying to benchmark themselves in
different ways to suit their performance requirements and benchmarking
objectives.
Benchmarking practices followed by majority of the Indian companies
can be broadly divided into three types: product or quality benchmarking,
customer service benchmarking (an extension of competitive benchmarking)
and comprehensive or combination benchmarking.
Quality benchmarking has been adopted by companies like BHEL, NTPC,
IOC, Tata Motors, JCT Electronics and Johnson & Nicholson. Companies which
have used benchmarking to improve customer service are HDFC, Infosys,
ModiXerox, Titan and Airtel, among others. These companies focus on those
practices which help them to serve their customers better. Companies like
Reliance Industries, Ranbaxy, Maruti Suzuki, Hero Honda and Honda Motors
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 323

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

have resorted to comprehensive or combination benchmarking, i.e., emulating


good or best practices in different areas to improve overall performance.
These companies have not confined themselves to benchmarking only
against Indian organizations. Many of them have gone for global benchmarking.
Some, like Maruti Suzuki have benchmarked their technology suppliers; others
like Hero Honda and ModiXerox have benchmarked their joint venture partners;
and some others like Honda Motors (India) have benchmarked their overseas
parents.
Some of these companies have adopted benchmarking practices as they
exist. Some others have modified or improved upon the existing practices for
better results or competitive advantage; Reliance and Infosys are among such
companies. Reliance has this to say about their global benchmarking: Global
benchmarking has always been a mantra for all of us here at Reliance. We
have now geared ourselves up to raise our levels of productivity and efficiency
for capital, assets, people and the entire organization well beyond comparable
global benchmarks.

12.4.3 Best Practices at Nike7


Nike can be studied as a good model of how companies grow to excellence in
corporate practices through organizational evolution. Nike evolved from a poster
child for irresponsibility to a leader in progressive practices. We analyse here
the content of this evolution or the path to corporate responsibility.
Nikes business model, like that of many othersto market high-end
consumer goods produced in cost-efficient value chainswas not enough.
During the past decade, the company has been grappling with complex
challenges of responsible business practices trying to strike a balance between
purely organizational and societal dimensions or objectives. Zadek (2004)
explains this in terms of five stages of organizational learning or growth. The
five stages of evolution are:
Stage 1 : Its not our job to fix that; this is the defensive stage
characterized by outright rejection of allegation or denial of links
between the companys practices and the alleged negative
outcome.
Stage 2 : We will do just as much as we have to, this is the compliance
stagea stage of recognition that a corporate policy must be
evolved and pursued for improving practices. Compliance may
be understood as a cost of doing business.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 324

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Stage 3 : Its the business...; this is the managerial stagethe company


realizes that it is facing a long-term problem which cannot be
passed off with attempts at simple compliance or a public
relations strategy. The company needs more fundamental
changes in strategy and practices.
Stage 4 : It gives us a competitive edge; this is the strategic stagethe
company learns how realigning its strategy to conduct
responsible business practices can give it an edge in competition
and contribute to the organizations long-term success.
Stage 5 : We need to make sure everybody does it: this is the civil or
implemention stagethe company promotes collective action
to address societys concerns. Generally, it is linked directly to
organizational strategy.8
Nikes transition from corporate irresponsibility to excellence in progressive
practices has been made possible through a series of measures and sequential
developments. These have been well summarized by Zadek:
Nikes business is based exclusively on global outsourcing. Labour
activists in the early 1990s were exerting tremendous pressure on
premium brand companies to incorporate proper codes of conduct
in their global supply chains (appalling working conditions in some
of the suppliers factories). These groups targeted Nike because of
its high profile brand and not because its business practices were
worse than its competitors.
Labour activists actions were already affecting Nikes core and highly
profitable youth markets in north America and Europe. To prevent
further damage, Nike went professional in 1996 by creating its first
department specifically responsible for managing its supply chain
partners compliance with labour standards. And, in 1998, Nike
established a Corporate Responsibility department.
The CEO assembled a team of senior managers and consultants/
experts to be led by Nikes VP, Corporate Responsibility. Nike realized
that it had to manage corporate responsibility as an integral or
inseparable part of its business. It was also not difficult to re-engineer
procurement incentives. The review team proposed that Nike should
grade all factories according to their labour conditions and, then
penalize or reward procurement teams based on the grade of the
supplier they used. But, commercially and culturally, it was not so
simple.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 325

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Nikes efforts to secure satisfactory labour conditions were serving


its immediate financial objective which was the sole focus of the
majority of the companys investors. Nikes challenge was to adjust
its business model to reflect responsible practicesbuilding
tomorrows business success without compromising todays financial
bottom line. And, to do this, it had to offset any first-mover
disadvantage it had by getting both its competitors and its suppliers
involved in the process.
Nike is a business and is accountable to its shareholders. But, the
company has taken significant steps in evolving a strategy and
practice which transforms itself from being a target of civil activism
to a key participant in civil society initiatives and processes. Nike
has perfectly positioned itself to deal with the challenges of corporate
responsibility. It rightly views the issue as integral to the realities of
globalization and, a vital learning process pertinent to its core
business strategy and organizational practices.
Activity 1
Use the SPACE framework and analyse the strategy selection process of a
company of your choice.

Self-Assessment Questions
3. A comparison with, and adherence to, prescribed norms, standards or
practices is called __________.
4. An organizations strategic capability or strategic choice is to be always
understood in _______ terms because it involves comparison with
competitors or industry norms.
5. A comparison of an organizations methods and practices or performance
against the best in any business or industry and adoption of the same is
called ________ benchmarking.

12.5 Selection of Final Strategy


The final selection of strategy by an organization may depend on judgement,
bargaining or analysis.9 Evaluation of different strategy alternatives through
quantitative techniques and models and application of some selection criteria
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 326

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

eliminate many inappropriate alternatives. This greatly facilitates the process of


strategic choice. But, the final choice of strategy still does not become easy or
automatic because subjective factors (in addition to objective factors) play a very
major role in any organization. Interplay of various organizational forces sometimes
lead to predominance of subjective factors (judgement or bargaining) and, in
some other cases, to dominance of objective or analytical factors (Figure 12.3).

Figure 12.3 Final Choice of Strategy: Interplay of Objective and Subjective Factors

Because final decision is taken by the management or the managers,


strategic choice cannot be governed only by objective considerations. If strategies
were selected only on the basis of objective criteria, a company would have
considered the organizations mission and goals, internal competences and
resources, environmental opportunities and threats analysis and evaluation of
alternatives and the selection criteria discussed above. But, in actual practice,
personal factors are inevitable in the choice processperceptions, biases and
preferences. So, the final choice becomes the outcome of interplay of different
and, sometimes, opposing forces. The resultant choice process narrows down
like this:
With individual group, organizational and environmental pressures
restricting strategic choice, a clear implication for the management is
the necessity for strenuous efforts to maintain choice. If 360 can be
conceived of as representing full choice, then previous strategic choice
may have eliminated 200 degrees, environmental conditions another
80 degrees, and, management values 50 degrees leaving a potential
choice range of 30 degrees or less.10

Mintzberg et al., have analysed 25 strategic decisions and arrived at certain


conclusions about strategy choice by judgement, bargaining or analysis.
According to them, choice by judgement is determined by decision makers
power equations. Choice by bargaining also depends on similar factors, but,
the choice process is more complex; the top management or the decision-making
power in the organization is divided and the issue may be contentious. Choice
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 327

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

of strategy by analysis is a more logical process. There is agreement among


the top management on organizational goals or objectives. Choice by analysis
is more commonly adopted by larger organizations with better data/information
base and organizational size, and structure tends to support a more objective
approach. But, even in this approach, analysis and evaluation of alternatives
are influenced by managerial attitude towards risk, internal power equations,
organizational culture, etc.11
Between formulation and implementation of strategy, there exists another
major step. This is activation of strategies. Activation of strategy means
institutionalizing the strategy and mobilizing, allocating and managing resources
for execution of strategy. The starting point of activation of strategy is preparation
of a strategic plan. We had mentioned about strategic planning and strategic
plan in Unit 1. The actual use of a strategic plan becomes more contextual at
this stage. Strategy choice or selection, preparation of a strategic plan, activation
of strategy and implementation form interrelated steps or stages:
Strategy selection

Strategic plan

Activation of strategy

Implementation of strategy

Self-Assessment Questions
6. Strategic choice cannot be governed only by _______ considerations.
7. Institutionalizing the strategy and mobilizing, allocating and managing
resources for execution of strategy is known as _______ of strategy.

12.6 The Strategic Plan


Strategists sometimes differ on whether strategy comes first or plan comes
before strategy. Logically speaking, organizations first decide on a broad strategy
or the strategic direction. It may be a stability strategy (for pause or caution),
growth or diversification strategy or a strategy for change (restructuring,
turnaround, etc.). This broad strategy or strategic direction is decided by the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 328

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

CEO or the board of directors based on organizational policy or philosophy and


the current company situation. Once the broad strategic move has been decided,
a strategic plan is required to work out or formulate the actual form or elements
of the strategy, the resource implications/allocations, environmental constraints,
etc. For example, a companys strategic choice may be diversification. It may
be related diversification or unrelated diversification; it may be external
diversification like joint venture, takeover, or acquisition or merger. The strategic
plan examines/evaluates each of these strategic options in terms of costs and
benefits before the strategy in its final form is actually decided. So it can be said
that the strategic plan precedes formulation of final strategy.
A strategic plan is a comprehensive document and, is developed in clear
sequential steps. It should contain the following (as shown in Figure 12.4).

Figure 12.4 Strategic Plan, Activation of Strategy, and Implementation

Implementation of strategy will be discussed in Units 13, 14 and 15. Steps


2 and 3 have already been dealt with in unit 5 and 6. We shall analyse here
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 329

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

issues connected with activating or organizing strategy for competitive advantage


or success. For activating or organizing strategy, three major factors are to be
considered:
1. Preparation of strategic budget
2. Allocating and managing resources
3. Integrating resources and organizing for success

Self-Assessment Questions
8. The strategic plan ________ formulation of final strategy.
9. Which of the factors are considered for activating or organizing strategy?
(a) Preparation of strategic budget
(b) Allocating and managing resources
(c) Integrating resources and organizing for success
(d) All the above

12.7 Preparation of Strategic Budget


Budget is the instrument for resource allocation. For strategic planning and
executing strategies, an organization needs strategic budgeting. A strategic
budget is different from the conventional accounting budget. In the accounting
budget, emphasis is on various financial entries for expenditure of a company
many of which are of an operational or routine nature; some may be of
developmental nature. A strategic budget, in contrast, is prepared with particular
reference to a strategic plan and its implementation. Certain assumptions are
made; a number of steps and factors are involved; and strategic budget
preparation is often an iterative process. A typical strategic budgeting process
is illustrated in Figure 12.5.
As shown in Figure 12.4 a number of steps or stages are involved in the
strategic budgeting process. The starting point is the preparation of different
position paperson environment, internal competence/resources and
performance of past strategies. The CEO/top management may also issue some
guidelines for preparation of position papers. These become inputs to the
budgeting process. Based on these inputs and corporate policy or philosophy,
planning objectives are set by the CEO/top management. In the next stage,
strategic plan is prepared by the planning/strategy team. The next step is the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 330

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

preparation of the strategic budget subject to certain resource availability. The


budget would be submitted to the CEO/top management for approval. They
would also allocate resources. The budgeting process is now complete and the
plan/strategy is ready for implementation. During implementation, there may be
a need for budgetary review which may result in revision of the budget proposals.

Figure 12.5 Strategic Budgeting Process

In large multi-business organizations, strategic budgeting often becomes


an interactive or iterative process between the corporate organization and the
SBUs. The budgetary process is initiated at the corporate level with corporate
goals and objectives. The SBU goals and objectives follow from, or have to be
compatible with or complementary to, corporate or organizational objectives.
But, the SBUs give their own planning and feedback inputs and the budgetary
process starts. Both the corporate organization and the SBUs become equal
partners or participants in the preparation of the final SBU budgets. The
interactive budgetary process is shown in Figure 12.6.

Figure 12.6 Interactive Strategic Budgeting: Corporate and SBU Levels

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 331

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Self-Assessment Questions
10. A strategic budget is the same as the conventional accounting budget.
(True/False)
11. In large multi-business organizations, strategic budgeting often becomes
an interactive or iterative process between the corporate organization
and the SBUs. (True/False)

12.8 Allocating and Managing Resources


Allocation and management of resources are major factors in activation and
implementation of strategy. In Figure 12.5, we have shown resource allocation
as a decision of the CEO/top management. In practice, resource allocation
proposals may originate from the planning/strategy team or the SBUs (as shown
in Figure 12.6) based on the strategy and implementation programmes.
Sometimes, the planning/strategy team may seek views of the functional/
operational managers which form important inputs in the resource allocation
process. But, final approval or allocation will be always by the CEO/top
management.
In allocating and managing or organizing resources, three types of
resources have to be considered: financial, human or managerial and technology
or innovation. Some strategic management analysts feel that information
resources should be considered as the fourth resource factor while organizing
and managing organizational resources.12 So, issues relating to allocation and
management of resources are not confined to financial resources only as is
commonly perceived.
We shall, however, start with management of the financial resources or
strategy. All organizations face a basic decision problem as to how their
businesses will be financed. An organization will have a particular financial
requirement if it is planning fast growth of its business through diversification
product/market development or acquisition. The funding requirement will be
different if a company is trying to consolidate its business, i.e., pursuing a stability
strategy. The funding requirement would also be different during different stages
of development of an SBU. Ward (1993) has analysed funding strategy along
with business risk and financial risk of an SBU. He has conducted the analysis
by using the BCG growth share matrix (discussed in Unit 7). Wards analysis is
presented in Figure 12.7.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 332

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Figure 12.7 Funding Strategy Analysis: Use of BCG Framework


Source: Adapted from K Ward Corporate Financial Strategy (Butterworth/Heinemann,
1993), Chapter 2.

The essential point emphasized in Figure 12.7 is the relationship between


business risk, financial risk and funding policy or strategy of an organization. In
other words, the analysis focusses on the need for matching financial risk and
financial return (linked to business risk) to investors. The greater the risk to
shareholders or lenders, the higher the return they expect. Debt (borrowing)
has a higher financial risk than equity because of interest and also repayment
obligations. If financing is through internal accruals (reserves/retained earnings)
as may be in the case of cash cows (maturity phase), shareholders may not be
so concerned. Businesses in maturity stage with high market share (cash cows)
usually generate enough surplus which can contribute to retained earnings,
which, in turn, can be reinvested. Financing can also be through a combination
of equity and debt, which through surplus generation, augment retained earnings/
reserves. Debt servicing also becomes easy. If financing is through equity for
growth as may be in the case of stars, the investors look for immediate returns/
profits. If it is equity in the form of venture capital which may be required for
development of new business (question marks) with high business risk, the
investors expect high returns. If a business is in decline, characteristically a
dog, equity funding is difficult because investors may not like to risk their capital
in a declining or sinking business. Financing through debt may be the only
option. Terms of credit is an important factor here.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 333

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

All this makes mobilization, allocation and management of financial


resources a complex job. Scarcity of investible resources is a common
phenomenon and SBUs make competing demands whether for equity funds or
debt funds. In practice, overstatement of resource requirements by SBUs is
quite common. Also, all businesses of a company do not strictly fall in the BCG
categories of stars, cash cows, question marks and dogs. For many FMCGs
and consumer durables, the market may be in the maturity stage of PLC, but,
all products/brands are not cash cows. There are many examples in soaps,
detergents, refrigerators, etc. These businesses follow stability or incremental
growth strategy. In such cases, the organization may have alternative financing
options available, and, the management may have to carefully weigh the
alternative costs of financing and commensurate returns. There is also a choice
between short-term and long-term financing and the issue of debt servicing. An
organization has to consider all these and related factors in organizing and
managing financial resources.
Next to finance, human resources are the most important factor in
activating strategies. People can make a major difference between success
and failure of a corporate strategy. Knowledge, skill and experience of people
can significantly contribute to strategic success as poor human resource can
hinder adoption or implementation of successful strategies. HR systems play a
vital role in organizing and managing human resources. For various functional/
operational strategies to support a chosen organizational strategy, the right
kind of people should be deployed in right positions or recruited to fill up the
resource gap. For example, if a companys chosen strategy is diversification,
and, if it involves innovative products and processes, requisite skills or expertise
may not be available in the company. Here the HR department has an important
role to play in hiring the right talent, providing or creating proper work environment
and helping to increase managerial productivity.
Talking about the role of HR, it is also necessary to distinguish between
hard and soft approaches to human resource management. Hard and soft
approaches in HR are like hard and soft Ss in organizations. Hard human
resource approach is about how the structure, systems and procedures can be
used to acquire, utilize, develop and retain people to secure strategic advantage
for the organization. Organizational needs are the predominant factor here, not
the people. In soft human resource management, dominant focus is on the
people, individually and collectively culture, style, behaviour, etc., and how
these help or hinder organizational strategies. Many organizations concentrate
on the hard approach leaning too much on the structures and systems and

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 334

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

overlooking or showing lack of concern for the soft factors. They tend to forget
the fundamental fact of complementarity between the hard and soft approaches
necessary for strategic success. In practice, HR approaches and strategies in
many companies reflect adhocism because of internal and external pressures.
But, this is a very shortsighted measure/solution and invariably affects activation
and implementation of strategies. A more balanced approach is necessary.
To ensure such an approach and to be effective, HR professionals also
need to orient themselves. They should familiarize themselves with the
organizations strategic process or a particular strategic initiative and human
resource requirements in terms of competence and commitment. HR activities
or human resource management can help in the pursuit of successful strategies
in many ways. Some of the more important ones are mentioned below:
HR audit to assess resource requirements and availability in terms
of competence and also to analyse skills and capabilities of individual
managers which can form useful inputs to the future planning and
strategy building process.
Fostering team-building attitude and rewarding team work approach.
Individual incentives and rewards often undermine teamwork. But,
most strategies require a team approach rather than individual
approach.
Performance assessment of individuals and teams should have a
clear focus on strategic inputs rather than pure functional or
operational inputs. Some have suggested a 360 degree appraisal
system, i.e., appraisals from multiple perspectives or different parts
or functional areas of the organization so that the full impact of an
employees contribution to success or otherwise of a strategy can
be more meaningfully assessed.
Devising appropriate training and development programmes. Of late,
there has been a shift in focus in terms of reduction of formal training
programmes and increase in coaching and mentoring for selfdevelopment. These become important developmental inputs for
individual managers if the organizations strategies are changing
more regularly.
Institutionalization of individual competence. Individual experts or
highly competent people may leave the organization or retire. So,
one of the objectives of HR policies should be to institutionalize such
competence or expertise through proper succession planning.13
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 335

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

Finance and people are two basic resources of an organization. These


two are the prime drivers of operations and strategies. Technology or
technological innovation renders credibility or completeness to these operations
or strategies. So, as organizations have to match and manage financial and
human resources, they also need to acquire, organize and manage technology
to activate strategy, particularly if the strategy pertains to product innovation or
new product development. Technology affects product quality, productivity and
cost efficiency and can significantly contribute to strategic advantage of an
organization. Coping with technological advances is necessary even if a company
pursues a stability strategy, let alone a growth strategy. The relationship between
corporate strategy, technology and innovation is illustrated in Figure 12.8.

Figure 12.8 Relationship between Strategy, Technology, and Innovation


Source: Adapted from G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), p. 514 (Exhibit 10.10).

12.8.1 Integrating Resources


Owning resourcesfinancial, managerial or technologicaland deploying them
in isolated ways are not enough because these do not ensure strategic capability.
Strategic capability, in the real sense, is concerned with how the resources are
deployed, managed and controlled in a harmonious way to produce a synergistic
effect. Financial planning is done primarily by the finance people; human resource
deployment is by HR department; technology development/management is by
R&D/production group. It is, therefore, essential to coordinate or link these

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 336

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

resources and groups at the organizational level. This means integration of


resources for competence building.
The starting point in resource development is to obtain the threshold levels
in individual resourcesfinance, human and technology. In a highly competitive
environment, the threshold levels are shifting upwards. To maximize the
contribution of resources, i.e., to create a unique strategic capability (core
competence or distinctive competence), resources have to be combined in right
proportion to create the required synergy. Enterprise resource planning (ERP)
is a good method for integrating and optimizing resources. In fact, many
companies are using ERP solutions to optimize resource allocation in an
integrated way. To conclude, we can say that it is not enough to be competent in
different resources. It is the ability of an organization to integrate these resources
effectively which determines the success or failure of a particular strategy or a
set of strategies.
Activity 2
As discussed in the unit, every company prepares a strategic plan. Choose
a company and prepare a strategic plan and analyse the same.

Self-Assessment Questions
12. In allocating and managing or organizing resources, three types of
resources have to be considered: financial, human or managerial
and __________.
13. In ________ human resource management, dominant focus is on the
people, individually and collectively culture, style, behaviour, etc., and
how these help or hinder organizational strategies.
14. Many companies are using ______ solutions to optimize resource
allocation in an integrated way.

12.9 Case Study


Crompton Greaves is a pioneer in the field of electric energy. It is Indias
largest private sector enterprise in the business of electrical engineering
operating for more than 50 years. Operations of the company are divided
into four strategic business units (SBUs)

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 337

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

1. Power systems (transformers, switchgears, etc.)


2. Industrial systems (motors, alternators, etc.)
3. Consumer products (lighting, fans, appliances, etc.)
4. Digital (industrial electronices, telecommunication informatics, etc.)

Strategic choice of business of the company emanates from its vision


statement which covers implementation as well as organizational learning.
The vision statement:
To achieve for Crompton Greaves, the status of world class company so as
to ensure
Customer satisfaction
Stakeholder satisfaction and pride
Profitable growth
Fulfilment of social obligation
Perpetuity
To achieve through the implementation of the best practices and continuous
improvement of processes focussed on:
Technology upgradation
Cost effectiveness
Total quality
Speed
Resource productivity
To create an environment which encourages organizational learning and
team effort where:
Each individual understands his or her responsibility, makes contribution
and is recognized for the same.
Each individual gives his or her best to achieve the shared vision.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 338

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

During 199596, business strategy of CGL was reformulated keeping in


view the increasing competition and entry of MNCs who were equipped
with better technology and resources. The company changed its orientation
from a business organization to a technology organization and a new
corporate policy came into being with a thrust on technology organization.
As a result of this orientation towards technology organization, three new
facilities were established at Mandideep near Bhopal. The most important
aspect of these new facilities is that they belong to that business area of
CGL which the company thinks is its core competence area and wants
dedicated centres to nurture and develop a technology area on which
management can focus for long-term planning.
Other key features of the new corporate strategy focus on the following:
(a) Information technology implementation
(b) Technology innovation and perpetuity
(c) SBU technology cell
(d) Customer satisfaction
(e) Operational efficiency
Right strategic choice and implementation have enabled the company to
maintain robust financial health and sustain steady long-term growth.
* Based on S Lomash and P K Mishra, Business and Strategic Management, New
Delhi: Vikas Publishing House, 2009

12.10 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Choice of a final strategy or strategies from alternative strategies available
is the most critical and the most difficult job in the strategic planning
process. Many companies go through the process of strategic choice or
decision making but not in a very organized or systematic way.
After evaluating various strategy alternatives in terms of company and
industry/market characteristics, the next step is to use appropriate selection
factors or criteria for narrowing down the choice to more specific strategies.
Two important selection factors or criteria are: SPACE technique or
approach, and benchmarking and best practices

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 339

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

An organizations strategic capability or strategic choice is to be always


understood in relative terms because it involves comparison with
competitors or industry norms. This shows the relevance of benchmarking
and best practices. Benchmarking means comparison with and adherence
to prescribed norms, standards or practices.
Final selection of strategy by an organization may depend on judgement,
bargaining or analysis.
Activation of strategy means institutionalizing strategy and mobilizing,
allocating and managing/balancing resources for execution.

12.11 Glossary
Activation of strategy: Institutionalizing the strategy and mobilizing,
allocating and managing resources for execution of strategy.
Benchmarking: Comparison with, and adherence to, prescribed norms,
standards or practices.
Contingency strategies: Exceptional strategies for exceptional situations
or circumstances

12.12 Terminal Questions


1. Explain the process of strategic choice. What are the four steps involved
in the process of strategic choice?
2. What is SPACE technique or framework? Explain by using a diagram.
3. What is benchmarking? What are the different types of benchmarking?
Explain with some examples.
4. Discuss the best practices at Nike.
5. What is strategic budgeting? Explain the steps involved in the process of
strategic budgeting.
6. Explain Wards analysis of funding strategy along with business risk and
financial risk of an SBU. Use the BCG framework.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 340

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

12.13 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. True
2. False
3. Benchmarking
4. Relative
5. Best-in-class
6. Objective
7. Activation
8. Precedes
9. (d) All the above
10. False
11. True
12. technology or innovation
13. soft
14. Enterprise resource planning (ERP)

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Choice of a final strategy or strategies from the alternative strategies
available is the most critical, and, also the most difficult job in the strategic
planning process. Refer to Section 12.3 for further details.
2. Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) matrix or framework
can be considered more comprehensive as a technique for evaluating or
selecting strategies. Refer to Section 12.4.1 for further details.
3. Benchmarking is comparison with, and adherence to, prescribed norms,
standards or practices. Refer to Section 12.4.2 for further details.
4. Nike can be studied as a good model of corporate best practice. Refer to
Section 12.4.3 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 341

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

5. For strategic planning and executing strategies, an organization needs


strategic budgeting. Refer to Section 12.7 for further details.
6. Allocation and management of resources are major factors in activation
and implementation of strategy. Refer to Section 12.8 for further details.

12.14 References
1. Cook, S. 1995. Practical Benchmarking: A Managers Guide to Creating
Competitive Advantage. London: Kogan Page.
2. Gupta, V, K Gollakota, and R Srinivasan. 2005. Business Policy and
Strategic Management: Concepts and Applications. New Delhi: Prentice
Hall of India.
3. Hofer, C W, and D Schendel. 1978. Strategy Formulation: Analytical
Concepts. St. Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing.
4. Murdoch, A. Lateral Benchmarking or What Formula One Taught an
Airline. Management Today, November, 1997.
5. Ward, K. 1993. Corporate Financial Strategy. Oxford: ButterworthHeinemann.
6. Zadek, S. The Path to Corporate Responsibility. Harvard Business Review
(Best Practice), December, 2004.
Endnotes
1

J A Peace II, and R B Robinson Jr (2005), 17374. The bottling operations were, however,
subsequently sold to Pepsico.

F Glueck and L R Jaunch, Business Policy and Strategic Managemet (New York: McGrawHill, 1984), 279

S Cook, Practical Benchmarking: A Managers Guide to Creating Competitive Advantage


(London: Kogan Page, 1995).

J A Pearce II, and R B Robinson Jr, Strategic Management: Formulation, Implementation,


Control, 9th ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2005), 172.

A Murdoch, Lateral Benchmarking or what Formula One Taught an Airline, Management


Today (November, 1997), 6467.

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6th ed. (Pearson Education,
2005), 174.

This section is based on S Zadek, The Path to Corporate Responsibility, Harvard Business
Review (December, 2004).

S Zadek, The Path to Corporate Responsibility (Best Practice), Harvard Business Review
(December, 2004), 126-27.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 342

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 12

P K Ghosh, Strategic Planning and Management (New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons,
2003), 290.

10

C Saunders, The Process of Strategic Choice in W F Glueck, and L R Jauch, Business


Policy and Strategic Management (McGraw Hill, 1984), 301.

11

H Mintzberg, et al., The Structure of Unstructured Decision Process, Administrative


Science Quarterly, 21 (1976), 24675.

12

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy (2005), 490500.

13

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corproate Strategy (2005), 48081.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 343

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Unit 13

Implementation:
Structures and Systems

Structure
13.1 Introduction
13.2 Caselet
Objectives
13.3 Structure of an Organization
13.4 Virtual Organization
13.5 Which is the Best Organizational Structure?
13.6 Organizational Systems
13.7 Complementarity of Strategy, Structure and Systems
13.8 Case Study
13.9 Summary
13.10 Glossary
13.11 Terminal Questions
13.12 Answers
13.13 References

13.1 Introduction
In the strategic war between Hindustan Unilever and Nirma in the Indian detergent
market during the mid-1980s, which factor enabled HLL to regain its market
position or supremacy? Was it the brilliant strategic conception of product
expansions in the form of Rin, Wheel and Sunlight or the way they were
marketed? In Parle products success with the pioneering Indian mineral water
Bisleri (which was selling at `10 per litre when good quality milk such as DMS
was selling at `7 per litre), which was more important: innovative concept of
bottled water or making the product acceptable to millions of Indians? What
enabled ITC to transform the Indian rural market with the breakthrough innovation
of e-choupal? Was it the brilliant idea or the execution of it?
This brings us to a fundamental question: Is formulation of strategy more
important or its implementation? This is a continuing debate in strategic
management literature. There are exponents on either side. But, one thing is
clear: the real test of a strategy is in its implementation. Only implementation
can determine the success or failure of a strategy. Even the most perfect strategy
or plan may fail if it is not implemented properly. It is said that a technically
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 345

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

imperfect plan implemented well may deliver better results than a perfect plan
which does not get off the paper.1 Many companies spend large amount of
time, energy and resources in developing a strategic plan without giving enough
thought to implementation.
Implementation of a strategy or plan depends on three sets of organizational
factors, namely, the structure of the organization, various functional areas and
operations and behavioural (people) aspects. Strategic analysts, therefore,
distinguish between three types or forms of implementation: structural and systems
implementation, functional and operational implementation and behavioural
implementation. These three forms of implementation are interrelated or
interdependent (Figure 13.1). Strategy implementation, in terms of more detailed
forms or components, is shown in Figure 13.2.

Figure 13.1 Strategy Implementation: Structural, Functional, Behavioural

13.2 Caselet
The e-choupal initiative started by ITC was conceived to overcome some
of the challenges faced by Indian farmers such as fragmented farms, weak
infrastructure and the involvement of numerous intermediaries in the sale
and purchase of produce. The e-choupal initiative directly links the rural
farmers with ITC for the procurement of agriculture and aquaculture
products, such as soybeans, coffee, and prawns. Traditionally, these
commodities were procured by ITC and other companies from mandis (major
agricultural marketing centers in rural areas), and a long chain of
intermediaries (middlemen) was involved in buying the produce from farmers
and moving it to the mandis. Through e-choupals, these farmers can now
directly negotiate the sale of their produce with ITC.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 346

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

The e-choupal model has been quite effective, not only because of its
innovative concept but also because it has been well executed. Every echoupal centre is equipped with a computer and Internet connectivity, which
enables the farmers to obtain information on mandi prices and good farming
practices, and to place orders for agricultural inputs, such as seeds and
fertilizers. This helps farmers in improving the quality of produce and
obtaining better prices. Elected from the village itself, a literate farmer acts
as the interface between the illiterate farmers and the computer. So, although
the primary objective of the project was to bring efficiency to ITCs
procurement process, an important byproduct is the increased
empowerment of rural farmers where e-choupals have been established.
Source: http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTEMPOWERMENT/Resources/
14647_E-choupal-web.pdf

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Discuss the structure of an organization and various structural types
Use the concept and tool of the virtual organization
Analyse different organizational systems
Discuss the complementarity of strategy, structure and systems
Identify the root organizational structure

13.3 Structure of an Organization


Structure of an organization defines the levels and roles of management in a
hierarchical way. One can also say that an organizational structure spells out
the way tasks, functions and responsibilities are allocated for implementing a
policy or strategy. These also imply that an organizational structure facilitates
or constrains how processes and relationships work.2 An organizational structure
is presented through the organizational chart. The organizational chart, however,
is only a visual expression of the tasks, functions responsibilities, and the links
and hierarchies among them. The structure goes beyond the visible chart and
signifies the mechanism through which an organization works.
In practice, structural types are many more than depicted by the four
stages of organizational development. In addition to the stage of development,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 347

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

structural forms or types are determined by corporate philosophy or goals,


organizational concepts of control and centralization/decentralization and the
nature of business or business strategy. More common structural forms are
functional structure, divisional structure, SBU structure and matrix structure as
shown in Figure 13.2. Major structural types or forms are mentioned below:
1. Entrepreneurial Structure
2. Functional Structure
3. Divisional Structure
4. SBU Structure
5. Matrix Structure
6. Project-based Structure

Figure 13.2 Implementation of Strategy: Structural, Functional and Behavioural

13.3.1 Entrepreneurial Structure


This is the most elementary form of structure. The entrepreneurial structure
represents an organization which is owned and managed by a single individual
the entrepreneur. Some call it a simple structure and contend that this is no
formal structure at all.3 Organizations with such structures are typically single
business product or service companies which cater to local or regional markets.
This is the way most small businesses operate. The owner-entrepreneur
assumes/discharges most of the responsibilities of management with some
manager(s)/staff assisting him/her. The manager(s)/staff hardly exercise any
authority and there is no or very little division of management responsibilities
(Figure 13.3).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 348

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Figure 13.3 Entrepreneurial or Simple Structure

Advantages and Disadvantages


The entrepreneurial structure, although very simple in form, has certain
advantages. The most important advantage is that decision making, including
strategic decisions, is fast. This also implies prompt and timely response to
environmental changes. Implementation also would be fast because authority
is vested in one person and is fully centralized. Informality also is an advantage
because the structure is free of procedures which often slow down matters.
The entrepreneurial approach also has its disadvantages. Such a structure
indicates excessive reliance on the owner-entrepreneur. There may be too much
demand on the time of the entrepreneur; this may result in his/her devoting
disproportionately more time to day-to-day operational matters and paying less
attention to important strategic decisions. Such a structure also carries the bias
of a single individual into corporate decisions because there are no checks and
balances in the system.

13.3.2 Functional Structure


As an organization increases in size with expansion of business, the simple
entrepreneurial system outlives its utility as a structural form. Need arises for
functional specialization and also delegation of powers for efficient functioning.
This implies a functional structure. A functional structure is based on
differentiation and allocation of primary functions such as production, marketing,
finance, and HR along with certain delegation of powers. Each of these functions
is headed by a general manager or director usually at board level. Other important
functions or activities like public relations and legal may be directly under the
charge of CEO or MD (Figure 13.4). The functional structure is most commonly
used by medium and large organizations with narrow or limited product range.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 349

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Figure 13.4 A Typical Functional Structure

Functional Structure: Electrolux Europe4


Functional structure at Electrolux Home Products (EHP) Europe demonstrates
how such a structure can help in bringing uniformity and simplicity into a business
for profitable growth. Electrolux, the Swedish multinational, is a leading
manufacturer of consumer durableswashing machines, refrigerators and
cookers. From a humble beginning, the company has grown through various
acquisitions (Electroluxs phenomenal growth has been discussed in Unit 8) to
become a dominant player in Europe. But, the market in Europe was becoming
fiercely competitive. To increase competitiveness and its stronghold on the
market, the company needed to reduce costs and improve product and service
standards. For this, the solution or strategy of Electrolux was to introduce a
functional structure for the European operations to replace the geographical
structure which was primarily the result of acquisitions. In 2001, EHP Europe
completely realigned the organization to introduce a functional structure as part
of its competitive strategy in Europe. The new structure is shown in Figure 13.5.

Figure 13.5 Functional Structure at Electrolux Europe

The functional areas/departments shown in Figure 13.5 are explained


below for better understanding of the structure:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 350

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Production and product development: This covers manufacturing and


related activities including R&D. This also includes procurement of raw
material inputs to ensure a seamless flow from input supplies to finished
product. This was considered essential to sustain a stream of innovative
and cost-effective products.
Supply chain management and logistics: This function is necessary for
taking products to the market and provides the link between demand/
sales forecasting and production.
Marketing, product/brand management: This covers all aspects of
marketing activity. This includes managing products and brands, key
customer accounts, service and spare parts.
Sales clusters/divisions: These are sales divisions grouped geographically
into seven clusters to maximize revenue generation.
The management of Electrolux explains the rationale for restructuring of
EHP Europe like this: The realignment of EHP Europe is part of a programme
to ensure profitable growth as the organization drives more simplicity into its
business while reducing the organizational hand-offs and creating more focus
on areas where increased effort is required to meet the tougher challenges of
the market place.5
Advantages and Disadvantages
The functional structure, as the EHP Europe example shows, can lead to
efficiency by focussing on functional specialization. Allocation of work or job
responsibilities also is clear and straightforward. All operational matters can be
delegated to the functional groups so that the top management/CEO can
concentrate more on corporate-level strategies. The functional structure also
signifies that specialists are managing tasks and responsibilities at senior-andmiddle management levels. The CEO is in touch with all functions/operations
through functional heads. This also reduces or simplifies the control mechanism.
If reduction or simplification of the control mechanism is an advantage of
the functional structure, coordination among different functions becomes difficult
in such a structure and this is a disadvantage. This structure can also lead to
functional conflicts, particularly between line and staff functions. Functional
specialization may also lead to narrow specification and compartmentalization,
which may affect organizational efficiency and growth prospects. Because of
functional groupings and allocations, senior managers may often be burdened
with operational or routine matters and may neglect strategic issues.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 351

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

13.3.3 Divisional Structure


A divisional structuresome call it multidivisional structureconsists of separate
divisions constituted on the basis of products, services or geographical areas.
Need for a divisional structure arises primarily because of inadequacy of a simple
functional structure to deal with the complexities of business as an organization
grows very large. The more common form of divisionalization is on the basis of
product or business. Divisionalization gives focus on different divisions with
separate product/market strategies. The divisional structure, however, does not
do away with the functional structure. Within divisions, the functional allocations
will still continue (Figure 13.6).

Figure 13.6 A Divisional Structure

Advantages and Disadvantages


One distinct advantage of the divisional structure is that it enables concentration
on major business areas of an organization, that is products (product-based
divisions) and/or markets (geographic divisions). Since, the divisional functions
are directly under the control of the divisional head, coordination and management
of intra-divisional operations become easy, and this contributes to functional and
operational efficiency. Such structure enables quick response to environmental
changes in matters affecting the divisions business. The structure also gives
enough time to top management for concentrating on strategic issues.
But, in a divisional structure, there is a possibility of confusion over authority
and responsibility in terms of centralization [top management/CEO and
decentralization (divisions)]. There is the possibility of conflicts among the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 352

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

divisions because of differences in interest, objectives and priorities. There is


also the issue of intra-divisional trading (and pricing policy) because some division
may be the input supplier to some other division. If a division grows very large,
problems of divisional management may arise. So, if there are too many divisions,
complexity of coordination and, also of cooperation is likely to arise.

13.3.4 SBU Structure


Divisions closely approximate strategic business units (SBUs) in all large multibusiness organizations. The fundamental factor in the SBU structure is to identify
independent product/market segment which requires distinct strategies. Each
of these product/market segments also face a different environment, and,
therefore, more is the need for separate strategies. In many companies,
particularly in the public sector, the earlier divisional structure has been replaced
by an SBU structure to give more focus on individual business and clearly
define the role of corporate parents. A typical SBU structure is shown in Figure
13.7. Some strategic analysts feel that creation of divisions, which closely match
SBUs may be difficult in practice due to size and efficiency factors because
there may have to be too many divisions. So, according to these analysts, the
divisional structure should be much broader with more than one SBU in each
division.6

Figure 13.7 A Typical SBU Structure

GE is an interesting example of how divisions and SBUs are matched. It


had 9 product groups and 48 divisions, which were reorganized into 43 SBUs.
Many of these SBUs cut across product groups, divisions and profit centres.
For example, three separate divisions in food appliances were merged into a
single SBU to serve the houseware market and to give strategic focus.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 353

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Advantages and Disadvantages


In terms of strategic focus, the SBU structure is an improvement over the
divisional structure. The structure facilitates strategic management of large and
diverse organizations through SBUs. Because of clear strategic focus, the
structure enables assessment/measurement of performance of individual SBUs.
This also makes possible fixing of responsibility and clear accountability at the
level of business units on the basis of performance and strategic positions of
different businesses. It is also possible or easy to add a new business with high
potential and divest unprofitable ones. All large multi-SBU organizations
commonly do this.
A major disadvantage of the SBU structure is that in very big multi-SBU
organizations like GE with too many business units, effective management of
all the units simultaneously may become a problem for the corporate
organization. Also, there may be problems of defining autonomy of the SBUs
and striking a proper balance between SBU autonomy and corporate parenting.
As in the case of divisions, issues/problems of inter-SBU trading exists including
pricing and profit policies. Also, with diverse SBUs, conflicts of interests among
units are quite likely and the larger the number of SBUs, higher are the chances
of such conflicts.

13.3.5 Matrix Structure


A matrix structure is a need-based or project-based structure which does not
follow the conventional lines of hierarchy or control. We can call it a combination
structurecombination of different divisions or functionsdesigned to form a
project team for launching a new product, development of a new market or
geographical operations. In the matrix structure, a project manager is appointed
to coordinate and manage project activities. Functional/specialist resources are
drawn from different divisions/functional areas to constitute the project team.
The members of the team have dual responsibility and authorityone is project
responsibility and authority and the other their line responsibility and authority
in terms of hierarchy and command. Every matrix structure usually has a defined
duration, that is, the project period. After the completion of the project, the
managers go back to their respective divisions/functional areas. Matrix structures
need not be adopted only by very large complex organizations; these can be
used by many professional organizations, like construction companies,
consultancy organizations, etc. A detailed matrix structure is shown in Figure
13.8. Multinational companies may use matrix structure for international trading
of various products. Here the products are projects. A typical matrix structure
for a multinational company is shown in Figure 13.9.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 354

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Figure 13.8 A Matrix Structure


Source: L R Jauch, R Gupta, W F Glueck, Business Policy and Strategic Management,
6th ed. (New Delhi: Frank Bros and Co. 2004), 369.

Figure 13.9 Matrix Structure of a Multinational Company (for Global Operations)


Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 355

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Advantages and Disadvantages


The greatest advantage of the matrix structure is that it fosters an interdisciplinary
approach to organizational business and encourages/promotes teamwork. This
also implies harnessing talents in the organization to optimize outcome. This
means, in other words, maximum utilization of the limited resources of functional
specialists in an organization. The matrix structure also makes possible timely
and efficient response to different environmental situations because of built-in
flexibility (loosely-knit group) and diverse talents in the project group. The
structure also facilitates development of management through increased
participation and involvement in organizational business and decisions. This
should also generally improve the quality of decision making in all group projects/
businesses.
Some disadvantages are inherent in the nature of matrix (cross-functional)
structure itself because it replaces formal lines of authorities, and, this is likely
to result in ambiguity of relationship, responsibility and authority. This implies
lack of clarity in task and job responsibilities. Due to the team approach, decision
making takes longer because consensus has to be reached in all important
matters. The team approach also increases the chances or degrees of conflict
among team members. This happens partly because of dual accountability
system. The dual accountability system also creates confusion and difficulty for
individual team members.

13.3.6 Project-based Structure


Some strategic analysts make a distinction between a matrix structure and a
purely project-based structure. Most matrix structures are also project based,
but, many of these structures have indefinite life like international trading
operations of multinational companies. A project structure is one in which teams
are created for specific purposes or projects, the project team undertakes the
assigned work, and immediately on completion, the team is dissolved. Projectbased structures are more temporary than matrix structures. Such structures
typically represent civil engineering/construction, IT/MIS, consultancy, event
management and management development programmes. The organizational
structure is a constantly changing collection of project teams created, made
functional and knit together loosely by a small corporate team.7 In such a
structure, there may be cross membership of teams.
Project-based structures, as described above, are growing in importance
because of their inherent flexibility and ability to adapt to new situations quickly.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 356

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Such a structure particularly suits some activities or operations as mentioned


above. There are, however, some practical issues and difficulties with such
structures. For example, if project teams are short lived or transitory, should
the team members be regular employees or contracted for specific projects
because of considerations of cost and speciality skills? Or, the team members
should be a combination of the two types? Also, if the teams are transitory,
what unites and motivates the members to work as a well-knit group? How do
they develop understanding of, and commitment to organizational strategy?
Activity 1
Analyse the organizational structure of a company of your choice and also
comment on whether you would suggest an alternative structure for the
company.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The structure of an organization defines the _________and _______of
management in a hierarchical way.
2. The most elementary form of structure is the _______, which represents
an organization owned and managed by a single individualthe
entrepreneur.
3. A _________is based on differentiation and allocation of primary functions
such as production, marketing, finance, and HR along with certain
delegation of powers.
4. The fundamental factor in the _____is to identify independent product/
market segment which requires distinct strategies.
5. A _______is a need-based or project-based structure which does not
follow the conventional lines of hierarchy or control.

13.4 Virtual Organization


Virtual organization is one of the latest developments in evolution of organizational
structures and designs. It is not an organization which exists in reality, but,
performs like one. This is an organization without a formal structure. A virtual
organization is like an extended network. Business Week has given a formal
definition of a virtual organization/corporation which aptly summarizes its major
characteristics:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 357

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Virtual corporation is a temporary network of independent companies


suppliers, customers, even erstwhile rivalslinked by information technology
to share skills, costs and access to one anothers markets. It will have neither
central office nor organization chart. It will have no hierarchy, no vertical
integration.8
As the above definition shows, in a virtual organization, the in-house or
owned resources and activities are minimized, and, most of those exist outside
the organization and are outsourced. Virtual organizations are not held through
formal structure or physical proximity of managers/staff, but, through partnership,
collaboration and networking.9 The important point here is that such an
organization appears real to clients and meets their needs almost as well as
the real organization. In the telecommunication sector in India, several virtual
organizations have been recently created to provide different services.
Business Week has identified and focussed on five basic characteristics
of a virtual organization. These are mentioned below:
(a) Technology: Information networks will link up far-flung companies
for working together through electronic contacts.
(b) Opportunism: Partnerships will be less permanent, less formal and
more opportunisticcompanies to bond together for a specific market
opportunity.
(c) Excellence: Each partnering company brings its core competence
and special capabilities, and, it may be possible to create a best-ofclass, virtual organization.
(d) Trust: Virtual organizations are based on relationship and trust. The
partners share a sense of co-destiny.
(e) No Borders: The virtual organization model redefines the traditional
boundaries of a company. Constant cooperation among the partners
makes it difficult to determine where one company ends and another
begins.10
Virtual organizations, like any other organizational form or system, have
their limitations, and, are facing some criticisms. Most virtual organizations
represent extreme forms of outsourcing. This may result in serious strategic
weaknesses in the long-run because an organization becomes devoid of its
core competence and internal capabilities. This is a major concern in industries
like civil engineering, publishing and IT/software solutions which have become
highly dependent on outsourcing. The real concern is that short-term

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 358

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

expediencies or improvements are achieved at the expense of long-term


competence development and innovation.

Self-Assessment Questions
6. The ________is an organization without a formal structure and is like an
extended network.
7. The in-house resources and activities of a virtual organization are generally
(a) Large
(b) Outsourced
(c) Maximized
(d) Nil

13.5 Which is the Best Organizational Structure?


In all organizations, a logical question is: which is the best or ideal organizational
structure? Or, is there any ideal structure? Stages of development theories
(discussed above) suggest that certain organizational forms are uniquely or
ideally suited to organizations during certain stages of their growth. Should,
then, the organizational structure be linked to the stage of growth of a company?
Studies, in more recent times, however, indicate that the stage of growth, although
very important, is only one of the many critical factors or parameters on which
an ideal organizational structure depends. These factors have complex
interrelationships with each other, and also, with the conditions in the
environment. To design or evolve the best/ideal organizational structure, a
company has to find the best fit between these factors and strategy
implementation.
All organizational structures work in some companies or the other and
would be quite appropriate under certain business conditions. For example, a
functional structure works best under stable market/environmental conditions
with less need for cross-departmental coordination and communication. The
narrower the product line and markets, the more effective is the functional
structure. Divisional structure or SBU structures are most effective under
changing markets/environmental conditions which require more innovations and
faster adaptation. The more diversified the product line and markets, the better
the divisional, particularly the SBU structure, works.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 359

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

For all products/projects (including international operations) where strong


cross-functional approach is required, the matrix structure (or the project
structure) may be the best.
It must be kept in mind, however, that an organizational structure should
never be static or permanent. In fact, the illustrations given before have indicated
the need for changes. For instance, as business diversifies and markets become
more complex, a functional structure should be replaced by a divisional or SBU
structure. If organizational strategy is for major expansion/diversification through
takeover or merger, the increased size and new organizational composition
may require change of structure. If the strategy is unrelated diversification, (i.e.,
new processes, products and markets), added complexity and diversity may
necessitate change of structure. If the strategy is market penetration through
cost reduction and improvement in service standards, a change of structure
would give better results. We have explained earlier how Electrolux Europe
replaced the geographical structure by a functional structure. Organizational
restructuring may also be required if environmental or business development
creates compulsions for divesting businesses. Tatas divested TOMCO and
Lakm business, Voltas divested its refrigerator and air conditioner businesses;
the companies restructured themselves accordingly.
In conclusion, we can say that the best or ideal organizational structure is
one which adapts itself perfectly to changing business and market conditions
and consequent strategy requirements.

Self-Assessment Questions
8. The structure that works best under stable market/environmental
conditions with less need for cross-departmental coordination and
communication is
(a) functional structure
(b) Divisional structure
(c) Matrix structure
(d) SBU structure
9. The structure that is most effective under changing markets/environmental
conditions which require more innovations and faster adaptation is
(a) Functional structure
(b) Divisional structure
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 360

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

(c) Matrix structure


(d) Project structure

13.6 Organizational Systems


An organizational structure provides the mechanism for distribution of authority
and responsibility among various managerial positions in the organization. This
is done through organizational constituents like business units, departments,
divisions, projects or networks. Through these constituents, the organization
performs a set of tasks, activities or functions to achieve its goals or objectives.
To do this effectively, certain organizational inputs are necessary, some linkages
need to be established among the constituents and some controls have to be
enforced. These are done through a series of systems. The structure and the
systems complement each other in the implementation of organizational
strategies. Strategy, structure and systems form the interrelated hard Ss of the
organization (Figure 13.10). Six major systems are important from the strategy
point of view:
(a) Planning system (PS)
(b) Management information system (MIS)
(c) Management development system (MDS)
(d) Motivation system (MS)
(e) Evaluation system (ES)
(f) Management control system (MCS)
See the diagrammatic presentation in Figure 13.11.

Figure 13.10 Interrelated Strategy, Structure, Systems

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 361

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Figure 13.11 Organizational Structure and Organizational Systems

13.6.1 Planning System


Planning, strategy and implementation have the most direct and intimate
relationship among them. We had discussed about the planning process in an
organization in Unit 1. Planning system represents the planning process in its
entiretyall matters related to planning. The most important factor in the planning
system is the constitution of the corporate planning team and according it an
appropriate position in the organizational chart/structure. In many organizations,
the planning team/system is directly under the control of the CEO. In such
cases, planning system or activity also includes strategy formulation except
pure functional strategies which may be delegated to the functional or
departmental heads. Implementation directives are also given by the centralized
planning system. A good number of organization also follow a decentralized
planning system. In such an organization, planning, strategy formulation and
implementation are decentralized at the division or the SBU level; the parent
organization confines itself to corporate directives or only corporate-level
strategies. The strongest argument in favour of a decentralized planning system
is that if managers are actively associated with the planning process/system,
chances of successful implementation are more.
Different planning systems (centralized and decentralized) suit different
organizational structures. For example, in entrepreneurial structure, and, also
in functional structure, a centralized planning system would be generally more
appropriate with the functional areas/heads given necessary flexibility/authority
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 362

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

for implementation. In a divisional or SBU structure, a decentralized planning


system would be more effective with the active involvement of SBU-level
managers in strategy formulation and implementation. The same applies to
matrix structures and network structures also. In all such decentralized structures
and systems, however, the corporate/parental organization will have its own
planning cell. But, all this also indicates the need for adaptation of the planning
system to organizational structure and strategy requirements.

13.6.2 Management Information System (MIS)


The planning system in any organization depends heavily on the management
information system or MIS. The MIS provides critical inputs to the planning
system regarding all important aspects of organizational functioning and
performance. It also provides connectivity between different constituents of the
organizational structure in terms of information flow and feedback. MIS helps
managers in two important ways; first, it enables them to equip themselves with
all relevant data/information which they may require to perform their tasks better
and, second, to coordinate their activities with other managers/departments
through a central organizational mechanism. Although MIS is more frequently
used by middle and operating management, it also greatly helps the top
management in decision making.
In fact, MIS provides the foundation for design and implementation of a
number of other organizational systems. Therefore, development of MIS in an
organization is a critical management activity because many vital decisions are
based on this. For effectiveness, development of MIS should be guided by the
organizational structure and the style of management. In some organizations,
MIS is part of HR; in some companies, it is part of finance; in some organizations,
MlS is an independent activity reporting directly to the top management; in some
companies, MIS is outsourced. But, for cohesion, MIS should be a part of the
planning system as is the case in many companies. Close connectivity between
the planning system and the information system should increase value addition
by MIS in the organizational process. It should also facilitate strategy
development and implementation.

13.6.3 Management Development System (MDS)


Management development system (MDS) is essentially concerned with the
development of individual managers and preparing them better for organizational
activities including planning, strategy making and implementation. The
Encyclopedia of Professional Management has described MDS as a process
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 363

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

of gradual, systematic improvement in the knowledge, skills, attitudes and


performance of those individuals in an organization who carry management
responsibilities.11
The objective of MDS is to nurture individual managers and build human
capital. The focus of MDS should be the orientation and development
programmes with particular reference to strategic tasks, planning skills and
implementation capabilities. The nature of strategic tasks change with the change
of organizational strategy or adoption of new strategy. MDS should regularly
modify or update existing programmes or design new development programmes
to prepare managers for changing tasks and responsibilities. Therefore, MDS
has a special role to play in the strategy development and implementation
process.
To effectively play its role, MDS should focus or concentrate on three
important functions:
(a) Training and development of managers through in-house or external
programmes to impart required skills to enable them to perform
strategic tasks.
(b) Career planning of managers to motivate and prepare them to
undertake future strategic tasks and responsibilities and
organizational development through this.
(c) Planned positive intervention to ensure smooth transition from one
strategic phase to another to minimize resistance to change; this is
done through motivational programmes.12

13.6.4 Motivation System


The motivation system can greatly contribute to the management development
system. Many companies work on the basis of a carrot and stick policy, i.e.,
reward and punishment system. But, recent trends are more towards carrot
than stick; carrot here means inducement, encouragement and incentives.
And, these are done through the motivation system. Incentives are the most
important motivational factor. Incentives can be of two types: monetary and
non-monetary. Common monetary incentives are salary increase (increments),
productivity or performance bonus, profit sharing, welfare allowances, etc. Nonmonetary incentives are special rewards, certificates of excellence, nomination
to a prestigious training programme, foreign tours, foreign postings, etc. Both
monetary and non-monetary incentives are used by progressive organizations
to motivate their employees.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 364

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Infosys is a good example, a sort of a model, of motivation through


monetary and particularly, non-monetary incentives. Infosys employees receive
high salaries and salary-linked compensations compared to Indian compensation
norms/practices. Infosys is also one of the few Indian companies which offer
employees stock option plans (ESOP). ESOP increases financial stake of the
employees and also gives them a proud feeling of ownership of a company
through shareholding. It is common knowledge that most employees of Infosys
become financially rich because of significant market capitalization of company
stocks. But, monetary incentives/compensations are not the only motivating
factors in Infosys. In fact, monetary compensations are not always enough to
completely motivate the employees. As Narayana Murthy, CEO, Infosys, put it:
My employees seek challenging opportunities, respect, dignity and the
opportunities to learn new things ... Salary alone is a very dangerous way of
rewarding capability.13 Infosys has a motivation system which goes much beyond
pure monetary incentives. The company has created an environment and work
culture in which employees are encouraged to communicate with each other
freely and with the higher management. The CEO keeps in regular contact with
the employees by sending them mails every fortnight. There are live chats also.
There is a concept of chairmans list, and, based on this list, an annual excellence
award is given to recognize talent.14

13.6.5 Evaluation System


Motivations are required to induce employees/managers to perform. Evaluation
or appraisals are necessary to ascertain whether employees/managers are
actually performing or performing satisfactorily. So, the evaluation system has
a role almost parallel to the motivation system. The evaluation system assesses
managerial performance in terms of organizational objectives, priorities, and
strategies. The purpose of a positive appraisal system is to remind managers
how they are discharging their tasks and responsibilities, particularly in relation
to the strategy implementation. In a progressive organization, this is a continuous
process.
For the development of an effective evaluation system, choice of factors
to be used for appraisal becomes a critical issue. It is generally advisable to use
a number of factors or multiple criteria to make the assessment system more
objective and broad based. This indicates the need for inclusion of a good number
of quantitative factors in addition to the subjective or qualitative factors. Several
appraisal methods are available; some are purely quantitative or objective, some
are totally subjective or qualitative, and, some are mix of the two. Most of the

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 365

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

actual appraisal systems are based on an appropriate mix of the two types of
factors to make the system more acceptable and reliable.
Also, relevance or suitability of the evaluation method to the corporate
strategy adopted by an organization should be considered. For example, if a
stability strategy is followed, the objective of the appraisal system should be to
focus on improving efficiency in current operations. Improvement of efficiency
in current operations, combined with initiative, can also help to achieve shortterm growth. For long-term growth, i.e., growth through expansion or
diversification, focus should be on long-term managerial characteristics of
initiative, aggressiveness, risk taking attitude, etc. The evaluation system should
lay emphasis on these factors and be structured accordingly.

13.6.6 Management Control System (MCS)


The management control system (MCS) runs parallel to the evaluation system,
and, also, to some extent, is complementary to the evaluation system. The
objective of the control system is to ensure that implementation of strategy
takes place according to plan. A properly structured MCS should consist of four
steps:
a. Establishing standards
b. Measuring performance
c. Evaluating performance against standards
d. Taking corrective measures to improve performance
These four steps constitute a cyclical process (see Figure 13.12).

Figure 13.12 Management Control Cycle


Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 366

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Organzational standards are prescribed in terms of targeted or planned


performance. Measurement of performance is done through the evaluation
system discussed above. Performance of employees/managers is evaluated
with respect to the prescribed standards and deviations are noted. On the basis
of deviations or observed drifts in performance, corrective action is initiated so
that performance improves and meets the prescribed organizational standards.
This is the MCS cycle.
The MCS cycle depicts a purely quantitative control system in terms of
formal or measurable indicators of standards and performance. But, in many
organizations, all controls are not enforced only through the formal machinery
or methods; they also use informal methods. In almost every organization, there
is a formal structure, which specifies the official hierarchy and reporting system
in the organization. But, there is also an informal structure which shows the way
systems and relationships actually work bypassing, or parallel to, the formal
structure. Informal controls are apprising the managers about possible problems
or lapses in strategy implementation in advance: guiding them through the
implementation process; cautioning them about mistakes or repeat of mistakes;
adherence to ethical norms, etc. These are done in a more unstructured way.
The informal control system many times complement or reinforces the formal
control system. To make the MCS more positive and successful, a good mix of
formal and informal control systems is generally recommended.

Self-Assessment Questions
10. The planning system in any organization depends heavily on the ________.
11. The __________ is essentially concerned with the development of
individual managers and preparing them better for organizational activities
including planning, strategy making and implementation.
12. The _________system assesses managerial performance in terms of
organizational objectives, priorities, and strategies.
13. The objective of the ________system is to ensure that implementation of
strategy takes place according to plan.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 367

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

13.7 Complementarity of Strategy, Structure and Systems


We had mentioned earlier (Figure 13.10) about interrelations between strategy,
structure and systems. Now, this can be seen in more specific forms in terms of
strategy options, structural alternatives and appropriate systems. We can also
introduce environmental factors to make the exercise more contextual.
Environmental factors, strategies, structures and systems can be combined in
the form of a linkage matrix. This is shown in Table 13.1.
Table 13.1 Strategy Implementation, Structure and Systems: A Linkage Matrix
Environmental Characteristics
Strategy/Structure/
Systems

Certain, stable, predictable

Unstable, volatile, unpredictable

Strategy

Growth/expansion/acquisition/
divestment

Stability/controlled growth

Structure

Entrepreneurial/divisional SBU/
matrix

Divisional/functional/holding company

Participative

Directive

MIS

Decision-orientation

Efficiency-orientation

Management
development

External-focussed; need-based;
contingency

Internal-focussed; programmed

Motivation

Monetary/non-monetary

Monetary/non-monetary

Systems
Planning

Evaluation

Broad-based; qualitative/subjective Efficiency-based; quantitative/objective

Control

Formal/informal; direct/indirect

Predominantly formal/direct

Source: Adapted from A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management (2005),
344 (Exhibit 10.13).

Since the matrix is two-dimensional, it has limitations in terms of options


or alternatives or combinations of environmental characteristics, strategies,
structures and systems which can be shown. So, the combinations of strategies,
structures and systems presented in the matrix are to be taken as more indicative
rather than definitive. For example, for growth and expansion strategy,
appropriate structural form may be divisional/SBU/matrix and the planning
system should be participative. But, for the same strategy, the organizational
structures can also be entrepreneurial; in that case, the planning system should
be directive and not participative. In such cases, more exactness can be obtained
through further analysis. But the matrix is important as a framework of analysis.
This can be made more detailed or sophisticated by adding more dimensions
or variables.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 368

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Activity 2
Discuss the complementarity or otherwise of strategy, structure and systems
of any of these companies: L&T, Tata Steel and Crompton Greaves. Write
down your observations in a report.

Self-Assessment Questions
14. Environmental factors, strategies, structures and systems can be
combined in the form of a _______matrix.
15. The combinations of strategies, structures and systems presented in the
matrix are to be taken as more _______rather than definitive.

13.8 Case Study


SBU Structure at BPCL
Organizational structures evolve in response to company requirements and
changes in environmental conditions. Often old functional or divisional
structures give way to more modern SBU structures. This happened at
BPCL also.
During the 1970s, the government of India nationalized the petroleum
industry and Burmah Oil Refiniries was renamed as Bharat Petroleum
Corporation Ltd (BPCL). Till 1992, the Government of India held 100 per
cent equity in BPCL. During this year, it sold 30 per cent stake to institutional
investors. Since 1995, petroleum companies in India initiated strategic
reorganization/restructuring to face emerging competition because of
dismantling of the Administered Price Mechanism (APM). Government
control on distribution and marketing was also relaxed by 2002 making
way for more competitive marketing.
Organizational restructuring in BPCL was led by Sundararajan, CMD.
Sundararajan initiated the restructuring process through consultation with
the top management, the board and the government. Arthur D Little was
appointed as the consultant for the project. Sundararajan had formed a
change teama cross-functional team of senior managersto plan and
implement the restructuring process.
The existing or old structure was functionally organized. There was four
major functional areasrefineries, marketing, finance and personneleach

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 369

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

headed by an executive director reporting to the CMD. Other support


functional like corporate affairs, legal, audit, vigilance and company secretary
were directly under the CMD.
The change management team, top management and the consultant were
unanimous in their view that the functional structure was not the appropriate
form to create a customer-centric organization. The consensus was to create
strategic business units (SBUs) with clear customer focus. But as happens
in most organizations, particularly in public sector companies, there was
inertia among the managers to change. There were apprehensions about
the new structure among the senior managers. Finally, with the intervention
of the CMD, the new SBU structure was approved and made acceptable.
The new structure identified and separated six distinct SBUs: 1. refinery,
2. industrial/commercial, 3. lubes, 4. LPG, 5. aviation, 6. retail

The refinery, along with two new departments, IT & Supply Chain and R&D,
came under the director (refineries); all the other five customer-centred
SBUs were to report to the director (marketing). The corporate support
functions were to remain under the direct charge of the CMD. Each SBU
was to have its own support functionfinance, HR, sales, logistics, etc.
During the process of formation of SBUs, delayering had also taken place
the number of layers in the organization reduced from seven to four.
Implementation of the new structural design involved redefinition of role
and responsibilities and redeployment of more than 2,000 personnel. New
roles had been created primarily to increase customer interface. Since the
support functions were now located within the SBUs, the new structure
included lateral linkage mechanism for better synergy.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 370

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

13.9 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Implementation of a strategy or plan depends on three sets of factors: the
structure (includes systems) of the organization, various functional areas
and operations, and behavioural (people) aspects.
Structure of an organization defines the levels and roles of management
in a hierachical way. One can also say that an organization structure
spells out the way tasks, functions and responsibilities are allocated for
implementing a policy or strategy.
Structural forms or types, in practice, are many more than depicted by
the four stages of organizational development. In addition to the stage of
development, structural forms are determined by corporate philosophy or
goals, organizational concepts of business or business strategy.
Ten probable structural forms are: i. entrepreneurial structure, ii. functional
structure, iii. divisional structure, iv. SBU structure, v. matrix structure, vi.
project-based structure, vii. team-based structure, viii. network structure,
ix. holding company structure, and x. intermediate structure. More common
structural forms are: functional structure, divisional structure, SBU structure
and matrix structure.
Virtual organization is one of the latest developments in evolution of
organizational structures and designs. This is an organization without a
formal structure. It is a temporary network of independent companies
suppliers, customers, even erstwhile rivalslinked by information
technology to share skills, costs and access to one anothers markets.
In the implementation of strategy, organizational structures are supported
by organizational systems. Six major systems are important from the
strategy point of view: planning system, management information system
(MIS), management development system (MDS), motivation system,
evaluation system and management control system (MCS).

13.10 Glossary
Functional structure: A structure based on differentiation and allocation
of primary functions such as production, marketing, finance, and HR along
with certain delegation of powers.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 371

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

Matrix structure: A need-based or project-based structure which does


not follow the conventional lines of hierarchy or control.
Divisional structure: A structure that consists of separate divisions
constituted on the basis of products, services or geographical areas.
Entrepreneurial structure: A structure that represents an organization
owned and managed by a single individualthe entrepreneur.
Virtual organization: A structure of an organization without a formal
structure, which does not exist in reality, but, performs like one.

13.11 Terminal Questions


1. What are the factors that determine the structure of an organization?
Mention six probable structural types or forms.
2. Distinguish between a divisional structure and an SBU structure. Explain
SBU structure with a diagram.
3. What is virtual organization? Explain and also mention its limitations.
4. Is there any ideal or best organizational structure? Discuss in detail.
5. What is the role of organizational systems in strategy implementation?
Distinguish between six major organizational systems.
6. Explain, in detail, the complementarity between strategy, structure and
systems. Analyse with the help of a linkage matrix.

13.12 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. levels, roles
2. entrepreneurial structure
3. functional structure
4. SBU structure
5. matrix structure
6. Virtual organization
7. (b) Outsourced

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 372

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

8. (a) functional structure


9. (b) Divisional structure
10. management information system (MIS)
11. management development system (MDS)
12. evaluation
13. control
14. linkage
15. indicative

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. The structure of an organization defines the levels and roles of
management in a hierarchical way. Refer to Section 13.3 for further details.
2. A divisional structure consists of separate divisions constituted on the
basis of products, services or geographical areas, while a an SBU
structure, the divisions closely approximate strategic business units
(SBUs). Refer to Section 13.3.3 and 13.3.4 for further details.
3. A vrtual organization is not an organization which exists in reality, but,
performs like one. Refer to Section 13.4 for further details.
4. All organizational structures work in some companies or the other and
would be quite appropriate under certain business conditions. Refer to
Section 13.5 for further details.
5. To achieve its goals or objectives, certain organizational inputs are
necessary, some linkages need to be established among the constituents
and some controls have to be enforced. These are done through a series
of systems. Refer to Section 13.6 for further details.
6. The interrelations between strategy, structure and systems can be seen
in more specific forms in terms of strategy options, structural alternatives
and appropriate systems. Refer to Section 13.7 for further details.

13.13 References
1. Jauch, L R, R Gupta, and W F Glueck. 2004. Business Policy and Strategic
Management. 6th ed. New Delhi: Frank Bros & Co.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 373

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 13

2. Macy, B, and Izumi, H. 1993. Organisational Changes, Design and Work


Innovations; A Meta Analysis of 131 North American Field Studies 1961
1991. In Research on Organisational Changes and Development, 7.
3. Salter, M S. 1970. Stages of Corporate Development. Journal of Business
Society. Spring.
4. Scott, B R. The Industrial State: Old Myths and New Realities. The
Business Review, MarchApril, 1973.
5. Thain, D H. 1969. Stages of Corporate Development. The Business
Quarterly. Winter.
6. Thompson Jr, A A, A J Strickland III, and J E Gamble. 2005. Crafting and
Executing Strategy: The Quest for Competitive Advantage. 14th ed. New
Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
Endnotes
1

D McKonkey, Planning in a Changing Environment, Business Horizons (SeptOct), 66.

G Johnson, and K Scholes, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 6th ed. (2005), 422.

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005)

Based on The Electrolux Executive, December 2000.

The Electrolux Executive, December 2000.

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), 425

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), 431

The Virtual Corporation, Business Week (February 8, 1993), 98.

G Johnson, and K Scholes (2005), 452.

10

The Virutal Corporation, Business Week (February 8, 1993) 98100.

11

L R Bittel, ed., Encyclopedia of Professional Management (New York: McGraw Hill, (1978).

12

A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 2nd ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill, 2005), 342.

13

A Phadnis, What Money Cant Buy, Business Standard (The Strategist), December, 12,
2000.

14

A Phadnis, What Money Cant Buy, Business Standard (The Strategist), December, 12,
2000

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 374

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Unit 14

Implementation:
Functional and Operational

Structure
14.1 Introduction
14.2 Caselet
Objectives
14.3 Production Policies and Plans
14.4 Marketing Policies and Plans
14.5 Financial Policies and Plans
14.6 HR Policies and Functions
14.7 MIS/IT Policies and Plans
14.8 Alternative Business Strategies and Functional
14.9 Processes or Methods
14.10 Productivity and Efficiency
14.11 Pace or Speed of Action
14.12 People Factor
14.13 Case Study
14.14 Summary
14.15 Glossary
14.16 Terminal Questions
14.17 Answers
14.18 References

14.1 Introduction
In the last unit, we had analysed the role of structures and systems in strategy
implementation. In this unit, we shall discuss the roles of functions and operations
in the implementation of strategy. It is necessary for an organization to have the
right structures and systems; but, real implementation of strategy takes place
through major functional areas of manufacturing, marketing, finance, etc. In
each of these functional areas, operational implementation is equally important.
Functional implementation and operational implementation are complementary
to each other. One can even say that operational implementation is an extension
of functional implementation (Figure 14.1).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 375

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Figure 14.1 Strategy Implementation: Functional and Operational

We will discuss the issues related to functional implementation and


operational implementation in this unit. These include defining functional strategy;
understanding the role of the functional policies and plans in implementing the
strategy; identifying major factors involved in formulating policies and plans in
different functional areas; integrating various functional policies and plans; and,
analysing all important aspects of operational implementation.
A. Functional Implementation
Functional implementation takes place through functional policies, plans and
strategies. Functional strategy relates to a particular functional area and follows
from business strategy of an organizationeither a corporate-level strategy or
a business unit-level strategy (in SBU structure in Figure 12.7, we have shown
different functions).
We had introduced the concepts of policy, plan, strategy and tactics in
Unit 1, and explained the difference between them. The analysis of functional
implementation will be carried out in terms of policies, plans and strategies in
different functional areas. In any organization, five major functional areas are:
production, marketing, finance, HRM and MIS/IT. Some consider R&D also as
an important functional area, but we shall confine ourselves to the four traditional
functional areas: production, marketing, finance, HRM and the emergent area
of MIS/IT. For strategy implementation, these functional areas have to have
proper horizontal fit among themselves, i.e., play interdependent roles
(Figure 14.2).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 376

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Figure 14.2 Interdependent Functional Areas

14.2 Caselet
The failure of Big Bite, a much hyped product launched by Parle is an
example of how wrong balancing in a products marketing mix can lead to
marketing failure. In 198788, Parle Exports (then makers of Thumps Up,
Limca, Gold Spot) made a high profile launch of Big Bite, a kind of burger
a bun with vegetables, or chicken or mutton filling topped with different
sauces. The launch was preceded by several campaigns in Mumbai with
tantalizing punchlines. Mumbaiites responded overwhelmingly, and, in the
first month of the launch, 90 per cent of the target customers had tried Big
Bite. But, thereafter, the sales declined, and, in less than six months, it was
reduced to 10 per cent. Big Bite was a big failure, and Parle had to withdraw
the product. Follow-up research showed that Big Bite did not live up to
customer expectations. Customers found it dry compared to its nearest
rival Rolls and perceived it to be like any other burger. Their expectations
were raised by the Big Bite ads, but, the product failed to rise to those
levels. This was a case of product-promotion mismatch, and the case shows
that wrong balance in the marketing mix can lead to marketing failure.
Source: A Nag, Strategic Marketing, 2nd ed. (New Delhi: Macmillan India, 2008), 171

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 377

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Analyse functional implementation functional policies, plans and
strategies
Identify the linkage between alternative business strategies and functional
policies and plans
Identify and analyse major issues in operational implementation of strategy
Discuss the important role of people factor in implementation

14.3 Production Policies and Plans


Production processes typically constitute more than 70 per cent of a companys
total assets1, and, therefore, have high stakes in terms of roles and activities in
strategy formulation and implementation. Production policies, capabilities and
limitations can significantly affect strategic planning and implementation and
the attainment of organizational objectives. Production, in the core, relates to
manufacturing, i.e., decisions regarding plant size, plant location or layout,
product design, choice of equipment, spares and accessories, technology level/
technological innovation, inventory control, quality control, cost control,
packaging, use of standards, capacity utilization, etc.
But, production as a function, in a broader sense, also includes procurement
of raw materials and inputs, R&D and any other operations (logistics) related to
the production process. Some, therefore, prefer to call this function production/
operations. Again, production, as a function, is not confined to manufacturingrelated activities/operations only. It also extends to production of services, retailing,
etc. Both manufacturing and service organizations have to formulate policies
regarding capacity, technology, purchasing, etc. Similarly, retailers have to
formulate policies and prepare plans for buying and sellingmay be, buy in bulk,
repackage and sell in smaller packs. There have to be policies and plans for
bulking also.

14.3.1 Choice of Production Process


If a company decides to manufacture the product, it has to consider some major
policy issues in relation to the production process. Four major issues to be
considered are:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 378

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Size and location of plants


Choice of technology
Process/job specialization
Mechanization of operations
For all large companies and multinationals, a basic policy decision with respect
to size and location of plants pertains to two alternatives: large size plant with
single centralized location or small size plants in multiple locations. Both the
alternatives have advantages and disadvantages. An obvious advantage of a
large size plant is economies of scale as enjoyed by many companies in steel,
cement, fertilizers, etc.
Choice of technology is a very important factor in the production process.
This assumes special significance today because of increased global
competition, faster communication network and high rate of technological
obsolescence. Like product life cycle, there is also technology life cycle. There
are four phases in the technology life cycle: embryonic, growth, maturity and
decline.
In some industries (products), there is a single or highly standardized
technology, and technological change is very slow. Paper is a very good example.
Others are edible oil, cotton textiles, woollen textiles, etc. But for majority of the
industries or products, regular technological upgradation is necessary, consumer
electronics being one of the best examples. For choice of technology, companies
have three options: first, in-house development
Technology governs, to a large extent, the production process and also
job specialization. In technologically sophisticated processes, i.e., with high focus
on standardization, job specialization or division of labour becomes imperative.
This, in fact, is a distinct characteristic of all large-scale manufacturing activities.
Job specialization also produces the experience effect (discussed in Unit 6)
which helps to increase productivity and efficiency.
Related to process or job specialization is mechanization and automation
of operations. Mechanization and automation are labour saving methods.
Automatic spinning and weaving in textile mills, packaging of products, loading
and unloading of cargo, computerization of banking and insurance operations
are good examples of increased mechanization and automation but, at the same
time, these cause displacement of labour. Technological advances drive
mechanization and automation. Displacement of labour, on the other hand, faces
resistance from workers unions and also creates employment problem. Every

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 379

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

big company, therefore, needs to formulate a policy on mechanization which


can balance technology advances and labour relations.

14.3.2 Quality Policy/Management


Quality of a product is closely linked to the production process, operational
efficiency and the quality control system. But, above all, quality depends on the
quality policy of a company. In a highly competitive market, quality of products
and services determine, to a large extent, success and failure of the companies.
This is particularly applicable to industrial products and consumer durables. In
fact, the major developments in quality policy and quality movement pertain to
industrial products (both intermediates and finished products) and consumer
durable categories like automobiles.
The quality movement was initiated in the US. During the post-World War
II period, the concept of total quality control (TQC) was developed in the US by
Armand Feigenbaum. The term, TQC, was defined as a system of integrating
the quality development, maintenance, improvement efforts of various groups
in an organization to enable production, marketing and service at the most
economical level with full customer satisfaction.2
In the early 1960s, Japan introduced Quality Circle (QC) for quality
management. A quality circle, as a tool, aims at defining, analysing and solving
quality related problems in a company through a team approach. Seven to ten
workers from interrelated functional or work area form a quality circle. Members
of the team are given necessary training in all quality-related matters so that
they can develop an effective approach to quality management. In India, many
companies, including BEL, BHEL, SKF, Godrej and Mahindra & Mahindra (Jeep
Division) have attempted quality control through QCs. Many other countries
have introduced their own quality controls and standards.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) has taken the lead in
internationalization of quality. ISO has published a series (ISO 9000 series) of
quality system and standards. ISO standards have now become international
quality benchmarks for all countries. All these have led to the development of
Total Quality Management (TQM) as a tool for integrated quality control. Many
progressive companies are now striving for Six Sigma quality standards
(discussed later in Unit 16) a benchmark set by GE.

14.3.3 Inventory Policy/Management


For most of the companies, whether in consumer goods or industrial products,
the planning process is:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 380

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Planned salesplanned productionplanned procurement


Any divergence between the planned and actual sales, and, therefore,
between the planned and actual production is matched by inventory build-up as
shown in the equation:
Sales = Opening stock + Production Closing stock
Ideal position is: Opening stock = Closing stock = 0 except for some
operating stock.
So coordination or balancing of procurement, production and sales is
leveraged by inventory control and management. But, it is not only inventory
management of finished goods as shown above, but also of raw materials and
inputs. So, a companys inventory policy should relate to both raw materials and
finished goods. Both have direct implications in terms of carrying cost. Every
company, therefore, has to have an inventory policy for determination of optimum
inventory levels.
One of the latest or more successful approaches or methods is the justin-time (JIT) inventory system. First introduced by Toyota Motors in Japan, JIT
model has been adopted by many companies in electronics and automobiles.
In the JIT system, storage of material,. i.e., inventory level is almost zero. Raw
materials/inputs are supplied/procured just-in-time so that the pipeline does not
become dry, production continues and sales do not suffer. To make the JIT
system effective or successful, many vendors have set up production facilities
either in the product manufacturing site or in close proximity. The objective, and
the crux of the JIT system, is to minimize the lead time for supply of raw materials
and inputs.
Activity 1
Choose any two companies one in the public sector and the other in the
private sector and make a comparative analysis of the production policies,
plans and strategies.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The_________is as a tool introduced in Japan, that aims at defining,
analysing and solving quality related problems in a company through a
team approach.
2. During the post-World War II period, the concept of total quality control
(TQC) was developed in the US by ________.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 381

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

3. In some industries (products), there is a single or highly standardized


technology, and technological change is very slow. Which of these is a
good example of this?
(a) Paper
(b) Electronics
(c) Food processing
(d) Garments
4. In the just-in-time (JIT) inventory system the, storage of material, i.e.,
inventory level is
(a) Very high
(b) Very low
(c) Always changing
(d) almost zero

14.4 Marketing Policies and Plans


Marketing is the most vital function in an organization because it establishes
the link between the company and the market or the customers. It is the function
which generates turnover (through sales) or revenue and earns profit for the
company. So, the marketing function fulfils the most important objective of a
company. In the implementation of most corporate strategies, marketing has a
definite role to play. Marketing policies and plans are, therefore, of great
significance in implementing business plans and strategies of a company.
Marketing policies and plans are expressed though the four Ps: product, price,
promotion and place (distribution). Each of these Ps has a number of elements
associated with it. These are shown in Table 14.1.
Table 14.1 Four Ps of Marketing and their Elements
Product

Quality
Brand
Features
Packaging
Warranties
Services

Price

List price
MRP
Discounts
Trade margin
Commission
Instalment
Credit terms

Sikkim Manipal University

Promotion

Place

Advertising
Customer location
Sales promotion Outlet location
Personal selling Channels
Test selling
Warehousing
Publicity
Stocks
Communications Delivery

Page No. 382

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Marketing policies and plans have to be understood and analysed in terms


of the four Ps and their elements as shown in the table. Many marketing
strategists call this marketing mix analysis. But there is a difference; marketing
mix is not just the four Ps. Marketing mix is the way the four Ps or some of the
Ps (depending on the product category) are combined or blended to optimize
market offerings to increase sales and market share.
In this section, the main issues in marketing policies and plans will be
analysed in terms of
(a) Product and product mix
(b) Pricing decision
(c) Product promotion
(d) Place (distribution)
(e) Marketing mix

14.4.1 Product and Product Mix


Product design, product manufacturing (except services) and product
development are primarily the task or concerns of the production function/
department (along with R&D). But, market or customer analysis is done by the
marketing people; they may know better than production the nature of market
demand, performance or acceptability of different products made by the company.
Market reaction or feedback on a product is conveyed to the production
department by the marketing group. Therefore, in every organization, marketing
and production functions work in tandem in all matters relating to product
planning, product making and product modification or adaptation.
Formulation of product policies and plans by a company should be based
on answers to certain key questions:
Which products should the company market?
Which products contribute faster to sales and market share?
Which products contribute most to profitability?
Which products make an optimal product mix?
How do a companys products compare with those of competitors?
How frequently should the company change the product?
Let us start with product mix. To have a product mix is a common policy or
strategy of most companies. The basic objective of the product mix is to balance
the product portfolio. This implies or includes two more objectives; first, to
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 383

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

optimize market offerings, (i.e., to cater to as large a cross section of market


segments as possible) and, second, to effectively match competitors products
and brands. To achieve optimality of product mix, companies have to continuously
review their existing product lines and market developments. Such review
pursues resource allocation to different products (existing and proposed);
examines whether the rate of new product development is satisfactory; and,
ascertains whether, or, to what extent, each product contributes to sales growth,
market share and profitability. Different products generally contribute differently
to sales, market share and profit. Drucker has mentioned that a typical portfolio
may consist of six different product types:
(a) Tomorrows breadwinners, i.e., new products or todays breadwinners
modified.
(b) Todays breadwinners, i.e., the innovations of yesterday.
(c) Yesterdays breadwinners, i.e., products with high volume, but,
fragmented into specials, small orders and the likes.
(d) Products capable of becoming breadwinners or net contributors if
major changes/improvements are made.
(e) The also ransthe high hopes of yesterday, which, although did
not perform well, have not become outright failures.
(f) The failures of today.3

14.4.2 Pricing Decisions4


Traditionally, two limits to pricing or price policy are set by an economic or cost
of production factor and the other by the market factor. A company would not
normally sell its product(s) at a price less than the unit (average) cost of
production, and, a customer would not pay a price more than the perceived
value of the product. These two would set the limits to pricing of the product
unit cost would set the lower limit and customers perceived value the upper
limit. The pricing policy of a company is mostly guided by these two limits; and,
in most market situations, the actual price would be settled between the two.
Given these two limits, the pricing policy of a company would depend on
the pricing objectives. The objective of pricing is not always to maximize profit,
although this should be the ideal objective. Many companies have other overriding
objectives dictated by organizational objectives and their positions in the market
vis-a-vis competitors. There can be short-term objectives and long-term objectives,
and there can be a dichotomy between the two. Various pricing objectives followed
by companies, including the more common ones, are given below:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 384

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

(a) Maximizing growth of sales


(b) Maximizing short-term profitability
(c) Achieving product-quality leadership
(d) Maximizing long-term profitability
(e) Skimming the market
(f) Creating entry barriers for competitors
(g) Dumping the product and
(h) Organizational survival

14.4.3 Product Promotion


There are many ways to promote a product and most companies use a mix of
different promotional tools. Policy-makers and strategists should take into
account the major factors which determine the choice of a particular promotion
mix. These are:
A. Nature of the market, i.e., market size, number of products/brands in the
market, intensity of competition, etc.
B. Product awareness and buyer readiness, i.e., buyers awareness of various
products and their readiness to buy particular products/brands.
C. Product life cycle, i.e., introduction stage, maturity stage, etc.in the
introduction stage, advertising and publicity are more important while in
the maturity stage, sales promotion and personal selling are more effective.
D. Overall marketing strategy, i.e., whether the company likes to push the
product (through marketing and distribution network) or create a pull
(strong consumer demand). In the push strategy, focus is on personal
selling and trade promotion; in the pull strategy, the emphasis is on
advertising and consumer promotion. For many companies, overall
promotional policy or strategy can be a combination of push and pull.
Given these factors, companies use a variety of promotional tools today.
These include promotion letters, catalogues, point of purchase (retail stores)
displays, customer service programmes, sales demonstrations, contests, free
samples, discounts, coupons, free offers, extras, price-offs, etc.
Point-of-purchase (POP) promotion through displays in retail outlets is
one of the most widely used promotional tools today. Innovative displays have
become a prerequisite for product/brand success. With limited space available
in retail stores, products/brands compete with one another for consumer attention
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 385

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

and shelf space. In todays high intensity marketing, the retailers are virtually
flooded with POP promotions from various manufactures. More and more
companies are going for innovative displays to give their products/brands more
visibility in shelves. When Nestl had introduced Maggi noodles in 1983, they
had used a unique dispenserthe wire mesh bag. It had not only helped in
product/brand identification and focus, but, also helped the retailer. The
dispenser, hung from the ceiling helped the retailers save shelf space. Cadbury
too came up with a dispenser. Customized racks are also being used by
companies for display. Companies like Procter and Gamble, Nestl, Hindustan
Unilever, Lakme and Tips and Toes make yearly bookings for display space in
various stores.

14.4.4 Place (Distribution)


Place or distribution is the process by which goods and services are delivered
to the customers. In industrial products and consumer goods (not for services),
an important matter of policy for a company is to decide whether it should sell
its products directly to consumers or through intermediaries or middlemen, i.e.,
channels. There can be zero channel or there can be multiple channels.
Given the alternative channels, a company has to evaluate these and
determine which channel suits its strategy implementation. Determination of
suitability or unsuitability of a channel is based on three criteria: economic,
control and adaptability. The economic criteria relate to distribution cost. Relative
costs of distribution through different channel alternatives have to be considered
for viability. Since the intermediaries or channel members are independent, a
manufacturer has to take into account the controllability factor of these channels.
A preferred channel is one which offers more controllability. Finally, adaptability
of a channel is important. A channel should provide for flexibility so that changes
can be introduced when situations demand. Inflexibility or rigidity may affect
operational efficiency of a channel.
In all multiple channels, channel management is a major task of a company.
Channel management involves two issues: managing channel conflict and
motivating channel members. Channel conflicts can be vertical (channel
members at one level in conflict with members at higher or lower level), horizontal
(conflicts between members at same channel level) or multichannel (channels
get in conflict with the company). Three different types of conflicts require different
types of channel management approaches. Also, it is not enough for a company
to resolve or reduce channel conflict; it is necessary to keep the channel members
motivated. Motivation can be achieved through both financial (higher margins,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 386

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

bonuses, extended credit limits, etc., and non-financial (contests, recognition of


better performance, paid holidays, etc.,) methods. Companies like Philips, Bajaj
Electrical and Parle Exports are known to publicly acknowledge and reward
high performance of selected dealers. Reliance, Videocon, etc., sponsor holidays
for their high-performing dealers to foreign destinations.

14.4.5 Marketing Mix


The genesis of the marketing mix is: if one manages to achieve the right product
at a right price with the right promotion and in the right place, the marketing
programme would be effective or successful. Therefore, assembling and
managing the marketing mix (including all the elements shown in Table 14.1) is
a basic marketing task and blending the marketing mix into a winning combination
is a matter of strategy. The inter-connected marketing mix system is shown in
Figure 14.3. Marketing success and failure depend, to a large extent, on the
choice and balance of the marketing mix.

Figure. 14.3 The Inter-connected Marketing Mix System

The case of Big Bite cite in the caselet above is an example of how wrong
balancing in the marketing mix can lead to marketing failure.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 387

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Self-Assessment Questions
5. Marketing policies and plans are expressed though the four Ps: product,
price, promotion and participation. (True/False)
6. The pricing policy of a company is mostly guided by the two limits unit
cost and customers perceived value. (True/False)
7. Which of these is not an element of a promotional mix?
(a) Advertising
(b) Sales promotion
(c) Personal selling
(d) Production
8. Promotion through displays in retail outlets is as a promotional tool is
known as
(a) Point-of-purchase (POP)
(b) Demonstrations
(c) customer service programmes
(d) discounts

14.5 Financial Policies and Plans


Next to production and marketing policies and plans, financial policies and plans
are most vital for strategy implementation of a company. Some may even argue,
and rightly so, that all the three are equally important or vital. Implementation of
every strategy has financial implications in terms of cost or investment. Financial
policies and plans relate to three important factors:
(a) Sourcing of funds
(b) Allocation of funds or investment decisions
(c) Management and control of funds

14.5.1 Sourcing of Funds


Policies and plans related to sourcing of funds deal with financing mix or capital
mix decisions. Policies have to be formulated and decisions taken on major
financing factors or issues: capital structure, capital issues, capital procurement
pattern, working capital borrowings, reserves and surplus or retained earnings
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 388

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

as sources for funding, relationship with lenders, banks, financial institutions,


etc. These policies and decisions are vital because of two reasons: first, these
determine how and how much financial resources will be made available for
implementation of different strategies; and, second, each of the sources or
choices has certain cost associated with it.
Various sources of funds can be broadly divided into two categories: short
term and long term. The other way to classify sources is as internal or external
(Table 14.2).
Table 14.2 Sources of Funds: Internal, External, Short term, Long term
Source

Short term

Long term

Internal

Nil

Retained earings

External

Short-term loans

Share capital

Banks

Equity shares

Financial institutions

Preference shares

Public deposits

Debentures

Leased assets

Fixed deposit

Trade credits

Longterm loans

Customers advances

Given the various sources of funds, a major policy decision for a company
is to secure the optimal financing mix, i.e., the right combination of internal and
external, and short-term and long-term sources of funds. Such combination or
mix is governed by a number of factors. The major factors are mentioned below.
(a) Nature of business
(b) Purpose of financing
(c) Cost of financing
(d) Financial leverage
(e) Control or interference in management
(f) Organizational ability
Because of these various factors, different companies adopt different
policies for financing mix commensurate with their business conditions. Ingersoll
Rand, for example, adopted a policy of blending internal and external sources
for financing its strategies for expansion and growth. Almost 70 per cent of the
companys post-tax profit was reinvested to reduce its dependence on external
sources (borrowed funds). This enabled the company to keep its interest costs
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 389

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

low. Reliance Industries gives a different kind of example. It has successfully


used its capabilities to source funds at lower cost. To achieve this, it has used a
mix of external long-term sources fully convertible debentures, partly
convertible debentures, and global depositing receipts (GDRs). The company
has used these sources to finance its expansion plans without putting much
pressure on equity. The companys debt-equity ratio is maintained around 1:1
which is very favourable for a rapidly growing company as against a general
private sector norm of 2:1.

14.5.2 Allocation of Funds or Investment Decisions


All strategy implementations, except retrenchment strategy, involve allocation
and deployment of funds or investment decisions. As sound corporate practice,
uses or allocation of funds should be kept in view while formulating policies on
sourcing of funds. Policies and plans related to allocation or utilization of funds
essentially relate to asset mix decisions, i.e., regulating investments in fixed
assets and holding of current assets. Fixed assets are long term in nature, have
certain life and depreciate; current assets are short term in nature and are
either held as cash or expected to be converted into cash during the accounting
period.
Fixed investment or investment in fixed assets and investments in current
assets or working capital are meant for different business or corporate purpose;
but, both forms of investment are used simultaneously and, in certain
combinations, with a common objective of strategy or project implementation.
For example, in manufacturing, a company requires both fixed capital and
working capital to fulfil the same objectiveto produce or make a product as
per strategy requirements.
Working capital requirements depend on various factors, like production
or sales, raw material/input procurement pattern, inventory norms, seasonal
fluctuations in demand/sales, etc. For formulating its working capital policy, a
company should take into account these and related factors. The fundamental
guiding principle for working capital policy formulation and implementation is
the endeavour to maintain working capital at a level which enables efficient
business operation and, at the same time, minimize the cost of working capital.
This requires three major steps or actions:
(a) Inventory management
(b) Credit/ debit policy
(c) Cash balance
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 390

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Self-Assessment Questions
9. All strategy implementations, except retrenchment strategy, involve
allocation and deployment of funds or investment decisions. (True/False)
10. Fixed assets are long term in nature. (True/False)

14.6 HR Policies and Functions


Human resource function in an organization may not appear as significant as
production, marketing and finance, but, its role is becoming increasingly
important. Strategic importance of HR function/activity received widespread
attention in the 1990s, and, its role is encompassing newer dimensions. The job
of the HR manager is changing rapidly as companies are downsizing and
reorganizing or restructuring and his/her strategic responsibilities are assuming
greater significance. Also, HR policies and functions essentially deal with people
who are at the core of all the functions and are considered the most precious
resource of an organization. HR policies are, therefore, very sensitive in terms
of application because these affect employees more directly than other functional
area policies. HR policies and functions should concentrate on four major factors
or areas:
(a) Development of human resource
(b) Retaining personnel
(c) Incentive system
(d) Job mobility/Succession planning
Management of human resource (HRM) and development of human resource
(HRD) are both important. HRM helps in retaining personnel by keeping them
happy and motivated. HRD prepares personnel/managers for performing the
present jobs better and for newer tasks and responsibilities which help in job
mobility and succession planning. HRD, therefore, plays a more vital role. In
practice, however, HRM and HRD play complementary roles. These two together
govern HR policies and plans.
Human resource development is a continuous process. HR development
takes place through counselling, postings, promotions and training. Training is
the most important. In most companies concerned with HR development,
elaborate and systematic training programmes are planned depending on
development requirement of managers at different levels. In planning and
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 391

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

designing training programmes, two factors are important: first, assessment of


training needs, and, second, partly following from the first one, training methods
and intensity of training.
Training needs are usually different for different managers. Therefore,
many tailor-made programmes or modules are necessary. There are two major
methods of training: on-the-job and off-the-job. To determine the methods or
modes of training and frequency, and, because HRD is a continuous process,
many companies have their own training cells and, also centres. Hindustan
Unilever, Larsen & Toubro, RCF, Tata steel, SAIL and BHEL, are among them.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. There are two major methods of training: _______ and __________.
12. Human resource development is a _______process.

14.7 MIS/IT Policies and Plans


MIS/IT is a new economy function which is increasingly playing a significant
role in planning, strategy formulation and implementation. We had briefly
discussed MIS in the previous unit under systems. It provides vital connectivity
between the organization and the environment, and, also among various
functional and operational areas within the organization. Earlier, MIS was
considered a peripheral functionsetting up of information system was purely
a matter of option or choice. But, today, it has become an essential requirement.
It has been observed that the strategic management process is more efficient
in companies which have an effective MIS. Many companies are adopting a
new approach to MISa system which blends the technical knowledge of IT
experts with thoughts and vision of senior/top management.
An effective management information system should consist of five
interrelated steps or stages to increase its utility and comprehensiveness:
(a) Collection and retention of information
(b) Processing and storage of information
(c) Database management
(d) Synthesis of information, retrieval and usage
(e) Transmission and dissemination of information

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 392

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Companies are developing MIS policies and plans for its extensive
application to increase productivity in different functional areas, efficiency in
operation and to improve networking for better connectivity. Hindustan Unilever
launched a pilot project to widen its area network by connecting its distributors
and important retailers. The purpose was market research and intelligence to
source information from the market about customers, competitors and various
channel members. The company has also set up a sales force automation
system with wireless connectivity through which salespersons in the field can
collect useful retail data and send the same to the MIS centre for further analysis
and policy formulation. Reliance Fire and General Insurance Company, a
subsidiary of Reliance Industries, is using MIS/IT to improve efficiency in
operationcomplete networking of area offices, service centres and insurance
agents for instant service to the customers. Glaxo India, Corporation Bank and
RPG Enterprises have used MIS/IT in different ways.

Self-Assessment Questions
13. MIS provides vital connectivity between the organization and the
environment, and, also among various functional and operational areas
within the organization. (True/False)
14. MIS is a peripheral function in most companies today. (True/False)

14.8 Alternative Business Strategies and Functional


Policies and Plans
We have analysed various dimensions and developments in major functional
areas of production, marketing, finance, HR and MIS/IT in relation to corporate
strategy. For effective implementation, different business strategies require
different functional policies and plans. So, functional policies and plans should
be flexible, adaptable and strategy-driven. Expansion or diversification strategies
require one set of functional plans; stability strategies need different kind of
functional plans; restructuring or downsizing or retrenchment require still different
plans; combination strategies would generally require a blending of some of
these functional plans. This is illustrated in Table 14.3.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 393

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Table 14.3 Alternative Strategies and Functional Plans


Strategy
Expansion/
Diversification

Production

Marketing

Financial Plan

HR Plan

Back-up Action

Expand/
install plant
capacity to
support new
products

Extend and
improve product;
this is more
critical than
margin

Increase debtequity ratio;


Review dividend
policy for cash
flow needs/
generation

Hire additional
production,
R&D and
sales
workers/
managers

Evaluate market
share and
review financial
position
after
two years

Stability/
Incremental
growth

Defer new
investments in
plant and
equipment

Push high
margin products/
brands

Strengthen
the balance
sheet and
maintain steady
dividends

Invest in training
programmes to
improve management skills

Continue for
few years
unless
market trend
shows high
opportunity for
growth.

Restructuring/
Retrenchment

Identify plants
to be closed on
the basis of
capacity
utilization and
obsolescence

Identify products
for divestment
those with
low sales and/
or margin

Eliminate or
reduce dividends
and manage
cash flows

Reduce and/or
redeploy
personnel on
the basis of
skills and
experience

Sell plants and


reduce
personnel in
one year; cut
dividends

Source: Adapted from L R Jauch, R Gupta and W F Glueck, Business Policy and
Strategic Management (New Delhi: Frank Bros. & Co., 2004), 387 (Exhibit 10.2).

For each of the major strategies and the functional plans mentioned in
the table, a set of policies has to be laid down relating to a particular area of
business. The policies will ensure that the plans are implemented as intended
and that different functional plans work towards achievement of the same
objectives. The example in Table 14.3 is an illustration of only one group of
strategies, functional plans and required policy support.
Plans and policies have to be developed by companies for all the key
functional decisions pertaining to each particular business strategy.
B. Operational Implementation
We have distinguished between functions and operations earlier in the unit.
Operations are more implementational; they give support to functional policies
and plans. Distribution is a function; transportation involved in distribution is
operation. Operational implementation, therefore, becomes as vital, if not more,
as functional implementation. And, the scope of operational implementation is
very wide because it is part of every function or functional implementation.
Operational implementation, or its effectiveness, depends on four major
interrelated factors. Some call them 4-Ps: processes, productivity, pace and
people (Figure 14.4).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 394

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Figure 14.4 4-ps: Processes, Productivity, Pace and People

Self-Assessment Questions
15. Functional policies and plans should be________, adaptable and strategydriven.
16. Operational implementation, or its effectiveness, depends on four major
interrelated factors, which are called the.

14.9 Processes or Methods


Processes are methods or courses of action in sequential steps for carrying out
tasks for achieving certain organizational objectives. All the functional areas of
production, marketing, finance, HR, and MIS/IT operate on the basis of
established processes. Processes, however, evolve and change over time, and
these affect operational implementation of corporate strategies. Many processes
have been developed by strategy analysts, consultants and companies which
have affected strategy implementation in different ways. Major processes which
have influenced strategic management in a significant manner are: value chain
analysis, supply chain management, enterprise resource planning (ERP),
benchmarking, business process re-engineering (BPR) and outsourcing or BPO.
We had discussed value chain analysis, at length, in Unit 6. Value chain
analysis, as a process, links a set of value-creating activities in a company. These
include both primary activities (inbound logistics, production, outbound logistics,
marketing/sales and services) in an organization and, also, support activities (R&D,
HR, MIS, general administration, etc.). Relative effectiveness of individual valuecreating activities, particularly the primary activities, has direct impact on operational
implementation, and, therefore, on overall strategy implementation.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 395

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

Supply chain management (SCM) is one of the developments, which


emerged from value chain analysis. SCM is a process in business logistics. It
lends logistical support to the activity-based value chain. Supply chain, as a
process, manages the entire movement of raw material/inputs and finished goods
from procurement to the market. Each of the steps or stages in SCM is critical
for the company on the one hand, and stakeholders like vendors, transporters,
channel members and customers on the other. Process improvements in SCM
benefit all the parties concerned and operational implementation of strategies
also improves.
Enterprise resource planning (ERP) provides vital connectivity within an
organization. ERP systems, through appropriate software, seek to integrate the
entire business operations of a company including manufacturing, marketing
finance, HR, logistics, warehousing, etc., to harmonize operations and reduce
cost. Many large organizations use the ERP process to increase operational
efficiency. HPCL, among others, has installed an adapted ERP system to optimize
communication or linkages among various functional departments/activities of
the company.

Self-Assessment Questions
17. The process called _______ links a set of value-creating activities in a
company.
18. ______systems, through appropriate software, seek to integrate the entire
business operations of a company including manufacturing, marketing
finance, HR, logistics, warehousing, etc.

14.10 Productivity and Efficiency


Productivity and efficiency contribute to the operational effectiveness of various
functions. Productivity measures or innovations to increase productivity have,
however, primarily taken place in the field of manufacturing. Development of
linear and non-linear programming techniques aimed at optimizing production
is subject to certain resource allocations or constraints. Japanese companies
had popularized quality and productivity technique during the 1980s. There was
virtual explosion of such techniques during the 1990s. Many of these were either
initiated by Japanese companies or prompted by their competitive superiority in
manufacturing methods over the US and European companies. Six such major
techniques/methods are: just-in-time manufacturing, cycle time reduction, mass
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 396

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

customization, flexible manufacturing system, optimized production technology


and total productive maintenance.
Just-in-time (JIT) manufacturing is a productivity-cum-efficiency technique
with two primary objectives: cost reduction and inventory minimization. In trying
to achieve these two objectives, JIT, in effect, becomes a more comprehensive
approach including simplification of product designs,
streamlining process flows, meticulous time planning, etc. Cycle time
reduction helps or complements JIT. Cycle time reduction, as the name indicates,
seeks to minimize the time taken for each step or work in the assembly line or
the manufacturing process. Mass customization of products is a development
which has struck a middle course between the two traditional classifications of
mass market and niche market. Mass customization is a landmark evolution in
production and productivity combining the characteristics and benefits of a mass
product and niche product. We had discussed mass customization in Unit 8.
Flexible manufacturing process or system almost follows from the mass
customization approach; or, rather, it is a necessity to ensure mass customization
of products and, at the same time, keep costs under control. Optimized production
technology is a computer-aided system for planning and integrating production,
materials management and resource utilization to maximize output and control
inventory. Total productive maintenance is an improvement over the traditional
reactive maintenance system and focusses on a total system of managing
productivity through organization-wide autonomous maintenance by everybody
concerned rather than a single department.

Self-Assessment Questions
19. _________manufacturing is a productivity-cum-efficiency technique with
two primary objectives: cost reduction and inventory minimization.
20. ________ seeks to minimize the time taken for each step or work in the
assembly line or the manufacturing process.

14.11 Pace or Speed of Action


Given the processes or methods and productivity, pace or speed of action or
implementation becomes a vital factor in operational effectiveness. Pace or
speed is essentially concerned with timing or time management of
implementation. For example, in value chain analysis, speed can be a
differentiating factor in performing different activities in the chain faster than the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 397

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

competitors to lead to competitive advantage. The same is true of timing or


speed of action in other processes or methods like supply chain management,
benchmarking, outsourcing, etc. Strategy analysts have suggested a number
of techniques for better planning and management of time to increase efficacy
of operations. Three such techniques are: time study, network analysis and
activity charting and time-based management.
Time study is one of the oldest methods of time management. In time
study, the emphasis is on analysing and sequencing critical stages in production
to identify bottlenecks and wastages, and eliminate or minimize them to build a
more efficient and fast process. Network analysis and activity charts are an
improvement over time study methods. Charting and networking of activities
are done to construct a critical path to optimize time and resource allocation,
and consequently, saving costs. Time-based management approach developed
during the 1980s and 1990s highlights the role of time as a strategic weapon.
For example, first movers in products/markets enjoy a definite competitive
advantage over late-movers or parallel innovators or initiators in launching and
implementation.

Self-Assessment Questions
21. Time study is one of the latest methods of time management. (True/False)
22. _________and ________of activities are done to construct a critical path
to optimize time and resource allocation, and consequently, saving costs.

14.12 People Factor


Finally, people in an organization become a major factor, or rather, the ultimate
factor, for the success in operational implementation of strategy. Be it process
or method, productivity or time management, people are a common factor.
People signify three categories of human resource who matter most for strategy
implementation: workers on the shop floor, operating staff and managers. Each
of these categories of people makes a difference in operational effectiveness.
Some of the important factors to be considered for optimizing peoples role in
implementation are: strategic selection and recruitment, training and
development and performance management.
Strategic selection and recruitment is the first step in manpower planning
and, should be properly aligned with strategies. As selection of right people for

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 398

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

right positions leads to enhancement of productivity, recruitment of wrong people


can significantly affect performance. After selection and posting, skill levels of
people need to be continually developed and updated through appropriate
training and development methods. Training and development have to be job
based and operation based. The third important factor, which supplements
selection and development, is performance management of the employees.
Productivity comes through performance, and, therefore, many companies use
performance appraisal and monitoring to improve employee efficiency in
operation. The three factorsselection, development and performance
management should be read in conjunction with the four important factors
development of human resource, retaining personnel, incentive system and job
mobility/succession planningmentioned before under HR policies and plans.
In fact, the people factor in operations should be viewed as a role extension of
human resource from HR policies and plans.
We have analysed above many processes, methods, techniques and
practices in different organizational areas for increasing operational effectiveness
of strategy implementation. Managers/management often are not clear about
which are the right methods and techniques, and, in their search for quick results,
sometimes make indiscriminate choices or fall for the latest techniques without
assessing their applicability or appropriateness to particular operational
situations. Companies should guard against such pitfalls. Even carefully chosen
processes and techniques may not always be sufficient to ensure successful
strategy implementation. Porter feels that operational effectiveness is necessary,
but is not a sufficient condition for success of strategy. By operational
effectiveness, he means, performing similar activities better than rivals perform
them. It refers to any number of practices that allows a company to better utilize
its inputs.5
Activity 2
Suppose that you are the strategy head in an organization. How would you
design the operational implementation plan for your company? Discuss in
the form of a project.

Self-Assessment Questions
23. People signify three categories of human resource who matter most for
strategy implementation: workers on the shop floor, operating staff and
managers. (True/False)
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 399

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

24. Productivity comes through performance, and, therefore, many companies


use performance appraisal and monitoring to improve employee efficiency
in operation. (True/False)

14.13 Case Study


Microsoft: Marketing/Operating Strategy to Sustain Leadership*
Market leaders usually adopt defensive strategies mostly counter
offensiveto maintain their leadership positions, and challengers (No. 2)
employ offensive strategiesfrontal or flank attacksto challenge or
displace the leader. But, Microsoft, the market leader in computer software,
primarily adopts an offensive or aggressive, or, in the minimum, pre-emptive
strategies to sustain its leadership

Microsoft tried to dissuade IBM and Gateway from promoting or using


Microsofts competitors products on their PCs. IBM and Gateway resisted
the move. In retaliation, Microsoft forced them to pay higher prices for
installing MS Windows operating system on their PCs than any other PC
makers.
Microsoft urged Intel not to export its newly developed NSP software because
Microsoft felt that NSP becomes an intrusion into its operating system
platform. Microsoft also pressurized PC makers not to install Intels NSP
software on their PCs.
Microsoft adopted an aggressive posture against Netscape also. Microsoft
wanted to enter into a special alliance with Netscape. The alliance would
allow Microsoft to incorporate Netscapes Navigator browsers functionality
into Windows. When Netscape declined the proposal, Microsoft withheld
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 400

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

information about its Windows 95 code till it released the new operating
system and its own new version of Internet Explorer.
During 1999, US district judge, Jackson, delivered a judgement (in US vs
Microsoft) that Microsoft had repeatedly used high-handed tactics to
pressurize customers, crush competitors and throttle competiton. Judge
Jackson cited many examples to support his conclusion/judgement.
But, Microsoft continues to use its marketing/operating muscle to sustain
its dominance. During 2001, the company curtailed its support for Java in
its release of the new Windows XP operating system because Java is
favoured by Microsofts old rival Sun Microsystems. Microsoft is also
pressurizing PC makers to follow/oblige it in different ways.
* Based on A A Thomson, A J Strickland, and J E Gamble, Crafting and Executing
Strategy (New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2005), 211 (Illustration capsule 8.2).

14.14 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
In any organization, actual implementation of strategy takes place through
major functional areas of manufacturing, marketing, finance, HR and MIS/
IT. In each of these functional areas, operational implementation is equally
important. Functional implementation and operational implementation are,
in practice, complementary to each other.
Marketing is the most vital function in an organization because it
establishes the link between the company and the market or the customers.
In marketing policies and plans, pricing is the most critical element. Pricing
policies and methods are based on the fundamentals of cost, demand
and competition.
Implementation of every strategy has financial implications in terms of
cost or investment. Financial policies and plans are, therefore, as important
or vital as production and marketing policies.
HR function in an organization may not appear as significant as production,
marketing and finance, but, its role is becoming increasingly important.
MIS/IT is a new economy function which is playing a very significant role
in planning, strategy formulation and implementation.
For effective implementation, different business strategies require different
functional policies and plans.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 401

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

14.15 Glossary
Current assets: Assets that are short term in nature and are either held
as cash or expected to be converted into cash during the accounting
period
Fixed assets: Assets that are long term in nature, have certain life and
depreciate
Functional strategy: Strategy that relates to a particular functional area
and follows from business strategy of an organization
Marketing mix: The way the four Ps or some of the Ps (depending on
the product category) are combined or blended to optimize market offerings
to increase sales and market share.

14.16 Terminal Questions


1. Discuss functional policies and plans in the area of production including
the major issues involved.
2. Anaylse marketing policies and plans with respect to strategy
implementation in terms of 4-Ps and marketing mix application.
3. What are the major factors which govern financial policies and plans of
an organization? Analyze them.
4. Discuss the role of MIS/IT as a new economy function in planning, strategy
formulation and implementation.
5. What are the major processes, methods or techniques which affect
operational implementation of strategy? Discuss briefly.
6. Discuss the vital role of people factor in implementation. Analyse in terms
of major HR initiatives required to optimize peoples role in strategy
implementation.

14.17 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. quality circle
2. Armand Feigenbaum

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 402

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

3. (a) Paper
4. (d) almost zero
5. False
6. True
7. (d) Production
8. (a) Point-of-purchase (POP)
9. True
10. False
11. On-the-job, off-the-job
12. continuous
13. True
14. False
15. flexible
16. 4Ps
17. value chain analysis
18. ERP
19. Just-in-time (JIT)
20. Cycle time reduction
21. False
22. Charting, networking
23. True
24. True

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. If a company decides to manufacture the product, it has to consider some
major policy issues in relation to the production process. Refer to Section
14.3 for further details.
2. Marketing is the most vital function in an organization because it
establishes the link between the company and the market or the customers.
Refer to Section 14.4 for further details.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 403

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 14

3. Next to production and marketing policies and plans, financial policies


and plans are most vital for strategy implementation of a company. Refer
to Section 14.5 for further details.
4. MIS/IT is a new economy function which is increasingly playing a
significant role in planning, strategy formulation and implementation. Refer
to Section 14.7 for further details.
5. Processes are methods or courses of action in sequential steps for carrying
out tasks for achieving certain organizational objectives. Refer to Section
14.9, 14.10, 14.11, 14.12 for further details.
6. People in an organization become a major factor, or rather, the ultimate
factor, for the success in operational implementation of strategy. Refer to
Section 14.7 for further details.

4.18 References
1. David, F R. 2003.Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases. 9th ed.
Pearson Education.
2. Ghosh, P K. 2003. Strategic Planning and Management. 10th ed. New
Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Jauch, L R, R Gupta, and W F Glueck. 2004. Business Policy and Strategic
Management. 6th ed. New Delhi: Frank Bros. & Co.
4. Miller, A. 2002. Strategic Management. New York: McGraw Hill.
5. Nag, A. 2008. Strategic Marketing. 2nd ed. New Delhi: Macmillan India.
6. Pearce II, J A, and R B Robinson Jr. 2005. Strategic Management:
Formulation, Implementation and Control. 9th ed. New Delhi: Tata McGrawHill.
Endnotes
1

F R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, (Pearson Education, 2003),26

P K Ghosh, Strategic Planning and Management (2003), 416.

P Drucker, Managing for Business Effectviness, Harvard Business Review (May-June,


1963), 59.

This section is primarily based on A Nag, Marketing Successfully: A Professional


Perspective (New Delhi: Macmillan India, 2001), Chapter 8.

M Porter, What is strategy? Harvard Business Review (NovemberDecember, 1996),


62.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 404

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Unit 15

Implementation:
Behavioural and Values

Structure
15.1 Introduction
15.2 Caselet
Objectives
15.3 Leadership: Strategic Role
15.4 Leadership Styles
15.5 Is Leadership Style Portable?
15.6 Leadership Role of Top/Senior Management
15.7 Organizational Culture
15.8 Corporate Ethics and Values
15.9 Corporate Politics and Power
15.10 Power, Politics, Strategy and Implementation
15.11 Case Study
15.12 Summary
15.13 Glossary
15.14 Terminal Questions
15.15 Answers
15.16 References

15.1 Introduction
The significance of behavioural factors in strategy implementation in an
organization is clearly understandable. Organizations may plan, formulate and
implement strategies, but, it is the individualsmanagers at different levels
who actually take appropriate actions involved in implementation. So, individualrelated or individual-focussed factors or issues like leadership styles, personal
ethics and values, corporate politics, etc., become very vital. In addition to these,
cultural environment in an organizationwork styles, beliefs, shared values,
etc., is also equally important. Leadership plays a vital role in addition to
organizational culture and values. So, behavioural implementation of strategies
focusses on:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 405

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

A. Role of leadership
Strategic role
Leadership styles
Role of top management
B. Organizational culture, values, politics
Organizational culture
Business ethics and values
Corporate politics and power
We shall analyse each of these factors below. In analysing these factors,
we shall discuss changing roles and styles of leaders, cultural web, strategy
culture relationship, cultural barriers to strategy implementation, strategy
supporting culture, organizational ethics, personal values of managers, corporate
politics, corporate power equations, etc.

15.2 Caselet
The quality and style of a companys leader is very important in determining
its growth and sustainability. Wipro was a small insignificant vegetable oil
company in 1947, which grew into a multinational conglomerate in the 21st
century. Wipro Technologies, one of the largest software companies in India,
is headed by Azim Premji (Premji), whose leadership is characterized by
sound values, integrity and professional will. It is these qualities that have
driven Premji to churn Wipro from a $2 million company to a $1.76 billion
one, serving customers across the globe. Premjis sharp strategic vision
and crisp communication skills led his team to strive for excellence. He has
been known for his modesty, simplicity and non-extravagance.
Source: J. Shalom J and Ravi L (2009), Wipros Azim Premji: Level 5 Leadership
Style? Available at http://www.ibscdc.org/Case_Studies/HRM/OB0021.htm

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Analyse the role of leadership in strategy implementation
Discuss whether leadership style is portable
Analyse the role of organizational culture in implementation of strategy

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 406

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Focus on the role of business ethics and values in implementation


Appreciate the role of corporate politics and power

15.3 Leadership: Strategic Role


We had highlighted the critical role of leadership in turnaround situations in Unit
9. We had also discussed the role of CEO in the strategic management process
in Unit 2. Be it a crisis or turnaround situation, normal times or good times, the
leader plays a pivotal role in the functioning and performance of every
organization. For the manager, leadership is the focus of activity through which
the goals and objectives of the organization are accomplished.1 Good or great
leaders lead an organization to strategic success, and bad leaders can be
instrumental for the downslide or closure of companies.
A leader performs two strategic roles. First, he is the architect of a
strategyinnovates, conceives, plans and formulates strategy ; second, he is
the implementor of strategyinitiates action and induces/drives the employees
into operations. Successful performance of these two roles presumes many
characteristics or qualities of a leader. King (1990) has enunciated 10 such
characteristics or factors (his original enunciation has nine factors) in relation to
strategy formulation, strategic direction and implementation. Many strategy
analysts agree with him that a leader should
Be a visionary, willing to take risk and be adaptable to change;
Develop new capabilities and qualities to perform effectively;
Exemplify the goals, values and culture of the organization;
Be clearly aware of the environmental factors affecting the business
of the organization;
Pay attention to and encourage strategic thinking and intellectual
activities;
Adopt a collective view of leadership in which leaders influence is
dispersed across all levels of the organization;
Lead by empowering employees and put an increasing emphasis
on statesmanship;
Adopt a strong perspective to build subordinates skills and confidence
to make them change agents;

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 407

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Facilitate transformation of followers into leaders even at lower levels;


and
Delegate authority and put emphasis on innovation.2

Self-Assessment Questions
1. A leader implements the strategy formulated by others. (True/False)
2. A leader should not delegate authority. (True/False)

15.4 Leadership Styles


Leadership style is a way or pattern of behaviour, which a leader adopts in
managing the affairs of the organization directing and motivating managers
and staff for achievement of organizational objectives. Such definition shows
that leadership styles can be many and varied. A question, therefore, arises as
to which is the most appropriate leadership style. A straightforward answer to
this is always difficult because leadership styles depend on organizational
conditions and business/strategic situations. In fact, most leadership styles are
situational. Contingency theories on leadership support this view. Khandwala
has studied leadership styles in a cross-section of organizations. Based on his
study, Khandwala distinguishes between leadership styles based on five major
characteristics or dimensions. These are presented in Table. 15.1.
Table 15.1 Leadership dimensions and styles
Base/Dimension

Style/Characteristics

Risk taking

Willingness to take high-risk, high-return decisions

Technocracy

Use of planning techniques and decision making by


technically qualified persons

Organicity

Flexibility and adaptability in organizational


structuring

Participation

Team management approach involving managers


at different levels

Coercion

Authoritarian use of fear and domination by top


management

Source: Adapted from P Khandwala, Some Top Management Styles: Their Context
and Performance, Organization and Administrative Science (Winter, 1977), 2125.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 408

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Leadership styles are influenced by environmental factors as shown in


the table, but, styles must relate to organizational strategy. Leadership roles
and styles are, in fact, designed to formulate and implement strategy. As we
had mentioned in Unit 7, such strategies are formulated taking into account
given environmental conditions. Styles would also depend on the type of strategy
for effective implementation and success. Leadership styles which suit stability
strategies may not be appropriate for growth or diversification strategies or
corporate restructuring or turnaround strategies. Similarly, leadership styles which
may be most suitable for managing internal change (crisis) would not be
applicable for pursuing or implementing growth or diversification strategies. So,
there are three interactive but, different factors: style, strategy and environment.
Strategy-environment combination determines leadership styles.

15.4.1 Leadership Styles in Practice


If we analyse the leadership styles of the global and the Indian CEOs, we would
find that each CEO has a distinctive style of his/her own. These styles are
influenced by environmental conditions and they all relate to organizational
strategies; but, there is a uniqueness to the style of each of these leaders which
make him/her successful and, also exemplary. This is true of great global CEOs
like Lee lacocca, Jack Welch, Bill Gates, Akio Morita, L N Mittal and Indian
CEOs like Dhirubhai Ambani, Ratan Tata; Aditya Birla, Rahul Bajaj, Azim Premji,
N R Narayana Murthy, B L Munjal and many others. The predominant styles of
some of these CEOs are mentioned below.
Jack Welch

: Building on strength; entrepreneurial,


participative.

L N Mittal

: Highly entrepreneurial, highly aggressive

Dhirubhai Ambani

: Highly entrepreneurial and innovative

Aditya Birla

: Participative, family approach

Ratan Tata

: Democratic temperament, delegates authority

Rahul Bajaj

: Friendly and philosophical, believes in level


playing field

Azim Premji

: Focus on developing peoplecreating leaders

N R Narayana Murthy : Constantly aspires for more, blends


professionalism with simplicity
Some studies suggest that, in the Indian context, a purely authoritarian or
a purely participative style may not be effective. Instead a nurturant-task style
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 409

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

can be more relevant and appropriate. Nurturant-task style means a combination


of tasks, responsibilities and concern for people/subordinates (nurturant), and,
is directive as well as paternalistic in approach.3 Maheswari (1980) has studied
the relationship between decision styles and organizational effectiveness in
Indian corporates. He observes that most of the Indian organizations are neither
authoritarian nor highly participative. The predominant style is consultation with
limited participation, rather than joint decision making or company-wide
participation. Organizational effectiveness is positively correlated with
entrepreneurial style and negatively correlated with bureaucratic style of decision
making.4

15.5 Is Leadership Style Portable?


Nohria and others (2006) have researched on a very interesting subject: Is
leadership or leadership style portable? Or, to put it in another way: Will a leader,
successful in one organization, be necessarily successful in another company?
The authors studied job switching of 20 executives of GE (who left the company
between 1989 and 2001) to become chairmen, CEO or CEO-designates of
other companies. These companies include some of the big international names
like 3M, Fiat and Home Depot. GE was chosen because the company is widely
regarded in the US as one of the best talent generators.
The authors conducted their analysis of CEO/leadership portability in terms
of four different types of human capital: strategic human capital, industry human
capital, relationship human capital and company-specific human capital. Strategic
human capital refers to skills or capabilities required to control or manage different
strategic situationscost control, competitive threat or fierce competition, new
product development, etc. Strategic capability or strategic human capital may
be the most portable. Industry human capital pertains to skills and capabilities
which are successful in one particular industry, but need not be transferable to
another industry. GE top executives who moved to industries which were quite
different from GE businesses were found generally ineffective. Relationship
human capital, which may also be called social capital, relates to skills,
relationships and understanding an executive develops in course of working
with his/her team or colleagues, and, a manager would be always more
successful in a new job or company if he/she brings along with him/her some of
his/her former colleagues or team members. Lee lacocca did this when he joined
Chrysler. Company-specific human capital refers to skill, knowledge, culture,
systems, procedures, informal processes, etc., which exist in a company and,

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 410

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

are unique to particular organizations and, therefore, are least portable or


transferable.
Based on their study of the selected GE executives in terms of the four
types of human capital, Nohria et al. have come to some interesting findings
and conclusions about leadership portability or transferability. These are
summarized below:
(a) Certain skillsmostly company-specific oneswill not be relevant
to the new job and will have to be unlearned, which takes time.
(b) The more closely the new environment (the company and the
business) matches the old environment, the higher the chances of
success of the portable managers.
(c) The new company should be prepared to make necessary changes
to allow the newcomer to succeedchanges in systems, procedures
business portfolios, hiring a new team, etc.
(d) The efforts of CEOs/leaders to replicate their performances in new
jobs may have only mixed success.
(e) Even the best management talent (CEO/leader) may not be portable
if it does not match the new environment.5

Self-Assessment Questions
3. Leadership _________ is a way or pattern of behaviour, which a leader
adopts in managing the affairs of the organization.
4. Skills or capabilities required to control or manage different strategic
situations are referred to as _________.
5. Skills or capabilities required to control or manage different strategic
situations are referred to as ________.
6. Skills, relationships and understanding an executive develops in course
of working with his/her team or colleagues are referred to as _______.

15.6 Leadership Role of Top/Senior Management6


The primary responsibility for providing effective strategic leadership is vested
at the top, that is, the CEO. The analysis so far has been directed towards this.
It does not, however, mean that leadership rests only with the CEO. Other

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 411

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

strategic leaders include members of the board of directors, the top management
team and senior managers including general manager (GM), vice-president
(VP), assistant vice-president (AVP), etc. We had discussed the role of managers
at different levels in the strategic management process in Unit 2. The focus
here is on leadership styles or qualities of the top/senior managers and the
important issues related to this.
The top/senior level managers are vested with the responsibility (under
the guidance/supervision of CEO) for formulating and implementing strategies
of the organization. The top/senior level managers take most of the strategic
initiative in the company, and, participate in the process of formulation of strategic
plans. Strategic decisions by top/senior level managers influence, to a large
extent, how far corporate goals will be achieved. Top/senior managers also
help to develop appropriate organizational structures and systems for successful
implementation of strategies. In Unit 12, we had analysed how organizational
structure and reward systems affect implementation of strategies. The top/senior
managers perform their leadership roles individually or, more often, as a team.

15.6.1 Top Management Team


In most companies, the complexity of tasks, issues and challenges and the
need for diversity of knowledge and skills require strategic leadership by a team
of managers. Use of a team to make strategic decisions also helps to avoid
potential problems when these decisions are made by the CEO alone: managerial
hubris.7 Research has shown that when CEOs begin to believe that they are
unlikely to make errors, they are more likely to make poor strategic decisions.8
Some felt that part of Carly Fiorinas (CEO, HP) problem was that she seemed
to be the only spokesperson for HP, and her refusal to focus more on the
operational details of the business might have been the reflection of her celebrity
status. CEOs and top executives need to have self-confidence but they must
not allow it to become arrogance and develop a false belief in their invincibility.
To guard against CEO overconfidence and poor strategic decisions, companies
often use the top management team to consider strategic opportunities and
problems, and to make strategic decisions. The nature and quality of the strategic
decisions made by a top management team influences, to a large extent, the
companys ability to innovate and initiate effective strategic management and
change.
The top management team should be, and usually is, heterogeneous in
composition. A heterogeneous team consists of top/senior managers from
manufacturing, marketing, finance, etc., with varied experience and skills. The
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 412

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

more heterogeneous a top management team is, the more varied knowledge
and experience will be at its disposal for effective interaction and decision making.
Different perspectives given by team members during meetings are likely to
increase the quality of the teams decision, particularly when a consensus or
synthesis emerges from diverse perspectives. Research has shown that greater
heterogeneity among top management team members generates healthy debate
which often leads to better strategic decisions, implementation and organizational
performance.

15.6.2 Top Management Team, CEO and Board


Diversity among team members may, however, lead to differences of views and
also conflicts. In general, the more heterogeneous and large the top management
team is, the more difficult it may be for the team to effectively implement
strategies. Comprehensive and long-term strategic plans can be constrained
because of communication barriers or problems among top executives who
have different backgrounds of education, experience and skills. A group of top
executives with diverse backgrounds may complicate the process of decision
making if it is not properly managed. In such situations, top management teams
may fail to logically examine all the issues, opportunities and threats leading to
a sub-optimal strategic decision. In such cases, the CEO must attempt to seek
behavioural integration among the team members and ensure that the members
function cohesively.
The characteristics of top management teams should be related to
innovation and strategic change. More heterogeneous top management teams
are likely to be associated positively with innovation and strategic change
because of diverse capability inputs. The heterogeneity may force the team or
some of the members to think out of the box and thus be more creative in
making decisions. Companies which need to change their strategies are more
likely to succeed if they have top management teams with diverse backgrounds
and expertise. When a new CEO is hired from outside the industry, the probability
of strategic change is greater than if the new CEO is from inside the organization
or inside the industry.9 Hiring a new CEO from outside the company or industry
adds diversity to the team, but, the top management team must be managed
effectively to use the diversity in a positive way.
Board of directors may sometimes find it difficult to direct the strategic
actions of powerful CEOs and top management teams. It often happens that a
powerful CEO appoints to the board a number of sympathetic outside members
and/or inside members who are also in the top management team and report to
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 413

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

the CEO. In either case, the CEO exercises significant control over the boards
actions. Thus, the amount of discretion a CEO has in making strategic decisions
is related to the board of directors and how it oversees the CEOs actions and
the top management team. For poor performance of HP during Carly Fiorinas
leadership, the board of directors had to share part of the blame.
Activity 1
The predominant styles of eight leaders have been mentioned in the text.
Choose any of these leaders and make a detailed analysis of his functioning
style.

Self-Assessment Questions
7. The primary responsibility for providing effective strategic leadership is
vested at the top, that is, the CEO. (True/False)
8. The leadership of a company rests only with the CEO. (True/False)
9. The more _______a top management team is, the more varied knowledge
and experience will be at its disposal for effective interaction and decision
making
10. Hiring a new CEO from outside the company or industry adds _______ to
the team.

15.7 Organizational Culture


Among the behavioural factors, next only to leadership style, organizational
culture plays the most important role in the strategy implementation process of
a company. Some people say culture is an abstraction; but it is the culture
which shapes or moulds the soft Ss in an organization. In McKinseys 7-S
framework, culture represents the seventh Sshared values (or superordinate
goals). Culture is not created by declaration; it is mostly unwritten or unstated
assumptions, values, beliefs, etc.
Different authors have attempted different definitions of organizational
culture. One such definition, which is quite representative, is given below:
Organizational culture is the set of assumptions, beliefs, values and
norms that are shared by an organizations members.10

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 414

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

The most important characteristic of organizational culture is sharing or


common beliefs, values, attitudes, feelings, etc. Sathe (1985) has enunciated
four components of sharing in organizational culture:
Shared things (e.g., the way people dress)
Shared saying (e.g., lets get down to work)
Shared action (e.g., a service-oriented approach)
Shared feelings (e.g., hard work is rewarded here)11
J R D Tata, former chairman of Tata Group, has well illustrated corporate
cultural dimensions while describing the house of Tata:
I would call it a group of individually managed companies united by two
factors. First, a feeling that they are part of a large group which carries
the name of Tatas, and, public recognition of honesty and realiability
trustworthiness. The other reason is more metaphysical. There is an
innate loyalty, a sharing of beliefs. We all feel a certain pride that we are
somewhat different from others.12

15.7.1 Creating Strategy-supportive Culture


In analysing the relationship between culture and strategy, we had mentioned
five alternatives or possibilities. Two of the alternatives involved either adapting
strategy implementation to the existing culture or changing the strategy itself
midway through implementation. But, before changing any strategy, a company
must carefully assess the stakes involved in the strategy and the implication of
its change on corporate objectives, growth and profitability. If the strategy has
very high stake like a major takeover or acquisition or a joint venture or merger
with long-term organizational growth or diversification, the change of strategy
will not be easy or will be at a high cost of organizational sacrifice. Therefore,
change of strategy should be the option or compulsion of last resort. In fact, the
recommended course for most of the situations is: mould the mindset of the
people, remove the resistance to change and prepare the organization for
strategic transformation.
Many methods or techniques are available for changing an organizations
culture. These methods include effecting changes in organizational design and
structure, job reallocations, role modelling, training, transfer, promotion, etc.
One such method is triangulation. Duncan describes triangulation as an effective,
multimethod technique for analysing and changing a companys culture.
Triangulation combines obtrusive observations, self-administered questionnaires
and personal interviews to analyse the existing organizational culture. The
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 415

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

process of triangulation identifies the changes required to be made in a


companys culture to make it contribute to strategy.13
In addition to using methods like triangulation, it is also possible to identify,
through experience and/or research, factors which are useful in positive linking
of culture and strategy. Schein has indicated many elements which can facilitate
creation of a strategy-supportive culture:
(a) Clear statements of organizational philosophy, mission, goals and
objectives;
(b) Organizational design, structure and hierarchy;
(c) Organizational systems and procedures;
(d) Designing of physical spaces, facades and buildings;
(e) Criteria used for selection, recruitment, promotion, leveling off and
retirement of people;
(f) Motivation, compensation and reward systems;
(g) Stories, legends and myths about key people and events;
(h) Role modelling, teaching and coaching by leaders;
(i) What leaders pay attention to, measure and control;
(j) Leaders reactions to critical incidents and organizational crises.14

15.7.2 Building a Sound Organizational Culture


A sound organizational culture is always conducive to strategy formulation and
implementation. Efforts should, therefore, be made by companies to build a
strong or sound cultural paradigm.
Strategists and consultants can develop an ambitious strategic plan; the
organization may have the necessary resource base; and, the top management/
leadership may be keen on fast and efficient implementation. But, the managers
and staff should be prepared to take on the challenge, i.e., the organization
should be culturally geared up. Sumantra Ghoshal has observed that:
Worldwide, managers are recognizing that while process re-engineering,
financial restructuring and strategic repositioning are important means
to corporate renewal, the bedrock of competitiveness ultimately lies in
the behaviour of people. To stimulate initiative, trust, commitment and
cooperation within the organization and, in its external relationships,
top level managers are increasingly recognizing that the shaping and
embedding of organizational values are perhaps their most important
challenges.15
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 416

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Building sound organizational culture has been the concern of many


companies. Researches have been conducted on this to evolve ways and
methods to develop an organizational culture which is positive, proactive, and
supports and strengthens strategy formulation and implementation. Collins and
Porras (1994), based on their research, have suggested six guidelines for
developing a sound organizational culture:
(a) Preserve core ideologies and values while allowing change to take
place;
(b) Stimulate growth and development through challenging objectives,
purposeful evolution and continuous self-improvement;
(c) Encourage new ideas, thoughts, experimentation and accept
mistakes as lessons for the future;
(d) Allow diverse thinking and accept paradox while accepting or rejecting
either or arguments;
(e) Create alignment by translating core values into organizational goals,
strategies and practices; and
(f) Grow new and trained managers internally by promotion from within.16

Self-Assessment Questions
11. The set of assumptions, beliefs, values and norms that are shared by an
organizations members is called ________.
12. ________ is a method to change organizational culture that combines
obtrusive observations, self-administered questionnaires and personal
interviews to analyse the existing organizational culture.
13. A sound organizational culture is always conducive to strategy formulation
and implementation. (True/False)
14. A change of strategy should be the first option for a company.
(True/False)

15.8 Corporate Ethics and Values


Corporate culture governs, to a large extent, corporate ethics and values in an
organization. In fact, many feel that ethics and values are embedded in the
cultural paradigm itself. We had mentioned about code of corporate governance

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 417

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

and corporate ethics in Unit 3. But, that was more with reference to corporate
ethics and values in the context of strategy formulation and implementation.
Organizational ethics may be generally understood to be of two kinds: (a)
professional ethics or ethics in terms of observance of rules, procedures,
systems, etc., and, (b) value ethics or ethics in terms of personal integrity of
individual managers. In terms of personal values, three types of managers can
be distinguished: the moral manager, the immoral manager and the amoral
manager. The moral manager is fully committed to high standards of ethical
behaviour both in his individual actions and in his perception of how the
companys business should be conducted. The immoral manager is openly or
clearly opposed to ethical behaviour in business, and willingly ignores ethical
principles in his management and decision making. The amoral manager believes
that business and ethics need not be mixed. He feels that it is not necessary to
introduce ethical considerations into his business practices and decisions
because business activity lies outside the purview of moral judgement. Corporate
ethics has three aspects or dimensions: development of the manager as a moral
person; influence of the organization as a moral environment; and, evolving
procedures, regulations and actions to ensure a high level of ethical performance
in general management and strategic operations and implementations.

15.8.1 Different Approaches to Business Ethics


In practice, different companies have different approaches to business ethics.
It depends on their prioritization of ethical practices in conducting business.
Some companies accord highest priority to the achievement of organizational
objectives and business targets; ethical practices may have to be compromised.
Some companies give almost equal priorities to both. Some companies give
very high priorities to ethics and values; management and strategic functions
are governed or dictated by this. According to Rossouw and Vuuren (2003),
approaches adopted by various companies to deal with business ethics may
take one of the four forms. These are shown below in terms of increasing order
of ethical concern:
(a) Unconcerned or ethical non-issue approach

(b) Ethical damage control approach

(c) Ethics compliance approach

(d) Ethical culture approach


Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 418

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Unconcerned or ethical non-issue approach: This approach is adopted


by companies whose managers are either immoral or amoral. Such companies
believe that organizational objectives and business targets are the foremost.
Business must grow; profit should be generated and maximized. These
companies plan and adopt strategies which may follow general legal and
business principles, but may be ethically unsound. They are not really concerned
with the ethical issues in the conventional sense. Many feel that Mittal Steels
(L N Mittal) international acquisitions fall in this category.
Ethical damage control approach: In companies in this category, managers
are generally amoral, but, they fear adverse publicity or scandal. The objective
in this approach is to protect the company from adverse publicity which may be
made by unhappy stakeholders, external investigation agencies, threats of
litigation, punitive government action, etc. To avoid such a contingent situation,
there is a need for rejecting unethical behaviour and introducing corporate
governance safeguards through window-dressing ethics. A company may
generally ignore or condone questionable methods or actions which may help
to achieve business targets or improve its market position so long as it does not
publicly tarnish the image of the company.
Ethics compliance approach: In this approach, companies are conscious
that they should comply with ethical standards and requirements. The managers
are either moral and view strong compliance to prescribed norms or methods
as the best way to enforce ethical practices; or, are unintentionally amoral but
are highly concerned about their ethical reputation. Companies which adopt a
compliance approach adhere to certain practices to demonstrate their
commitment to ethical conduct: make the code of ethics visible and a regular
part of communication with employees, form ethics committees to give guidance
on ethical matters, introduce ethics training programmes, lay down formal
procedures for investigating alleged ethical violations, conduct ethics audit to
measure and monitor compliance and institute ethics awards for employees for
outstanding efforts for creating an ethical environment and improving ethical
performance.
Ethical culture approach: In companies with this approach, ethical business
practices are rooted in the organizational culture itself. The top management/
CEO believes that high ethical principles embedded in the corporate culture
should guide the managers and staff. The ethical principles contained in the
companys code of ethics and/or corporate values are seen as integral to the
companys identity and image. The prevalence and success of the ethical culture
approach depends heavily on the personal integrity of the individual managers
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 419

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

who create and nurture the culture. It is clearly understood in such companies
that corporate strategy should be ethical in all respects and ethical behaviour
should also be reflected in strategy implementation.17

15.8.2 Why Unethical Business Behaviour


In todays volatile business environment, it is an established fact that business
ethics and values are under severe test. Companies are too busy chasing targets
and managers are under enormous pressure to perform. If the targets or results
are achieved, the end justifies the means, i.e., certain amount of dubious or
unethical business behaviour may be permissible if this helps in the achievement
of physical or financial targets. Sometimes, managers themselves may be of
questionable personal integrity and may adopt unethical practices for personal
motives or interests. If we analyse unethical business behaviour perceived in
various companies, this can be attributed to one or more of three major reasons
or factors:
(a) Company culture encourages unethical behaviour
(b) Pressure on company managers to meet or beat targets
(c) Pursuit of personal gain and other selfish interests by managers

15.8.3 Company Culture Encourages Unethical Behaviour


There are companies where corporate values are based on unethical foundation.
The general work culture is immoral or, at best, amoral. The employees have a
company-approved licence to ignore or underplay conventional ethical norms
or standards for pursuing operations and strategies which can significantly
contribute to financial gains of the company. Prompted by such corporate
environment, even the otherwise ethical or moral managers may commit ethical
errors and also succumb to opportunities and pressures to resort to unethical
practices.
Almost a classical example of such companies is now infamous Enron.
Enrons top management/leadership encouraged managers to be innovative
and aggressive in finding out what could be done to increase current revenues
and earnings of the company. The company hired the best and the brightest
people in the industry/market. They were pushed to be creative, exploit
opportunities in the environment and exhibit a sense of urgency in producing
results. Managers were encouraged to be entrepreneurial and, go all out to
contribute to corporate growth and profitability. Norms, procedures and ethics
could be underplayed for this. Employees got the messagepushing the limits
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 420

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

and achieving numbers is the key to survival. Managers had to devise clever
ways to bolster revenue and earnings even if it meant violating existing policies
and norms and doing things without the knowledge of superiors. In fact, for
generating profitable new business, out-of-ethics practices were even
appreciated and sometimes celebrated.

15.8.4 Pressure on Company Managers to Meet or Beat Targets


An organizations cultural foundation need not be amoral or unethical as in
companies like Enron, but pressures to perform may force managers to look
beyond ethics for the achievement of business targets. Targets can be of various
kinds: quarterly or annual sales targets, profit targets, production or output
targets, inventory management/liquidation targets, dealer networking targets,
etc. Towards the end of the financial year, the pressure builds for meeting
specified targets. Many times, annual compensation packages of managers
are linked to organizational performance and their individual performances in
terms of targets. This puts additional pressure and the fear of loss of financial
gains/incentives prompts the managers to bend the rules, norms and values.
Bristol-Myers Squibb (BMS), one of the worlds largest drug manufacturers,
can be cited as an example. In BMS, the management engaged in different
kinds of manoeuvres to achieve revenue/profit targets. Number games were
said to be common earnings management practice at BMS and, according to
one former executive, this sent a huge message across the organization that
you make your numbers at all costs. Some such cases were:
(a) Offering special discounts at the end of a quarter to distributors and
local pharmacists to build stocks of certain prescription drugsa
practice known as channel stuffing;
(b) Giving last-minute price increase signals to prompt/force purchases
and increasing operating margin;
(c) Building excessive reserves in the name of restructuring and then
reversing some of the financing or cost elements to bolster operating
profit.18

15.8.5 Pursuit of Personal Gain and Other Selfish Interests


Immoral managers are characterized by their lack of personal integrity and
disregard of ethical values. Their only objective is to maximize personal gain
and wealth. In many such cases, the organization and the manager/managers
may be working at cross-purposes. The organizational culture may be based
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 421

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

on sound ethical principles and the top management/leadership may not


encourage managers to adopt unethical practices. It is the individual managers
who may be indulging in unethical or corrupt practices in disregard of
organizational norms and values. Sometimes, the top management itself may
be unscrupulous and highly corrupt and try to rip off the company financially.
One such glaring case has been reported by the Securities and Exchange
Commission (SEC) of the US. According to a complaint filed by the SEC, CEO
of Tyco International, a well-known $36 billion manufacturing and services
company, conspired with the companys chief financial officer (CFO) to ransack
more than $170 million from the company. Tycos CEO and CFO were further
charged with conspiracy to manipulate more than $ 430 million through sales of
company shares. They did this by using questionable methods to hide their
actions and indulging in deceptive accounting practices to distort the companys
financial position during 19952002.
On the charges filed by the SEC, the prosecutor told the judiciary: This
case is about lying, cheating, and stealing. These people didnt win the jackpot
they stole it.19

15.8.6 Business Ethics in Indian Companies


In terms of ethical practices, companies in India, as in many other countries,
can be classified as good and bad. We have just given the examples of Infosys,
Amul, ICICI, etc., which are highly ethical. There are also companies which do
not conform to strong ethical norms. We also have regulations like the MRTP
Act and FEMA (earlier FERA) for curbing unethical business practices.
KPMG India conducted a survey of 280 top Indian companies for
ascertaining the level of business ethics in India. Study analysis and findings
are contained in Business Ethics Survey Report: India, 1999. Major findings of
the study are summarized below:
(a) Mission statement: About 85 per cent of the companies surveyed
are reported to have a mission statement. But, most of these
statements focus on customer service and customer satisfaction.
Very few companies emphasize ethical and moral issues such as
organizational values, integrity in business, harassment in the
workplace, etc.
(b) Company policy on ethics: Many companies have a documented
policy on ethics. But, implementation or reinforcement of a formal
ethical system is weak in most of these companies. Some companies
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 422

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

have a grievance cell; some companies conduct periodic workshop


on business ethics, but nothing much beyond that.
(c) Ethical risk in the workplace: Many companies express concern about
lack of ethics in the workplace. Some of the major ethical concerns
expressed by companies are: leakage or misuse of confidential
information (77 per cent); insider trading (48 per cent); receiving
gifts or favours from suppliers (48 per cent); promoting personal
interest (47 per cent).
(d) External factors in corporate ethics: Most Indian companies feel that
ethical problems in business arise because of external or
environmental factors. Two major external factors are government
policies/regulations and political interference.
(e) Training in business ethics: Majority of the companies feel that training
in business ethics should be given high priority. Education in ethics
should be incorporated in the formal management development
programmes of companies.
(f) Strengthening ethical practices: Most Indian companies are of the
opinion that, for strengthening ethical business practices, two factors
are important: first, professionalizing company management; and,
second, minimizing state or governmental control and interference.20
Activity 2
Conduct an analysis of business ethics among Indian companies, with
particular reference to a company of your choice.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. Organizational ethics may be generally understood to be of two kinds
_______ and _______ ethics.
16. In the _______ approach, ethical business practices are rooted in the
organizational culture itself.
17. _________ managers are characterized by their lack of personal integrity
and disregard of ethical values.
18. In the ________ approach, companies are generally amoral, but, the
objective is to protect the company from adverse publicity.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 423

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

15.9 Corporate Politics and Power


All corporate cultures include a political component (corporate politics), and, in
this sense, all organizations are, to a large extent, political in nature. This
permeates to strategy formulation and implementation also. In Unit 11, we have
discussed the role of pressure groups and also about bargaining in final selection
or choice of strategy. These are actually manifestations of organizational politics
and power. Managers come from different social backgrounds with different
views/opinions, professional or individual biases, etc. These managers
continually try to position themselves in the organization so that they can establish
their dominance or prevail over others with their opinions and decisions in all
management matters including strategy. Some tend to call this political view of
strategy development. Political view of strategy development relates to the
proposition that strategies develop as the outcome of process of bargaining
and negotiation among powerful internal or external interest groups (or
stakeholders).21
Power and politics are different, but, they play interrelated roles in corporate
functioning and strategic management. Politics stems from power. Managers
and strategists use different types of power to influence operations, choice of
strategy and its implementation. We can distinguish five types or sources of
power.
(a) Legitimate power: This is derived from positions managers hold in
an organization. Managers can use their official positions to influence
strategy and decision making.
(b) Expert power: This emanates from a managers knowledge,
competence and expertise acknowledged by others in the
organization.
(c) Referent power: This arises from personality and charisma of
managers, and their ability to use these to create liking among
subordinates and peers.
(d) Reward power: This is derived from the ability of managers (partly
because of legitimate power) to reward outcomes or results.
(e) Coercive power: This is based on the ability of managers (derived
from their positions) to penalize or punish non-performance or
negative results.22

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 424

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

As mentioned above, politics stems from power, and, it is concerned with


the use of power in different forms in organizational matters. Corporate politics
may be defined/described as the carrying out of activities not prescribed by
policies for the purpose of influencing the distribution of advantage within the
organization.23 In more clear terms, this means seizing, holding, extracting
and executing of power. The nature of organizational structure itself creates
conditions for corporate politics. The organizational structure (some call it a
power structure) creates hierarchy, positions and relationships; and, this leads
to ambitions, coalitions and conflicts among managers. This happens because
material benefits, promotions, career growth, prestige, ego, etc., are involved.
We can put it like this:
The who gets what (politics) is endemic to every organization regardless
of size, function or character of ownership. Furthermore, it is to be found in
every level of the hierarchy; and, it intensifies as the stakes become more
important and the area of decision possibilities greater.24

Self-Assessment Questions
19. The ________ view of strategy development relates to the proposition
that strategies develop as the outcome of process of bargaining and
negotiation among powerful internal or external.
20. _______ power emanates from a managers knowledge, competence
and expertise acknowledged by others in the organization.

15.10 Power, Politics, Strategy and Implementation


A common thinking is that power and politics have adverse or negative effects
on company operations and strategies, because, power and politics mean
influence, manipulation and domination. But these can be viewed or used in a
positive way also, or, at least, as significant factors in strategy making and
implementation. Mintzberg (1991) observes that corporate politics is neither
inherently good nor bad. Although, more often corporate politics may lead to
divisiveness which is not healthy for an organization, but, there are times when
it can be strategically used to bring about changes. There are times when an
organization is emerging from a stage of complacency or stability or incremental
growth and entering into a phase of fundamental changes or discontinuous
growth. Suggesting the need for creating political tension as well as harmony,

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 425

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

Mintzberg contends that the organization must ... pull apart before it can pull
together again.25 Quinn (1980) observes that most strategic decisions and
strategic thrusts in large enterprises emerge as part of an evolving continuous
political consensusbuilding with no precise beginning or end.26
All this tends to indicate that a manager cannot effectively formulate and
implement strategy without being perceptive about company politics and being
adept at political manoeuvring.27 What is important or essential is that managers
and strategists should know when to exploit power and politics, and, when to
shun them and promote harmony for achievement of organizational objectives.
Based on an understanding of the power structure, and, the nature of corporate
politics, the strategists should master support for acceptable proposals and
garner similar support for discarding unacceptable or unviable ones.
Some strategic analysts feel that power and politics have a more critical
role to play in strategy implementation than in strategy formulation. There is a
valid reason behind such thinking. Strategies are mostly formulated (planned
and finalized) by the strategic planning group under the direction of the top
management/CEO. Many functional and operational areas may not be
associated with this. But, implementation invariably involves the major functional
and operational areas. Let us take the example of diversification strategysay
launching of a new product. Three functional areasmanufacturing, finance
and marketingwill play critical roles in implementation of this strategy along
with the respective operational areas. Successful implementation of this strategy
necessitates balancing of interests of all the functional and operational areas
involved and, therefore, requires conflict resolutions (handling inter-functional
and interpersonal clash of interests), consensus building and managing
understanding or coalitions. This can be achieved only through careful and,
sometimes delicate, management of power and politics.
The strategists and managers responsible for implementation should,
therefore, take cognizance of the dominant factors in organizational politics
and power. In other words, managers should make strategic use of power and
politics in implementation. For this, 10 guidelines28 may be followed. The
guidelines recommend that managers should:
(a) Accept the inevitability of power and politics in organizational
functioning.
(b) View power and politics more as positive factors in strategic
management.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 426

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

(c) Understand how an organizations power structure worksindividuals


and groups whose opinions matter most and those who can be
undermined.
(d) Be sensitive and alert to political signals emanating from different
parts of the organization.
(e) Generally adopt a team approach subject to organizational power
blocks.
(f) Know when to tread softly and rely on coalition management and
consenus building and, when to push through decisions and actions
for results.
(g) Gather support for acceptable ideas and proposals and let the
unacceptable ones die a natural death.
(h) Encourage and reward organizational commitment, and discourage
and penalize negative attitude or actions.
(i) Promote and practice principled politics with openness and honesty
and counter unprincipled and corrupt politics.

Self-Assessment Questions
21. According to Mintzberg (1991), corporate politics is inherently bad.
(True/ False)
22. Managers should accept the inevitability of power and politics in
organizational functioning. (True/ False)

15.11 Case Study


Hewlett-Packard: What is Right Leadership?
Hewlett-Packard (HP) had two contrasting leaders (CEOs): Carly Fiorina
and Mark Hurd with almost diametrically opposite styles. Fiorina was a
visionary, and her style or strategy was to provide long-term direction to the
company rather than focus on immediate or short-term results. She was
charismatic and a well known leader.
One of the biggest long-term strategic decisions taken by Fiorina was the
acquisition of Compaq. Her decision was based on the directive of the
board of directors to change the course of the company and increase its
long-term competitiveness. The objective was to acquire market power
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 427

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

through integration of the two companies and be able to compete with the
likes of Dell Computer and IBM. This was a high profile acquisition and
many such M&As were not successful in the past. Therefore, Fiorinas
decision involved a high element of risk.

The developments after the acquisition exposed the risk factor. Even after
three years of merger of Compaq with HP, the new HP could not compete
with Dell or IBM. Some analysts think that Fiorina overlooked critical
operating issues which had to be addressed, particularly to compete with
the super-efficient Dell.*
During 2004, HP fell far short of its sale and profit targets. Because of the
companys poor performance, the stock price fell and investors and other
stakeholders got worried. Many HP managers viewed Fiorinas style more
as a promotional role than as strategic leadership. Many felt that Fiorina
had a vision, but she was unable to secure necessary internal/organizational
support to fulfil the vision.** After being in HP for almost six years as CEO,
Fiorina was finally fired.
HP hired Mark Hurd as the new CEO. Mark was viewed as quiet, unassuming
and un-Carly. His approach was traditional. He was a nuts-and-bolts
operation man with apparently no clear vision. Working on short-term targets
to reduce costs without a long-term vision was not considered a good
strategy of recapturing HPs lost glory. Hurds style has been summarized
as executing, but without a long-term sense of direction.***
For HP, some have suggested a combination of (styles of) Fiorina and
Hurd. This would blend a thinker with vision and a doer who excels in
execution and operational efficiency. Both styles may be required for
strategic leadership. But, it implies dual CEO. Is it possible in practice?
* B Elgin, The Inside story of Carlys ouster, Business Week, (February 10, 2005).
** .Ibid.
*** P Burrows, and P Elgin, The Un-Carly Unveils His Plan, Business Week, June 16,
2005.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 428

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

15.12 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Organizations may plan, formulate and implement strategies, but, it is
the individualsmanagers at different levelswho actually take
appropriate actions involved in implementation.
Individual-related or individual-focussed factors or issues like leadership
styles, personal ethics and values, corporate politics, etc., are very
important. In addition to these, organizational culturework styles, beliefs,
shared values, etc.,is equally important or vital.
In an organization, the leader performs two strategic roles. First, he/she
is the architect of a strategyinnovates, conceives, plans and formulates
strategy; second, he/she is the implementor of strategyinitiates action
and induces/drives the employees into operation.
Leadership style is way or pattern of behaviour which a leader adopts in
managing the affairs of an organizationdirecting and motivating
managers and staff for achievement of organizational objectives.
Next only to leadership style, organizational culture plays the most
important role in the strategy implementation process of a company.
The most important characteristic of organizational culture is sharing or
common beliefs, values, attitudes, feelings, etc.
Different companies adopt different approaches to business ethics. It
depends on their prioritization of ethical practices in conducting business.

15.13 Glossary
Business ethics: A form of professional ethics that examines ethical
principles and moral or ethical problems that arise in a business
environment. It applies to all aspects of business conduct and is relevant
to the conduct of individuals and entire organizations.
Leadership style: A way or pattern of behaviour which a leader adopts
in managing the affairs of the organization.
Organizational culture: The set of assumptions, beliefs, values and
norms that are shared by an organizations members.
Triangulation: A multimethod technique for analysing and changing a
companys culture that combines obtrusive observations, self-administered
questionnaires and personal interviews to analyse the existing
organizational culture.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 429

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

15.14 Terminal Questions


1. Discuss the major leadership styles, including the leadershio styles in
practice.
2. Explain how to create a strategy supportive culture. Discuss the various
steps involved in this.
3. What are the different approaches to business ethics adopted by various
companies? Discuss in details.
4. Why does unethical business behaviour exist in many companies? Explain
the major reasons.
5. Discuss the state of business ethics in Indian companies. Analyse in terms
of KPMG business ethics survey.
6. Discuss the roles of power and politics in strategy implementation. Focus
on different thoughts on this.

15.15 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. False
2. False
3. style
4. strategic human capital
5. Strategic human capital
6. Relationship human capital
7. True
8. False
9. heterogeneous
10. diversity
11. Organizational culture
12. Triangulation
13. True
14. False
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 430

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

15. professional, value


16. Ethical culture approach
17. Immoral
18. Ethical damage control
19. Political
20. Expert
21. False
22. True

Answers to Terminal Questions


1. Leadership styles are influenced by environmental factors. Refer to Section
15.4 for further details.
2. In the relationship between culture and strategy, two of the alternatives
involved are either adapting strategy implementation to the existing culture
or changing the strategy itself midway through implementation. Refer to
Section 15.7.1 for further details.
3. Different companies have different approaches to business ethics. Refer
to Section 15.8.1 for further details.
4. In todays volatile business environment, it is an established fact that
business ethics and values are under severe test. Refer to Section 15.8.2
for further details.
5. In terms of ethical practices, companies in India, as in many other countries,
can be classified as good and bad. Refer to Section 15.8.6 for further
details.
6. All corporate cultures include a political component. Refer to Section 15.9
for further details.

15.16 References
1. Collins, J C, and J I Porras. 1994. Built to last: Successful Habits of
Visionary Companies. New York: Harper Business.
2. Groysberg, B, A Mclean, and N Nohria. Are Leaders Portable? Harvard
Business Review, May, 2006.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 431

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

3. Khandwala, P. 1977. Some Top Management Styles: Their Context and


Performance. Organization and Administrative Science, Winter.
4. King, A S. 1990. Evolution of Leadership Theory. Vikalpa. April-June.
5. Rossouw, G J., and C J Vuuren. 2003. Modes of Managing Morality: A
Descriptive Model of Strategies for Managing Ethics. Journal of Business
Ethics, September.
Endnotes
1

A D Szilagyi Jr, and M J Wallace, Jr. Organisational Behaviour and Performance, 2nd
ed., (Glenview, IL: Foreman and Company, 1980), 274.

King, A S, Evolution of Leadership Theory, Vikalpa, 1990, 4354.

Sinha, J B P, The Nurturant Task Leader: A Model of Effective Executive, ASCI Journal
of Management (Vol. 8), 1979, 10919

B L Maheswari, Decision Styles and Organisational Effectiveness, Vikas Publishing House,


1980, ix-x.

B Groysberg, A N Mclean, and N Nohria, Are Leaders Portable? , Harvard Business


Review, (May, 2006).

This section is largely based on M A Hitt, et al. (2007), 364-69.

M A Hitt, et al. (2007), 365.

M L A Hayward, et al., Believing ones own Press: The Causes and Consequences of
CEO Celebrity, Strategic Management Journal, 25, 2004.

Y Zhang, and N Rajagopalan, Explaining the New CEO Origin: Firm versus Industry
Antecedents, Academy of Management Journal, 46, 2003.

10

C O Reilly, Corporations, Culture and Commitment: Motivation and Social Control in


Organization, California Management Review (Summer, 1989), 10.

11

V Sathe, Culture and Related Corporate Realities (Homewood, III: Richard D Irwin, 1985),

12

R M Lala, The Creation of Wealth (Mumbai: IBH Publishing, 1981), 198.

13

For details, refer J Duncan, Organisational Culture: Getting a Fix on an Elusive Concept,
Academy of Management Executive (August, 1989).

14

E H Schein, The Role of the Founder in Creating Organisational Culture, Organisational


Dynamics (Summer, 1983), 13-28.

15

S Ghoshal, The Value of Values, Economic Times (Supplement) (March 5,


1999), 1.

16

J C Collins and J I Porras. Built to Last: Successful Habits of Visionary Companies (New
York: Harper Business, 1994).

17

G J Rossouw, and L J Vuuren, Modes of Managing Morality: A Descriptive Model of


Strategies for Managing Ethics, Journal of Business Ethics (September, 2003), 389
400.

18

A A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, J E Gamble, and A K Jain, Crafting and Executing
Strategy: The Quest for Competitive Advantage, 14th ed. (New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill,
2006), 287.

19

Ibid. 286.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 432

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 15

20

Picking India Incs Conscience: The KPMG Business Ethics Survey, Financial Express,
(October, 1999), 5.

21

This is discussed in D Buchanan, and D Boddy, The Expertise of the Change Agent:
Public Performance and Backstage Activity (London: Prentice Hall, 1992).

22

J R P French, and B Raven, The Bases of Social Power, in Studies in Social Power, ed.
D Cartwright (Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1959), 15067.

23

A Sharplin, Strategic Management (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1985), 141

24

J M Pfiffner, and F P Sherwood, Administrative Organization (New Delhi: Prentice Hall of


India, 1964), 311.

25

H Mintzberg, The Effective Organization: Forces and Forms, Sloan Management Review,
32 (Winter, 1991), 5467

26

J R Quinn, Strategies for Change: Logical Incrementalism (Homewood, Illinois: Richard


D Irwin, 1980), 119.

27

A Zaleznik, Power and Politics in Organisational Life, Harvard Business Review, (48)3,
4760.

28

The guidelines are generally based on A Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategy Management
(New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005), 363.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 433

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Unit 16

Strategy Evaluation and Control

Structure
16.1 Introduction
16.2 Caselet
Objectives
16.3 The Evaluation and Control Process
16.4 Evaluation and Control Criteria: Pre-implementation
16.5 Implementation Process Control
16.6 Evaluation and Control Criteria: Post-implementation
16.7 The Balanced Scorecard Approach
16.8 Organizational Controls
16.9 Six Sigma Approach to Evaluation and Improvement
16.10 Characteristics of an Effective Evaluation System
16.11 Case Study
16.12 Summary
16.13 Glossary
16.14 Terminal Questions
16.15 Answers
16.16 References

16.1 Introduction
For an organization, evaluation and control of strategy is the final stage, and, is
one of the most vital stages in the strategic management process. Through the
evaluation system, the management tries to demonstrate how well the chosen
strategy is implemented and how successful or otherwise the strategy is. If
implementation is not taking place as planned, or, if there are deficiencies in the
strategy in terms of achievement of the objectives or targets which are getting
exposed during implementation, appropriate control mechanisms have to be
put in position for taking necessary corrective actions based on the feedback
process.
In analysing the strategy evaluation and control process, we will be
discussing here all related factors and issues. We shall start with an
understanding of the evaluation and control process. We will discuss preimplementation and post-implementation evaluation and control criteria. In terms

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 435

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

of specific details, we will analyse participants in the evaluation process, critical


success factors, strategic control factors, various quantitative performance
criteria and qualitative criteria. Special focus will be given on analysis of the
balanced scorecard approach as an evaluation criterion. We shall also discuss
the Six Sigma approach to evaluation and improvement. Finally, we will mention
certain important factors or characteristics of an effective evaluation system.

16.2 Caselet
Six Sigma has evolved into a highly rigorous tool for analysis and continuous
improvement of corporate performance. Six Sigma at many organizations
simply means a measure of quality that strives for near perfection. To achieve
Six Sigma, a process must not produce more than 3.4 defects per million
opportunities. Six Sigma processes are executed by Six Sigma Green Belts
and Six Sigma Black Belts, and are overseen by Six Sigma Master Black
Belts. According to the Six Sigma Academy, Black Belts save companies
approximately $230,000 per project and can complete 4-6 projects per year.
(Given that the average Black Belt salary is $80,000 in the United States,
that is a fantastic return on investment.) General Electric, one of the most
successful companies implementing Six Sigma, has estimated benefits on
the order of $10 billion during the first five years of implementation. GE first
began Six Sigma in 1995 after Motorola and Allied Signal blazed the Six
Sigma trail. Since then, thousands of companies around the world have
discovered the far reaching benefits of Six Sigma.
Source: http://www.isixsigma.com/new-to-six-sigma/getting-started/what-six-sigma/

Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to:
Discuss the evaluation and control process in an organization
Identify the evaluation and control criteria: pre-implementation and postimplementation
Analyse the strategy implementation process control
Use the concept and tool of balanced scorecard analysis
Apply the Six Sigma approach to corporate evaluation and improvement

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 436

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

16.3 The Evaluation and Control Process


The evaluation and control system is a step-by-step or sequential process. The
process consists of five interrelated steps or stages. These are:
A. Set performance targets, standards and tolerance limits for the strategy,
implementation and achievements.
B. Measure the actual performance position in relation to the targets at a
particular point of time.
C. Identify/diagnose deviations from the prescribed targets.
D. Analyse/measure deviations from targets and given tolerance limits.
E. Incorporate modifications, if and as necessary, to revise targets/objectives,
strategy and the implementation process.
Figure 16.1 illustrates the evaluation and control process.

Figure 16.1 Strategy Evaluation and Control Process


Note: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 indicate possible corrective steps/actions
Source: Adapted from L R Jauch, R Gupta, and W F Glueck, Business Policy and
Strategic Management, 6th edn, (New Delhi: Frank Bros & Co, 2004), 438
(Exhitbit 11.3).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 437

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

As seen in the figure, the evaluation and control system actually operates
through stages C, D and E. The evaluation process may reveal many things.
Targets or standards may not be met because those are too high or low (too
soft). All objectives and targets are based on certain assumptions. Sometimes,
assumptions may be erroneoustoo rigid or too general. In some cases, the
assumptions may have been based on pessimistic environmental scenario and
the goals and objectives may be conservative or narrow in scope. The
assumptions might have ignored the new or emerging environmental
opportunities. Under the opposite set of assumptions or scenario, the objectives
may be too ambitious or unrealistic. It is also possible that the objectives have
been achieved because the strategy has not been properly implemented; that
the selection of strategy has not been very appropriate. The strategists/
management have to ascertain which of these factors or cause-and-effect
relationships are at work.
The evaluation and control system generally operates during the process
of implementation of a strategy as shown in Figure 16.1. But, these can be
applied before and after implementation also. So, the evaluation and control
process can be analysed during three stages:
(a) Pre-implementation;
(b) During implementation; and
(c) Post-implementation.

Self-Assessment Questions
1. The evaluation and control system is a ________ process, with five
interrelated steps or stages.
2. The evaluation and control system generally operates during the process
of _____of a strategy.

16.4 Evaluation and Control Criteria: Pre-implementation


The major participants in the evaluation and control process have to play both
pre-implementation and post-implementation roles. Pre-emptive measures are
always better than reactive or corrective actions. To minimize the problems of
strategy implementation and, possible strategy formulation-implementation
mismatch, it is advisable to use certain evaluation criteria before implementation.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 438

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

For pre-implementation assessment of strategies, three interrelated evaluation


criteria are generally used (Figure 16.2).
1. Suitability
2. Acceptability
3. Feasibility

Figure 16.2 Evaluation Criteria: Premple-mentation

Suitability is the most important criterion for evaluating a strategy. As shown


in the figure, acceptability and feasibility generally follow assessment of suitability.
Based on these three criteria, a final decision is taken about choice or adoption
of a particular strategy, keeping in mind the implementation factor.
Suitability of a strategy involves assessment in terms of three stages:
first, establishing the rationale or logic of each strategic option available; second,
analysing relative merits of various options when alternative choices are available;
and, third, evaluating the alternatives for final selection of strategy.
Examining the suitability of a strategy in terms of the above factors may
appear to be an elaborate process. But, in practice, the process may not be as
elaborate as it appears. Most of the strategists/managers should be constantly
monitoring product/brand life cycles, positioning and, also the value chain. While
evaluating a particular strategy, the strategy team has to assess the financial
results or profitability and the balancing factor in terms of product/brand portfolios
to arrive at a final decision.
Acceptability of a strategy is concerned with expected performance or
outcome. Factors considered for deciding about the acceptability of a strategy
are return on investment (on strategy formulation/implementation) risk involved
and stakeholders expectations from or reaction to possible outcomes.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 439

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Feasibility of a strategy involves three aspects. The first is the compatibility


of the strategy with internal competences of the company resources,
capabilities and skills; second, practicability of the strategy in terms of the
environment market structure, competitors, government controls, etc.; and,
third, amenability or easiness of implementationsteps or stages are not
ambiguous or mutually conflicting.

16.4.1 Critical Success Factors (CSFs)


Identification of critical success factors helps in analysing suitability of a strategy.
In fact any strategy, to be successful, must start with an identification of the
critical success factors (CSFs) or key success factors (KSFs).1 We had defined
CSF while analysing parenting fit in Unit 7. Critical success factors are those
factors or aspects of strategy in which a company must excel to outperform
competitors, and there are underlying core competences in specific activities of
the company which are concomitant with CSFs. For example, if speed to market
with new product launch is a CSF, the underlying core competences should be
logistics of physical distribution and retail network. CSF analysis highlights the
important relationship between resources (includes business assets and skills),
competences and choice of strategy which is vital for assessing performance.
A study (Vasconcellos and Hambrick, 1989) of six mature product
industries shows that critical success factors differ from industry to industry
a capital goods manufacturer will have CSFs different from an input supplying
firm or a consumer goods company. And, those companies which have strengths
matching the CSFs perform significantly better than other companies. Failure
of companies like Procter & Gamble and Philip Morris to penetrate the soft
drinks market because they lack the CSF of access to bottlers gives a good
example of the significance of this concept or tool.
An analysis2 of the wine market in the early 1990s identified seven CSFs:
1. Access to quality grape supply (50 per cent of the variable cost),
particularly for those in the premium segment.
2. Access to technology both in the vineyard and in the winery so that
costs can be controlled or minimized.
3. Achievement of adequate scale in production, perhaps with a set of
brands.
4. Expertise in wine making.
5. Financial resources to compete in a capital-intensive business.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 440

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

6. Name or image recognitiona sense of tradition.


7. Strong relationship with distributors.
It is not enough to identify present CSFs. It is also necessary to project
them into the future, that is, identify emerging CSFs. This gives sustainability to
success. Experience shows that many companies have faltered when CSFs
changed, and resources and competences on which they were based became
less relevant. For example, for industrial products, technology and innovation
are most important during the introduction and growth phase, and systems
capability, marketing and service back-up play more dominant roles as the market
matures. In consumer goods, marketing and distribution skills are critical during
the introduction and growth phases, and manufacturing and operations become
more vital as the product moves into maturity. For services, the CSFs would be
different.

Self-Assessment Questions
3. Which of these is an evaluation criterion for pre-implementation
assessment of strategies?
(a) Suitability
(b) Acceptability
(c) Feasibility
(d) All the above
4. Factors or aspects of strategy in which a company must excel to outperform
competitors are known as _________.

16.5 Implementation Process Control


In most companies, evaluation and control are exercised during the strategy
implementation process itself. Many call these strategic controls. All strategies
are based on certain assumptions. These assumptions may change or lose
their validity during the period between strategy formulation and its
implementation, and, also, during the period or process of implementation.
Strategic controls take into account required changes in assumptions,
continuously monitor and review the strategic implementation process, and
suggest or undertake changes in the strategy to match the new developments.
Schreyogg and Steinman (1987) have mentioned four types of strategic control:
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 441

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

(a) Premise control


(b) Strategic surveillance
(c) Implementation control
(d) Special alert control3
These controls have a time perspective. See Figure 16.3.

Figure 16.3 Strategy, Implementation and Strategic Control


Source: Adapted from G Schreyogg, and H Steinman, (1987). 86.

16.5.1 Premise Control


This is the first stage of control. As mentioned above, all plans and strategies
are based on certain premises or assumptions. The objective of premise control
is to identify key or critical assumptions, and, during the course of implementation,
either maintain constancy of the assumptions or modify or drop some of them
or reformulate the strategy, if changes of assumptions warrant this. Premise
control is the responsibility of the strategic planning group. The premises or
assumptions may relate to organizational factors and/or industry factors and/or
environmental factors because these are the ones which govern or influence
strategy building.
Organizational factors can relate to resource availabilityfinancial as well
as managerial. Assumptions about organizational factors can also pertain to
different functional areas. For example, it may be about an expected
breakthrough in R&D (may be through strategic alliance) which can directly
affect any strategy on new product development or diversification. The
assumption can also relate to timely installation of a new plant or equipment,
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 442

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

i.e., introduction of a new technology. It may also involve marketing or distribution


collaboration for market penetration strategy of an existing product.
Assumptions are also made about several industry factorsessentially
about industry structure, competitive position and growth. For example, if an
industry is exhibiting a high growth rate like the IT industry, a companys plan
and strategy may be based on continuance of such growth rate; or, if there is
excess capacity in an industry, creation of any new capacity by a company
would be governed by certain assumptions about the nature and magnitude of
excess capacity. Lafarge of France had planned to set up a greenfield cement
manufacturing project/plant in India. After assessing the overcapacity in the
Indian cement industry, Lafarge changed their strategy to the acquisition route.
Proposal of Michelin of France, the international tyre major, was approved by
FIPB for setting up a radial tyre project in Pune in 2000. The company deferred
project implementation because of a slump in the Indian automobile market.
Important assumptions are required to be made about environmental
factors because these are very critical for determination of strategy. Some of
the vital environmental developments include sudden change in government
policy, regulation and/or control, shift in business or market conditions, an
unanticipated competitor action and capital market boom or depression. VSNL
had planned to raise capital overseas through global depository receipts (GDRs).
The company postponed its GDR issue thrice because of depressed stock market
conditions which prevailed during the period between grant of permission and
actual issue of GDR. Sometimes, it can be a political or social development.
Tata Steel had formulated a strategic plan for establishment of a steel plant in
Orissa. The company had also acquired land for the project. But, they finally
abandoned the project because of sustained protest by the local inhabitants
who were likely to be displaced if the project had come up.

16.5.2 Strategic Surveillance


This is a more generalized strategic control over the entire period spanning
from finalization of strategy to completion of the implementation process. This
is designed to monitor a broad range of events inside and outside the company
that are likely to threaten the course of a firms strategy.4 Through strategic
surveillance, a company can keep control over organizational factors, industry
factors and also major environmental factors. Surveillance or monitoring is done
with respect to any of these factors. For example, if there is an unexpected
development in resource availability leading to reallocation of resources, strategy
implementation may have to be slowed down or some change made in the
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 443

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

process. Similarly, strategic surveillance may reveal that a new competitor is


emerging in the industry, and, this may necessitate review of the strategy or its
implementation. In terms of environmental factors, the government may
announce a change in its FDI policy. Strategic surveillance will assess its impact
on the strategy and, accordingly undertake control measures may be in the
form of reformulation of the strategy either in whole or part, and, also its
implementation.

16.5.3 Implementation Control


Implementation control is focussed on the actual process of implementation.
The implementation process consists of programmes, projects, actions, etc.,
relating to different functional and operational areas. Some of these programmes/
projects/actions are undertaken simultaneously, and, some other incrementally,
in steps or stages, over a period of time. Implementation control evaluates and
monitors these steps/stages. If it is observed that these are not following the
plans, and, the predetermined course, controls are designed for necessary
course corrections.
For effective implementation control, two methods have been suggested;
first, monitoring strategic thrust and, second, milestone review. In the strategic
thrust approach, critical actions, steps or stages are identified as thrusts which
need to be constantly monitored to assess the impact of change in any of these
on the implementation process. For launching a new product, the thrusts are
concept development, product development (R&D) and test marketing. On the
basis of implementation position (deficiency or relative success) in the three
stages, the product may be modified or product launch may be deferred; and,
in case of too many abnormalities, the product may even be abandoned.
In the milestone review approach, all critical activities (stages) are identified
as milestones. Each milestone has a cost factor and time factor associated with
it, and it is assessed in terms of these two parameters. Either cost overrun or
time overrun or both in any of the milestones will affect the critical path of
implementation. The milestone approach is analogous to the PERT/CPM method
for project evaluation. This approach renders more exactness to the control
process, and, can also be said to be more objective compared to monitoring
strategic thrust approach.

16.5.4 Strategic Alert Control


Strategic surveillance and implementation control may not be sufficient for all
situations. For extraordinary developments or situations, special alert control
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 444

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

may be necessary. Such control is triggered by developments more sudden


and serious than mentioned above. In other words, this refers to contingency or
crisis situationsan industrial disaster, sudden fall of government, natural
catastrophes like floods, earthquakes, etc. Special alert control works through
a contingency plan or strategy which partially or wholly replaces the original
strategy and the plan of implementation. Contingency or crises management
strategy follows certain steps such as signal detection, preparation/prevention,
containment/damage limitation and recovery leading to organizational learning.5
Special alert controls cover such steps to prevent organizational collapse.

Self-Assessment Questions
5. The objective of _______ control is to identify key or critical assumptions.
6. _______ control is designed to monitor a broad range of events inside
and outside the company that are likely to threaten the course of a firms
strategy.
7. The control that is focussed on the actual process of implementation is
called __________.

16.6 Evaluation and Control Criteria: Post-implementation


Post-implementation evaluation shows actual performance of a company vis-vis targets set in the plan. This also becomes an assessment of the strategy
to what extent it has succeeded or failed. Evaluation of performance is generally
done through various quantitative criteria. But, in a comprehensive evaluation
system, qualitative criteria are also used in addition to the quantitative criteria.
The qualitative criteria usually complement or support the quantitative criteria.
We shall first discuss various quantitative performance criteria, and, then,
qualitative indicators.

16.6.1 Quantitative Evaluation Criteria


Quantitative evaluation criteria or indicators of performance are primarily financial,
but, there are also some important non-financial criteria. These criteria can be
used to measure results or performance in three ways: first, comparing current
performance of the company with its past performance; second, comparing
companys performance with industry averages, standards or benchmarks; and,
third, comparing companys performance with that of competitors. Because,
absolute numbers can sometimes be misleading, different evaluation
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 445

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

performance criteria are expressed in relative terms or ratios. Ten major financial
and non-financial criteria may be used:
Financial
1. Return on investment (ROI)
2. Return on equity (ROE)
3. Earnings per share (EPS)
4. Price-earnings ratio
5. Profitability: profit/sales ratio
6. Profitability: relative profit growth
Non-financial
7. Market share: absolute market share
8. Market share: relative market share
9. Sales ratio: actual to target sales
10. Sales ratio: relative sales growth
We had discussed the financial ratios in Unit 6 (Table 6.1). The above
ratios and also the non-financial evaluation criteria are briefly described below.
Return on investment (ROI) is gross or net income on total investment of
a company including both fixed investment and working capital. Return on equity
(ROE) is gross or net income on equity capital. Earnings per share (EPS) is
gross or net income divided by total number of equity shares. Price-earnings
ratio is market price per share to earnings per share. Profit-to-sales ratio is
gross or net profit to total sales (these are also called gross profit margin or net
profit margins). Relative profit growth is the growth of profit of the company
relative to that of the market leader or the nearest competitor.
Absolute market share is a traditional measure or indicator of performance
of a company. But, relative market share is a better indicator of competitive
performance. Relative market share can mean two things. The first is the ratio
of market share of the company to that of the market leader; if the company is
the leader, the ratio of its share to its challenger or No. 2. The second is the ratio
of companys market share to its nearest rival or rivals (when the company is
ideally in No. 2, No. 3 or No. 4 position). Sales ratio can be either actual sales or
turnover to target sales or relative sales growth, i.e., growth in sales of the
company to that of the leader or nearest rival as explained in the case of market
share.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 446

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

We can now try to understand the post-implementation evaluation system


more clearly. We shall use a hypothetical example to illustrate this. Hypothetical
data on targets and performance (with and without strategic intervention) have
been used to measure the deviations or variances between the targets and
actuals. These are shown in Table 16.1. For post-implementation evaluation of
strategy of a particular company, the hypothetical data can be replaced by actual
data.
Table 16.1 Post-implementation Performance Evaluation
Evaluation

1.

Return
on investment

2.

Return on equity

3.

Earnings
per share (`)

Objective/
Target

Expected
Expected
Actual
Shortfall/
Performance Performance Performance Variance
(without stategic (with stategic
intervention)
intervention)

5%

3%

5%

6%

+1%

25%

15%

25%

20%

5%

20

10

20

15

4.

Price/earnings ratio 150%

100%

150%

150%

0%

5.

Profit/sales ratio

15%

10%

15%

12%

3%

6.

Relative
profit growth

140%

100%

140%

120%

20%

7.

Absolute
market share

30%

20%

30%

30%

0%

8.

Relative
market share*

80%

60%

80%

70%

10%

9.

Ratio of
actual sales to

100%

80%

100%

110%

10%

150%

100%

150%

130%

20%

target sales
10. Relative
sales growth**
*relative to the leader

**relative to the nearest competitor/leader/industry average.

As shown in the table, there can be mixed results in terms of targets and
achievements. The ideal situation would be if actual performance in terms of all
major evaluation criteria matches with targets or budgeted estimates given certain
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 447

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

tolerance limits. There can be some cases of over-achievement, i.e., actuals


surpassing the targets. But, more common outcomes are under-achievements
or shortfalls, and, these are matters of serious concern for the strategists/top
management/CEO.
By using the four strategic controls mentioned earlier, the deviations or
shortfalls can be minimized, or, in some cases, eliminated. But, this would depend
on how timely and effectively the controls are exercised.
If the shortfalls are still significant, the strategic group or the top
management has to ascertain the causes of shortfalls or underperformance. A
series of searching questions may help in determining the causes. Some such
pertinent questions are given below.
(a) Is the cause of deviation an organizational or management problem?
(b) Is the causal factor external or environmental?
(c) Is the cause random or could it have been foreseen?
(d) Is the deviation temporary or permanent?
(e) How far are the plans and strategies still valid?
(f) Does the organization have the capacity or preparedness to respond
to the changes required?6
Answers to the above questions will help in identifying the focus areas
where corrective action is required, and, also, the nature and magnitude of
such action. These may mean revision of targets, plan and strategy; this may
sometimes be tantamount to formulation of a new strategy. The lessons learnt
will also provide directions for future planning.
Issues in Measurement
One of the major limitations of the quantitative evaluation criteria, and of the
quantitative indicators, is the problem of measurement. Difficulties are faced in
the choice of unit, gross or net concepts/values, reference period, etc. Information
or database are keys to correct measurement whether it is capital or investment,
return on equity, earnings per share, relative sales growth or profitability.
Incomplete or inadequate database can always create problems of accuracy.
Also different accounting methods may give different results about many
quantitative indicators. There is also a bias in terms of annual targets or objectives
rather than short-term or long-term targets or variables. Finally, the human factor
or subjective element is always associated with choice of, and/or deriving,
quantitative criteria or estimates.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 448

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Companies sometimes deliberately manipulate either definitions, units,


or timing points or periodicity to show results which will please the stakeholders
or shareholders. Some companies, particularly in the public sector, resort to
soft targeting, i.e., set targets which are very easily achievable whatever be the
methods of measurement. This is done in the public sector to take care of the
accountability criteria, and, in the private sector, to please or satisfy the
shareholders. But, large professional companies try to maintain as much
neutrality or objectivity as possible in terms of choice of base year, data base,
timing and periodicity for correct strategic evaluation and long-term growth.

16.6.2 Qualitative Evaluation Criteria


Because of the inadequacy of quantitative criteria (and also its limitations as
discussed above), qualitative criteria are also used for evaluation of corporate
strategy. Certain factors, which are critical for strategy and organizational
performance evaluation, are not subject to quantitative measurement. These
are strategic clarity, flexibility, skills and capabilities, organizational attitude
towards risk taking, management motivation/commitment, employee turnover
rates, etc. Qualitative criteria are generally applied before implementation of
strategy, but these can be used as useful controls during the process of
implementation also. A number of criteria have been suggested by strategic
analysts. Tilles has posed six questions which can be useful in evaluating
strategies. These are:
(a) Is the strategy internally consistent?
(b) Is the strategy compatible with the environment?
(c) Is the strategy appropriate considering available resources of the
organization?
(d) Does the strategy involve an acceptable degree of risk?
(e) Does the strategy have an appropriate time frame?
(f) Is the strategy workable or practicable?
David has raised seven additional questions, answers to which can give
significant qualitative directions to strategy:
(a) How good is the companys balance of investments between highrisk and low-risk businesses/projects?
(b) How good is the balance of investments between long-term and
short-term businesses/projects?

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 449

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

(c) How good is the balance of investments between slow-growing


markets and fast-growing markets?
(d) How good is the balance of investments among businesses/ SBUs/
divisions?
(e) What are the relationships between the companys key internal and
external strategic factors?
(f) How are major competitors likely to respond to particular company
strategies?
(g) To what extent are the organizations strategies socially responsible?7
Glueck and Jauch have suggested three qualitative criteria for strategy
evaluation: consistency, appropriateness and workability. Consistency is
compatibility of the strategy with organizational objectives/targets, internal
conditions and major environmental factors. Appropriateness of the strategy is
assessed with reference to resources, organizational capabilities, risk taking
and time frame. Workability is feasibility or practicability in terms of
implementation.8
Activity 1
We have mentioned financial and non-financial evaluation criteria in the
text (16.6.1). Choose a public limited company and using its balance sheet
and profit and loss account, do a perfromance analysis in terms of the
criteria.

Self-Assessment Questions
8. Quantitative evaluation criteria or indicators of performance are always
financial. (True/False)
9. Relative market share is a better indicator of competitive performance
than absolute market share. (True/False)
10. The gross or net income on total investment of a company including both
fixed investment and working capital is called __________.

16.7 The Balanced Scorecard Approach


The balanced scorecard approach combines both quantitative and qualitative
criteria/measures of evaluation and incorporates expectations of different
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 450

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

stakeholders in relating performance to strategy. This approach has been


developed by Kaplan and Norton (1992, 1993 and 1996) and elaborated, updated
and improved by others, and is recognized as a modern tool for strategic
evaluation of companies. Based on an analysis of some of the shortcomings of
earlier implementation and control methods, the balanced scorecard approach
has been designed to provide clear guidelines about what companies should
assess/measure to balance the financial aspect in implementation and control
of strategic plans.
The balanced scorecard approach works through four critical perspectives:
financial, internal business process, customer and, learning and growth. These
four perspectives are interlinked, and, they emanate from or are guided by
vision and strategy of the organization. Each of these perspectives is expressed
through its own objectives, targets, initiatives and measures. Together with vision
and strategy, these represent an integrated or balanced scorecard of
performance and growth (Figure 16.4).

Figure 16.4 Balanced Scorecard Approach to Strategy Evaluation


Source: R S Kaplan, and D P Norton, Using the Balanced Scorecard as Strategic Management
System, Harvard Business Review, (January-February, 1996).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 451

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

As shown in Figure 16.4, the objectives/targets, initiatives and measures


of the four perspectives are connected through a chainsort of cause and
effect relationshipswhich lead to successful implementation of strategy.
Achievement of one perspectives targets leads to improvements in the next
perspective, and so on till the companys overall performance improves. A
properly built scorecard is balanced between financial and non-financial
measures; internal and external performance perspectives; and short-term and
long-term success.
The balanced scorecard approach can be regarded as a management
system and, not merely a measurement system, which enables companies to
formulate their strategies, allocate resources, implement strategies and provide
meaningful feedback. The method generates feedback on both internal business
processes and external (stakeholder) outcomes to be able to continuously
evaluate and improve strategic performance and results. When fully developed,
the balanced scorecard is expected to transform strategic planning from a purely
top management function into the system centre in the organization guiding
resources, processes and outcomes.
Kaplan and Norton describe the effect of balanced scorecard on
organizational functioning as follows:
The balanced scorecard retains traditional financial measures. But,
financial measures tell the story of past events, an adequate story of
industrial age companies for which investments in long-term capabilities
and customer relationships were not critical for success. These financial
measures are inadequate, however, for guiding and evaluating the
journey that information age companies must make to create future
value through investment in customers, suppliers, employees,
processes, technology and innovation.9

During the last decade, a large number of forward-looking companies


have adopted the balanced scorecard approach. Some of the initial experiences
were not very good. But, those may be either because the approach and
methodology were not understood clearly or not implemented fully. But,
companies soon realized that an overwhelming dependence on conventional
financial performance measures means using only lag indicator (consequences
of past actions). As progressive companies, they should concentrate more on
lead indicators, i.e., drivers of future financial performance innovations in
business processes, learnings from the past and growth perspectives. Many
US companies including Exxon Mobil, Sears, DuPont and Mobil Corporation
have successfully used this approach in their own ways.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 452

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Activity 2
Select a large public limited company and do a balanced scorecard analysis
of the company using the balance sheet, annual report, balance sheet and
profit and loss account.

Self-Assessment Questions
11. The ______ approach combines both quantitative and qualitative criteria/
measures of evaluation and incorporates expectations of different
stakeholders in relating performance to strategy.
12. A properly built scorecard is balanced between ________ and _____
measures.

16.8 Organizational Controls


We have discussed above different types of strategic controls used by
organizations but, have not mentioned about the financial controls. We have
however, analysed the balanced scorecard approach/framework which
companies use to ensure that they have established both strategic and financial
controls to assess their performance. These are two major components of
organizational control before, during and after strategy implementation.
Companies rely on strategic controls and financial controls as part of their
structures to support implementation of their strategies. Strategic controls are
largely subjective criteria applied to ensure that the company is adopting
appropriate strategies for securing competitive advantage. Thus, strategic
controls are concerned with examining the fit between what the company might
do (to exploit opportunities in its external environment) and what it can do (as
indicated by competitive advantages). Financial controls, in comparison, are
largely objective criteria used to measure the companys performance against
predetermined quantitative standardsaccounting-based or market-based
criteria. The overall organizational control has to enforce complementarity
between the two to make an integrated framework like the balanced scorecard.
Financial control focusses on short-term financial outcomes. In contrast,
strategic control focusses on the content of strategic actions, rather than their
outcomes. Some strategic actions can be correct but may still result in poor

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 453

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

financial outcomes because of external conditions such as a recession in the


economy, unexpected domestic or foreign government actions or natural
disasters. Therefore, an emphasis on financial control often produces more
short-term and risk-averse managerial decisions because financial outcomes
may be caused by events beyond managers direct control. Alternatively, strategic
control encourages lower-level managers to take decisions that incorporate
moderate and acceptable levels of risk because outcomes are shared between
the business-level executives making strategic proposals and the corporatelevel executives evaluating them. Strategic controls demand rich communications
between managers responsible for using them to judge the companys
performance and those with primary responsibility for implementing its strategies
(such as middle-and lower-level managers). These frequent exchanges can be
both formal and informal in nature.10
Strategic controls are also used to evaluate the degree to which the firm
focusses on the requirements to implement its strategies. For a business-level
strategy, for example, the strategic controls are used to study primary and support
activities (discussed under Value Chain Analysis in unit 5) to verify that those
critical to successful implementation of the business-level strategy are being
properly emphasized and executed. With related corporate-level strategies,
strategic controls are used to verify the sharing of appropriate strategic factors
such as knowledge, markets and technologies across businesses.
Intel is focussed on improving strategic control of its operations. To
accomplish this, Paul Otellini, Intels CEO, has shifted the chip makers
organization and control systems to focus
on different product platforms. He has reorganized Intel into five marketfocussed units: corporate computing, the digital home, mobile computing, health
care and, channel products (PCs produced by smaller manufacturers). Each
platform brings together engineers, software developers, and marketers to focus
on creating and selling platform products for particular market-oriented customer
groups. In doing this, he has used two men in a box meaning that there are two
executives in charge of each of the largest groups, mobile computing and
corporate computing. This approach has facilitated improved control; the overall
structure has more key executives and affiliated functional teams overseeing
the development of each market platform.11

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 454

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Self-Assessment Questions
13. Strategic controls are largely subjective criteria applied to ensure that the
company is adopting appropriate strategies for securing competitive
advantage. (True/False)
14. Financial control focusses on long-term financial outcomes. (True/False)

16.9 Six Sigma Approach to Evaluation and Improvement


Six Sigma 12 is conventionally known for minimizing errors or defects in
manufacturing or quality improvement. But, since its first introduction in Motorola
in 1987, Six Sigma has evolved into a highly rigorous tool for analysis and
continuous improvement of corporate performance. Improvement in performance
is combined with profitability. This is brought about by defect reduction, yield
improvement, increase in customer satisfaction and best-in-class performance
standards. Today, Six Sigma approach in many organizations means
benchmarking or best practices in quality, which seeks to achieve near perfection
in every aspect of business including products, processes, functions, operations
and transaction. Many companies including Honeywell (1994), GE (1995),
Citibank (1997) Polaroid (1998) have adopted the Six Sigma approach as a
major business initiative for success. In some companies, Six Sigma is referred
to as the new TQM.

Figure 16.5 DMAIC Process of Six Sigma

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 455

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

The Six Sigma approach, like any other effective performance


improvement programme, does not ensure easy or automatic success.
Companies need to work hard for this. Top management commitment is vital for
its success; and employees must be fully trained in Six Sigma methodologies.
Many methodologiesframeworks, models and statistical toolsexist for
implementing the Six Sigma programme. One such method for improving a
system through incremental, but steady corrections in the DMAIC process.
DMAIC is a five-stage process: define, measure, analyse, improve, control.
See Figure 16.5.
The five stages of DMAIC process are elaborated below in terms of specific
analysis, planning and action:13
1. Define
Project definition
Project charter preparation
Ascertaining customer needs (voice of customer)
Translating customer needs into specific functional and
operational requirements
2. Measure
Process mapping
Data attributes/characteristics
Measurement system analysis/choice
Measurement process capability
Calculating process sigma level
Determining/displaying baseline performance
3. Analyse
Data tabulation and display (Scatter diagram, Histogram, Pareto
chart)
Value addition analysis
Cause and effect analysis
Identification (verification of root causes)
Locating opportunity (defects and financial) for improvement
Project charter review/revision

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 456

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

4. Improve
Brainstorming sessions
Quality tool deployment
Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA)
Testing (piloting) the solution
Implementation planning
Culture change planning for the organization
5. Control
Statistical process control
Developing a process control plan
Documenting the process
Many Six Sigma programmes are based on an uncompromising
orientation of all business processes towards the customer. The focus is on
clear understanding of customer expectations so that appropriate methods can
be developed to improve and realign business processes for maximizing
customer satisfaction. Six Sigma implementation at Citibank is one such
example.

Self-Assessment Questions
15. The _________ approach is conventionally known for minimizing errors
or defects in manufacturing or quality improvement.
16. In some companies, Six Sigma is referred to as the new __________.

16.10 Characteristics of an Effective Evaluation System


We have seen above that strategy evaluation and control is an elaborate, and,
at times, complex, process. It can also be a sensitive process because of the
human factor involved. Too much or too rigorous evaluation and control may be
expensive and, sometimes counterproductive alsoauthority and flexibility may
be challenged, minimized or even eliminated. Too little or no evaluation may
create the opposite effectlack of responsibility and accountability. In some
companies, strategy evaluation simply means performance appraisal of the
organization. This is also not correct. The evaluation system should be balanced

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 457

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

and follow some norms and standards. Strategic analysts have laid down certain
basic requirements which evaluation should comply with to be effective.
First, strategy evaluation process or measures should be meaningful.
These should specifically relate to the objectives/targets and the plan. There
should be clear focus and no ambiguity.
Second, strategy evaluation and control process should be economical.
This means that the process should not be made unnecessarily elaborate and
incur too much cost on evaluation itself. Use of too much of information which
may not be necessary increases cost which is avoidable.
Third, the evaluation process should conform to a proper time dimension
for control and information retrieval or dissemination. Time dimension of control
should coincide with the time span of the activity or the implementation phase.
Also, information on developments or feedback should be timely (not delayed
or provided too early) to make evaluation and control more appropriate.
Fourth, strategy evaluation system should give a true picture of what is
actually happening. The objective of evaluation is not fault finding. Sometimes,
performance may be overshadowed by external factors or the environment.
For example, during a severe slump in economic/business activity, productivity
and profitability may decline in spite of best efforts by the managers to implement
strategy. This should be analysed in the correct perspective.
Fifth, strategy evaluation process should not dominate or curb decisions;
it should promote mutual understanding, trust and common cause. All functional
and operational areas should cooperate with each other in evaluating and
controlling strategies. Strategy evaluation process should be simple and not
too complex or restrictive. Complex evaluation systems may confuse managers
and result in lack of accomplishments.14
It is true that there may not be any ideal or the only strategy evaluation
system. All organizations are unique in themselves in terms of vision/mission,
objectives, size, management style, strengths, weaknesses, organizational
culture, etc. All these together determine the exact nature of the evaluation
system, as also the implementation process, which is most suitable for the
organization. Waterman (1987) has made some useful observations about
strategy evaluation system of successful organizations:

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 458

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Self-Assessment Questions
17. The evaluation process should conform to a proper ________ for control
and information retrieval or dissemination.
18. The strategy evaluation process should not ________ decisions.

16.11 Case Study


Samsung and LG: Contrasts in Control
Samsung and LG are the leading electronics companies in Korea. During
the 1980s, both the companies were facing environmental changes and
reformulated their strategies in response to the new environment. They
adopted similar strategic methods. Their performance during this period,
however, differed significantly. Samsung clearly outperformed its rival. The
difference in performance was primarily the result of different methods of
control adopted by the two companies.
In the late 1980s, Samsung further strengthened its already strong
environmental scanning system. It did this by appointing monitors of
information in every business activity/group by introducing management
information system for collection and dissemination of information. The
corporate office was strengthened by 200 high-performing managers, and
this enabled the company to increase its supervisory role over the subsidiary
units. The major instrument of control was the annual budget, with
rebudgeting done every six months. In contrast, LG changed its strategy to
give greater autonomy to the subsidiaries. It defined the headquarters role
as coordinator and supporter rather than controller. Also, its strategic
planning horizon became three years longer than that of Samsung.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 459

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Samsung operates a highly formalized feeback control system. Reporting


is comprehensive and also extremely regular with subsidiary units reporting
15 or 16 times during a month to corporate office. Evaluation is tough and
the reward and punishment system is based on well-established norms or
rules, and it can be harsh for many. For example, the bonus payments are
on zero sum basiswhen some employees are paid extra, others are paid
less. By contrast, LGs reporting system is less formalized and is based, to
some extent, on the strong involvement of members of the founding families.
This makes it difficult to implement the reward and punishment system in
more professional or objective way.
Samsung follows the groups recruitment system for new managers, except
for some specialists such as R&D staff. So, Samsungs own recruitment
policy focusses on qualification and skills, but the groups recruitment
emphasizes the commitment, attitude and personality of applicants. This
shift in recruitment policy focus weakens the socialization of new staff.
Samsung has a well-developed education and training scheme with
company career paths leading to generalists with some special knowledge.
LG, on the other hand, recruits about half of its managers itself with the LG
group recruiting the rest. Its rigorous education and training system is geared
to provide different career paths for general managers, R&D staff and shopfloor managers. In Samsung, informal communication is not strong and
sub-group formation is totally discouraged. By contrast, in LG, informal
communication and sub-group formation are welcomed.
To sum up, Samsung has been strengthening its strategic planning while
reducing emphasis on its recruitment process as a control mechanism. It
has focussed on two integrating mechanismscentralization and
formalizationwhile reducing socialization among employees. In contrast,
LG has strengthened central control of socialization, while decentralizing
strategic planning and budgetary control.

16.12 Summary
Let us recapitulate the important concepts discussed in this unit:
Evaluation and control of strategy is the final stage, and, is one of the
most vital stages, in the strategic management process of an organization.
Through the evaluation system, the management tries to demonstrate
how well the chosen strategy is implemented, and how successful or
otherwise the strategy is.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 460

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

Strategy evaluation and control criteria can be both pre-implementation


and post-implementation. Pre-emptive measures are always better than
reactive or corrective actions.
Evaluation and control are not only pre-implementation or postimplementation; these are also exercised during the strategy
implementation process itself. Many call these strategic controls.
Post-implementation evaluation of strategy shows actual performance of
a company vis-a-vis targetshow successful or otherwise a strategy is.
Evaluation of performance is generally done through various quantitative
criteriaprimarily financial and, also non-financial.
The balanced scorecard approach to strategy evaluation combines both
quantitative and qualitative criteria/measures and incorporates
expectations of different stakeholders in relating performance to strategy.
Six Sigma approach, conventionally known for minimizing errors or defects
in manufacturing or quality improvement, has evolved into a highly rigorous
tool for analysis and continuous improvement of corporate performance.
Strategy evaluation and control is an elaborate, sometimes complex and,
can also be a sensitive process. It should, therefore, be balanced andfollow
some norms and standards.

16.13 Glossary
Six Sigma: A quality-control program developed in 1986 by Motorola.
Initially, it emphasized cycle-time improvement and reducing manufacturing
defects to a level of no more than 3.4 per million.
Strategic control: process of monitoring as to whether to various
strategies adopted by the organization are helping its internal environment
to be matched with the external environment.
Strategic surveillance: A process by which a company can keep control
over organizational factors, industry factors and also major environmental
factors.

16.14 Terminal Questions


1. Explain the strategy evaluation and control process in terms of different
steps or stages involved.
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 461

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

2. Analyse various quantitative criteria for performance evaluation of


companies. Distinguish between the financial criteria and non-financial
criteria.
3. What role does qualitative evaluation criteria play in the strategy evaluation
process? Analyse.
4. Explain the balanced scorecard approach. Analyse the four perspectives
in the balanced scorecard approach.
5. Analyse Six Sigma as a performance evaluation and improvement method.
Discuss with reference to Citibanks Six Sigma application for improving
customer satisfaction level.
6. What are the major characteristics of an effective strategy evaluation
system? Analyse these characteristics.

16.15 Answers
Answers to Self-Assessment Questions
1. step-by-step
2. implementation
3. All the above
4. (d) Critical success factors (CSFs)
5. premise
6. strategic
7. Implementation control
8. False
9. True
10. Return on investment
11. balanced scorecard
12. financial, non-financial
13. True
14. False
15. Six Sigma
16. TQM
Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 462

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

17. time dimension


18. dominate or curb

Answers Terminal Questions


1. The evaluation and control system is a step-by-step or sequential process.
Refer to Section 16.3 for further details.
2. Quantitative evaluation criteria or indicators of performance are primarily
financial, but, there are also some important non-financial criteria. Refer
to Section 16.6.1 for further details.
3. Because of the inadequacy of quantitative criteria (and also its limitations
as discussed above), qualitative criteria are also used for evaluation of
corporate strategy. Refer to Section 16.6.2 for further details.
4. The balanced scorecard approach combines both quantitative and
qualitative criteria/measures of evaluation. Refer to Section 16.7 for further
details.
5. Six Sigma is conventionally known for minimizing errors or defects in
manufacturing or quality improvement. Refer to Section 16.9 for further
details.
6. Strategic analysts have laid down certain basic requirements which
evaluation should comply with to be effective. Refer to Section 16.10 for
further details.

16.16 References
1. Jauch, L R , R Gupta, W F Glueck. 2004. Business Policy and Strategic
Management. 6th ed. New Delhi: Frank Bros & Co.
2. Kaplan, R, and D Norton. The Balanced Scorecard: Measures that Drive
Performance. Harvard Business Review, JanuaryFebruary, 1992.
3. Kaplan, R, and D Norton. Using the Balanced Scorecard as a Strategic
Management System. Harvard Business Review, JanuaryFebruary,
1996.
4. Schreyogg, G, and H Steinmann. 1987. Strategic Control: A New
Perspective. Academy of Management Review, Vol. 12 (1).

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 463

Strategic Management and Business Policy

Unit 16

5. Tilles, S. How to Evaluate Corporate Strategy. Harvard Business Review.


JulyAugust, 1963.
Endnotes
1

Johnson and Scholes (1999) and others call these critical success factors (CSFs) and
Aaker ( 1995) and others call these key success factors (KSFs).

J Dougery, T Fabregas, and others, The California Wine Industry Report, (Unpuhlished
Paper, 1991).

G Schreyogg, and H Steinman. Strategic Control: A New Perspective, Academy of


Management Review, Vol. 12(1), 1987, 91103.

J A Pearce II, and R B Robinson, Strategic Management: Strategy Formulation and


Implementation, 3rd ed., (Homewood, Illinois: Richard D Irwin, 1988), 409.

I I Mitroff, 'Crisis Management: Cutting through the Confusion', Sloan Management Review,
(Winter, 1988), 19.

S Tilles, How to Evaluate Corporate Strategy, Harvard Business Review (JulyAugust,


1963).

F R David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, 9th ed., (Pearson Education,
2003), 308.

W F Glueck and L R L R Jauch, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 4th edn.,
(New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984), 399402.

R S Kaplan, and D P Norton, Using the Balanced Scorecard as Strategic Management


System, Harvard Business Review, (January-February, 1996).

10

M A Hitt et al. Management of Strategy: Concepts and Cases (South-Western Cengage


Learning, 2007), 329, 382.

11

Hitt et al. (2007), 329.

12

For conceptual understanding of Six Sigma and other sigmas, refer any standard textbook
on TQM or quality management.

13

These have been abstracted and adapted from J A Pearce II and R B Robinson Jr (2005),
377-78

14

David, F R. 2003. Strategic Management: Concepts & Cases (2003), 312.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 464

You might also like